UOP

Fluid Catalytic
Cracking Process
Process Technology Manual



ORPIC
Sohar, Oman
September 2012








LIMITED DISTRIBUTION

This material is UOP LLC technical information of a confidential nature for use only by personnel within your
organization requiring the information. The material shall not be reproduced in any manner or distributed for any
purpose whatsoever except by written permission of UOP LLC and except as authorized under agreements with
UOP LLC.

157048
Table of Contents
Page 1





FCC PROCESS TECHNOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENTS


I. INTRODUCTION

II. PROCESS FLOW
Reactor Regenerator
Main Column
Gas Concentration and Recovery

III. PROCESS CONTROL
Reactor Regenerator
Main Column
Gas Concentration

IV. EQUIPMENT
Process Equipment and Its Use
Metallurgical Corrosion

V. FLUIDIZED SOLIDS
Theory
Applications to Fluid Catalytic Cracking

VI. CATALYST
History
Modern FCC Catalysts
Time and Temperature Effects
Poisons
Catalyst Management
Catalyst Properties and Testing

VII. PROCESS VARIABLES
Reactor and Regenerator Process Variables
Feedstock

VIII. PROCESS CALCULATIONS
FCC Flow Corrections and Mass Balance
Liquid Product Cutpoint Corrections
Reactor and Regenerator Heat Balance
FCC Unit Mechanical Summaries
Additional FCC Unit Calculations
157048
Table of Contents
Page 2





IX. FEED AND PRODUCT TREATING
Feed Treating
Product Treating Reasons and Methods

X. ANALYTICAL METHODS
Minimum Sample Size
Typical Sampling Schedule
Outline of FCCU Laboratory Methods

XI. PROCEDURES
Refractory Dryout
Startup
Shutdown
Emergencies
Catalyst Handling
FCC Unit Evaluation

XII. SAFETY
General
Additional Safety Precautions for Entering Vessels
High Temperature Problems
Chemical Hazards

XIII. ENVIRONMENTAL
Emissions Sources and Solutions


157048
Introduction
Page 1





Introduction

UOP Company History

For more than 80 years, UOP has been one of the worlds leading licensors of new
and innovative technology. Today, UOP continues in this role with 30 offices on 4
continents and 9 manufacturing facilities worldwide. UOP currently licenses and
designs more than 60 different processes and has a total of 5,500 units licensed
worldwide. For the last 50 years, the fluid catalytic cracking (FCC) process has
been an important and successful part of UOP's licensing activities.

The Early Years

UOP was founded in 1914 as the National Hydrocarbon Company on the strength
of patent rights developed from the pioneering work of J esse A. Dubbs, a California
inventor. The company was financed by a noted Chicagoan, J . Ogden Armour. In
1915, the company name was changed to Universal Oil Products Company.

From the beginning, the goal of the company was to develop and commercialize
technology for license to the petroleum refining industry. Under the direction of C. P.
(Carbon Petroleum) Dubbs, son of J esse Dubbs, research and development work
continued at the company's small site near Independence, Kansas, where the
famous Dubbs Thermal Cracking process was successfully demonstrated in 1919.
The then-revolutionary process became the foundation of UOP's rapid growth and
its early worldwide recognition by the industry. The early period of growth was ably
directed by its president, Hiram J . Halle, and by Dr. Gustav Egloff, one of the
worlds leading petroleum chemists.

In 1931, UOP established its headquarters in Chicago and its research laboratories
in nearby Riverside, Illinois. That same year the ownership of UOP passed to a
consortium of its major licensees, led by Shell and Standard Oil of California.
157048
Introduction
Page 2





During this stage, the company benefited immensely by the addition to its research
staff of Prof. Vladimir Ipatieff, a famous Russian scientist known internationally for
his work in high-pressure catalysis. His contributions in catalytic chemistry gave
UOP a position of leadership in the development of catalysis as applied to petro-
leum processing. The first project of Ipatieff and his research team was catalytic
polymerization. Other eminent scientists were also attracted to UOPs research
center in Riverside during this period.

With the outbreak of World War II, UOP scientists and engineers focused their
knowledge and talents on developing new catalytic processes, notably alkylation
that helped meet wartime energy requirements, especially for aviation fuel. UOP
also cooperated with other companies to develop the FCC process.

In 1944, the owners of UOP divested themselves of their holdings in the company,
and UOPs stock was placed in trust. The American Chemical Society was named
as the beneficiary. Thus, the Petroleum Research Fund was created with the
understanding that income from the trust was to be used for advanced scientific
education and fundamental research in the petroleum field.

In spite of some financial and legal setbacks suffered by UOP during this period,
strong management succeeded in steering the company back to its original course:
taking creative research from concept to commercial reality. UOP was recognized
as a company employing the worlds most knowledgeable scientific and technical
personnel, who understood petroleum refining and the need for improved process-
ing methods and techniques.

In 1949, UOP's research staff developed a radically different refining process that
used a catalyst containing platinum. Called the Platforming process, it revolu-
tionized the art of reforming to produce gasoline with substantially improved octane
number. The process was also instrumental in making benzene available in a
quality and quantity never before realized on a commercial scale. With the
Platforming process and other innovative processes, UOP became a vital
contributor to the emergence and growth of the petrochemical industry.
157048
Introduction
Page 3





In the early 1950s, UOP also began to manufacture its own proprietary catalysts
and a variety of refining chemicals at a newly constructed plant in Shreveport,
Louisiana. Later UOP built manufacturing plants at McCook, Illinois; Brimsdown,
U.K.; and other locations. In 1952, UOP moved its headquarters and engineering
activities to Des Plaines, a suburb of Chicago. Soon after, the construction of a new
research center at the same location was begun.

The Recent Era

In 1959, UOP assumed its fourth different corporate form when it was sold to the
public for the first time in its history. As a publicly owned company, UOP entered a
new era marked by growth and diversification. The 1960s saw UOP grow from
essentially a process-licensing company to a diversified corporation through many
acquisitions and mergers with other companies. By 1975, UOP Inc. included more
than 20 different divisions involved in such areas as aerospace and automotive
technology.

During the 1960s and 1970s, UOP's tradition of innovative process development
and commercialization continued with the licensing of the first Sorbex simulated
moving-bed countercurrent adsorption process in 1961 and the introduction of
UOP's CCR Platforming process early in the 1970s.

In 1975, Signal Companies Inc. acquired 50.5% of UOP and in 1978 acquired the
remaining 49.5%, making UOP a wholly owned subsidiary of the company. When
the Signal Companies merged with Allied Corporation in 1985, UOP Inc. became a
subsidiary of Allied-Signal Inc. As the result of reorganizations and restructuring by
its parent companies during the 1980s, UOPs business scope was refocused on
the development and licensing of process technology and the marketing of products
associated with its licensing activities. Of the 20 different divisions, only the Process
Division and UOP Management Services remain in the present UOP.
157048
Introduction
Page 4





In 1988, Allied-Signal entered into an agreement with Union Carbide Corporation
that resulted in the creation of a unique joint venture company called simply UOP.
The new UOP combined the resources of Allied-Signals UOP Inc. with the
Catalysts, Adsorbents and Process Systems (CAPS) Division of Union Carbide. The
joint venture brought together in synergistic union the strong R&D traditions of both
companies. The joint venture now contains the new materials R&D of the CAPS
Union Carbide researchers and the scale-up and commercialization skills of UOP
research. In addition, the joint venture brings together the commercial experience
and worldwide marketing presence of both partners. The result is unprecedented
growth for UOP and the development of valuable new technologies, products, and
services for its customers. Table 1 summarizes some of the historical highlights of
UOP as a process technology company.

Table 1
UOP's History
1914 National Hydrocarbon Company formed to hold J esse Dubbs
patents for a process to recover heavy oil from water
1915 Name changed to Universal Oil Products Company --
patents for Dubbs cracking process issued
1921 Dubbs continuous cracking process commercialized
1930 Ipatieff joins UOP beginning a wave of new process develop-
ments: alkylation, catalytic polymerization, C
4
isomerization
1941 FCC technology developed
1949 Platforming introduced, many aromatics processes followed
Late 1950s Hydrocracking introduced
1961 First Sorbex unit licensed
Early 1970s CCR Platforming introduced
1988 UOP merged with the EP&P and CAPS groups of Union Carbide
1995 UOP acquires the Unocal hydroprocessing business

157048
Introduction
Page 5





In the last 20 years, UOP has developed and commercialized a variety of new and
innovative processes for the refining and petrochemical industry including the
Penex

, Molex

, BenSat

, Oleflex

, Ethermax

, Merox

, Styro-Plus

,
Alkylene

, Isal

, Isomar and Detal

processes.

UOP transfers this technology to its clients through its licensing activity. In the
technology transfer process, UOP licenses technology; assists in the planning,
design, engineering and commissioning of new installations; provides management
services and advises on the efficient performance of processing facilities throughout
the world.

Behind the successful performance record of UOP is a highly qualified and strong
team continuously at work on ideas and projects. The scientific disciplines are
strongly represented in UOP's team of personnel. UOP has about 4,000 employees
worldwide. With a wide array of highly specialized talents, UOP offers its clients the
complete capability necessary in meeting the demands of today, and the challenges
of the future.

UOP licenses or maintains a position of technical expertise for more than 60 differ-
ent processes in the petroleum and petrochemical industry. Approximately 175
process units are licensed yearly, and to date UOP has licensed more than 5,500
individual process units and provided technical know-how in designs for more than
1,000 additional non-licensed units. UOP presently holds in excess of 9,000
unexpired patents.

UOP's worldwide licensing activities are supported by a network of offices and
representatives. UOP is centered in Des Plaines, Illinois, and has a district office in
Houston. UOP Limited, a 100% UOP owned subsidiary for operations in Europe,
Africa and the Middle East, has its main European office in Guildford (near London)
and district offices in New Delhi, J akarta, J eddah, Beijing and Moscow. UOP Asia
Pacific, located in Tokyo, is an affiliate company of UOP for the licensing of UOP
processes in J apan and certain other areas in the Far East and Southeast Asia.
157048
Introduction
Page 6





UOP has catalyst manufacturing facilities in the United States and in Europe. UOP
Asia Pacific operates a catalyst plant in J apan.

The international scope of UOP activities is evidenced by the fact that process units
have been designed for installation in more than 80 countries around the world.
UOP activities related to these installations have ranged from preparation of
engineering designs for single process units to extensive planning studies involving
market analyses, feasibility and optimization studies, designs for entire grassroots
refineries (both process units and offsites), and complete plant commissioning
services.

The services provided by UOP for these units includes plant design, inspection,
commissioning, performance testing, and training of refinery operating personnel.
Since 1955, UOP has provided, or is providing, engineering designs for more than
125 grassroots refineries and petrochemical complexes. UOP also provided design
specifications for all offsite equipment for many of these installations.

Historical Origins of FCC Technology

The advent of the petroleum refining industry can be traced to the rapidly increasing
demand for kerosene to fuel kerosene lamps for lighting in the latter half of the
1800s. With the invention of electric lighting and the automobile in the early 1900s,
the high value product of petroleum refining shifted from kerosene to gasoline. The
increasing demand for gasoline soon outstripped the availability of straight-run
gasoline from crude oil distillation. This shortage of gasoline provided the impetus
for the development of technologies to increase the gasoline yield from a barrel of
crude oil. Table 2 shows a summary of the progression of cracking technology
which has led to the FCC process as we know it today.
157048
Introduction
Page 7






Table 2
Historical Origins of Fluid Catalytic Cracking
1913 - 1936 Thermal cracking
Burton thermal cracking process (1913)
Dubbs thermal cracking process (1915)
Current use visbreaking, coking
1936 - 1941 Fixed-bed catalytic cracking
Houdry Process Company (1931)
- Multiple reactors -- cyclic process (1937)
- Silica-alumina catalyst (acid-activated clay)
1941 - 1955 Moving-bed catalytic cracking
Thermofor catalytic cracking (TCC) developed by
Socony-Vacuum (Mobil)
Houdryform catalytic cracking
- Continuous process
- Macro-catalyst, moving bed
1942 - Present Fluid catalytic cracking (FCC)
J oint development (1938)
- Continuous process
- Micro-catalyst, fluidized bed

Thermal Cracking

The first thermal conversion process was the Burton process first practiced
commercially in 1913 by Standard Oil of Indiana. In the original Burton process, oil
was exposed batch-wise to high temperature at elevated pressure to achieve
thermal conversion to lighter products. Because of the batch nature of the Burton
process, commercial units contained a large number of individual cracking stills in
order to achieve acceptable daily throughputs.
157048
Introduction
Page 8





Following the commercialization of the Burton process, the Dubbs thermal cracking
process was developed and patented in 1915 (UOP). The Dubbs process was a
continuous process for the thermal conversion of oil to lighter products at elevated
temperature and pressure. The Dubbs process was widely used in refineries
through the 1920s and into the 1930s.

Thermal cracking processes continue to be used in refining today. Examples of
currently used thermal processes are visbreaking and various forms of coking.

Fixed-Bed Catalytic Cracking

In the mid 1920s, a French mechanical engineer and racecar enthusiast named
Eugene Houdry became interested in gasoline quality. After the trial and error
screening of hundreds of catalyst formulations, Houdry found that acid-activated
clay (silica and alumina) was an effective catalyst for cracking heavy oil to lighter
products, particularly high octane gasoline.

In 1931, Houdry, in partnership with Socony-Vacuum (now Mobil), founded the
Houdry Process Company to develop Houdry's fixed-bed catalytic cracking process.
The Houdry catalytic cracking was a cyclic process which typically used four time-
phased reactors, each of which cycled through a sequence of steps outlined below:

1. Hot heavy oil is cracked by contact with a fixed bed of catalyst.
2. The reactor is purged to remove hydrocarbon.
3. Coke deposited on the catalyst is burned off with air.
4. The combustion gases are purged from the reactor and the reactor
is ready to begin the next cracking cycle.

A number of technical innovations were required to make the Houdry cracking
process successful. Among these were the development of automatic valves and
the use of control algorithms to control the reaction-regeneration cycles. Many of
the innovations associated with the commercialization of the Houdry cracking
157048
Introduction
Page 9





process were considered revolutionary in the field of process engineering at the
time they were first introduced.

The Houdry catalytic cracking process was first commercialized at the Sun-Marcus
Hook refinery in 1937. The Houdry process was technically attractive to refiners and
by 1940, 14 commercial Houdry units were in operation. Interest in the Houdry
process declined after 1941 because of further advances in catalytic cracking
technology.

Moving-Bed Catalytic Cracking

The next advance in catalytic cracking was the development of a continuous
moving-bed cracking process. The Thermofor Catalytic Cracking (TCC) and
Houdryform Catalytic Cracking (HCC) processes were developed in parallel in the
1940s and early 1950s. Both processes used a similar concept and had
approximately equal success.

In the TCC process, the catalyst pellets continuously move through the reactor to
the regeneration vessel and are then returned to the reactor. The key to the TCC
process was the Thermofor kiln used to regenerate the spent catalyst (the kiln had
been originally developed to burn coke off of Fullers earth used to filter lube oils).

In the TCC process, regenerated catalyst flows by gravity from a surge vessel
elevated above the reactor, into the reactor vessel where the catalyst contacts hot
oil and the cracking reactions take place. The air environment of the catalyst surge
vessel is buffered from the hydrocarbon environment of the reactor by steam
injected into the catalyst transfer line. Both the hydrocarbon vapors and catalyst
flow down through the reactor to a lower section where the cracked products exit
the reactor through separation pipes. The spent catalyst continues to flow by gravity
down through a steam stripping zone into the regeneration kiln where coke is
burned off the spent catalyst with air. The steam stripping zone also serves to
provide a barrier between air in the regenerator and hydrocarbon in the reactor. In
early TCC units, the hot regenerated catalyst pellets were mechanically conveyed
157048
Introduction
Page 10





back up to the catalyst surge vessel by bucket elevators. Later units employed
pneumatic air lift systems to transfer the regenerated catalyst back up to the surge
vessel.

Socony-Vacuum was the principle developer of the TCC process and the first semi
commercial unit started up at the Paulsboro refinery in 1941. The TCC units were
licensed and operated by Socony-Vacuum and others from 1941 to about 1955
when the TCC gave way to the more versatile FCC process developed in the during
the late 1930s and early 1940s. A few TCC units still continue to operate today.

The FCC Process

Early development of the FCC process took place late in the 1930s. A number of
motivations were behind the development of the FCC process. Among these were
the high fees required to license the Houdry cracking process, the diffusion and
heat transfer limitations associated with both the Houdry fixed-bed process and the
TCC process (both used large size catalyst pellets), and the increasing demand for
high octane aviation gasoline brought on by World War II.

Initial FCC process development efforts were led by Standard Oil of New J ersey
(now Exxon) in association with two researchers from the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, Warren Lewis and Edwin Gilliland (consultants to Standard-NJ ). Lewis
and Gilliland had found that under the proper aeration conditions, finely divided solid
particles (powders) could flow through pipes and in many respects act similarly to
liquids. This was the advent of fluidization. The use of finely divided cracking
catalyst offered a means of overcoming the diffusion and heat transfer limitations
encountered with the large size catalyst pellets used in the earlier catalytic cracking
processes.

In 1938, Standard-NJ and some of the other major oil companies, as well as M. W.
Kellogg Co. and Universal Oil Products (UOP), formed Catalytic Research Associ-
ates (CRA) to jointly develop a fluidized catalytic cracking technology. The first
commercial-scale (13,000 BPD) FCC unit, designated the Model I, started up at
157048
Introduction
Page 11





Standard-NJ 's Baton Rogue refinery in May 1942. Two other Model I FCCs were
designed but were not built as the improved Model II FCC design came very
quickly. When Standard-NJ announced the construction and imminent startup of the
first FCC Model I, they also announced that Universal Oil Products (UOP) and M.
W. Kellogg would be designing and licensing the new FCC technology. In the three-
year period between 1942 and 1945, 34 new FCC units came on stream in the
refineries of 20 different oil companies. The installed capacity of these new FCC
units was over 500,000 BPD. Thirteen of these units were licensed from UOP.

Following the commercialization of the Model I and Model II FCC units within the
CRA partnership, the FCC unit design and development diverged with the partner
companies largely going their separate ways with regard to future FCC technology
development and commercialization.

UOP and Fluid Catalytic Cracking

During the 1940s, military requirements resulted in widespread commercialization
when UOP designed about 40% of the 34 units that were built and operated.
Following this period, UOP was in the forefront with commercialization of the
"stacked" FCC unit design which featured a low-pressure reactor stacked directly
above a higher pressure regenerator. The stacked design not only met the
economic needs of smaller refiners, it was a major step toward shifting the cracking
reaction from the dense phase of the catalyst bed to the dilute phase of the riser. In
the mid-1950s, UOP introduced the "straight-riser" or side-by-side design. In this
unit, the regenerator was located near ground level with the reactor to the side in an
elevated position. Regenerated catalyst, fresh feed and recycle were directed to the
reactor by means of a long, straight riser located directly below the reactor.
Compared to earlier designs, product yields and selectivity were substantially
improved.

A major breakthrough in catalyst technology occurred in the mid-1960s with the
development of the zeolitic catalysts. These catalysts demonstrated vastly superior
activity, gasoline selectivity and stability characteristics compared to the amorphous
157048
Introduction
Page 12





silica-alumina catalysts then in use. The availability of the zeolitic catalysts served
as the basis for most of the process innovations that have developed in recent
years.

The continuing sequence of advances in both catalyst activity and process design
culminated in the most significant concept to date in the field of the FCC process
the achievement of transport-phase cracking entirely in the riser, or all-riser crack-
ing. The key to all-riser cracking is the design of a system that initiates a plug-flow
reaction and then stops the cracking reaction at the optimum yield of desired
products. UOP commercialized a new design based on this concept in 1971. This
design was also applied to existing unit revamps. Commercial results confirmed the
expected advantages of the system compared to the older designs. The quick
quench design provided the desired high selectivity to gasoline, reduced coke yield,
and a reduction of secondary cracking of desired products to lighter, less valuable
material.

The next major improvement in the FCC technology was the development of
catalysts and regenerator systems for the complete internal combustion of carbon
monoxide (CO) to carbon dioxide (CO
2
). In 1973, an existing UOP unit was
revamped to include a new combustor concept in regeneration technology to
achieve direct conversion of CO within the unit. This was followed by the start-up in
1974 of a new FCC unit specifically designed to incorporate the combustor
regenerator technology.

This development in regenerator design and operating technique resulted in
reduced coke yields, lower CO emissions which satisfy environmental standards
and higher circulating catalyst activity that improved product distribution and quality.
Table 3 summarizes some of the major achievements in UOP's FCC process
technology development and commercialization.
157048
Introduction
Page 13






Table 3
Milestones in FCC Technology
1942 UOP begins licensing the FCC Process
1945 13 Units licensed by UOP
1947 UOP commercializes stacked unit design
Economical for small refiners
50 Stacked designs over 10-year period
1950s UOP commercializes side-by-side design
Straight riser
Better suited for larger units
Riser extension and termination
(more reaction in riser)
1973 First complete combustion regenerator
1983 First two-stage regenerator with external dense-phase
cooling for highly contaminated resid feed commissioned
1983 First elevated distributors commissioned
1991 - 1995 Newest generations of highly contained riser termination
devices commercialized (VDS and VSS)
1994 First Optimix feed distributor commissioned
1994 First MSCC unit commissioned
2006 First AF Packing commissioned

Recent Developments

Advances in riser termination devices occurred at a rapid rate in the 1980s to the
mid 1990s. Early riser termination devices such as the open Tee resulted in very
long residence times for the hydrocarbon products in the reactor vessel. This
extended residence time resulted in nonselective thermal cracking and secondary
catalytic cracking reactions. Recent improvements have resulted in better contain-
ment of the hydrocarbon vapor to the riser and therefore lower post riser residence
time. This reduced delta coke and dry gas and improved gasoline selectivity. Early
versions of these high containment riser terminations included the vented riser and
157048
Introduction
Page 14





SCSS (suspended catalyst solids separation) devices. In 1991, the first VDS
(vortex disengager stripper) was commissioned. This technology further minimized
the post-riser residence time resulting in further improvements in product yields. In
1995, the first VSS (vortex separation system) was commissioned.

Improvements in feed distribution systems also occurred rapidly in the late 1980s
and 1990s. Elevated, radially oriented feed distributors minimize nonselective
thermal cracking reactions by providing more uniform feed/catalyst contacting with
less back mixing than the earlier wye feed distributors. Acceleration zone
technology which pre-accelerates the catalyst into a uniform, moderate density flow
pattern for optimum oil penetration and uniform catalyst/oil contacting further
improved the performance of the elevated feed distributors. The first UOP elevated
feed distributors were commissioned in 1983. Developments in spray nozzle
technology resulted in the Optimix feed distributor which has a smaller, more
uniform oil droplet size and a spray pattern that distributes the oil uniformly over the
entire riser area for superior catalyst/oil contacting and performance. The first
Optimix feed distributor was commissioned in 1994. Since then, the number of
refiners using Optimix feed distributors has grown to over 80.

Resid processing in FCC units began in the mid-1970s. During this same period,
reactor temperatures were being increased to maximize gasoline octane. The need
for higher conversion, combined with the desire to process residue feeds signifi-
cantly increased coke yields and ultimately limited the FCC regenerator capacity.

The RCC

, or Reduced Crude Conversion, process was developed jointly by UOP

and Ashland Oil in the late 1970s to address residue processing. It is an extension
of UOP's FCC design experience that incorporates many innovations and modifica-
tions from the UOP-Ashland Oil development program. In addition to cold-flow
modeling work, a large-scale pilot plant was constructed at Ashland's Catlettsburg,
Kentucky refinery. Testing in this 200 BPSD plant examined processing variables
and new mechanical designs on a wide range of residual feedstocks. In 1983,
Ashland commissioned a 40,000 BPSD RCC unit at the Catlettsburg refinery.
157048
Introduction
Page 15





Several major innovations from the pilot plant testing and first commercial design at
Ashland have become the foundation of UOP's technical offering for catalytic
cracking of residue feedstocks, including the following.

Acceleration zone and feed distribution system
Higher containment riser termination devices for quick disengagement
Two-stage catalyst regeneration
Catalyst cooler

Since 1983, eight grass-root RCC units licensed by UOP have been commissioned.
In addition, resid feedstocks are being processed in more than 30 existing UOP
FCC units. In present times, the distinction between a gasoil FCC unit and a resid
FCC unit has blurred to the point where most modern FCC units are capable of
processing some level of resid. The term RFCC is used by UOP today to designate
a new unit utilizing a 2 stage regenerator designed for the specific intent of
processing resid feeds. Table 4 shows a brief summary of resid processing and
UOP's activity in the area of resid processing.

157048
Introduction
Page 16





Table 4
Resid Processing Milestones
1940s Resid component added to feed
1950s Resid processing diminishes
1975 Resid processing regains attractiveness
Market conditions favor increased efficiency in
gasoline production
Technology and catalyst advances increase resid
processing potential
UOP units begin processing resid/gasoil blends
1976 UOP and Ashland Oil Cooperation
Research and development for reduced crude
conversion
Semi-commercial demonstration
1983 First RCC unit commissioned
1984 - 2006 8 New RCC units operating --
>30 Units processing resid

Commercial Experience

Since commercialization of the FCC process, UOP has licensed more than 210
units, or over 50% of all non-captive installations. More than 140 of these units
continue to operate throughout the world. The superior technology and operational
reliability built into UOP FCC units are some of the reasons why 58 refineries
worldwide have licensed new UOP FCC units since 1980, which is more than all
other licensors combined during this period. UOP's commercial activity in the
FCC/RCC/MSCC processes since 1980 is as follows:

63 New units licensed
40 New units commissioned
330 Revamps
180 Major revamps
30+ Units processing resid with UOP technology
157048
Introduction
Page 17





Revamp activity is of equal importance in demonstrating technical expertise. In the
period 1980-1998, UOP performed more than 330 unit revamps that encompassed
virtually every major section of the FCC unit. This activity is vital to UOP's continu-
ing advances in both process and design engineering. The depth of both grass-root
and revamp experience gives UOP great capability to respond to the changing
needs of the industry.

FCC Process Description

The FCC process converts heavy crude oil fractions into lighter, more valuable
hydrocarbon products at high temperature and moderate pressure in the presence
of a finely divided silica/alumina based catalyst. In the course of cracking large
hydrocarbon molecules into smaller molecules, a non-volatile carbonaceous
material, commonly referred to as coke, is deposited on the catalyst. The coke laid
down on the catalyst acts to deactivate the catalytic cracking activity of the catalyst
by blocking access to the active catalytic sites. In order to regenerate the catalytic
activity of the catalyst, the coke deposited on the catalyst is burned off with air in the
regenerator vessel.

One of important advantages of the FCC process is the ability of the catalyst to flow
easily between the reactor and the regenerator when fluidized with an appropriate
vapor phase. In FCC units, the vapor phase on the reactor side is vaporized hydro-
carbon and steam, while on the regenerator side the fluidization media is air and
combustion gasses. In this way, fluidization permits hot regenerated catalyst to
contact fresh feed; the hot catalyst vaporizes the liquid feed and catalytically cracks
the vaporized feed to form lighter hydrocarbon products. After the gaseous hydro-
carbons are separated from the spent catalyst, the hydrocarbon vapor is cooled and
then fractionated into the desired product streams. The separated spent catalyst
flows via steam fluidization from the reactor to the regenerator vessel where the
coke is burned off the catalyst to restore its activity. In the course of burning the
coke a large amount of heat is liberated. Most of this heat of combustion is
absorbed by the regenerated catalyst and is carried back to reactor by the fluidized
regenerated catalyst to supply the heat required to drive the reaction side of the
157048
Introduction
Page 18





process. The ability to continuously circulate fluidized catalyst between the reactor
and the regenerator allows the FCC unit to operate efficiently as a continuous
process.

The FCC units are large-scale processes and unit throughputs are typically in the
range of about 10,000 to 130,000 barrels per day. This corresponds to catalyst
circulation rates of around 7 to 130 tons per minute. The largest commercial FCC
unit in operation was designed at 130,000 BPSD, pushed to ~184,000 BPSD, and
in 2005 was revamped to a nominal 200,000 BPSD with a catalyst circulation rate in
excess of 170 metric tons per minute. These large circulation rates of hot, abrasive
catalyst constitute a very significant challenge to the mechanical integrity of the
reactor, the regenerator and their associated internal equipment. Thus, mechanical
design considerations are critical to the ultimate success of an FCC unit as a
prominent refinery process unit. The main features of an FCC unit are:

Catalytic process
Mechanical process
Cracks heavy molecules to lighter ones
Pressure: 15-45 psig (1-3 kg/cm
2
g)
Temperature:
Reactor: 915-1050F (490-565C)
Regenerator: 1200-1450F (650-790C)
Reaction and regeneration sections intimately
linked by heat balance and catalyst circulation

FCC Process Feedstocks

FCC units process heavy oil from a variety of variety of refinery flow schemes.
Generally, the feed comes from either the refinery crude unit or vacuum unit and
constitutes the fraction of the crude boiling in the range of 650 to 1000+F (350 to
550+C). There may be additional feed preparation units upstream of the FCC unit
such as a hydrotreater or deasphalter. Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of the
possible refinery flows providing feed to an FCC unit.
157048
Introduction
Page 19








In addition, the FCC units commonly process heavy fractions from other conversion
units as part of the combined FCC feed blend. Examples of these types of streams
are coker gasoil and hydrocracker fractionator bottoms. The types of heavy hydro-
carbon streams that are commonly charged to an FCC unit are:

Atmospheric gasoil
Vacuum gasoil
Atmospheric resid
Coker gasoil
Demetallized oil
Hydroprocessed gasoil
Hydroprocessed resid
Lube oil extracts

157048
Introduction
Page 20





FCC Products

The products obtained from the FCC unit are light hydrocarbon gases (C
2
-) which
are normally used within the refinery as fuel gas, light olefins and paraffins (C
3
s
and C
4
s) also referred to as LPG, gasoline, LCO and clarified oil commonly
referred to as main column bottoms. In addition, flue gas is generated from the
burning of coke in the regenerator. Heat is recovered from the flue gas and is used
to make steam and in some cases power is also recovered from the flue gas in the
form of electricity via a power recovery expander coupled to a motor/generator.
Products produced from an FCC unit are:

Light gas
Light olefins
Light paraffins
Gasoline
Light cycle oil
Main Column Bottoms
Coke (burned in unit as fuel)

Most of the FCC product streams undergo further processing before leaving the
refinery as marketable products. Figure 2 shows typical routes for the FCC product
steams going to further processing and ultimately to blending into the refinery
product pools.

LPG

157048
Introduction
Page 21





Reactor
&
Regen.
Main
Column
&
Gas Con
LPG Pool
Gasoline
Pool
Diesel
Pool
Heavy Fuel
Oil Pool
LPG
Merox
Gasoline
Merox
Flue Gas
Fuel Gas
C
3
/C
4
Splitter
Alkylation
Alkylate
C
3
/C
4
Paraffins
MTBE
Distillate
Hydrotreater LCO
CLO
Gasoline
Figure 2
Typical Use of FCC Products


The light liquid products from the FCC process are LPG and gasoline. The LPG
from an FCC unit is highly olefinic and has become an increasingly valuable stream
for further processing in the present movement toward reformulated gasoline and
as petrochemical unit feedstocks. The FCC olefins are an important feedstock for
the production of MTBE and alkylate as gasoline blending components and for the
production of polypropylene. The FCC gasoline generally has good octane proper-
ties (90-95 RON and 80-83 MON) and may make up 30 vol-% or more of the
refinery gasoline pool. Some typical characteristics of light FCC products from high-
conversion operations (VGO Feed, 1.0 wt% sulfur) are:

157048
Introduction
Page 22





LPG:
500 - 1500 wppm total sulfur
30 - 40 vol-% C
3
olefins
34 - 45 vol-% total C
4
olefins

Gasoline: C
5
- 380F 90% point (193C 90% point)
92 - 94 RONC
0.1 - 0.2 wt-% sulfur
30 - 40 vol-% olefins
25 - 35 vol-% aromatics
0.5 - 1.0 vol-% benzene

The heavy liquid products from an FCC unit are normally LCO and clarified oil. The
LCO product is normally used as a blending component in the diesel pool and/or in
the heavy fuel oil pool. It is becoming increasingly common for LCO destined for
diesel blending to be hydrotreated first for sulfur reduction. Clarified oil is usually
blended off to the heavy fuel oil pool. In some cases, the FCC unit clarified oil is
used in coker feed, for asphalt production or sold as feed for carbon black produc-
tion. Some characteristics of heavy FCC products from high conversion operations
(VGO Feed, 1.0 wt% sulfur) are:

Light cycle oil: 600F 90% point (316C 90% point)
20 - 26 cetane index
1 1.5 wt-% sulfur
75 - 80 vol-% aromatics
3 - 3.5 cSt @ 122F (50C)

Clarified slurry oil:
2 - 3 wt-% sulfur
9 - 13 cSt @ 210F (100C)

Source: Middle Eastern light gasoil

157048
Introduction
Page 23






157048
Introduction
Page 24





Abbreviations and Definitions
ABD average bulk density
ACFM actual cubic feet per minute
activity conversion of oil by test catalyst compared to standard
reference feed often referred to as MAT activity
adjusted conversion or yields reported as corrected to standard
product cutpoints
afterburning burning of CO above the dense bed in the dilute phase or
flue gas, characterized by temperature increase
AGO atmospheric gasoil
Al aluminum
Al
2
O
3
alumina
APS average particle size
AR atmospheric column resid
ash non-combustible particles remaining after burning of a
main column bottoms sample
as produced conversion or yields reported as percent of fresh feed at
the actual product rates not adjusted to standard product
cut points
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
o Coefficient of thermal expansion at 60F, (1/F)
behind in burning insufficient coke combustion in regenerator,
characterized by increased coke production in reactor
and dark grey regenerated catalyst (high carbon on
regenerated catalyst)
BPD barrels per day
157048
Introduction
Page 25





BS & W bottoms sediment and water, normally reported in vol-%
C
1
, C
2
methane, ethane, ...
C
3
=
olefin (propylene)
caustic sodium hydroxide
CCR catalyst circulation rate
CFR combined feed ratio (volume of fresh feed plus recycle,
divided by volume of fresh feed)
CN
-
cyanide ion
CO
2
/CO mole ratio of carbon dioxide to carbon monoxide,
indicates degree of partial combustion
cold regenerator operation in conventional controlled regenerator
afterburning mode of regeneration
conversion measure of the rate of gasoil disappearance (or
conversion) from feed to products defined as
COS carbonyl sulfide
CRC carbon on regenerated catalyst
CSO clarified slurry oil
Cu copper
DA, DS, DG reactor or regenerator purges using air, steam or gas,
respectively
P, DP pressure drop or pressure difference between two points
dry gas gas from sponge absorber (usually refers to C
2
-
)
EP end point of distillation
F-1 research octane number (RON)
F-2 motor octane number (MON)
157048
Introduction
Page 26





Fe iron
Fines catalyst particles less than 20 microns diameter
F
m
feed metals factor
Gasoline efficiency ratio of liquid vol-% gasoline to vol-% conversion,
indicates selectivity to produce gasoline
GC, GLC gas chromatography, gas/liquid chromatography
G
b
Fluid gravity at base temperature (60F)
Gf fluid gravity at flowing temperature
gpm gallons per minute
H
2
/C
1
ratio of moles hydrogen to moles of methane
H
2
S hydrogen sulfide
HC hydrocarbon
HCN heavy cat naphtha product drawn from the side of the
main column
HCO heavy cycle oil
HPS high pressure separator
H enthalpy (heat) difference
IBP initial boiling point of distillation
K (UOP K) measure of paraffinicity or aromaticity of hydrocarbon
lb/Bbl (#/Bbl) pounds per barrel
LCO light cycle oil
LV-% liquid volume percent
M prefix for thousand
MC main column
157048
Introduction
Page 27





MCB main column bottoms product
MON motor octane number
MW molecular weight
N (or N
2
) nitrogen
Na sodium
NH
3
ammonia
Ni nickel
NO
x
nitrogen oxides
O (or O
2
) oxygen
ppm parts per million
P
f
Pressure at flowing conditions (absolute)
recycle normally refers to heavy oil from main column which has
already passed through the reactor that is returned with
the fresh feed to the reactor, this could also refer to light
material such as LCO or gasoline; a stream which returns
to its source.
RE (or Re
2
O
3
) rare earth (or rare earth oxide)
Rg regenerator
RON research octane number
RSH mercaptan sulfur
RVP Reid vapor pressure
Rx reactor
SA surface area
SCF/Bbl (SCFB) standard cubic feet per barrel of fresh feed
157048
Introduction
Page 28





SCFD standard cubic feet per day
selectivity preferential towards specified goal or species
severity combines different factors to give an overall qualitative
measurement of extent or difficulty in cracking and
regeneration
Si silicon
Si
2
O
3
silica
sintering closure of catalyst pores
SO
X
sulfur oxides
spillback gas recycle, may also refer to liquid recycle
SS stainless steel, also second stage
T
f
temperature at flowing conditions (absolute)
V vanadium
VGO vacuum gasoil
vol-% volume percent
wt-% weight percent
157048
Introduction
Page 29





UOP P&I Diagram Abbreviations
AR Analysis Recorder
ARC Analysis Recording Controller
DR Specific Gravity Recorder
FA Flow Alarm
FE Orifice Flange Assembly
FFRC Flow (ratio) Recording Controller
Fl Flow Indicator
FIC Flow Indicator Controller
FIF Flow Indicator Flow Type
FQI Flow Meter Displacement Type
FR Flow Recorder
FRA Flow Recording Alarm
FRC Flow Recording Controller
FRCF Flow Recording Controller Float Type
FRCQI Flow Recording Controller Integrator
FRQI Flow Recorder Integrator
FRQIA Flow Recorder Integrator Alarm
HC Hand Control
II Current Indicator
LA Level Alarm
LC Level Controller
LG-B Gage Glass Boiler TypeVisible Length Shown
157048
Introduction
Page 30





LG-R Gage Glass Reflex TypeVisible Length Shown
LG-RLT Gage Glass Reflex Type
Visible Length ShownLow Temperature
LG-T Gage Glass Through View Type
Visible Length Shown
LG-TK Gage Glass Through View Type
Visible Length ShownKEL-F
LG-TLT Gage Glass Through View Type
Visible Length ShownLow Temperature
Ll Level Indicator
LIA Level Indicating Alarm
LIC Level Indicating Controller
LR Level Recorder
LRA Level Recording Alarm
LRC Level Recording Controller
PA Pressure Alarm
PC Pressure Controller
PDC Pressure Differential Controller
PDI Pressure Differential Indicator
PDIC Pressure Differential Indicating Controller
PDR Pressure Differential Recorder
PDRA Pressure Differential Recording Alarm
PDRC Pressure Differential Recording Controller
PDRCA Pressure Differential Recording Controller Alarm
157048
Introduction
Page 31





PI Pressure Indicator
PIA Pressure Indicating Alarm
PIC Pressure Indicating Controller
PR Pressure Recorder
PRA Pressure Recording Alarm
PRC Pressure Recording Controller
SI Speed Indicator
SR Speed Recorder
TA Temperature Alarm
TC Temperature Controller
TDR Temperature Differential Recorder
TDRA Temperature Differential Recording Alarm
TDRC Temperature Differential Recording Controller
TI Temperature Indicator
TIC Temperature Indicating Controller
TIX Temperature Indicator Skin
TR Temperature Recorder
TRA Temperature Recording Alarm
TRC Temperature Recording Controller
TRX Temperature Recorder Skin
TW Thermowell
Zl Valve Position Indicator

157048
Introduction
Page 32






When Instruments Are Designated with an Alarm
H Indicates High
HH Indicates High-High, typically in association with an Emergency
Shutdown (ESD) system trip point
L Indicates Low
LL Indicates Low-Low, typically in association with an Emergency
Shutdown (ESD) system trip point

157048
Process Flow
Page 1




PROCESS FLOW


INTRODUCTION

The modern Fluid Catalytic Cracking unit is a large and complex process for
cracking heavy gas oil to lighter hydrocarbons. FCC has largely replaced the old
thermal crackers because it is a more efficient process, i.e. more production of
valuable products at a lower overall cost by using catalyst and heat instead of
simply heat.

In its simplest form, the process consists of a reactor, a catalyst regenerator, and
product separation. This is shown in Figure 1. Catalyst circulation is continuous, at
very large mass flow rates. For this reason, the reactor and regenerator are usually
discussed as one section. The product separation is usually divided into its low and
high pressure components, i.e. the main column section, and the gas concentration
and recovery section.

Figure 1:
Fluid Catalytic Cracking Process
Regenerator Reactor
Catalyst
Transfer
Lines
Product
Separation
Raw Oil Air
Flue Gas
Products


157048
Process Flow
Page 2





Reactor-Regenerator

This is the heart of the process, where the heavy feed is cracked. The reaction
products range from oil which is heavier than the charge to a light fuel gas. The
catalyst is continuously regenerated by burning off the coke deposited during the
cracking reaction. This provides a large measure of the heat required for the
process.


Main Column

The main column cools the reactor vapors and begins the separation process. A
heavy naphtha fraction and light and heavy fuel oils (LCO and CLO) come off the
tower as products; gasoline and lighter materials leave the top of the tower together
and are cooled and separated further into product streams in the gas concentration
section.


Gas Concentration and Recovery

This section separates the main column overhead into gasoline, liquefied petroleum
gas, and fuel gas streams. The composition of each stream is controlled for
maximum product value. Figure 2 shows a slightly more detailed schematic of an
FCC unit.


157048
Process Flow
Page 3




F
i
g
u
r
e

2
F
C
C

B
l
o
c
k

F
l
o
w

D
i
a
g
r
a
m
F
C
C
-
P
F
0
0
2
S
t
e
a
m
R
a
w
O
i
l
C
a
t
a
l
y
s
t
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
P
o
w
e
r

R
e
c
o
v
e
r
y
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
l
u
e

G
a
s
C
o
o
l
e
r
F
l
u
e
G
a
s
M
a
i
n

C
o
l
u
m
n
S
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
a
s

C
o
n

S
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
u
e
l
G
a
s
M
C
B
L
C
O
H
C
O
H
e
a
v
y
N
a
p
h
t
h
a
L
i
g
h
t
N
a
p
h
t
h
a
L
P
G
B
F
W
157048
Process Flow
Page 4




PROCESS FLOW DESCRIPTION

Reactor-Regenerator

The FCC process was developed in the early 1940's. A number of companies
participated in the early stages of the work, so most of the early units were virtually
identical. The first design, the Model I, was installed at only three refineries and
quickly replaced by a more successful Model ll. Thirty-one of these were built,
thirteen designed by UOP. Figures 3 and 4 show the configurations of the Model I
and the Model II FCCs, respectively.

The Model II units had double slide valves and long standpipes, which were a prime
source of operating problems due to loss of catalyst fluidization in the standpipes.
The raw oil charge passed through a dense bed of fluidized catalyst in the reactor
vessel; however, evidence indicated that a large part of the desired cracking was
occurring in the transfer line where the hydrocarbon first contacted the catalyst.

The early units used low activity catalysts by today's standards, starting with natural
clay and later progressing to amorphous synthetic silica/alumina catalysts. Large
amounts of heavy oil were recycled back to the reactor in order to obtain the
desired conversion levels of 40-60 vol-%.

UOP introduced a major departure from the Model ll design in 1947. The
regenerator riser was eliminated and the regeneration air was injected directly into
the regenerator dense bed. Single slide valves and the more compact design cut
construction costs. An important feature of the design was a long reactor riser,
which was a major advantage as FCC technology advanced toward entirely riser
cracking. The UOP Stacked FCC design proved to be quite popular and UOP
designed about 50 Stacked FCC units. Figure 5 shows the typical arrangement of
the UOP Stacked FCC unit.
157048
Process Flow
Page 5




Figure 3:
Model I FCC

Steam
Water
Catalyst
Recycle
Cooler
Fired
Heater
Raw Oil
Charge
Regenerator
Reactor
Cottrell
Precipitator
Flue Gas
Catalyst
Fines
Products to
Main Column
Cyclones
Hoppers
Steam
Air or
Steam
Standpipes
Reactor
Riser
Regenerator
Riser
FCC-PF003
157048
Process Flow
Page 6





Figure 4
Down-flow Model II Catalytic Cracking Unit






Raw Oil
Charge
MCB
Recycle
Air
Steam to
Stripping
Section
Reactor
Products to
Main Column
Multicyclones
Waste
Heat
Boiler
Flue
Gas
Cottrell
Precipitator
Regenerator
FCC-PF004
157048
Process Flow
Page 7





Figure 5
UOP Stacked Fluid Catalytic Cracking Unit
To Main Column
Cyclone
Reactor
Spent Catalyst
Stripper
Stripping
Steam
Air
Slurry Recycle
HCO Recycle
Raw Oil
Charge
Flue Gas
Orific
Chamber
Regenerator
Spent Catalyst
Slide Valve
Flue Gas
Slide Valve
Regenerated Catalyst
Slide Valve
FCC-PF005
157048
Process Flow
Page 8




The next advance in reactor-regenerator design was the Side-by-Side unit, shown
in Figure 6. This design was better for larger units, where stacking the reactor on
top of the regenerator became more expensive. The Side-by-Side layout has also
been used for many of the new small units. The straight riser showed less erosion
than the curved riser of the Stacked unit. Some of the Side-by-Side units were
designed with a reactor dense bed. This bed was eliminated with the advent of
zeolite cracking catalysts, and the riser was extended within the reactor to minimize
thermal and catalytic cracking by reducing vapor residence time in the vessel.
Initially, cyclones were installed on the riser to separate the oil and catalyst, but this
was not particularly successful due to poor cyclone performance. The riser cyclones
were replaced by a "Tee" shaped termination at the top of the riser. The riser
cyclone could then be moved over to allow room for the addition of another cyclone
at the reactor outlet, providing two stages of cyclone separation. Later advances in
riser termination devices concentrated on maximizing hydrocarbon containment or
minimizing the post-riser residence time in the reactor shell where non-selective,
thermal and secondary cracking reactions occur. Side-by-Side units have won
good acceptance by the industry and over 75 UOP designed Side-by-Side FCC
units have been built.

Zeolite cracking catalysts were developed in 1963 and gradually accepted by the
industry over the next ten years. These catalysts proved to be much more active
than amorphous catalysts and were ideally suited for the short contact time riser
cracker. Conversion levels rose as high as 80% without requiring excessive reactor
temperature.

Another significant improvement in FCC reactor technology was the use of elevated
feed distributors. The older wye feed distributors injected the raw oil charge into a
highly back-mixed catalyst flow that resulted in non-uniform oil/catalyst mixing and
excessive light gas and coke formation. In newer systems, multiple, radially oriented
feed distributors elevated in the riser inject raw oil more uniformly to maximize
selectivity to desired products.

157048
Process Flow
Page 9




New regenerator designs were also developed over the years. The old perforated
plate air distributor was changed to a pipe grid for better air distribution. Two stage
cyclones replaced single stage cyclones and reduced catalyst losses.

The burning of coke in the old regenerators was not complete, i.e., not all the
carbon went to CO
2
, and the flue gas normally contained 6-10 vol-% CO. The unit
ran with no excess oxygen. This prevented afterburning in the cyclones and the
resultant heat damage to the cyclones. An extra furnace to generate steam, the CO
boiler, was added to utilize heat that would otherwise be lost. All of the excess CO
in the flue gas could be burned in the CO boiler, but capital costs were high. The
obvious solution to this problem was to burn all of the CO to CO
2
in the regenerator,
where the catalyst can absorb the heat.

Although this could be done in a standard bubbling bed regenerator, a new, high
efficiency type regenerator design proved more efficient. In the high efficiency or
combustor style regenerator, shown in Figure 7, the air and catalyst is mixed in a
fast fluidized environment in the lower part of the regenerator or combustor. The
fluidized catalyst is then carried up the combustor riser to the upper regenerator.
The fluidization in the combustor provides excellent air/catalyst mixing and heat
transfer to maximize coke burning kinetics. The high efficiency regenerators on
stream average less than 100 ppm CO, and less than 40 ppm NOx in the flue gas.
This design enables refineries to get greater thermal efficiency from the unit while
simultaneously meeting more stringent air quality standards.
157048
Process Flow
Page 10




Figure 6
UOP Side by Side Fluid Catalytic Cracking Unit


Raw
Oil Feed
Air
Flue
Gas
Rxn Products to
Main Column
Regenerated
Catalys
Slide Valve
Bubbling Bed
Regenerator
Reactor
Stripping
Steam
Spent
Catalys
Slide Valve
Down-Turned
Arm
Flue Gas
Slide Valve
Wy
Section
Main
Distributo
157048
Process Flow
Page 11




Figure 7
Modern UOP Side by Side Fluid Catalytic Cracking Unit
With High Efficiency Regenerator, Elevated Feed Distributors and
Vortex Separation System Riser Termination
157048
Process Flow
Page 12




The process flow of the reactor and regenerator section of a typical, modern FCC
unit with a high efficiency regenerator can be described as follows:

Lift steam and/or light hydrocarbon is injected at the base of the riser or Wye to
accelerate the catalyst from towards the elevated feed distributors, which are
located about 1/3 the way up the riser. The preheated raw oil charge is pumped
through the feed distributors and atomized with the addition of steam then injected
into the regenerated catalyst stream. The heat from the catalyst and reduced
hydrocarbon partial pressure in the riser both act to help vaporizes the oil. The
catalyst, oil and steam travel up the riser to a region of lower pressure in the reactor
where the cracked hydrocarbon products are separated from the catalyst in the riser
termination device and cyclones before going to the main column for initial product
separation.

During the cracking reaction, a carbonaceous by-product called coke is deposited
on the circulating catalyst. This catalyst (referred to as spent catalyst) drops from
the reactor disengager and cyclones into the stripping section where a
countercurrent flow of steam is used to remove both interstitial and some adsorbed
hydrocarbon vapors. The stripped catalyst flows from the reactor stripper through
the spent catalyst standpipe to the regenerator, where the coke is continuously
burned off. The catalyst flow through the spent catalyst standpipe is controlled to
balance the circulating catalyst flow by maintaining a constant catalyst level in the
reactor.

In the regenerator, the spent catalyst mixes with air and hot regenerated catalyst
from the recirculation catalyst standpipe at the base of the combustor. Here the
coke deposited during in the reactor is burned off to reactivate the catalyst and
provide heat for the net endothermic cracking reactions. The heat of combustion
raises the catalyst temperature in the regenerator to a range of 1200F-1375F
(648C-746C). The catalyst and air flow up the combustor riser and separate at a
"Tee" shaped head. The flue gas is further "cleaned" of catalyst in the cyclones in
the upper regenerator. The recirculation catalyst standpipe returns some of the hot
regenerated catalyst to the combustor either on temperature or density control to
provide heat for initiation of the carbon burn. The remainder or the regenerated
157048
Process Flow
Page 13




catalyst flows down the regenerated catalyst standpipe on reactor temperature
control to the riser Wye to complete the cycle.

The flue gas exits the regenerator through the flue gas slide valves on pressure
control to the regenerator. An orifice chamber located downstream of the slide
valves acts to reduce the pressure drop and velocity across valves to minimize
mechanical deflection of the body and erosion to the internals. Many units have a
power recovery unit in place of the slide valve and orifice chamber to recover
electrical energy by letting down the high volume, moderate pressure flue gas
across a turbo-expander connected to a motor/generator. Finally the sensible heat
energy in the flue gas is recovered through steam generation in either a CO boiler
or flue gas cooler depending on the mode of operation in the regenerator. Many
units also have an electrostatic precipitator or wet gas scrubber to remove catalyst
fines from the flue gas before it is discharged to the atmosphere.

The reasons and methods for varying the high efficiency regenerator operation will
be discussed in more detail later in the PROCESS VARIABLES section.

RFCC Regenerator

As a result of the crude oil embargoes and oil price rises of the 1970s, interest in
processing heavier feeds in FCC units grew. However, FCC technology at that time
could not handle highly contaminated heavy feeds while maintaining a reasonable
degree of conversion. In the mid 1970s, UOP and Ashland Oil Company embarked
on a joint development project to develop catalytic cracking technology capable of
processing very heavy, highly contaminated feeds, i.e. feeds with high metals and
Conradson carbon contents. The result of this development program was the
commercialization of the RCC
SM
(Reduced Crude Conversion) process at Ashlands
Catlettsburg refinery in 1983.

The main feature of the RCC unit is a two stage regenerator equipped with a
catalyst cooler to remove heat from the regenerator. The upper or first stage
regenerator burns approximately 2/3 of the coke from the catalyst in partial
combustion mode to limit the heat of combustion and therefore the temperature of
157048
Process Flow
Page 14




the catalyst. A portion of the partially regenerated catalyst entering the lower or
second stage regenerator flows through the catalyst cooler(s) where heat is
removed from the catalyst to generate steam. The cooled catalyst and the
remainder of the hot catalyst from the first stage regenerator mix in the second
stage regenerator where the coke burning is completed under conditions of
complete CO combustion in the presence of excess O
2
. Carbon is burned off the
catalyst to low levels in the second stage regenerator at moderate temperature to
maximize catalyst activity. The combustion gases from the second stage
regenerator pass into the first stage regenerator where the pre-heated excess O
2

improves coke burn kinetics, and is completely consumed. The combined flue gas
exits through two stages of cyclones in the first stage regenerator and out through a
single common flue gas line. The overall mode of combustion for the two stage
regenerator is partial burn with the additional benefit that all of the catalyst returning
to the reactor is fully regenerated due to the full burn environment of the second
stage regenerator.

Figure 8 shows the arrangement of the regenerator of an RFCC unit. The reactor is
the same as the modern Side by Side unit shown in Figure 7.

Figure 9 shows the process flow for a catalyst cooler. Although catalyst coolers are
not a new idea for FCC service, past attempts to employ catalyst coolers on FCCs
have been largely unsuccessful from both mechanical and process points of view.
UOPs catalyst cooler represents an improved design developed and refined to
provide both mechanical reliability and a wide range of heat removal flexibility. Heat
removal varies with the rate of fluidization air injected to the cooler and the catalyst
slide valve opening.

The operation of the catalyst cooler is as follows; catalyst enters the cooler shell
where the tube bundle is immersed in hot fluidized catalyst. Fluidization air is
injected at the bottom of the cooler shell to control the fluidization and heat transfer.
Annular bayonet type water tubes are used in the tube bundle. Water entering the
bundle flows up through the inner tube, flows out the top of the inner tube and down
through the annular space between the inner and outer tubes where heat transfer
occurs and water is vaporized to steam. In flow-through style coolers cooled
catalyst exits the cooler shell through a standpipe and slide valve and is returned to
157048
Process Flow
Page 15




the regenerator to allow hot catalyst to enter the top of the cooler to maximize the
cooler duty. Back-mix type coolers rely only on fluidization and back-mixing to
transfer hot catalyst from the regenerator rather than using catalyst flow through a
standpipe. Back-mix coolers have a simpler mechanical configuration but can only
remove approximately 70% of the heat transfer capable through a flow-through
cooler.

A large excess of water is circulated through the tubes where heat transfer
generates steam to ensure that the tube walls are always wet and cooled. The
steam and water mixture returns from the cooler bundle to a steam drum where the
steam and water are separated. Water from the drum is circulated back to the
cooler and the saturated steam from the steam drum is routed to the refinery steam
system.
157048
Process Flow
Page 16




Figure 8
UOP RFCC Regenerator Process Flow
Second Stage
Air
First
Stage Air
Spent Catalyst
from Reactor
Regenerated
Catalyst to
Reactor
Vent Tubes
Recirculation
Catalyst
Standpipe
Flue Gas
2nd Stage
Regenerator
1st Stage
Regenerator
Catalyst
Cooler
Water/
Steam
Water
157048
Process Flow
Page 17




Figure 9
UOP FCC Catalyst Cooler Process Flow




Makeup
BFW
Saturated
Steam to
Superheater
Fluffing
Air
Blowdown
Circulating
Water
Water and
Steam
FCC-PF009
Cooled Catalyst
Slide Vlave
157048
Process Flow
Page 18





Main Column

The main column is the first step in the separation and recovery of the cracked
hydrocarbon vapors from the FCC reactor. The reaction products enter the column
at high temperatures, 900-1022F (480-550C). The main column is similar to a
crude tower, with two important differences: 1) The vapors must be cooled before
fractionation can begin, and 2) a large quantity of lighter gas passes overhead with
the gasoline. Figure 10 shows the general process flow for an FCC main column.

Large quantities of heavy oil are circulated over a series of disc and doughnut trays
to cool the vapors and wash down entrained catalyst. The heat removed by the
main column bottoms and the heavy cycle oil is used for feed preheat, steam
generation, reboiler heat in the rest of the unit, or some combination of the three.
The catalyst washed out of the reactor is concentrated in the main column bottoms
stream.

Most of the bottoms flow is directed through exchangers for heat removal and
returned to the disc and doughnut trays. The return line must be free draining to
avoid plugging problems with catalyst fines settling in low points. Some of the
cooled bottoms material from the steam generators may be returned directly to the
bottom of the tower as quench to reduce the temperature of the liquid and minimize
coking and fouling in the bottoms system. Figure 11 shows a typical process flow
for the main column bottoms pumparound and product circuit.

Many older units used a slurry settler to separate and return catalyst fines to the
reactor with a slurry stream off the bottom of the settler. The main column bottoms
product comes off the top of the settler and is normally called clarified slurry oil. In
reactors with two stages of cyclones and in units with modern riser termination
devices, the use of slurry settlers has normally been discontinued. Heavy bottoms
product comes directly from the main column bottoms circulating stream, as does
any slurry recycle to the reactor.

157048
Process Flow
Page 19




Figure 10
UOP FCC Main Column

1
6
7
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
30
29
26
22
21
19
27













FI




FI


To Wet Gas
Compressor
To Sour
Water
Steam
Steam
Heavy
Naphtha
Product
Light Cycle
Oil Product
Flushing Oil
5
Gas
Concentration
Unit
Gas
Concentration
Unit
Gas
Concentration
Unit
Equalizing
Line to/from
Feed Drum
Flushing Oil
Torch Oil
BFW
Steam
Reactor
Vapors
CW
CW
Main Column
Bottoms Product
Raw Oil to
Reactor
Raw Oil from
Surge Drum
To Primary
Absorber
157048
Process Flow
Page 20




Figure 11
UOP FCC Main Column Bottoms Process Flow


1
3
6
M
a
i
n

C
o
l
u
m
n
Water
Steam
Water
Steam
E
E E
Quench
MCB
Steam
Generators
Raw
Oil
Circulating
Bottoms/
Raw Oil
Exchanger
Minimum
Spillback
Rx
Overhead
E
FRC
Raw
Oil
Net
Bottoms/
Raw Oil
Exchanger
Tempered
Water
MCB
Product
MCB
Product
Pumps
Main Column
Bottoms Circulation
Pumps
MCB Product Circuit
Minimum Flow Valve






157048
Process Flow
Page 21




As previously mentioned, most FCC units with modern riser terminations and
reactor cyclones do not require the use of a slurry settler and new units currently
being designed do not include settlers. If a refiner has strict specifications on the
ash content of the main column bottoms product, then more advanced alternate
fines removal equipment is usually employed to reduce the catalyst fines to very low
levels. The two most common types of catalyst removal equipment used today are
the micromesh filter and the electrostatic separator. Cyclonic separation devices
have also been used, but are typically limited to smaller capacity installations.

A typical micromesh filter system will have 2 or 3 vessels with up to 100 filter
elements in each. When multiple filtration vessels are used, each filtration vessel is
sized for 100% of the design flow rate. One vessel is typically in filtration mode
while another is in backflush mode to remove the filter cake from the elements.
When enough catalyst fines have deposited on the filter elements to increase the
pressure drop across the filter to a pre set limit, the vessel is taken off line for back
flushing. Once the filter vessel is off line and drained the vessel is filled with
backflush liquid, either HCO or LCO, and allowed to soak to help dissolve any
heavy aromatic compounds on the elements. The top of the vessel is then
pressured up with either fuel gas or nitrogen to provide the driving force for a high
velocity back flush. The back flush material is collected in a receiver vessel and
pumped back to the reactor riser. A typical process flow for the micromesh filtration
system is shown in Figure 12.

A typical electrostatic slurry oil filtration unit consists of 4-16 skid mounted
cylindrical shells (modules) depending on the volume of filtrate to be process. Each
module contains a high voltage cylindrical electrode surrounded by conductive glass
beads, with a ground rod located in the center of the module assembly. During the
separation cycle, the glass beads are ionized in an electrostatic field. As catalyst
particles flow between the beads, they are electrostatically collected on the surface
of the beads. Each module is sequentially back-flushed while the remaining
modules in the system continue the separation. In the backflush cycle, the electrode
is de-energized and the beads are fluidized, resulting in a circulating motion up
through the center of a 9-inch annular electrode and down the outside. The
circulation up the center annulus and down the walls of the module creates a
scrubbing action, to mechanically scrub the beads clean. Mechanically scrubbing
157048
Process Flow
Page 22




the beads as opposed to solvent soaking as with the micro-mesh filters, raw oil
feed, or any compatible oil can be used as the backflush medium to an electrostatic
filter. The back flush material is directed back to the reactor riser.


Figure 12
Main Column Bottoms Product Filtration System


Filter
#1
Filter
#2
Filter
#3
Receiver
Vessel
Back Flush
Liquid
(LCO/HCO)
Backwash Gas
(N
2
or Fuel Gas)
N
2
or Fuel Gas
Vent
MCB
Product
Clean MCB
Product to
Storage
Catalyst
Backwash
to Reactor
157048
Process Flow
Page 23





There are typically three side-cuts withdrawn from the main column, heavy cycle oil
(HCO), light cycle oil (LCO), and heavy naphtha (HCN). The refiner may withdraw
all three, only two or one, depending on product needs and tower design. On
relatively rare occasions, the main column is designed with a fourth side-cut to
discretely fractionate a heavy LCO cut and a light LCO cut. The side-cut streams
that go out as product are usually stripped to meet flash-point specifications.
Pumparound loops from these side-draws are used to heat balance the main
column by exchanging heat with the gas concentration unit reboilers, the raw oil
charge or boiler feed water. The heat removed in the bottom and side pump-
arounds determines the amount of reflux in each section of the tower and must be
properly balanced for proper column operation. Gasoline and light gases pass up
through the main column and leave as vapors. After being cooled and condensed,
unstabilized gasoline is pumped back to the top of the column as reflux to control
the top temperature in the column. Figures 13, 14, 15 and 16 show typical process
flows for the HCO pumparound, the LCO pumparound, the Heavy Naphtha
pumparound and the Main Column Overhead system, respectively.


157048
Process Flow
Page 24




Figure 13
Main Column HCO Pumparound

Main Column
HCO Internal
Reflux
(Pumped)
Heavy Cycle Oil
Circulation
Pumps
E
E
LIC
To Pump
Flushing Oil
Supply Header
E
To Feed
Surge Drum
(normally no flow)
To MCB/Feed
Exchanger Outlet
(for startup)
Filling Line
(from feed pump)
Gas Con Unit
Debutanizer
Reboiler
157048
Process Flow
Page 25




Figure 14
Main Column LCO Pumparound and Product


LCO
Product
LCO to
Flushing Oil
Steam
LIC
FI
CW
BFW
Preheater
Lean Oil to
Sponge Absorber
Rich Oil from
Sponge Absorber
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Debutanizer Feed
Exchanger
Stripper
Reboiler
FCC-PC403
157048
Process Flow
Page 26




Figure 15
Main Column Heavy Naphtha Pumparound and Product








Main Column
Hydrotreated
Heavy Naphtha
Product
Reflux
(Gravity Flow)
Heavy Naphtha
Circulation
Pumps
Heavy Naphtha
Product Pumps
Heavy Naphtha
Product Cooler
LIC
E
FRC
Steam
L
C
O
S
t
r
i
p
p
e
r
H
e
a
v
y
N
a
p
h
t
h
a
S
t
r
i
p
p
e
r
HeavyNaphtha
to and from
NHT Unit
CW
EE
Circulating Naphtha/
Debutanizer Feed
Exchanger
C
3
/C
4
Splitter
Reboiler
E
FRC
Signal from HCN
Hydrotreater
157048
Process Flow
Page 27




Figure 16
Main Column Overhead System
FCC/DS-R00-37


157048
Process Flow
Page 28




The raw oil feed system is included in the main column section for better process
efficiency, i.e. to take advantage of the heat from the main column. Feed enters the
unit from storage or directly from upstream processes, such as a vacuum tower or a
hydrotreater. The latter scheme is more efficient because the feed will not have to
be cooled before storage and then reheated flowing into the FCC. The number and
type of exchangers used will depend on cost and process factors that will vary with
each refinery.

Most newer units do not use fired charge heaters. Fired charge heaters have
become unpopular due to the increases in fuel costs, operational safety and impact
on overall refinery stack emissions. The feed goes directly to the riser after the raw
oil/main column bottoms exchanger. Figures 17 and 18 show typical process flow
schemes for the FCC feed preheat system without a fired charge heater and with a
fired charge heater, respectively.

Figure 17
Feed Preheat


MCB
Recycle
HCO
Recycle
Raw Oil from
Crude Unit/
Hydrotreating
LCO
Product
MCB
Product
Circ.
MCB
To
Reactor
Equalizing
Line To/From
Main Column
Raw Oil Surge
Drum
FCC-PF401
157048
Process Flow
Page 29





Figure 18
Feed Preheat with Fired Heater




Raw Oil from
Storage/
Upstream Unit
MCB
Product
Circ.
MCB
To
Reactor
Fuel
Gas
Equalizing Line
To/From Main
Column
Fired
Heater
Raw Oil Surge
Drum
FCC-PF401
157048
Process Flow
Page 30




Gas Concentration and Recovery

This section further separates the main column overhead products into stabilized
gasoline, LPG and fuel gas. The normal configuration is shown in Figure 18.
Unstabilized gasoline from the main column overhead receiver is pumped to the
primary absorber, where it is used to adsorb C
3
s and C
4
s in the gas stream at
much higher pressure than the main column. From here the liquid stream goes to
the high pressure receiver (separator), then the stripper column, where H
2
S and
C
2
- are removed. The gasoline off the bottom of the stripper is pressured to the
debutanizer for separation of LPG and gasoline and vapor pressure adjustment of
the gasoline. The overhead of the debutanizer is olefins rich LPG which is often
further processed, for C
3
and C
4
separation and propylene recovery.

The gas from the main column overhead receiver goes first to the wet gas
compressor. From here it is pressured to the HPS, the primary absorber, and finally
the sponge absorber. Valuable light products such as LPG are removed in the first
of two vessels by absorption into the gasoline. The second vessel is the sponge
absorber which uses a LCO pumparound from the main column as a final
absorption stage before the gas goes out as fuel.

Wash water, typically clean condensate, is injected into the inlet to the wet gas
compressor interstage condenser. From the interstage receiver it is pumped to the
high pressure receiver then to the main column overhead condensers. This water
washes out salt forming and corrosive and species such as H
2
S, NH
3
, cyanides and
phenols. The wash water flow is shown in Figure 19.
157048
Process Flow
Page 31




F
u
e
l
G
a
s
L
P
G
H
C
O
S
t
a
b
i
l
i
z
e
d
F
C
C

G
a
s
o
l
i
n
e
L
e
a
n
O
i
l
R
i
c
h
O
i
l
W
a
s
h

W
a
t
e
r

t
o

M
C
O
V
H
D

R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
W
a
s
h
W
a
t
e
r
W
G
C
G
a
s

f
r
o
m
M
C

O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
G
a
s
o
l
i
n
e

f
r
o
m
M
C

O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
H
P
R
PA
SA
S
I
R
D
L
e
g
e
n
d
:
D
D
e
b
u
t
a
n
i
z
e
r
H
P
R
H
i
g
h

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
I
R
I
n
t
e
r
s
t
a
g
e

R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
P
A
P
r
i
m
a
r
y

A
b
s
o
r
b
e
r
S
A
S
p
o
n
g
e

A
b
s
o
r
b
e
r
S
S
t
r
i
p
p
e
r
W
G
C
W
e
t

G
a
s

C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r
3
6 1
1
4
0
1
4
0
F
i
g
u
r
e

1
9
:
T
y
p
i
c
a
l

G
a
s

C
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

U
n
i
t

P
r
o
c
e
s
s

F
l
o
w
9
157048
Process Flow
Page 32






T
o

S
o
u
r

W
a
t
e
r
S
t
r
i
p
p
e
r
W
G
C
1
s
t

S
t
a
g
e
C
o
n
d
e
n
s
a
t
e
I
n
t
e
r
s
t
a
g
e
D
r
u
m
W
G
C
2
n
d

S
t
a
g
e
M
a
i
n

C
o
l
u
m
n
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
M
a
i
n
C
o
l
u
m
n
H
i
g
h

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
H
y
d
r
o
c
a
r
b
o
n
W
a
t
e
r
F
i
g
u
r
e

2
0
:
W
a
s
h

W
a
t
e
r

F
l
o
w
157048
Process Control
Page 1




PROCESS CONTROL


Reactor-Regenerator Control Systems

Most of the control systems in a Fluid Catalytic Cracking unit are similar to those used
elsewhere in the refinery.

Good control of the catalyst circulation through the reactor and regenerator is critical for
stable operation. The catalyst circulation control scheme is shown in Figure 1. This
figure shows a side by side unit with a bubbling bed regenerator but the catalyst
circulation control between the reactor and regenerator is the same on all FCC and
RFCC units.

The circulation of hot regenerated catalyst from the regenerator to the reactor is
controlled to maintain a constant reactor temperature with the regenerated catalyst slide
valve. The circulation of spent catalyst from the reactor to the regenerator is controlled
to maintain a constant catalyst level in the reactor with the spent catalyst slide valve.

The controls on both the spent catalyst and regenerated catalyst slide valves also
include a low differential pressure override. If the differential pressure across either slide
valve drops to a very low or negative value the override will close the slide valve. This
minimizes the possibility of reverse flow in the standpipes, either air entering the reactor
or hydrocarbon entering the regenerator, which are hazardous situations.

Figure 1 shows signals from the reactor temperature controller and level controllers
going to low level selectors (LSS). The low signal selectors also receive signals from the
differential pressure controllers on the corresponding slide valve. If the differential
pressure across the slide valve is greater than the override setpoint, typically 2 psi (0.14
kg/cm
2
) the LSS will select the process variable (level or temperature) to control the
slide valve. If the slide valve pressure drop falls below the override setpoint the LSS will
send that output to the slide valve which will start closing. The low differential pressure
override controllers should always be in automatic.
157048
Process Control
Page 2




Figure 1
Catalyst Circulation Controls

<
<
PDIC
LSS
PDIC
LSS
LIC
TIC
PDIC
Raw
Oil
Air
Flue
Gas
Products to
Main
Column
>
PIC
HSS
Spent
Catalyst
Slide Valve
Regenerated
Catalyst Slide
Valve
LI
XI
(Density)
Regenerator
Reactor
Lift Gas/
Steam
Riser
Termination
Device
FCC-PC001
157048
Process Control
Page 3




For steady control of the catalyst circulation between the reactor and regenerator the
differential pressure across the slide valves must be constant. To ensure steady slidy
valve DPs the differential pressure between the reactor and regenerator is controlled
with the double disc flue gas slide valves on the outlet of the regenerator. In addition to
the slide valves an orifice chamber is also used to take approximately 2/3 of the total
flue gas system pressure drop to minimize erosion in the flue gas slide valves.

A typical flue gas system without power recovery is shown in Figure 2. The reactor
pressure is not controlled directly and floats on the main column overhead pressure.
The reactor-regenerator differential pressure controller allows the regenerator pressure
to change along with the reactor pressure. Pressure control for units with power
recovery is discussed later.

Figure 2
Regenerator Pressure Control/
Flue Gas System

Flue Gas
Slide Valves
Orifice
Chamber
CO Boiler
Electrostatic
Precipitator
Flue Gas
Air
Steam
Water
PIC PDIC
>
HSS
Air
Signal from
Reactor
Pressure Tap
FCC-PC002
157048
Process Control
Page 4




Reactor Control (Figure 3)

Reactor temperature is controlled by the flow of hot regenerated catalyst as described
above. The temperature controller may be located in the reactor vapor line or in the
upper vapor space of the reactor vessel depending on the type of riser termination
device.

The reactor pressure is not directly controlled. Reactor pressure floats on the main
column overhead pressure. Thus, the reactor pressure is the sum of the main column
overhead receiver pressure plus the pressure drop through the main column and MC
overhead condensers plus the pressure drop through the reactor cyclones and reactor
vapor line.

The reactor catalyst level is controlled by the flow of spent catalyst to the regenerator as
described above. Modern reactor designs include a wide range level indicator and a
more accurate, narrow range level controller. Also, the density in the spent catalyst
stripper is measured to allow compensation of the level indication for actual catalyst
density. The level is typically controlled off of the wide range LIC because the signal has
less noise but a switch is included in newer unit designs to allow use of the more
accurate narrow range LIC if desired.

Steam is used to atomize the feed in the elevated Optimix feed distributors (Figure 4).
The amount of steam used determines the both the pressure drop and extent of
atomization as well as the velocity out of the distributor tip and penetration into the
catalyst. During normal operation the steam and oil enter the nozzle separately and are
mixed internally near the tip. The steam flow is normally set at design rates, typically1-2
wt% of the design charge rate. During operation at turndown additional steam may be
used to maintain the optimal pressure drop across the nozzles (typically 50-75 psig) to
ensure adequate atomization is maintained. An alternative that allows maintaining near
design pressure drop and atomization at turndown with minimal additional steam is to
mix a small amount of steam directly with the oil before it enters the nozzle. This results
in a large increase in pressure drop with minimal increase in velocity out of the tip. The
oil and steam flows to each nozzle have restriction orifices with pressure drop indicators
and globe valves to ensure that the flows to each nozzle are equal.
157048
Process Control
Page 5




Figure 3
Reactor Control and Instrumentation
XI
(Density)
X
LI (Density
Compensated)
LIC LIC
SWITCH
MPS
Prestripping
Steam
Stripping
Steam
Fluffing
Steam
XI
(Density)
PDIC
LSS <
PDIC
LSS
<
TIC
Lift Gas
MPS
FIC
FIC
FIC
Lift Steam
Start-up/Emergency
Steam
Atomizing
Steam
Raw Oil
For Feed/Steam
controls see Figure 4
PDI
Regenerated
Catalyst
Spent
Catalyst
FCC-PC003
157048
Process Control
Page 6




The feed bypass system is also shown in Figure 4. When a situation requiring a quick
shutdown is encountered, a control board mounted switch is activated which trips a
solenoid valve controlling the pneumatic signals to the feed bypass valves, causing
these valves to move to their failure positions, i.e. the valve in the line to the riser closes
and the valve in the bypass line to the main column opens. Normally, the next course of
action is to open the emergency steam to the riser to either maintain catalyst circulation
if the regenerated catalyst slide valve remains open or to clear the riser of catalyst if the
regenerated catalyst slide valve is closed.

On units with elevated feed distributors, another important operating variable affecting
the yield pattern is the lift zone velocity. The lift zone velocity is a function of the lift
steam and/or lift gas flow rates which are controlled on straight flow control. As the lift
zone velocity is increased the catalyst density at the point of the feed injection
decreases allowing better penetration of the atomized oil droplets into the catalyst. The
optimum lift zone velocity is typically in the range of 10 15 ft/sec (3 4.5 m/sec).
Either lift gas, lift steam or a combination of both may be used to achieve the optimum
lift zone velocity.

Stripping steam flows are also controlled on straight flow control. The optimal total
stripping steam rate is typically 1.7 2.5 lb/M-lb catalyst circulation but this can vary
significantly with depending on the unit design. The stripping steam rate should be
changed when any process conditions are changed that result in a significant change in
the catalyst circulation rate. The stripping steam rate should also be tested occasionally
to ensure that the optimum steam rate is used.
157048
Process Control
Page 7




Figure 4
Feed/Atomizing Steam Control
NORMALLY
NO FLOW
HEADER
PURGE
Local FI must
be readable
from valve
To other
nozzles
Steam
Local FI must
be readable
from valve
Local PI must be
readable from valve
FI
PI
FI
PI
FI
FI
FI
To other
nozzles
Raw Oil from
Preheat
Raw Oil to Main
Column
Vent
S
Instrument
Air
Feed Bypass
Switch
To other
nozzles
HS
FO
FO
FC
FCC-PC004
157048
Process Control
Page 8




Bubbling Bed Regenerator Control

In full combustion units without a catalyst cooler the regenerator temperature is not
directly controlled and is a function of a number of process variables. In simple terms,
the regenerator temperature is a function of delta coke, i.e. the wt% coke on spent
catalyst entering the regenerator minus the wt% coke on regenerated catalyst leaving
the regenerator. The concept of delta coke is discussed in more detail later in the
section of this book covering Process Variables.

The regenerator may be operated to burn the coke on catalyst completely to CO
2

(complete combustion mode) or may be operated so that some of the coke is burned to
CO (partial combustion mode).

In units that operate in partial combustion mode the CO
2
/CO ratio of the flue gas may
be controlled to adjust the heat of combustion and therefore adjust the regenerator
temperature. The CO
2
/CO ratio is controlled primarily with the amount of combustion air
entering the regenerator. Partial combustion operation is discussed in more detail in the
Process Variables Section.

In units with a catalyst cooler, the regenerator temperature may be controlled by
controlling the amount of steam generated in the cooler. The controls of the catalyst
cooler are discussed in more detail later in this chapter.

The regenerator catalyst inventory serves as the surge capacity for catalyst in the
system and there is no control instrumentation on the regenerator catalyst level. A level
indicator is provided to monitor the regenerator catalyst level. The regenerator catalyst
level changes with catalyst additions, withdrawals and losses. In most units the level is
controlled by intermittent withdrawals of equilibrium catalyst. It is important that the level
be maintained above the terminations of the cyclone diplegs and below the level that
would cause the catalyst in the cyclone diplegs to back up into the cyclone dustbowl.

157048
Process Control
Page 9




The air rate to the regenerator is controlled either to maintain a minimum of excess
oxygen in the flue gas (typically 2%) for full combustion operation or to control the
CO
2
/CO ratio and therefore the heat of combustion and regenerator temperatures in
partial combustion operation.

High Efficiency Regenerator

The instrumentation and controls for a FCC unit with a high efficiency, combustor style
regenerator is shown in Figure 5.

The pressure, regenerated catalyst temperature and combustion air rate for the high
efficiency regenerator are the same as the bubbling bed regenerator described above.

The difference between the high efficiency regenerator and a conventional "bubbling
bed " regenerator is that the regenerator is divided into two sections. The lower section
is called the combustor and is where the spent catalyst and air mix and coke
combustion occurs. The combustor operates in the fast fluidized regime of fluidization.
All the catalyst entering the combustor is transported up the combustor riser into the
upper regenerator where the regenerated catalyst disengages from the flue gas. The
upper regenerator holds the cyclones, provides volume for the regenerated catalyst to
disengage from the flue gas and provides the surge capacity for catalyst in the system.

An important feature of the high efficiency regenerator is the recirculating catalyst
standpipe and slide valve. The recirculation of hot regenerated catalyst from the upper
regenerator to the combustor is important in controlling the coke combustion rate. By
controlling the amount of catalyst recirculated, the following parameters are controlled in
the combustor: the pre-combustion mixing temperature, the catalyst density, catalyst
flux and catalyst residence time. This, in turn, allows the coke combustion rate and
catalyst regeneration to be optimized. The recirculating catalyst slide valve is controlled
through a low signal selector and a slide valve PDIC, similarly to the other slide valves.
On early designs, this slide valve position was set on hand control. In current designs,
the recirculation slide valve position is controlled by a temperature or density controller
located in the upper section of the combustor. A switch is used to select the input signal
to the recirculation slide valve low signal selector.
157048
Process Control
Page 10





Figure 5
High Efficiency Regenerator Controls and
Instrumentation
<
TIC
SWITCH
XIC
(Density)
LSS
XI
(Density)
LI
Regenerated
Catalyst to Reactor
Spent Catalyst
from Reactor
TI's
(1 Each Cyclone)
Signal from
Reactor Pressure
Tap
PDIC
>
Fluffing Air
FIC
Recirculating
Catalyst Slide
Valve
PDIC
PIC
FCC-PC005
157048
Process Control
Page 11




In a high efficiency regenerator the dense bed catalyst level in the upper regenerator
provides the surge volume for the unit and is not controlled directly except by catalyst
additions and withdrawals.

A small flow of fluffing air to the upper regenerator on straight flow control is required to
ensure proper fluidization and flow into the regenerated and recirculation catalyst
standpipes.


RFCC Two Stage Regenerator Control

The regenerator control systems for the RFCC unit with a 2 stage regenerator are
shown in Figure 6. The reactor control systems are identical to those described above
for the conventional reactor-regenerator.

The principal difference is that the coke combustion is completed in 2 stages. The upper
regenerator, or 1
st
stage, is a bubbling bed regenerator operating in partial combustion
mode without excess oxygen. The catalyst exiting this stage still contains a significant
amount of coke which is burned off in the 2
nd
stage operating in full combustion mode
with excess oxygen. This allows the benefits of both partial combustion (lower
regenerated catalyst temperature) and full combustion (very low carbon on regenerated
catalyst for maximum activity).

In the RFCC the catalyst level in the second stage is controlled by the flow of catalyst
from the first stage to the second stage through the recirculation catalyst standpipe and
slide valve. This slide valve has a differential pressure override which closes the slide
valve if the pressure drop across the valve drops to low as described above for the
other slide valves. The level in the first stage regenerator is the surge volume for the
unit and is typically controlled by periodic withdrawals of equilibrium catalyst.

Since RFCC units are designed for heavily contaminated feed stocks one or more
catalyst coolers are included in the design and are used to control the temperature of
the regenerated catalyst circulated back to the reactor. The total air rate which controls
157048
Process Control
Page 12




the CO
2
/CO ratio in the flue gas and therefore the heat of combustion is also used to
adjust the temperature of the regenerated catalyst.

Figure 6
RFCC Regenerator Controls and Instrumentation

<
LSS
PDIC
LIC
XI
LI
<
PDIC
LSS
TIC
Second
Stage Air
Second
Stage Air
First
Stage Air
Recirculation
Catalyst
Standpipe
Cooled
Catalyst
Standpipe
Spent Catalyst
from Reactor
Regenerated
Catalyst to
Reactor
Side View
FCC-PF006
Vent Tubes
157048
Process Control
Page 13




Air Blower Control

The control system for the main air blower depends on whether the blower is an axial or
centrifugal machine and whether it is turbine or motor driven. The most common
configuration built today is a turbine driven axial blower because these are generally
more efficient, but the choice is unit specific.

Figure 7 shows a conventional control scheme for a turbine driven axial blower. Flow is
measured by the venturi in the discharge line and is controlled by varying the speed of
the turbine. Alternatively, the air rate may be controlled by varying the stator vane
position for a fixed speed, axial blower.

A variable vent line, called a snort, is located on the air blower discharge and is used to
prevent air blower surge. An anti-surge system control system constantly monitors the
flow through the blower and the discharge pressure and compares the operating
condition to the surge line on the blower curve. If conditions close to the surge line are
detected the anti surge-controller opens the snort valve to increase the flow to
atmosphere and reduce the discharge pressure of the blower. Modern anti-surge control
systems available from specialized vendors continuously monitor a number of process
variables and calculate deviation from surge to allow operation closer to the surge line
while providing better protection for the equipment. The process variables monitored by
the modern anti-surge controllers are shown in Figure 7.

Occasionally, on older partial combustion units, an additional, smaller vent is used to
fine tune the air flow to the regenerator. This may be tied into a differential temperature
controller (DTC) which controls the temperature difference between the regenerator
dense and dilute phases to limit or control afterburn in partial combustion units.

On RFCC units control valves are used on the air lines to the first and second stages of
the regenerator (Figure 8). Typically the air to the second stage is set at ~25-30% of
the total air flow. In some units an additional control loop is included to minimize the
discharge pressure and thereby minimize the energy consumed by controlling the axial
air blower stator vane position. This control loop minimizes the blower discharge
pressure until one of the 2 flow control valves on the discharge is nearly wide open.
157048
Process Control
Page 14




Figure 7
Main Air Blower Control

Figure 8
RFCC Main Air Blower Control
(Anti Surge and Special Check Valve Details Not Shown)
T
FO
FT TT PT
SIC
Steam
FIC
(Temp, Pressure Corrected) XIC
(Anti-Surge)
TT PT TT PT
FT
ST
Vent to
Atmosphere
Silencer
Special Check
Valve
Air
Cylinder
Vent
Instrument
Air
S
Low Fl ow
Shutdown
Air to
Regenerator
Suction
Fi lter
Housing
Snort
Valve
FCC-PC007
T
FO
TT PT
FIC (Press, Temp
Corrected)
TT PT
FIC (Press, Temp
Corrected)
ZT
ZT
Steam
ZIC
Special Check
Valves
To First Stage
Regenerator
To Second Stage
Regenerator
XIC
(Anti-Surge)
Vent to
Atmosphere
Silencer
Stator Vanes
Suction
Filter
Housing
FCC-PC008
157048
Process Control
Page 15




The check valve in the air blower discharge line isolates the blower from the regenerator
if the blower trips. This minimizes the possibility of hot catalyst backing up into the
blower and minimizes the volume of air in the piping if surging occurs. The closing
action is assisted by a spring loaded air cylinder, which operates when the air flow falls
below a certain limit. When the flow drops below the low limit a solenoid valve de-
energizers and vents the air from the cylinder allowing the spring to move a cam which
bumps the check valve to assist it in closing. An air line from the catalyst hoppers or
plant air is used to provide plant air to clear catalyst from the discharge line if the blower
is down. It can also be used to supply warm blower air to the catalyst hoppers.


Power Recovery Controls

A typical process flow and control scheme for the flue gas system on an FCC with a
power recovery unit is shown in Figure 9. On units with a power recovery turbine,
butterfly valves are used in the flue gas line instead of slide valves for pressure control.
The butterfly valves operate on a single, split range controller which first opens the
valve on the line to the expander inlet then opens the butterfly valve on the bypass
around the expander if the capacity of the expander is exceeded. The bypass valve may
also be controlled to limit the speed of the expander or the pressure in the expander.

In the past, flue gas power recovery systems were designed with regenerator pressure
held steady to minimize fluctuations to the power recovery expander-motor/generator-
air blower train. With this control strategy, a regenerator pressure controller output
signal was used to control the power recovery butterfly valve positions. In this control
scheme, the regenerator pressure is fixed and the reactor-regenerator differential
pressure is allowed to float within reasonable limits.

Recently, the control system for flue gas power recovery pressure control has been
modified so that the reactor-regenerator differential pressure is controlled with a
differential pressure controller as in conventional flue gas systems. The objective of this
change in pressure control strategy is to insure that the reactor-regenerator pressure
balance and catalyst circulation are maintained at steady conditions. Now the output
signals of the reactor-regenerator PDIC and the regenerator PIC are fed to a high signal
157048
Process Control
Page 16




selector (HSS). The high signal selector directs the appropriate control signal (normally
the PDIC) to set the positions of the expander inlet and bypass butterfly valves via a
split range signal. The expander turbine is discussed further in the section covering
Equipment.

Modern power recovery controls, while controlling in the same manner, are more
complicated than discussed here. Power recovery controls and anti-surge controllers
are provided by specialized vendors. The additional functions performed by these
controllers are beyond the scope of this manual.

On units with power recovery, a steam turbine may be used for startup of the air blower.
The turbine can also provide auxiliary power if necessary. The motor/generator imports
or exports power to maintain a constant speed on the power recovery train. If more
energy is being supplied to the expander and the turbine than is required by the blower
there will be surplus electricity generated and exported. If the blower needs more power
than the expander is providing then electricity will be consumed to hold the train at
normal speed.

The flue gas leaving the regenerator flows through a series of small cyclonic devices in
the third stage separator for catalyst fines removal to minimize erosion in the expander.
The underflow catalyst stream from the third stage separator, carried by a small gas
flow, bypasses the expander and typically leaves the system with the main flue gas
stream downstream of the expander turbine. The underflow from the bottom of the
separator is controlled by a restriction orifice called the critical flow nozzle.

A flue gas quench system is also included on units with power recovery. If the flue gas
temperature exceeds the design temperature of the expander a flow of cooling steam is
started to the regenerator plenum through a split range controller. If the steam fails to
cool the flue gas sufficiently a flow of cooling water, typically BFW, is started to the
plenum. Most power recovery vendors also include an emergency steam quench at the
inlet of the expander for additional protection.
157048
Process Control
Page 17




Figure 9
Power Recovery Controls

Orifice
Chamber
PIC
HSS
Flue Gas
Cooler
Electrostatic
Precipitator
Flue
Gas
M
Expander
Motor/
Generator
Steam
T
Steam
Turbine
Air Blower
Air
Split
Range
Third
Stage
Separator
Butterfly
Valves
Critical
Flow
Orifice
RO
Signal From
Regenerator
Temperature
Transmitter
FC
Atomizing
Steam
Split
Range
HighTemperature
Signal Opens This
Control Valve First
TIC
Purge
Steam
FC
FI
Concentric
Sleeve Purge
Stuffing
Box
Plenum
Shell
Retracta
ble Tip
To Other
Nozzles
BFW
LPS
TIC
Quench Connection -
See Detail Below
Regenerator Plenum Chamber Quench Detail
FCC-PC009
PDIC
>
157048
Process Control
Page 18




Catalyst Cooler Controls

Catalyst coolers provide FCC operating flexibility, permitting direct control over the
regenerated catalyst temperature. The regenerated catalyst temperature is a major
variable impacting cracking reactions since it sets both the catalyst to oil ratio and
determines the temperature of the catalyst surface at its first contact with the oil feed.
Both of these variables are important in determining the overall conversion and yield
pattern in the FCC.

Figure 10 shows a schematic of a flow-through catalyst cooler installed on a high
efficiency regenerator with the associated cooler fluidization air, water circulation, steam
drum and control instrumentation. As already discussed, hot catalyst from the upper
regenerator flows through the cooler shell, around the water tubes of the inserted tube
bundle and out of the cooler through a cooled catalyst standpipe and slide valve into the
combustor. The fluidization air lance system delivers fluidization air to the cooler shell to
maintain catalyst fluidization and mixing in the shell and to ensure that catalyst flows
smoothly through the cooler and out through the standpipe. The combination of mixing
and net catalyst flux through the cooler provide the driving force for heat transfer by
maintaining contact of hot catalyst with the tube wall.

The cooler duty is therefore controlled by controlling the amount of fluidizing air and the
flow through the cooled catalyst standpipe. Minimum and maximum fluidizing air rates
are typically specified to ensure that the air lances do not plug with catalyst and that
high velocities in the cooler do not cause erosion on the tube surface. In back mix type
coolers without a standpipe and slide valve the cooler duty is controlled only with the
fluidizing air.

To protect the tubes from thermal damage and oxidation, a large excess of water is
circulated through the tubes to ensure that the tube walls remain wetted. The ratio of
water circulated to steam generated is typically in the range of 20:1 to 25:1 lbs water
circulation per pound of steam generated. In the most recent designs the water
circulation rate is determined by the pump curve and no control valve is provided. In
earlier designs water circulation is controlled by a control valve. A low flow signal from
the flow indicator or controller activates a spare water circulation pump autostart. A low
low flow signal from the water circulation flow indicator or a low low steam drum level
157048
Process Control
Page 19




effectively causes the cooler to shutdown by closing the cooled catalyst slide valve and
closing the fluidization air control valve.

The mixture of steam and water exiting the cooler tube bundle flows to the steam drum
where the steam and water are separated. The saturated steam flow from the drum is
metered and flows out to the refinery steam system. Normally the saturated steam
leaving the steam drum is superheated in some type of downstream steam superheater.
The water returned to the steam drum is recirculated back to the cooler tube bundle. A
small continuous blowdown flow of water is removed from the drum to control
accumulation of impurities in the circulating water. The outputs of the steam product
flow meter and the steam drum level indicator are summed and control the flow of boiler
feed water (BFW) makeup entering the steam drum.

157048
Process Control
Page 20




Figure 10
Catalyst Cooler Controls


M
To Motor
Control
Circuit
STEAM
SEPARATOR
Continuous
Blowdown
Intermittent
Blowdown
LG
LT LT
LT
PI
PG
FIC
Low Flow
Pump Auto
Start
LI
Makeup
BFW
Steam
To Motor
Control
Circuit
M T
LIC
FI
FIC
FI
FI
I
I
I
I
Low Low Flow or
Low Low Level
Slide Valve Trip
I
Low Low Flow or
Low Low Level
Fluffing Air Trip
Steam and
Water
Steam
Air
I
Interlock System
Low/Low
Low Flow
(2/3 Voting)
Low Low
Level (2/3
Voting)
TI
TI
FCC-PC010
FO
FT
DE
S
VENT
DE
S
VENT
157048
Process Control
Page 21




Emergency Interlock Systems

For many years automated interlock systems that removed feed from the FCC were not
used because it was assumed that a well trained operator would make a better decision
regarding stopping feed to the unit than any logic system looking at only a limited
number of inputs. Also, since many of the inputs into the interlock system relied on
pressure taps around the reactor and regenerator which were prone to plugging, the
threat of spurious trips was too great.

Recently, however, many refiners understand the value of a properly designed interlock
decision to automatically remove feed from the FCC and place it in a safe condition.
Also, in many refineries the turnover of operations personnel has increased so that
many FCC operators have limited experience. There have been a number of incidents
where operators tried to keep the unit running during upset conditions warranting
shutting down the unit only to greatly increase the mechanical damage done to the unit.
Instead of a shutdown lasting only a few hours an extended shutdown resulted.

UOP now includes an emergency interlock system on all new units and major revamps.
The purpose of this system is to move the unit to a safe condition during an abnormal
event while permitting a safe, fast restart of the unit once the problem is resolved. This
system automatically performs the steps necessary to accomplish these goals that were
once left to the operator. The system is also designed to minimize the risk of spurious
trips or shutdowns resulting from false indications when no abnormal condition existed.

The emergency interlock system monitors the air flow rate, regenerated and spent
catalyst slide valve pressure drops and valve positions, feed flow rate, reactor
temperature, and reactor stripper level to determine and verify the existence of an
abnormal event warranting a shutdown of the FCC. Once the abnormal event is
detected and verified by 2 out of 3 voting systems or a by a combination of abnormal
process readings the following actions are automatically initiated:

157048
Process Control
Page 22




The feed is bypassed to the main column
Raw oil flow rate is reduced (now going to the main column)
The spent and regenerated catalyst slide valves are closed
Steam is increased to the riser
All related controllers are placed in manual as required


Torch Oil Nozzle Control

Figure 11 below shows a typical torch oil arrangement for an FCC regenerator. The
torch oil nozzles provide a means of injecting heavy oil, usually raw oil feed or HCO,
into the regenerator when extra heat is needed, e.g. during startup. Details of the nozzle
will be described in the section covering equipment. Control of the torch oil flow and the
torch oil atomization steam is often by hand control on older units. New unit designs
usually use a flow controller with a split range output to the torch oil flow and the torch
oil atomization steam to ensure that the atomizing steam is commissioned before the
oil. The torch oil assembly is provided with a continuous steam purge to the annular
space around the torch oil nozzle to keep it clear of catalyst. This purge steam flow is
regulated to less than 50 lb/hr (25 kg/hr) steam with a restriction orifice. In addition, a
small flow of steam is sent to the nozzle tip through a restriction orifice when torch oil is
not in use to help cool the nozzle and keep it from plugging with catalyst.
157048
Process Control
Page 23





Figure 11
Torch Oil Control
STRAINERS
FI
FI MUST BE
READABLE
FROM CONTROL
VALVE
S
VENT
FC
RO
DE
PI MUST BE
READABLE FROM
CONTROL VALVE
From Raw
Oil Pumps
From HCO
Oil Pumps
FC
PI
FC
PI
FIC
Split Range
(Steam Valve
Opens First)
Regenerator
Shell and
Lining
Stuffing Box
Manifold
Purge Steam
Annular Sleeve
Purge Steam
Atomizing
Steam
Instrument
Air
Emergency Interlock
Unit Shutdown Logic
Steam
I
FCC-PC011
157048
Process Control
Page 24




Direct Fired Air Heater (DFAH)

Figure 12 shows the control system of a modern direct fired air heater, present on all
FCC units between the main air blower and the combustion air inlet to the regenerator.
The air heater is used for refractory curing and dry-out following repair or renewal of
regenerator linings as well as during normal startup to heat the regenerator catalyst
inventory. The DFAH outlet temperature is controlled by the fuel gas rate. A high
temperature shutdown trips the fuel gas to the heater to prevent damage to the air grid
in the regenerator. Modern air heater controls trip the fuel gas on a flame out signal
from a flame sensor or on low air flow rate. Separate shutoff valves are provided so that
the tight shut off of only the fuel gas control valve is not relied upon for emergency trip
conditions.

Figure 12
Direct Fired Air Heater Control
Burner
Damper
FC
INSTRUMENT
AIR
Sight
Port
PDI Must Be
Readable
From Damper
Ignitor
VENT
DE
PI
Pilot/
Ignitor
Fuel
Gas
PI
PI
Pressure
Control
Valve
PIC
PI
Air
TIC
I
High Temperature
Shutdown
Ignitor
Start
Flame
Sensor
I
I
Pilot Gas
Sight
Port
To
Regenerator
Interlock Shuts Down the Air Heater on:
Low Air Flow
High Outlet Temperature
Loss of Flame Detection
FCC-PC012
PI
S
S
S
Sight Port
(sighting
flame)
Sight Port
(sighting
opp. wall
157048
Process Control
Page 25




Catalyst Addition Controls

Continuous additions of fresh catalyst are required to maintain the activity of the catalyst
in the reactor and regenerator and to replace catalyst fines lost from the unit through the
cyclones. Regular additions of small batches of catalyst results in more stable operating
conditions and yields than larger batches added less frequently. The typical UOP
catalyst addition system uses a volume pot and automated valve sequence to add a
constant volume of catalyst at timed intervals. This system is shown in Figure 13.
Specialized valves, designed to close on the catalyst transfer lines when they are full of
catalyst, are required to ensure reliable service. Other systems are available including
weight addition systems which include a load cell to add weighed batches of catalyst on
a regular interval.

157048
Process Control
Page 26




Figure 13
Catalyst Addition Control


S
Vent
Instrument
Air
S
Vent
Instrument
Air
S
VENT
FC
RO
FC
Plant Air
INSTRUMENT
AIR
Plant Air
RO
To Regenerator
Volume
Pot
I
I
I
Plant Air
FC
FI
Plant Air
FI
Fresh Catalsyt
Hopper
Sight Flow Indicator
FCC-PC013
157048
Process Control
Page 27




Main Column Control

The main column is the first step in the product separation sequence. The superheated
reactor vapors need to be cooled so that fractionation can be conducted. In large
measure, operation of the main column becomes an exercise in controlled heat removal
coupled with sufficient liquid-vapor contacting to effect the desired degree of
fractionation into desired product streams, typically main column bottoms (MCB), light
cycle oil (LCO), heavy naphtha (HCN), unstabilized gasoline and wet gas. MCB, LCO
and HCN are drawn as products directly from the main column, although on many FCC
units HCN is not removed from the unit as a product stream. On some units, Heavy
Cycle Oil (HCO) is drawn as a product from the main column between the MCB and
LCO products. Main column sidecut products are often steam stripped in sidecut
strippers for flash point adjustment. The unstabilized gasoline and wet gas are further
separated in the gas concentration section. The arrangement and integration of heat
exchange from an FCC main column varies from refinery to refinery based on the
specific requirements and economics of a given installation. The following discussion
describes typical heat exchange circuits used on an FCC unit. Figure 14 shows a
simplified FCC main column schematic.

157048
Process Control
Page 28




Figure 14
Main Column Overview







































Raw Oil to
Reactor
MCB
Product
BFW
Steam
LCO from
Gas Con

LCO to

Gas Con
LCO
Product

HCN
Product
LCO to
Flushing Oil
HCO to
Gas Con
HCO from
Gas Con
HCN to
Gas Con
HCN from
Gas Con
CW
Net OVHD Liquid
to Gas Con
Wash Water

WGC Spillback
Sour Water
Reactor
Product
Vapor

Steam
Steam
OVHD Vapor
to WGC
FCC-PC400
157048
Process Control
Page 29




Main Column Bottoms Pumparound Circuit

The main column bottoms circulation system (Figure 15) is designed to desuperheat
the reactor vapors, condense the bottoms product and scrub entrained catalyst fines
from the reactor product vapor. Main column bottoms (MCB), also commonly called
slurry oil, is removed from the bottom of the main column and typically pumped to a
circulating bottoms/raw oil exchanger and one or more steam generators. MCB may
also be used to provide heat to reboilers. The reactor vapors are desuperheated by
contact with a large stream of cooled slurry oil on the disk and donut trays. The bottoms
flow over the disc and donut trays also washes catalyst fines out of the reactor vapors.
The total bottoms circulation rate over the disc and donut trays is normally set at 150%
to 200% of the feed rate or 6 gpm per ft
2
of column area (15 m
3
/hr per m
2
of column
area), whichever is greater. A minimum spillback valve is provided to maintain this
minimum flow during turndown operation. This ensures enough circulating MCB is
returned to the main column to adequately wet the disc and donut trays, thereby
cleansing the reactor vapors of catalyst fines and preventing coke formation on the disk
and donut trays due to insufficient liquid flow over the trays.

Typically the bottoms temperature is maintained at 670-700F (354-370C) to minimize
coking and fouling in the slurry circuit. The bottoms temperature is controlled by the
LCO product draw rate (or HCO product draw rate if HCO is withdrawn as a product).
This flow is adjusted manually by the operators. If the bottoms temperature is too high
the LCO product rate is reduced to drop more LCO to the bottom of the column which
lowers the bubble point of the MCB product. Alternatively, if a higher LCO endpoint is
desired than can be achieved while controlling the bottoms temperature in this manner,
a stream of cooled bottoms from the steam generator (quench) may be returned directly
to the bottom of the column to sub cool the liquid there. In this manner the temperature
in the bottom of the column is no longer composition dependent and the LCO/MCB
cutpoint may be varied independently of the bottoms temperature.

157048
Process Control
Page 30




Figure 15
Main Column Bottoms and HCO Flow and Control

Raw
MCB
Product
BFW

Steam
Reactor
Product
Vapor

LIC
FI
FIC
CW
MCB
Quench
Disc and Donut
Minimum Flow
Raw
LIC
Debutanizer
Reboiler
HCN Stripper
Reboiler
FIC FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Torch Oil
Pump Flushing Oil
FCC-PC401
FIC
157048
Process Control
Page 31




During normal operations the heat input from the circulating main column bottoms to
reboilers and preheat exchangers will be set by product and process considerations.
This is true of the heat removed in the other pump around loops as well. Heat input to
the steam generators is generally the only variable available to the operator for
adjustment of the column heat balance and reflux rates. Increasing the bottoms flow
through the steam generators will cause more heat to be removed. This will reduce the
amount of hot vapor traffic up the column and eventually will reduce the overhead reflux
rate and the heat removed in the overhead system.

Each exchanger in the main column bottoms pumparound circuit is designed for oil
containing catalyst particles. Main column bottoms flows through the exchanger on the
tube side and the velocity should be kept between 3.75 ft/s and 7.0 ft/s (1.14 m/s and
2.13 m/s) for straight tubes and between 3.75 ft/s and 5.75 ft/s (1.14 m/s and 1.75 m/s)
for U-tubes. Below the minimum velocity, catalyst can accumulate on the tube walls
and slowly plug the tube while greatly reducing heat transfer. If the velocity is above 7
ft/s (2.13 m/s), there is a risk of erosion on the tube walls. If the circulating MCB is very
low in ash content (<0.15 wt-%) the risk of erosion is greatly reduced. The rates
required to meet these velocities must be calculated for each exchanger before startup.

Bottoms product is withdrawn on straight flow control adjusted manually by the operator
to maintain a steady bottoms level in the main column. The product is cooled, typically
in cooling water exchangers before being sent to tank. In many cases the bottoms
product is also exchanged with the raw oil.

Removal of catalyst fines from the bottoms product by filtration, settlers or hydroclones
is an option which may be included depending on the end use of the bottoms product. If
a slurry settler is used to reduce catalyst fines in the bottoms product, the settler inlet
flow is drawn upstream of any bottoms product coolers. Hot main column bottoms
enters the settler tangentially and the swirling motion imparted distributes the heavy oil
evenly as it moves up to the outlet. Settler superficial velocity is limited to 30 BPD/ft
2
(50 m
3
/d/m
2
) or less in the settler so that the fines can settle to the bottom of the
vessel. Clarified oil product (CLO) leaves from the top of the settler. Diluent (cooled
main column bottoms, raw oil or HCO) is added at the bottom of the settler to carry the
157048
Process Control
Page 32




fines back to the riser. The diluent addition rate is always equal to or slightly less than
the slurry flow to the riser and the settler feed rate is normally equal to or greater than
the clarified product from the from the top of the settler so that net flow is downward
carrying the settled fines out of the settler. Figure 16 shows the slurry settler flow and
control. Slurry settlers are not as common today because of the improvement in reactor
riser terminations and cyclones.

Filtration of the slurry product is becoming more common either to produce carbon
black feed stock (which typically requires less than 100 wppm solids), to minimize
downstream problems in fired heaters or to minimize tank cleaning cost. Figure 17
shows a typical flow and control for a bottoms filtration unit.

Figure 16
Slurry Settler Flow and Control

Clarified
Slurry Oil
Product
Slurry
Settler
PSV
FI
FIC
Return to
Main Column
Diluent
(HCO or
Raw Oil)
Sewer
Slurry
to Riser
Main Column
Bottoms
FIC
FIC
FIC
FCC-PC402
157048
Process Control
Page 33




Figure 17
Main Column Bottoms Filter Flow and Control
Filter
#1
Filter
#2
Filter
#3
Receiver
Vessel
Solvent Fluid
(LCO/HCO)
Backwash Gas
(N
2
or Fuel Gas)
N
2
or Fuel Gas
Vent
MCB
Product
Clean
MCB
Product to
Storage
Catalyst
Backwash
to
Reactor
FIC
PIC
PDI PDI PDI LS LS LS
FI
LIC
FIC
Split
Range
PIC
FIC
Bypass
(normally
closed)
Valve sequencing controlled by programmable logic controller(PLC)
Signals to/from PLC not shown for clarity
FCC-PC412
157048
Process Control
Page 34




HCO Pumparound Circuit

HCO is withdrawn from the column and commonly used to provide heat to the raw oil
preheat exchanger and the debutanizer reboiler as shown in Figure 15. Occasionally,
HCO is also used to generate steam and reboil side cut strippers such as a heavy
naphtha stripper. HCO flow to each of these exchangers is regulated by a flow
controller. Each controller is set by the operator to achieve desired product or process
specifications. If a steam generator is used, then the HCO pumparound heat removal
may be varied to some extent independently of process or product requirements. The
HCO reflux to the column is typically pumped back to the column on flow control reset
by the HCO draw tray level.

A decrease in heat removal from the HCO circuit will require an increase in heat
removal elsewhere in the column. For example, if less heat is removed in the
debutanizer reboiler then fewer vapors will be condensed in this part of the column
increasing the amount of vapor rising up the column. If the excess heat is not removed
in another pumparound circuit the overhead duty and reflux to the top of the main
column will increase to remove this heat.

HCO product (if any) can be removed through a stripper for flash point adjustment. The
amount of HCO product produced will depend on reactor operating conditions, feed
quality and catalyst type. The plant operator will make adjustments in HCO, LCO and
naphtha draw off rates to maintain target cut points or end points for these products. If
HCO is taken as a product it would typically be cooled against raw oil in a charge
preheat exchanger and then sent through a water cooled product cooler on flow control.

The HCO circuit also provides torch oil to the regeneration section for start-up and
emergencies and flush oil to the main column bottoms pumps.

157048
Process Control
Page 35




LCO Pumparound and Product Circuit

Circulating LCO normally provides heat to the gas concentration unit stripper reboiler
and the debutanizer feed exchanger as shown in Figure 18. Flow to each exchanger is
regulated by a flow controller which is set according to process requirements. A stream
of LCO, after heat exchange at the stripper reboiler, is sent to the sponge absorber as
lean oil to adsorb light gasoline range components from the light gas in the gas
concentration section. The rich oil from the sponge absorber is returned to the main
column with the cooled LCO circulation stream, providing internal reflux for the main
column LCO section. On many units this reflux steam is circulated from a total trap tray
by gravity through a flow meter to provide additional column process information.

Most units contain an LCO stripper for LCO product flash point adjustment. Depending
upon the plant arrangement, light ends in the LCO can be removed either by steam
stripping or by refluxing the liquid using heat from the circulating HCO. The LCO product
may exchange heat with the raw oil feed stream before being cooled with water in a
product cooler and being sent to storage. Flow to storage is set by a flow controller. The
amount of LCO sent to storage is typically varied to control the temperature in the
bottoms of the main column as described previously. Alternatively the LCO product rate
may be adjusted to maintain a constant temperature at the draw tray and therefore
maintain a constant endpoint. Stripped LCO is available for use as emergency quench
to the riser, instrument flush and pump gland seal oil.

157048
Process Control
Page 36





Figure 18
LCO Flow and Control


LCO
Product
LCO to
Flushing Oil
Steam
LIC
FI
CW
BFW
Preheater
Lean Oil to Sponge
Absorber
Rich Oil fromSponge
Absorber
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Debutanizer Feed
Exchanger
Stripper
Reboiler
FCC-PC403
157048
Process Control
Page 37




Heavy Naphtha Pumparound and Product Circuit

A heavy naphtha (HCN) product is typically withdrawn through a side cut stripper
column in order to remove light ends for vapor pressure adjustment. The product may
be either steam stripped or reboiled with HCO. The naphtha stripper bottoms product is
cooled with water in a product cooler and then sent to storage or treating on flow
control. The HCN product flow rate is adjusted by the operator to maintain a constant
draw temperature and therefore endpoint at the draw tray. The portion of the naphtha
draw from the main column which is not stripped as product is pumped and used for
heat exchange with raw oil feed, the C3/C4 splitter reboiler, water or other low
temperature streams and returned to the main column as internal reflux for the main
column naphtha section. Figure 19 shows the flow and control for the naphtha
pumparound circuit.

Figure 19
HCN Flow and Control

FCC-PC404
HCN
Product
HCO
FIC
CW
FIC
FIC
C3/C4 Splitter
Reboiler
FI
LIC
157048
Process Control
Page 38




Main Column Overhead System

Reactor product vapors contain large quantities of light gas and gasoline vapors which
pass through the entire main column as gases. A portion of these products are
condensed in the overhead condenser, the trim condenser and separated in the main
column overhead receiver. A quantity of the condensed hydrocarbon liquid (unstabilized
gasoline) is pumped to the main column as reflux (Figure 20).

Reflux to the main column controls the overhead vapor temperature. This temperature
determines the endpoint of the debutanized gasoline product from the gas concentration
unit. The reflux also heat balances the column. If heat removal from one section is
changed the overhead reflux rate will respond in the opposite direction to maintain a
constant top temperature. For example, if more heat is required in the feed to the
debutanizer, LCO circulation will be increased to provide the heat. The increased heat
removal from the LCO circulation will condense more vapors rising up the column. Less
heat will reach the top of the column. The top temperature controller will then reduce the
reflux flow to maintain the column top temperature, thus heat balancing the column.

The unstabilized gasoline liquid in the receiver not used as reflux is pumped to the
primary absorber in the gas concentration unit on receiver level control. Gas flows to the
suction drum of the wet gas compressor in the gas concentration unit. Water from the
overhead receiver water boot is pumped to the waste water treating unit.

The main column pressure, and therefore the reactor pressure, is controlled at the
overhead receiver by the amount of gas removed through the wet gas compressor. This
control must be very steady because swings in this pressure will affect the pressure
balance between the reactor and regenerator and therefore will affect the catalyst
circulation. The wet gas compressor control system depends on the type of driver and
the compressor design.

Regardless of the primary pressure control system, a backup control system is present
in case the wet gas compressor trips or can not handle all of the gas produced in the
reactor. This is shown in Figure 20. In this case an overpressure control valve, typically
157048
Process Control
Page 39




set at 0.3-0.5 psi (0.02-0.035 kg/cm
2
) above the setpoint for the primary pressure
controller will open venting some of the gas to flare or a low pressure fuel gas system.
This control system allows the unit to continue operating during a short duration
compressor failure and is useful during startup before sufficient gas is produced in the
reactor to run the compressor.

Figure 20
Main Column Overhead Flow and Control
PSV
Cooling
Water
Wet Gas
Compressor First
Stage Spillback
To Wet Gas
Compressor
Suction Drum
To Flare
Header FC
Signal to Wet
Gas Compressor
Controls
PIC PRC
Net Overhead
Liquid to High
Pressure
Receiver
Sour
Water
LIC
TIC
FIC FIC
LIC
FI
Wash
Water
FCC-PC405
157048
Process Control
Page 40




Wet Gas Compressor Control

Steam Turbine Driven Wet Gas Compressor Control

The compression of the wet gas from the main column overhead receiver to the gas
concentration section is done in two stages, with external cooling and liquid knockout
between the stages. A variable speed steam driven centrifugal compressor is shown in
Figure 21. The control system is set up to hold pressures steady and to prevent the gas
compressor from surging, which can cause serious damage to the wet gas compressor.

The pressure control signal from the main column overhead receiver has a split range,
to the low signal selector controlling the spillback, and to the governor on the steam
turbine. The second stage spillback to the first stage compressor discharge is controlled
by a low signal selector which is fed by the interstage suction drum pressure signal and
the second stage flow signal. The low signal selector will ignore one of the two inputs,
whichever is higher, and transmit the lower output signal intact.

The system works as follows:

1. Normal flow - at lower charge rates, the main column overhead receiver signal
will control the first stage spillback to hold receiver pressure constant. The
second stage spillback will be controlled by the anti-surge controller to satisfy the
minimum flow requirements of the surge curve. The turbine will be running at
minimum governor speed. As the charge rate is increased, there is a greater net
flow of gas, so the two spillbacks are gradually closed by the controllers. When
the spillbacks reach the fully closed position, the output signal from the overhead
receiver pressure controller will be high enough to begin increasing the
compressor speed. The speed will then be continuously varied to remove the gas
from the main column and hold the pressure constant. Throughout this, the flow
controllers will have no effect as long as there is sufficient gas flow to keep the
machine out of surge.

157048
Process Control
Page 41




2. Abnormally low flow - there would be two main reasons for low gas flow. The first
would be insufficient gas from the main column, such as when the feed was
suddenly cut out. The second reason would be an abnormally high second stage
discharge pressure, caused by problems in the gas concentration unit. Whatever
the cause, when the flow falls below the point set by the operator on the FRC,
the output signal falls, which would then be transmitted by the low signal selector.
This opens the spillback valves to recycle gas back to the suction, allowing the
gas to be moved through the machine in sufficient quantities to keep it out of a
surge condition. When normal conditions are restored, the flow controller output
will rise, and the low signal selector will return the spillbacks to pressure control.
If the low flow is caused by high pressure in the gas concentration unit, opening
the first stage spillback will overpressure the main column. This condition will
open the overpressure control valve to flare, holding the receiver pressure at the
overpressure set point.

3. Abnormally high flow - the main cause for very high flow rates would be operating
the FCC unit in such a fashion that the compressor could not handle the gas
flow. The machine would be at maximum governor speed with both spillbacks
closed. Pressure in the main column would rise, opening the overpressure
control valve to flare.

Modern anti-surge and pressure control systems take advantage of faster transmitters
and computer technology to allow monitoring of multiple variables and rapid calculation
of corrected flow rates to allow more efficient operation closer to the surge line with less
spillback. These inputs to the anti-surge controllers are shown in Figure 21.



157048
Process Control
Page 42




Figure 21
Wet Gas Compressor Control
Steam Turbine, Variable Speed

FCC-PC407
Nirogen
Purge
Nirogen
Purge
Antisurge
Controller
FI
FO
TI
Steam
T
Speed
Sensor
SI
To Surface
Condenser
TT
PT PT
TT
PT PT
Antisurge
Signal Opens
Control Valve
FO
FI
SC
Signal
from Main
Column
Overhead
PRC
To High
Pressure
Receiver
Antisurge
Signal Opens
Control
Valve
First Stage
Spillback to
Main Coulumn
Overhead
From
Main
Column
Overhead
Receiver
First
Stage
Second
Stage
TT
TT
Antisurge
Controller
157048
Process Control
Page 43




Motor Driven Wet Gas Compressor Control

This case would be for a constant speed centrifugal compressor. The instruments,
controls, and actions are essentially the same as discussed above, except that the
governor speed control is replaced by a suction butterfly valve to throttle the gas flow to
the compressor. This valve normally stays partially closed, against a limiting stop. As
more flow is required, after the spillbacks have closed, the butterfly valve will open
allowing more gas to move through the compressor. The action on low gas flow is to
move gas through the compressor spillback valves in the same manner as described
above for the variable speed machine.

Reciprocating Wet Gas Compressor Control

Older FCC units occasionally used reciprocating wet gas compressors. These are rarely
used today because of the better efficiency of the centrifugal compressors.
Reciprocating compressors are normally constant speed machines. At normal flows and
pressures, the spillbacks open or close to hold the overhead receiver and interstage
suction drum pressures at the point set by the operator. Abnormally low flow rates, such
as when the charge is cut, will cause a drop in pressure, opening the spillbacks. High
second stage discharge pressure will have the same effect. Reciprocating machines
may also have clearance pockets and suction valve unloaders which can be varied to
control flow, but this will depend on the individual machine.

Variations

There are other control schemes which are in use today, depending on the individual
refiner's needs. Some plants have been designed with only one spillback, from second
stage discharge to the main column overhead receiver. This does not allow the same
freedom of action as that offered by two spillback valves. Excess pressure drop through
one part of the system caused by such things as exchanger fouling, is one reason why it
is better to have the extra freedom of two spillbacks.


157048
Process Control
Page 44




Main Column and Gas Concentration Section Water Wash

The overhead stream from the main column contains a number of contaminants which
can cause corrosion, plugging and fouling. These contaminants include ammonia,
sulfides, cyanides, chlorides and phenols. A wash water stream is used to remove the
contaminants. The wash water should be clean, preferably steam condensate, to
prevent adding more problems such as salts or dissolved oxygen to the system. Wash
water is effective in removing most of these impurities because most of them are ionic
or polar species which tend to be readily soluble in water.

Figure 22 shows the preferred arrangement of the water wash system for an FCC
fractionation and gas concentration section. Clean water is pumped into the first stage
discharge of the wet gas compressor at the inlet to the interstage cooler. The water from
the interstage receiver is pumped out on level control to the wet gas compressor
discharge at the inlet of the high pressure cooler. Water collected in the high pressure
receiver water boot is pressured on water boot level control to the inlets of the main
column overhead condenser and trim condenser. Sour water is then pumped to
disposal from the main column receiver water boot on receiver water boot level control.

The recommended water wash rate is 6.5 to 7.0 vol% of feed or about 2 gpm per 1000
BPD feed (approximately 1.15 liters/min of water per 1 m
3
/hr of fresh feed rate). The
drain water from both the overhead receiver and the high pressure receiver should be
checked regularly for pH. The main column overhead receiver water should be in the
range of pH 8.0 to 8.5. The high pressure receiver drain water should also be slightly
alkaline, pH 7.5 8.0.

157048
Process Control
Page 45




Figure 22
Wash Water Control



M
FI
Main Column
OVHD Vapors
First
Stage
Second
Stage
Condensate
Water Break
Drum
LIC
FIC
LIC
High Pressure
Receiver
Main Column
OVHD Rec.
Wet Gas Compressor
Sour
Water
Liquid from
Primary Absorber
Vapor from
Stripper
CW
CW
To Primary
Absorber
Water Flow Indicated by Bold Lines
To Primary
Absorber
To Stripper
FCC-PC409
157048
Process Control
Page 46




Feed Preheat Train

There are two basic raw oil preheat schemes used in FCC units. One uses a fired
heater to supply some or all of the feed preheat duty. Fired feed preheaters are
expensive to build and operate by today's standards so fired preheaters are mainly in
use on older FCC units. The other feed preheat scheme uses extensive heat integration
to provide feed preheat duty. Most new FCC units use this heat exchange scheme and
do not employ fired feed preheaters. Figures 23 and 24 show FCC feed preheat
schemes with and without fired heaters, respectively.

In both preheat trains, the raw oil flows to a feed surge drum directly from the crude unit,
vacuum unit, hydrotreating or from storage. The surge drum pressure rides on main
column pressure through a vent line connected to the lower section of the main column
just above the HCO draw. The surge drum level is normally controlled by controlling the
flow of one of the feed sources into the unit.

The charge is pumped from the surge drum on flow control through heat exchangers
before reaching the feed distributor at the reactor riser. The only significant difference
between the two schemes is the presence of the fired heater. Both schemes use a TRC
to control the raw oil outlet temperature from the circulating main column bottom/raw oil
exchanger by bypassing some of the raw oil around the exchanger. The flow of main
column bottoms through the exchanger is varied to keep the temperature controller in a
good operating range. With the fired heater, each heater pass is also controlled by a
TRC.

157048
Process Control
Page 47




Figure 23
Feed Preheat System

MCB
Recycle
HCO
Recycle
TIC
Split
Range
High Temperature
Closes Control
Val ve
Low Temperature
Closes Control
Valve
Raw Oil from
Crude Unit/
Hydrotreating
Raw Oil from
Storage
LCO
Product
MCB
Product
Circ.
MCB
Split
Range
High Level Closes
this Valve First
LIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Level Control
Signal from
Upstream
Unit
<
LSS
To
Reactor
Equalizing
Line To/From
Main Column
FIC
Raw Oil Surge
Drum
FCC-PC411
157048
Process Control
Page 48




Figure 24
Feed Preheat with Fired Heater

TIC
Raw Oil from
Storage/
Upstream Unit
MCB
Product
Circ.
MCB
LIC
FIC
To
Reactor
TIC
Fuel
Gas
Equalizing Line
To/From Main
Column
Fired
Heater
Raw Oil Surge
Drum
FCC-PC410
157048
Process Control
Page 49




Gas Concentration Unit Control

A typical flow scheme for the overall gas concentration unit is shown in Figure 25. It is
convenient to discuss the controls in 2 sections - the absorber section and the
fractionation section. The absorber section removes LPG and light material from the
gases and recycles them back to the high pressure receiver. The fractionation section
strips C2 and lighter material as well as H2S from the LPG and gasoline and recycles
them back to the high pressure receiver. The fractionation section also separates the
LPG and gasoline.

Because the absorbed and stripped material are recycled back to the high pressure
receiver good control of the gas concentration unit requires a good balance of stripping
and absorption. If excessive stripping is occurring then excessive absorption will also be
required to achieve reasonable C
3
and C
4
recoveries from the fuel gas. This is at a
minimum a waste of utilities and in severe cases can result in increasing recycle flows,
or snowballing, until one or more of the columns flood.

157048
Process Control
Page 50




Figure 25
Gas Concentration Unit Flow
Stabilized Gasoline to
Treating
Stripper
Debutanizer
CW
Lift Gas to
Reactor
Sponge
Gas to
Treating
Unstabilized
Gasoline from
Main Column
OVHD
CW
Wet Gas
Compressor
Discharge
Wash Water to
Main Column
OVHD Receiver
Wash Water
from Interstage
Receiver
LCO from
Main
Column
Rich Oil
to Main
Column
LPG to
Treating
Primary
Absorber
Sponge
Absorber
CW
Circ.
HCO
CW
High Pressure
Receiver
Lean Gas
KO Drum
FCC-PC703
157048
Process Control
Page 51




Absorber Section - Primary Absorber

LPG and heavier hydrocarbons are recovered from the light gas (also called sponge
gas or fuel gas) in this section of the gas concentration unit shown in Figure 26. Gas
from the high pressure receiver enters the primary absorber below the bottom tray and
is contacted by counter current flow with unstabilized gasoline on level control from the
FCC main column overhead receiver.

Many units also recycle stabilized gasoline (debutanizer bottoms) on flow control to the
top tray to increase recovery of the C
3
and C
4
hydrocarbons. Unstabilized gasoline is
typically fed to the 6
th
tray from the top when recycle gasoline is used. Heat is removed
from the column to maximize adsorption efficiency with two pumparound inter-coolers,
one about one third the way down the column and another about two thirds of the way
down from the top. The rich oil flows from the bottom of the column to the high pressure
condenser on level control cascaded to a flow controller. The overhead gas stream
flows into the sponge absorber.

Absorber Section - Sponge Absorber

The sponge absorber is typically a packed column which serves to recover nearly all the
remaining C
5

and C
6
material and some C
3
and C
4
hydrocarbons. Circulating light cycle
oil on flow control from the stripper reboiler is heat exchanged with the rich oil and then
cooled before being pumped to the top of the absorber as lean oil. The gas from the
primary absorber flows upward from the bottom of the column. Rich oil leaves the
bottom of the column on level control. The rich oil is heated in the rich oil/lean oil
exchanger before returning to the main column with the circulating LCO stream. Lean
sponge gas leaving the top of the sponge absorber is cooled and any condensed liquid
drops out in the lean gas knockout drum. The liquid is periodically drained to the LCO
return line.

Gas from the lean gas knockout drum is normally sent on pressure control to a fuel gas
amine treater before being sent to the refinery fuel gas system. In FCC or RCC units
using lift gas technology, a portion of the lean sponge gas (before amine treating) is
recycled to the reactor riser on flow control for use as lift gas. The sponge gas pressure
157048
Process Control
Page 52




controller sets the pressure for the knockout drum, the sponge absorber, the primary
absorber, the high pressure receiver and the stripper column. The pressure of each
vessel depends upon the pressure drop between the vessel and the lean gas knockout
drum.

Figure 26
Gas Concentration Unit Absorber Section
Stabilized Gasoline to
Treating
Stripper
Debutanizer
CW
Lift Gas to
Reactor
Sponge
Gas to
Treating
Unstabilized
Gasoline from
Main Column
OVHD
CW
Wet Gas
Compressor
Discharge
Wash Water to
Main Column
OVHD Receiver
Wash Water
from Interstage
Receiver
LCO from
Main
Column
Rich Oil
to Main
Column
LPG to
Treating
Primary
Absorber
Sponge
Absorber
CW
Circ.
HCO
CW
High Pressure
Receiver
Lean Gas
KO Drum
FCC-PC703
157048
Process Control
Page 53




Fractionation Section - Stripper Column

Removal of light hydrocarbons from the LPG and gasoline is accomplished in the
stripper column (see Figure 27). Liquid from the high pressure receiver is heated with
debutanized gasoline before entering the top of the stripper. Heat to the stripper is
provided from the debutanized gasoline reboiler and the LCO reboiler. The LCO flow to
the reboiler is controlled on a cascade loop to maintain a constant vapor rate from the
top of the column. A bypass around the debutanizer bottoms to the lower reboiler is
provided in case the demand for LCO to the upper reboiler is less than the required flow
to the sponge absorber. The stripping rate is varied to reject all of the C
2
and lighter
material and in some cases to control the amount of H
2
S going to the debutanizer and
therefore into the LPG product. Stripper overhead vapors return to the high pressure
condenser. Liquid leaves the bottom of the stripper on level control and is pressured to
the debutanizer column feed exchanger.

Fractionation Section - Debutanizer Column

Gasoline vapor pressure adjustment and separation of the C
5
and heavier components
from the LPG is achieved in the debutanizer column. Circulating LCO provides heat to
the debutanizer feed before the feed enters the column at tray 20. LPG leaves the top of
the column as a gas and is cooled in the condenser before collecting in the overhead
receiver. The pressure in the column is controlled by controlling the amount of vapor
entering the condenser. A hot vapor bypass around the condenser is used to control the
pressure drop between the column and the receiver to ensure that the opening of the
pressure control valve stays in a good operating range. If the hot vapor bypass valve is
fully open then the temperature, and therefore the pressure, in the receiver is too low
indicating that less cooling is required at the condenser and that either the fan speed
should be reduced or one or more fans should be shut off. Likewise, if the hot vapor
bypass valve is fully closed then the fan speed needs to be increased or additional fans
turned on.

Liquid from the overhead receiver is returned to the column top as reflux to control the
column temperature at tray 6. Net overhead liquid is pumped to the LPG treating unit to
control the level in the receiver.
157048
Process Control
Page 54




Heat to the debutanizer reboiler is typically supplied by circulating HCO. The flow of
HCO is adjusted by the operator to adjust the reflux rate in the column and the quality of
fractionation. The temperature controller is adjusted to control the RVP (Reid Vapor
Pressure) of the gasoline. Stabilized gasoline flows from the column bottom to supply
heat to the stripper reboiler and then to the stripper feed exchanger. Gasoline from the
stripper feed exchanger can be split into two streams. Recycle gasoline is cooled and
pumped to the primary absorber on flow control. Net debutanizer bottoms (i.e., gasoline)
is cooled and pumped to the treating unit. The net gasoline flow controller is reset by the
debutanizer bottoms level controller to maintain the column bottom level.

157048
Process Control
Page 55




Figure 27
Gas Concentration Unit Fractionation Section

1
7
19
20
35
36
40
1
18
19
36
FIC
Circulating
HCO To/From
Main Column
Stabilized Gasoline
to Primary
Absorber
FIC
FIC
Stabilized
Gasoline to
Treating
Liquid
from
HPR
Split
Range
TIC
LIC
FI
TIC
PIC
PDIC
Vapor
to HPR
Stripper
Debutanizer
Circulating
LCO To/
From Main
Column
FIC
FIC
CW
LIC
LPG to
Treating
FCC-PC700
157048-1
Equipment
Page 1




EQUIPMENT


INTRODUCTION

The Fluid Catalytic Cracking unit is exposed to severe temperature, erosion and
corrosion effects. The equipment has been designed to withstand these conditions
for an acceptable mechanical life, but the life can be drastically shortened by abuse
or poor operations. Proper control and operation will avoid the unnecessary
problems which lead to premature failure.

The FCC unit should be inspected every turnaround. The inspection can be done by
a UOP inspector, the refinery inspection department, or both. Adequate record
keeping of these inspections is necessary to develop the unit history which will aid
the refiner to judge equipment life, determine potential problems and evaluate the
effect of different metallurgy and process conditions related to the equipment.

A good inspection will include the following:

1) An evaluation of the equipment which has experienced erosion and/or
corrosion

2) A list recommending minor repair work

3) An assessment of mechanical problems caused by the operating
conditions of the previous run

4) A list of spare parts required for the next turnaround

Erosion and corrosion are not always obvious. A thorough inspection of the
equipment will reveal the extent of any damage and help determine the cause and
effect relationship. Also, because no equipment lasts forever, the inspection will
help the refiner determine when equipment must be replaced so advance orders
can be made.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 2




Minor repair work can prevent small problems from expanding to larger problems. It
is difficult to predict the amount of minor work which will be required. The desired
length of the next run will determine the extent of the repairs.


PREPARATION for INSPECTION

Preparation for inspection should begin well before the shutdown. Proper
scheduling of inspection and maintenance will avoid delays and wasted time. As
soon as an inspector finds a problem, parts can be ordered and work can be
scheduled so the completion of the turnaround will not be delayed.

The normal shutdown procedure will remove most of the catalyst from the unit and
cool the vessels to 200-250F (90-120C). The manways should be opened on
both the reactor and regenerator to air cool the vessels. Vacuum connections are
provided to remove any remaining catalyst. The vacuuming operation can begin
while the manways are being opened, if there is sufficient manpower. When the
vacuuming is complete, water washing can be started. This will remove the dust
and fines which would hinder a complete inspection. A simple water spray is usually
sufficient, with the water draining out of the reactor and regenerator at the bottom of
each vessel. The water will not cause any problems with the vessel internals, even
stainless steel. A high-pressure blast could obviously damage the refractory;
common sense is required. Clean, potable water with less than 50 ppm chlorides
should be used. Excess water should not be allowed to stand on the equipment for
long periods of time. An air hose can be used to blow away these puddles. There
are a few areas that are difficult to drain, such as the regenerator plenum chamber.
These can be cleaned with a heavy-duty vacuum cleaner. Because there are
different reactor and regenerator designs, the exact cleaning method should be
determined by the refiner.

The main column and gas concentration section should also be cleaned for
inspection after the normal shutdown procedures have been completed.
Hydrocarbon and sour water should be pumped or pressured out of the unit. Gas
and vapors are removed by steaming out the vessels. Any remaining material can
157048-1
Equipment
Page 3




be removed as necessary by water washing the equipment. Do not allow any water
in the wet gas compressor. Normal refinery safety practices should be followed for
toxic vapors, explosivity, oxygen content of vessels, etc. The refinery safety
engineer should follow the turnaround carefully.


AIR BLOWER

The main blower of an FCC unit supplies large quantities of air to the regenerator.
Advances in rotating machinery technology have led to the replacement of the old
positive displacement reciprocating air compressor with centrifugal and axial
machines. Blowers can be driven by steam or gas turbines, electric motors, or flue
gas turbines, usually referred to as power recovery expanders. Depending on the
mode of operation and other factors such as feed quality, the FCC unit needs 10-
14.5 pounds of air per pound of coke, which is approximately 2000-3000 SCF/bbl
(330-500 Nm3air/m3FF). Air is filtered through a screened suction housing that
should be designed for noise abatement. Compressed air leaves the blower at
about 300-450F (150-230C) and 30-60 psia (2.1-4.2 kg/cm2(a)).

CENTRIFUGAL MACHINE

Air flow rates on a centrifugal machine are controlled by varying the speed of
rotation, throttling the suction, or venting off excess air. Four to six stages are
common, with labyrinth seals used to prevent leakage between stages. These
machines normally use forced lubrication systems for the bearings and may be
equipped with temperature and vibration probes for early detection of mechanical
problems.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 4




AXIAL MACHINE

An axial blower, shown in Figure 1, uses rotating blades to move the air. The air
flows through the machine in a straight line, each successive stage adding pressure
energy much like a propeller blade. The air flow rate is most often controlled by
varying the shaft speed. This can be accomplished either through a turbine driver,
or by including a Variable Speed Drive (VSD) unit on a motor. If the machine is
designed for constant speed, other means of flow control must be provided. One
option is to snort (vent) excess air to atmosphere. However, for normal control this
would require power to compress air that is vented back to atmosphere, and is
simply not energy efficient. Practical options include the use of small variable pitch
blades known as stators on the blower housing. The variable pitch stators redirect
the air flow into the path of the rotating elements. When this redirection is at a
steeper angle, more air is transferred. These machines use forced lubrication
systems and are normally equipped with temperature and vibration probes.

Another option to control air flow from a fixed speed blower is to include a suction
throttle valve. This mode of operation is very common in older machines, but as
with a snort valve, it is not an energy efficient system. The suction throttle valves
on motor driven air blowers can be eliminated through the installation of a VSD unit
onto the motor.

Axial compressors are generally more efficient at larger capacities than centrifugal
machines. They are smaller and lighter than an equivalent size centrifugal unit.
Choice of machine depends on the individual refiner, but axial blowers are more
common for larger units.

Specific operation of these large machines is too complex to describe in this
manual. Individual manufacturer's instructions should be followed for each unit.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 5




Figure 1
Axial Compressor



BLOWER PROBLEMS

The problems encountered with an FCC blower can be divided into two groups;
operational and mechanical. Examples of mechanical problems are vibration, shaft
displacement and noise. These may result from manufacturing defects, construction
mistakes such as misalignment of the driver and blower, and routine wear of the
bearings. In most cases, however, mechanical problems are caused by operational
difficulties. An example is surge, which occurs when the air blower is not able to
produce enough head to overcome downstream resistance. A centrifugal
compressor curve, shown in Figure 2, gives a typical head-flow relationship, while
Figure 3 shows a curve for an axial machine.

At a fixed speed the compressor will follow the curve. Flow decreases with
increasing head, similar to a pump. Unlike a pump, however, the characteristic
curve begins to turn down toward the zero capacity region after reaching a peak in
157048-1
Equipment
Page 6




pressure. This peak is called the stability limit or surge point. The machine will thus
produce less head at the decreased capacity. The pressure downstream of the
machine is higher and the flow reverses through the blower. When the downstream
pressure is relieved, normal flow is restored. Resistance quickly builds again and
the machine surges. The condition can be recognized by a characteristic cycling
sound and a rapid rising and falling of the flow between normal and zero. When the
gas moves back into the machine, the rotor tends to stall, which can cause serious
damage as the machine is subjected to large unusual forces and increased gas
temperature across each surge cycle. Surge cycles can result in damage to the
thrust or axial bearings and labyrinth seals. In severe cases the rotor itself may
crack or rub against the casing. On an axial blower the blades may break.

To prevent this backflow condition, many blowers are fitted with an anti-surge
controller. The controller essentially compares pressure rise and flow against a
programmed operating map of the blower. The operating map includes a calibrated
surge line. As the machine approaches the surge line a blow-off valve, commonly
referred to as a snort valve, is opened slowly. Opening the snort increases flow
through the machine and prevents surging. Surge is generally considered more
dangerous to axial blowers than to centrifugal, but should be avoided for either.

Choke, or stonewalling, is a low pressure, high flow condition where the gas velocity
approaches the speed of sound. Dangerous vibrations result and can cause the
rotor to crack. This condition may also be seen on the characteristic curve at low
head. The line becomes almost vertical as the capacity increases and air velocity
approaches the sonic value. This condition is infrequent but care must be taken to
avoid it. Choke is more of a problem for axial than centrifugal machines. Rotating
stall is a somewhat rare phenomenon, indicated by an inability to build pressure
while the flow is more or less normal. It results when air moves around the axial
rotor, rather than through it. The best cure is to back down to starting conditions and
restart increasing the flow again.

The air blower suction line should be inspected for cleanliness. The suction hood or
housing should be cleaned. Except for vibration from the blower, this section of the
plant is not subject to any unusual stresses, and normally lasts for many years.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 7




Inspection and maintenance on the blower and associated systems should follow
the manufacturer's recommendations. Replacement of the bearings, seals,
lubricating oil, etc. is required at certain intervals. The air filters on the suction
housing should be inspected during normal turnarounds and replaced or repaired
as required.

Performance (capacity) of the blower can diminish over time due to fouling of the
blades. Foulants may include dust and chemical contaminants drawn into the
machine through the filter housing. Episodes of blade fouling have been associated
with sudden and heavy rains, washing contaminants off of the suction filters and
into the blower. Performance decline of up to 10% of rated flow have been
associated with blade fouling. Most vendors offer a surfactant or solvent injection
system that can be added to the suction line of the machine to help remove blade
foulants from the blower.

The air blower discharge line is not subject to corrosion or metal loss. All air snort
valves should be checked by the instrument department; few problems are ever
encountered with the air snort valves.

In the event of an emergency trip, many modern machines require that they be
rotated while cooling down. If this procedure is not followed when required, serious
rotor deflection can result. Excessive rotor deflection can result in serious
mechanical damage to the compressor, requiring a major overhaul of the machine.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 8




Figure 2
Centrifugal Air Blower Performance Curve



Figure 3
Axial Air Blower Performance Curve


157048-1
Equipment
Page 9





POWER RECOVERY

The power consumed by the air blower is a significant part of an FCC unit's
operating expense. Utility costs continue to rise, only partially offset by more
efficient motors and turbines. Recovery of the energy in the hot flue gas from the
regenerator can increase the overall efficiency of the unit. This was first done with
steam generation systems. The flue gas exchanges heat with a circulating water
stream. A 30,000 BPD (195 m
3
/hr) FCCU without a CO boiler can produce 40-70 M-
lb/hr (18-32 t/hr) of 600 psig (42 kg/cm
2
) steam. Heat recovery in this scheme is
somewhat limited by a minimum allowable flue gas temperature. Sulfur oxides and
water vapor in the stack gas can cause corrosion of the equipment if they condense
in the flue gas duct. The temperature at which the condensation occurs is known
as the acid gas condensation point, which shifts depending on the concentration
and distribution between the different oxides. The acid gas condensation point is
typically in the range of 400-600F (200-315C), although it may be higher for some
units. The maximum temperature limit of the flue gas is typically a function of
metallurgical design limits for downstream equipment, which may include an
electro-static precipitator, flue gas scrubber, and/or stack.

The major disadvantage of a straight steam generation energy recovery scheme is
that no power is recovered from gas pressure, normally 10-40 psi (0.7-2.81 kg/cm
2
)
above atmospheric pressure at the regenerator outlet. Another approach to
recovering energy from the flue gas was tried in 1950. This was a turbo expander,
driven directly by hot flue gas. Initial results were unsatisfactory; after only 750
hours of operation catalyst fines in the flue gas had substantially eroded away the
turbine blades and casing. The fines problem was solved by placing an additional
catalyst separator, known as a Third Stage Separator (TSS) outside of the
regenerator.

In the TSS, flue gas moves through a large number of small cyclone assemblies in
which the catalyst is centrifugally separated from the flowing gas stream. To
remove the separated catalyst fines from the TSS, a small amount of gas, typically
3% of the regenerator flue gas, is used to pneumatically sweep the catalyst fines
157048-1
Equipment
Page 10




out the bottom of the vessel. The clean flue gas is then directed to the inlet of the
power recovery expander.

UOP has been designing power recovery systems since 1973. Between 1973 and
2004, UOP licensed 33 TSSs with 22 placed into operation. The original units were
designed by UOP under license from Shell. Over the years, UOP improved upon
the original design by implementing several modifications. Even with these
modifications incorporated into the base design, very little had actually changed in
the overall design of the TSS in 25 years. These TSS designs still suffered from the
limitations imposed by radial flow gas distribution and reverse flow in the cyclone
elements.

In 1996, UOP launched a development program to design and offer a smaller, more
economic, high efficiency TSS that could not only be utilized in power recovery
installations, but also be a viable alternative to electrostatic precipitators and wet
gas scrubbers for environmental applications.

The cold flow modeling (CFM) test program extended over 2 years, during which
both dimensional variables and process flow variables were studied. Based on a
thorough understanding of cyclone theory, and drawing on other sources of cyclone
expertise, the UOP program investigated the contribution of many variables on
catalyst separation efficiency. These variables included:

Cyclone diameter and geometry
Inlet velocity
Length to diameter ratio
Outlet velocity
Catalyst loading
Gas distribution

Over 200 individual tests were conducted on single and multiple cyclone models to
determine the highest efficiency and highest capacity design cyclone. The tests
were conducted with commercial FCC catalyst fines. Computational fluid dynamic
(CFD) computer modeling was used to validate and benchmark the CFM work, and
to quickly investigate potential improvements and guide the physical modeling
program.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 11





The development work culminated in the new UOP TSS design (see Figure 9). The
most significant improvement in the design is that the UOP TSS utilizes axial flow
for catalyst/gas separation. The flue gas flow is maintained essentially in one
direction - in the top and out the bottom of the unit. Axial flow distribution minimizes
the potential for solids re-entrainment resulting from gas flow direction change and
resultant eddy current formation. The older style TSS utilizes radial flow distribution
in which the flue gas is distributed from the centerline of the TSS, radially outward
between the two tube-sheets. As such, the inner tubes see a higher gas and dust
loading than the outer tubes. The mal-distribution of flue gas and fines inherent in
this design results in varying efficiency across the older style TSS.

The new UOP TSS is about 40% smaller than other TSS offerings for the same
capacity; making it less expensive to fabricate, easier to install, and better suited
where plot space is a premium.

The first UOP TSS was commercialized in April 2002. Performance testing on the
unit was performed twice in 2002, following the unit startup in April and again in
December. The initial test showed that the UOP TSS discharged between 36-50
mg/Nm
3
of particulates, depending on flue gas rate. The NSPS compliance testing
resulted in a particulate matter emission of 0.6 lbs/1000 lbs of coke burn, only 67%
of that allowed by NSPS standards. This performance showed that the UOP TSS
could not only provide power recovery expander erosion, but could also be used as
in the refiners particulate emission control strategy, by replacing more traditional,
costly, and hazardous means (electrostatic precipitators and wet gas scrubbers) of
controlling particulates exiting the flue gas stack.

A comparison of the older style TSS and newer style TSS is shown in Figure 4.
Both vessels are carbon steel vessel with 4" (100 mm) of refractory lining and
stainless steel internals. The cold-wall construction is more effective on both
erosion and cost basis than the early hot-wall stainless steel separators. A coarse
screen, or grate, covers the flue gas outlet entrance to trap large chunks of
refractory or other debris.
The overall efficiency of the separator depends on the efficiency of the regenerator
cyclones and the quantity of catalyst fines being generated in the reactor-
regenerator system. The separator should remove >70-90% of the particles for high
157048-1
Equipment
Page 12




and low regenerator cyclone efficiency, respectively. Most of the fines which pass
through the separator are smaller than ten (10) microns. These small particles do
not cause much erosion to the expander blades but the smallest particles can
deposit on the expander blades and casing, causing vibration problems.

The pressure drop across the expander is on the order of 10-30 psi (0.7-2.1
kg/cm
2
), with a temperature drop of 200-250F (110-140C). After driving the
turbine, the flue gas goes to a steam generator for further energy recovery.

The majority of the catalyst is removed from the flue gas with the underflow from
the third stage separator which is typically routed back into the flue gas downstream
of the expander. If required, an electrostatic precipitator or flue gas scrubber may
be placed downstream of the steam generator to remove any remaining catalyst
fines before the flue gas is exhausted to atmosphere. Alternatively the underflow
may be filtered to achieve ~99.99% removal of the catalyst fines, or routed to a 4
th

stage cyclone separator to achieve ~60-90% removal of the catalyst fines from the
underflow stream, depending on local environmental restrictions.

The power recovery train usually consists of five parts; the expander turbine,
motor/generator, air blower, and a steam turbine, and is commonly referred to as a
5-Body Train, see Figure 5. In this arrangement the expander turbine is coupled
to the main air blower shaft to directly supplement the power requirement of the
blower. The 5-body train requires a steam turbine or motor to get it started; in some
cases only one of them is provided.

The expander, shown in Figures 6 and 7, is a single stage machine because of the
low pressures involved. The gas to the expander is accelerated over a parabolic
nose cone. Pressure energy is converted to velocity energy, and the high velocity
gas drives the turbine.

Expander turbines designed in the past were generally limited to an inlet
temperature of 1200-1250F (650-675C) to prevent heat damage. This generation
of expanders however, still required quench injection systems in the regenerator
plenum chamber to protect the expanders in the event of a regenerator temperature
157048-1
Equipment
Page 13




excursion. Quench systems essentially dumped steam and water into the
regenerator plenum to cool the flue gas. While this provided for thermal protection
of the expander, the increased steam and water in the flue gas often resulted in
sticky catalyst that agglomerated in cement-like deposits that increased blade
fouling on the expander. Newer expander turbines normally have a design
temperature in excess of 1375F (750C) and do not require a quench control
system.

For units with a power recovery system, butterfly valves in the flue gas line control
the differential pressure between the reactor and regenerator. The PDIC sends a
signal to the large butterfly valve which is located at the inlet to the expander. A
smaller butterfly valve will allow flue gas to bypass the expander when the large
butterfly valve is fully open because of an excessive flue gas rate or when the
expander is off line. This prevents over pressuring the regenerator.

In the traditional five piece power recovery train, the motor/generator is usually a
constant speed induction type machine that provides extra power to the blower
shaft when needed. If the expander produces more energy than is required by the
blower, the machine will act as a generator and feed power into the electrical grid.
This acts as a braking mechanism and provides some over-speed protection for the
machine.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 14




Figure 4
Third Stage Separator

















Figure 5
5-Body Power Recovery Train


Expander
Main Air
Blower
Inlet
Guide
Vanes
Flue
Gas
Exhaust
Flue
Gas
Inlet
Air
In
Air to
Regenerator
Steam
Turbine
Steam
Inlet
Exhaust
Steam
Outlet
Gear
Box
Motor /
Generator
Electrical
Connection to
Power Grid

11' 6" OD
48 Tubes
23'
70 Tubes 19' 3" OD
29'
New Style TSS
Old Style TSS
157048-1
Equipment
Page 15




Figure 6
Flue Gas Expander




Because power recovery trains are generally fitted on larger units, the blowers used
are of the higher efficiency axial type. The blower is a constant speed machine in
most cases, especially if used with an induction type motor/generator. Varying the
angle of the stator blades in the blower is the most economical control scheme.

Because the motor/generator has a large startup electrical power requirement, a
steam turbine may be used to bring the train up to speed. The turbine will normally
provide 50-75% of the power needed for the blower. Once the train is close to
design speed, the motor can be started without using excessive amounts of
electricity. This in turn decreases the size of the transformers and switch-gears
needed. When the expander is running the turbine is allowed to freewheel, or may
157048-1
Equipment
Page 16




be used to provide extra power. If there is no steam turbine, the expander turbine
may be used to "bootstrap" the train up to speed.

In unit revamp situations where the main air blower is not to be replaced, the power
recovery train can be reduced to 3 parts; the expander, gear reducer and generator.
This configuration is known as a Gen Set power recovery installation. In this
configuration, the power recovery system is completely isolatable from the
remainder of the FCC unit. The electrical power generation from the system is
routed directly into the refinery power grid. The net power recovery capable through
a Gen Set system is lower than a 5-body train due to efficiency losses in the switch
gear, and motor. However, the capital expenditure of Gen Set systems is lower,
and they can be completely isolated from the remainder of the FCC unit should
there be any equipment problems with the power recovery system.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 17







Figure 7
Flue Gas Expander






Inlet
Rotor
Blades
Shaft
Coupling
Bearing
Outlet
FCC-E001
157048-1
Equipment
Page 18




A typical power recovery expander performance map is illustrated in Figure 8. The
power recovery system achieved commercial success in 1963. More than 30 units
are in operation or under construction. It has proven to be a valuable tool in
increasing efficiency and decreasing costs for Fluid Catalytic Cracking units.

Figure 8
FCC Power Recovery

1600 F
(871 C)
1300 F (704 C)
1200 F (649 C)
1100 F (593 C)
1000 F (538 C)
44.7 psia
(3.14 kg/cm
2
a)
40 psia (2.81 kg/cm
2
a)
36 psia (2.53 kg/cm
2
a)
32 psia (2.25 kg/cm
2
a)
28 psia (1.97 kg/cm
2
a)
26 psia (1.83 kg/cm
2
a)
Percent Flue Gas Mass Flow Rate
P
e
r
c
e
n
t

E
x
p
a
n
d
e
r

H
o
r
s
e
p
o
w
e
r

157048-1
Equipment
Page 19




CHECK VALVE

The check valve is installed on the discharge of the air blower. It prevents backflow
of air or catalyst, which could cause serious damage to the blower. Fluidized
catalyst will easily flow back through the air heater if pressure is lost. If the blower
starts to surge, the large volume of the regenerator must be isolated from the
blower. Figures 9-11 show the check valve and its associated equipment.

Figure 9
Blower Discharge Check Valve


157048-1
Equipment
Page 20




Figure 10
Blower Discharge Check Valve - Side View


The special check valve is a swing style check valve with a spring loaded air
cylinder that provides spring force assisted closing. An oil filled dash pot provides a
damping action on opening. Construction is of heavy wall steel to resist temperature
and pressure stresses, with 11-13% Cr or stainless trim. The stainless steel shaft is
supported by hardened stainless steel bushings, with graphoil packing used to
prevent leakage. Older designs have incorporated asbestos packing that may need
to be addressed with the appropriate abatement procedures. The shaft is connected
to the dashpot and to a lever arm that has counterweights that support 75% of the
disc weight. These weights minimize the pressure drop through the valve, but
should never hold the disc open when there is no air flow. The lever arm is usually
cut to the proper length in the factory, and the weights set in the field.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 21





The air cylinder consists of a small piston opposed by a spring. Under normal
conditions, air is supplied to the piston, which moves up to compress the spring.
The piston rod moves freely between two small lever arms attached to the check
valve shaft. As the piston rod rises, the valve is free to open. Air flow from the
blower forces the valve open. The air to the piston is supplied through a three-way
valve that will vent off cylinder pressure when actuated. For older units, a shutdown
of the blower would signal the valve to cut off the air supply. For the new units that
have venturi meters on the blower discharge line, a low flow signal will signal the
valve to cut off the air supply. A shutdown on the blower itself, low blower-
regenerator differential pressure, or low air flow can all be configured to cut off the
air supply to the piston and activate the special check valve. Instrument air failure
will also vent off pressure from the cylinder. Upon initial venting, the spring provides
a sharp thump to the valve shaft to help free the disc in the event that it has become
slightly stuck in the open position. The force of the spring is not enough to close
against the normal operating air flow from the main air blower. As such, a spurious
activation of the special check valve, i.e., a loss of instrument signal to the solenoid
valve, would result in a higher pressure drop through the check, but would not force
a unit shutdown.

After initial actuation, with no air pressure to oppose it, the spring provides a
constant load on the valve shaft. As the piston rod comes down, it pulls on the lever
arms, which exert a closing force on the shaft. This provides a starting boost to
close the check valve and will bring the valve closer to the seat before the air flow to
the regenerator actually stops.

Following a solenoid trip, the three-way valve must be manually reset in the field.
This functionality is included in the system design to help ensure that movement of
the check valve disc is controlled and stable, rather than a sporadic situation that
would result if the air cylinder was pressured and depressured in a random fashion
during an upset.

Typical turnaround maintenance on the special check valve includes maintenance
of the air cylinder, refilling the dashpot oil, repacking of the stuffing box hinge
157048-1
Equipment
Page 22




assembly, replacement of the accordion type protective piston rod cover. After the
check has been reassembled, the flapper should move freely and close normally
under its own weight. Proper seating of the check disc should be confirmed
internally with visual inspection. If the main air line is too small to facilitate internal
visual inspection, the approximate position of the disc can be verified by the position
of the counter-weight arm.


DASHPOT

The dashpot provides a resistance to a sudden opening of the check valve. It has a
loose fitting piston that rides in an oil filled cylinder. The valve in the bypass line
restricts oil flow from the top of the dashpot to the bottom as the piston moves up.
This restriction prevents the check valve from opening too quickly. As the piston
moves down on the check valve closure, the valve in the bypass on the dashpot
opens wide to allow rapid closing of the check valve. Some snubbing action remains
to prevent excessive slamming. The dashpot should be filled with a light lubricating
oil such as SAE 10W. It is also important to provide a "volume leg" in the oil piping
to account for the volume of the piston shaft in the closed position. The setting on
the oil dash pot needs to be verified on initial installation and subsequent
turnarounds by opening the disc and allowing it to fall closed. Proper setpoint of the
oil valve should result in a smooth controlled closure of the disc with no substantial
impact on the valve seat.

If the check valve is thrust open under low air flow conditions, it may fly up too far,
and then slam back onto the seat. This can cause damage to the valve seating
surfaces. As a result, the check valve should be examined for any unusual wear,
such as impact erosion on the seat during the turnaround.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 23




DIRECT FIRED AIR HEATER

The direct fired air heater (Figure 12) is a carbon steel, internally insulated vessel
that heats the air to the regenerator primarily during startup. A pilot burner, as well
as one main burner (two - on rare occasion), are used to fire fuel gas, LPG, or oil on
heater discharge temperature control. The pilot for the burner is lit by a high energy
electrical electrode igniter. Air is directed to the burner by a large damper, controlled
externally with a hand crank. Sight ports are provided for flame observation. Air
purges to the sight ports keep the glass cool and can be used to blow catalyst out of
the ports if it backs up from the regenerator. A block valve is provided to shut off
and isolate the ports when the burner is either being ignited, or not being used. On
heaters that are mounted vertically, directly beneath the regenerator, there are
several stainless steel baffles spaced approximately three inches apart at the outlet.
The baffles prevent flame impingement on the air grid in the regenerator, which
could cause extensive damage to the grid. The baffles should be routinely
inspected during each turnaround.

The extent of the direct fired air heater repair work required during a turnaround will
depend on the hours and type of use. Over-firing and burner misalignment are the
two main causes of refractory spalling and reduced equipment life.

On low Coke operating units, the regenerator temperature can be cool enough to
adversely affect regenerator performance. On occasion, some refiners supplement
the regenerator temperature by Auxiliary firing of the air heater during normal
operation. While this has proven effective for some refiners, care must be taken not
to exceed maximum recommended exit velocities on the main air distributor.
Operating with distributor jet velocities too high can result in excessive erosion to
the main air distributor as well as excessive catalyst fines generation in the unit.

The fuel source to the DFAH needs to be maintained within the fuel specifications
outlined by the vendor. Improper fuel/air/burner combinations can result in severe
mechanical damage to both the DFAH and the regenerator internals; i.e., accidental
injection of liquefied LPG through a fuel gas burner.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 24





Figure 12
Direct Fired Air Heater


Air Splitting Damper
with Limit Stops
Pilot/Ignitor
Assembly
Main
Gas
Air
Purge
Sight Port
(2 Required -
Must Sight Pilot
and Main Burner)
Air Purge and
Blast Connection
Air
Inlet
Air
Outlet
TI's
(2 Required)
Air
Purge
Air
Purge
Sight Port
Sighting
Opposite Wall
Sight Port
Sighting
Burner
Baffle
4" (100 mm)
Vibrocast Insulating
Refractory
4" Vacuum
Cleanout
Connection
Manway
FCC-E002
157048-1
Equipment
Page 25




AIR GRID

The original design for a conventional regenerator air distribution system was a
perforated plate. Air entered the base of the regenerator and then passed through a
large number of small holes in a large metal plate. In the late 1970's and early
1980's, the processing of more contaminated feedstocks increased air demand and
regenerator temperatures. Increased incidents of erosion, full CO combustion, and
the introduction of new regenerator designs lead to significant changes in the
design of the air grid.

The bubbling-bed regenerators feature a high catalyst entry point into the dense
bed relative to the air grid. Two basic types of air grid designs are used by UOP in
this style of regenerator: pipe grid and mushroom grid. The high-efficiency
regenerators have a low catalyst entry point relative to the air grid. On this design,
UOP uses a pipe grid.

The mushroom grid with extension arms is used in situations where a standpipe
inlet is below the air grid. A dome grid was used previously, but an exit in the grid
was needed to transfer catalyst to the regenerator standpipe. The mushroom air
grid with extension arms distributes air through jets located in the dome and arms.
A side view of the grid is shown in Figure 13. Figure 14 shows a plan of the
mushroom grid with arms.

The mushroom grid is constructed with 1" (25mm) lining on the dome and " (19
mm) lining on the extension arms. The lining minimizes the thermal stresses on the
grid wall resulting from the temperature differential between the inlet air and
regenerator.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 26




Figure 13
Mushroom Air Grid with Extension Arms


157048-1
Equipment
Page 27




Figure 14
Plan View of Mushroom Air Grid with Arms




Plugged Nozzle
Open Nozzle
157048-1
Equipment
Page 28




The dome air grid distributes air through jets located on its dome. A side view of the
grid is shown in Figure 15.


Figure 15
Dome Air Distributor


157048-1
Equipment
Page 29




Some dome-type air distributors have experienced jet erosion. UOP believes that
the erosion on this type of air grid is due to catalyst from the spent and recirculating
catalyst standpipes impacting directly onto the surface of the distributor. When the
catalyst impacts the air grid in this fashion, the catalyst can be forced into the jets
resulting in erosion as the catalyst is blown out of the jets. Erosion can also occur
on the external portion of the jet from the catalyst impact.

Several methods of combating this type of erosion have been developed. One
method is to install extended catalyst deflectors, which distribute the catalyst over a
wide cross-sectional area of the regenerator to minimize the localized impact of
catalyst onto the grid. Another modification is to cover the surface of the air grid with
an abrasion-resistant lining so that the outlet of the jets is flush with the abrasion-
resistant lining. The dual-diameter jets have also been replaced with single-
diameter, higher velocity jets.

Because of mechanical reliability the pipe grid is the most commonly designed type
of air grid today. The pipe grid distributes the air through two to four large laterals
into a number of small branches. A side view of the grid is shown in Figure 16.
Figure 17 shows a plan of the pipe air grid. Modern air grids use a dual diameter jet
(Figure 18) with a restriction orifice at the inlet. This allows a higher pressure drop
for better air distribution while minimizing the velocity out of the jet for minimum
catalyst attrition.

Air grids are designed for a total pressure drop between 0.8 and 1.2 psi (0.06-0.085
kg/cm
2
). The pressure drop must be maintained above 0.5 psi (0.035 kg/cm
2
) to
achieve even distribution and should be below 1.5 psi (1.05 kg/cm
2
) to minimize
main air blower discharge pressure.

Many of the pipe grid and supports designed for partial combustion units were low
alloy, such as 5% chrome. The higher temperatures encountered in a most modern
full CO burning units require 304 SS.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 30




Pipe-grids designed by UOP in the early 1970's had experienced cracking at certain
butt welded joints, but otherwise worked well. UOP has modified the pipe-grid
design and the advantages of this style of air grid are as follows:

1) by using a 90 elbow (instead of a 45 lateral arm), thermal stress in the air
grid is greatly reduced because the elbow has greater flexibility

2) the 90 elbow is attached to the header arms and main hub with extruded
connections which moves the welds away from the highly stressed junction

3) the branch arms pass through the header arms which increases the strength
of these joints

4) external abrasion resistant lining protects against erosion and also provides a
smooth thermal gradient


Figure 16
Pipe Air Grid



157048-1
Equipment
Page 31




Figure 17
Plan of Pipe Air Grid


Figure 18
Dual Diameter Jet Detail
157048-1
Equipment
Page 32




A pipe grid is subject to severe catalyst erosion on the upper surface of the
branches. For this reason, older units had stainless steel retaining dams, Figure 19,
welded on top of each lateral. These dams held an insulating layer of catalyst which
alleviated both erosion and possible heat damage problems. Currently, UOP
designs the air distributor so the entire surface of the branches have abrasion
resistant lining. The lining provides both the erosion resistance and the thermal
barrier required.

Figure 19
Coffer Dam

Branch
Stiffener

157048-1
Equipment
Page 33




The jets on the pipe air grid and on the arms of the mushroom grid point down to
avoid channeling the catalyst bed, as seen in Figure 18. It should be noted that
some of the jets are normally plugged. This is done for three reasons:

1. To prevent a blast of air from impinging directly on an air pipe or the
regenerator wall.

2. To increase the pressure drop to the proper level if the grid has too many
holes (future design case).

3. To properly distribute air across the full regenerator cross section to
compensate for spent catalyst maldistribution.

The pressure drop across the air grid can be calculated with the equation:

P =
P* V
2200* T
=
2.238* W
C * A *
2 2
d
2
h
2

where:

P = Grid pressure drop, psi
P = Air pressure to grid, psia
T = Air temperature to grid, R
V = Velocity of air through jets: flow rate of air/total cross sectional area
of all open jets, ft/sec
W = Air Flow, lb/sec
C
d

= Orifice Coefficient
A
h

= Orifice Cross Sectional Flow Area, in
2

= Flowing Air Density, lb/ft
3



157048-1
Equipment
Page 34




REGENERATOR

The regenerator is an internally lined carbon steel vessel. The lining, called
refractory, is a concrete type material which is gunned onto reinforcing support
anchors. This lining is necessary to protect the metal wall of the vessel from the
high temperatures at which the regenerator operates and should keep the outer
shell of the regenerator below 650F (343C) at all times. The refractory is applied
over stainless steel hexmesh or steerhorn anchors. Different grades and depths are
applied depending on the service. In general, four - five inches (100 - 125mm) is
used in the regenerator when insulation is of primary importance.

Abrasion resistant refractory lining are used on all internal surfaces in the
regenerator to protect the base metal from the erosive environment. - 1 inch (19 -
25mm) of lining is typically used and is anchored by stainless steel hex mesh
anchors. This refractory is much harder and denser than the insulating refractory so
that it is provides more erosion protection but does not offer the same insulating
properties.

Instrument connections are inserted through the refractory. Thermowells, which are
used to measure catalyst or gas temperatures, are hard surfaced with a cobalt-
chrome stellite hard surfacing to protect them from the erosive conditions. Pressure
taps (and pressure taps used as level indicators) are protected by steam, gas, or air
purges. These are discussed later in this section. The purges provide a buffer
between the catalyst bearing gas in the regenerator and the small instrument taps
which can easily plug.

Figure 20 shows a conventional (bubbling bed) regenerator in detail. The air flows
from the grid up through a dense bed of catalyst where the carbon is burned off.
The catalyst enters the vessel from the spent catalyst standpipe, at the end of which
is a deflector baffle to distribute the catalyst evenly over the bed, not straight down
to the outlet. The design shown does not have an internal catalyst hopper, which is
a large diameter cone above the regenerated catalyst standpipe. The higher density
catalyst in the cone provides extra head pressure in the standpipe if needed by a
particular unit.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 35




Combustion gases, excess air, and catalyst particles traveling from the dense
phase to the dilute phase are separated using two-stage cyclones. Flue gas leaving
the cyclones enters a plenum chamber at the top of the regenerator. The hot gases
travel through the double-disc slide valves, which are set to regulate the reactor-
regenerator differential pressure. The flue gas then travels through the orifice
chamber, where its pressure is dropped through a series of perforated plates.
Finally, the energy of the flue gas is recovered in a CO boiler (or steam generator
for a full combustion unit) where the CO is burned along with auxiliary fuel gas and
air to generate steam (or simply cooled to generate steam in a full combustion unit).

157048-1
Equipment
Page 36




Figure 20
Conventional Regenerator

T
REGENERATOR PLENUM
CYCLONE SUPPORTS
REFRACTORY
LINING
REFRACTORY
LINING
EXTERNAL
LINING
SPENT CATALYST
DEFLECTOR
AIR DISTRIBUTOR
SECOND STAGE
CYCLONES
FIRST STAGE
CYCLONES
THERMOCOUPLES
(1each cyclone)
TRICKLE
VALVES
SPENT CATALYST
STANDPIPE
TIs
LEVEL AND
PRESSURE TAPS
MANWAYS
CATALYST
WITHDRAWAL
OPEN PRIMARY
CYCLONE DIPLEG
TERMINATIONS
LEVEL AND DENSITY
PRESSURE TAPS
MANWAY
TORCH OIL
REGENERATED
CATALYST
STANDPIPE
FCC-E003
157048-1
Equipment
Page 37




TWO STAGE REGENERATOR

The two-stage regenerator (RFCC) is used for units with heavily contaminated resid
feed stocks. The coke deposited on the catalyst is burned off by air distributed
through a grid mounted at the bottom of each stage. The spent catalyst enters the
upper, first stage regenerator which operates in partial combustion mode to
minimize the heat of combustion. Approximately 70% of the coke on the spent
catalyst is burned off in this stage. The catalyst is then transferred to the lower,
second stage regenerator through the recirculation catalyst standpipe. The second
stage operates in full combustion mode with excess oxygen to completely remove
the remaining carbon from the catalyst. This combination provides the heat balance
advantages of partial combustion operation with the advantage of low carbon, high
activity regenerated catalyst.

In the second stage regenerator, air is typically distributed through pipe grid
distributors although dome air distributors can also be used. In the upper
regenerator, the air distributor is typically the mushroom-and-arm type. Arms are
radially arranged around a central dome. The skirt which holds the upper air
distributor in place physically separates the two stages. Vent tubes in the skirt allow
the transport of combustion gasses and excess oxygen (with some catalyst) from
the second stage to the first stage. A two-stage regenerator is shown in detail in
Figure 21.

The recent RFCC design uses multiple pipe air grids in the first stage regenerator
entering through the cone rather than a single dome grid entering through the
second stage. This is a mechanically simpler design which eliminates the need for a
complex expansion joint on the air line. This also allows individual control to the air
grids in each section of the first stage. This configuration is shown in Figure 22.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 38




Figure 21
Two Stage Regenerator

Spent
Catalyst
Spent Catalyst
Distributor
Ski-Jump
First Stage
Regenerator
Second Stage
Regenerator
Vent Tubes
First Stage Air Inlet
Regen
Standpipe
Hopper
Flue Gas
Regenerated
Catalyst
2nd Stage Air
Recirculation
Catalyst
Standpipe
Catalyst
Cooler
Cooled
Catalyst
Standpipe
Second Stage
Regenerator
(Side View)
Pipe Air Grid
Distributor
Mushroom
Grid
Distributor
Primary
Cyclone
Secondary
Cyclone
157048-1
Equipment
Page 39




Figure 22
Updated RFCC First Stage Air Grid Design

2nd Stage Regenerator
1st Stage Regenerator
First Stage
Air In
FCC-E004
157048-1
Equipment
Page 40




RFCC units will also have one or more catalyst coolers. The catalyst cooler slide
valve position is set by the signal from the second stage regenerator temperature
controller or the slide valve differential pressure controller over-ride via a low signal
selector. The recirculating catalyst slide valve position is set in a similar manner, by
signals from the lower regenerator level controller or the slide valve differential
pressure controller through a low signal selector. Each slide valve packing is steam
purged like the regenerated catalyst slide valve.

In the first stage the flue gas and catalyst are separated by two-stage cyclones. The
catalyst falls down the cyclone diplegs which are submerged in the catalyst bed to
provide a seal against gas passing up the diplegs. The primary cyclone diplegs are
typically open ended pipes with a splash plate and the secondary cyclones have
trickle valves. The catalyst flows into the annular zone around the mushroom air
distributor and into the recirculation catalyst standpipe and catalyst cooler(s). Air is
directed through nozzles on the underside of each arm of the upper air distributor to
help maintain proper fluidization of catalyst in this area.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 41




HIGH EFFICIENCY REGENERATOR

The high efficiency regenerator approximates a plug flow burning profile for the
catalyst as opposed to the back-mix regime of the standard bubbling bed design.
Because the high efficiency design burns essentially all of the CO in the
regenerator, there is no need for a CO Boiler and there is typically very little
afterburning. The plug flow burning profile also results in much lower NOx
emissions than a bubbling bed.

The spent catalyst from the reactor mixes with the blower air and roughly an equal
amount of recirculating regenerated catalyst at the bottom of the regenerator
(combustor). The recirculating flow of catalyst is necessary because the spent
catalyst at 925-1025F (495-550C) is not hot enough to initiate and complete
burning in a reasonably sized vessel. The mixing takes place in the lower part of the
regenerator, called the combustor or in a mixing riser, depending on the design.
Figures 23 and 24 show the two designs. These were developed to obtain the best
regeneration, with vessel cost and maintenance considered. The coke burns off the
catalyst as it travels up the combustor riser with the air. There is a rough separation
at the top of the riser through a "tee" shaped outlet. The flue gas goes up to a two-
stage cyclone system and out to energy recovery. The catalyst is returned to a
dense phase. From here the flow splits, part of the catalyst going to the base of the
reactor riser, and the rest back to the combustor.

The high efficiency regenerator has most of the same fittings as the conventional
bubbling bed design. The torch oil nozzles, instrument connections, and catalyst
loading lines are positioned differently because of the different regenerator
configuration, but function in the same manner as those in a conventional unit. If the
unit is equipped with a flue gas power recovery system, there will be spray nozzles
in the plenum chamber for emergency cooling if the temperature at the inlet to the
expander exceeds the safe limit of the machine.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 42




Figure 23
UOP Fluid Catalytic Cracking Process
High Efficiency Regenerator System

Mixing Zone
Spent
Catalyst
Regenerated
Catalyst
Combustor
Combustor
Riser
Cyclones
Spent Catalyst Distributor
(Ski Jump)
Air Grid
Upper
Regenerator
Fluffing Air Ring

157048-1
Equipment
Page 43




Figure 24
High Efficiency Regenerator with External Mixing


Spent
Catalyst
Regenerated
Catalyst
Air
Recirculation
Catalyst
Standpipe
Catalyst/Air
Distributor
Combustor
Combustor
Riser
Upper
Regenerator
Lift Riser

157048-1
Equipment
Page 44




COMBUSTOR CONE

Figure 25 illustrates the changes in regenerator cone design that have taken place
since the mid-1980s. UOP has developed a new cone detail (see Figure 26) that
eliminates the radial and axial constraint imposed by the hard refractory lining and
cold regenerator shell. The resulting stress is dissipated by incorporating a flexible
soft pack ceramic lining that permits both radial and circumferential expansion.
Additionally, the new cone detail minimizes thermal stresses due to radial
expansion by providing a flexible skirt section that connects to the regenerator wall.
The key feature of the new internal combustor cone design is the air space
incorporated between the cone skirt and the regenerator shell. The air space is
required to provide the optimal heat transfer medium between the cone and the
regenerator shell. By using this air space, it has been proven that the thermal
stresses in the cone are less than the stresses compared to other internal cone
designs that have experienced deformation.

In order to maintain this air space, it is mandatory to keep the air gap free of
catalyst. The catalyst seal device achieves this objective (see Figure 27). Some
characteristics of the catalyst seal are as follows:

1) the seal is not tight; the gap operates at regenerator pressure
2) the seal design supports the weight of the catalyst within the regenerator
3) the seals allows thermal expansion of the cone

157048-1
Equipment
Page 45




Figure 25
Combustor Cone Modifications


UOP 3110-4
UOP 1906H-7


157048-1
Equipment
Page 46




Figure 26
Detail of Combustor Cone Design

Fiberfrax
Moist Pak-D
Ceramic Fiber
Blanket Insulation
Catalyst Seal Device
(Figure 26)
Refractory
Lining
Abrasion
Resistant Lining
Retaining Ring
Air Space
157048-1
Equipment
Page 47




Figure 27
Detail of Catalyst Seal Device

Ceramic Fiber
(2 layers)
3.5 Sch. 10S Pips
4
(Cold Position)
2
(Hot Position)

157048-1
Equipment
Page 48




COMBUSTOR RISER ARMS

Several old-style high-efficiency regenerators have experienced excessive
deformation of the regenerator riser arms. The rectangular openings in the bottom
of the arms have "ovaled" and sagged. The arms have rotated at the leading edge
of the opening and have sagged 1 ft. to 2 ft. (300-600 mm) below the guides on the
regenerator wall.

The primary cause of the deformation is attributed to high-temperature creep
relaxation. During the late 1970's, the original circular openings in the arms were
enlarged to rectangular openings to improve catalyst separation efficiency. This
larger opening significantly decreases the inherent bending strength of the arm.

Several modifications to existing units have been implemented. The first method is
to install stiffeners to the arm to reinforce the opening. The second method is to
install a tension member from the riser to prevent excessive deformation.

The new-style riser arms have a modified geometry. The arms have been designed
as oblong members to improve strength. Additionally, a greater number of shorter,
smaller diameter arms are used (Figure 28). The shorter arm reduces the bending
stress resulting from weight. The increase in the number of arms improves the flow
characteristics in the regenerator by more uniformly discharging the catalyst across
the regenerator's cross-sectional area.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 49




Figure 28
New Style Combustor Riser Arms




157048-1
Equipment
Page 50




FLUFFING AIR DISTRIBUTOR

To improve fluidization in the upper regenerator and flow into the standpipes a
fluffing air ring (Figure 29) is installed in the cone. An alternate source of fluffing air
other than the main air blower is now specified for the upper air distributor. On
designs where the fluffing air was provided by the main air blower, circumstances
could arise where insufficient P was available for good fluidization of the catalyst.

Figure 29
Fluffing Air Distributor

ABRASION RESISTANT
LINING
ABRASION RESISTANT
LINING
PIPE
3/4 " XX-STRONG PIPE
DISTRIBUTOR JET
STANDPIPES
RESTRICTION
ORIFICE
157048-1
Equipment
Page 51




TORCH OIL NOZZLES

The torch oil nozzles shown in Figure 30 provide a means of injecting heavy oil into
the regenerator when extra heat is needed (e.g. during the startup). The oil is
sprayed into the regenerator with atomizing steam through a special nozzle made of
tungsten alloy to withstand the high temperature. These nozzles may be retracted
through a packing gland if they need to be cleaned. Steam is continuously injected
through a 1/8" (3mm) restriction orifice to the annular space around the nozzle to
keep the area clear of catalyst, which could pack up and prevent retraction of the
nozzle. Steam is also continuously injected through the nozzle tip to keep it cool
and prevent plugging with catalyst. Excess steam may contribute to erosion and
catalyst breakup.

The nozzle should be marked so that after cleaning it can be returned to its proper
position - recessed " (6 mm) back from the refractory face. This position allows
the oil spray to miss the regenerator wall, yet protects the nozzle.

During a turnaround, the various steam and torch oil nozzles should be inspected. If
there has been too much purge steam around the barrel there may be erosion
problems in the refractory surrounding it. The nozzles should be checked for wear
and cleanliness. If the nozzle was not recessed the proper " (6mm), there will
probably be severe metal loss. Refractory damage may indicate the nozzle was
recessed too much. Nozzle positions should be checked when they are replaced.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 52




Figure 30
Torch Oil Nozzle



SPRAY NOZZLES

Spray nozzles are used to inject water through an atomizing nozzle to cool off the
flue gas in the plenum chamber if the unit has power recovery. The spray water
should be clean, such as steam condensate. Contaminants such as sodium will
cause problems by deactivating the catalyst or contributing to its breakup.
Mechanically, the spray nozzles are similar to the torch oil nozzles.


CATALYST COOLER

The ability to control and vary the amount of heat removed from the regenerator
creates an additional degree of freedom by moderating the regenerator temperature
as a limiting constraint. The catalyst cooler provides a variable heat sink, which
157048-1
Equipment
Page 53




allows the refiner to vary the catalyst/oil ratio, reactor temperature, and feed
temperature independently of one another.
The catalyst cooler tube bundle is inserted into a refractory lined shell off the side or
bottom head of the regenerator. The tubes of this exchanger are the bayonet type.
The boiler feed water enters the cooler through the inner tubes and the mixture of
water and steam exits the cooler through the annulus between the inner and outer
tubes. The outer tubes are 3 inch (75mm) O.D. made from 1 Cr, Mo seamless
tube material. The inner tubes are 1-3/8 inch (35mm) O.D. made from carbon steel
seamless tubing.

The stainless steel fluidizing air lances distribute air into the cooler near the bottom
of the tubes. The air creates turbulence and increases heat transfer coefficient as
the bubbles travel upward. The backmixing created by the bubbles also brings hot
catalyst into the cooler from the regenerator. The air is delivered to a common
manifold supplying all the lances through a flow controller. The lances contain a
restriction orifice, located near the piping header at the top of each lance, to help
distribute the air uniformly over the cross sectional area of the cooler. The
countercurrent fluidizing air improves heat transfer by creating turbulence and
mixing in the region of contact between the hot catalyst and the tubes. A differential
pressure transmitter, with taps located above and below the cooler, gives a direct
indication of the density of the fluidized catalyst at various conditions of catalyst flow
and air injection.

Mechanical reliability is achieved by locating the cooler in the dense phase of the
regenerator. In the dense phase, the heat transfer coefficient is higher which
permits lower catalyst and fluidization air velocities. Lower velocities minimize
erosion within the cooler. In addition, the cooler tubes are located in the vertical
plane. This feature generates a uniform heat transfer coefficient over the entire tube
surface thereby preventing uneven surface temperatures which cause localized
stress.

Catalyst coolers have been designed and built to fit virtually every regenerator
configuration, including single-stage bubbling beds, high-efficiency combustors, and
two-stage regenerators. Three basic styles of UOP catalyst coolers are currently
available:
157048-1
Equipment
Page 54




Flow-through catalyst cooler The catalyst flows downward into the cooler shell
and exits into the cooled catalyst standpipe near the bottom of the tube bundle. The
standpipe transports the cooled catalyst through a slide valve and expansion joint
into the combustor on a high efficiency regenerator or to the second stage
regenerator on an RFCC. In a single stage bubbling bed regenerator the catalyst
can be lifted back into the regenerator with air through a lift riser. Both the catalyst
flow through the cooler and the fluffing air rate are used to control the cooler duty.

Backmix catalyst cooler This style contains no catalyst exit standpipe. Hot
catalyst enters the cooler by backmixing as a result of fluidization air injected near
the bottom of the tube bundle. The major advantage of this cooler design is that no
slide valve, expansion joint, or standpipe is required. This configuration also permits
the cooler to be lower to the ground if elevation is a limiting constraint. The duty of
a back mix cooler is ~60% of an equal sized flow through cooler and is controlled
only with the fluffing air.

Hybrid catalyst cooler The combination of flow-through and backmix operation
constitutes the hybrid catalyst cooler. In a hybrid, the catalyst exits into a standpipe
located at the midsection of the tube bundle (instead of at the bottom as in flow-
through coolers). In the hybrid cooler, the upper portion of the bundle operates in
the flow-through mode, and the bundle length below the catalyst outlet operates in
the backmix mode. This configuration achieves somewhat less heat-removal
capacity than a full flow-through cooler but still transfers cooled catalyst down to the
lower portion of the regenerator.

The catalyst cooler steam generation circuit includes the cooler, steam drum, and
circulation pumps. Boiler feedwater is pumped to the bottom head, enters the inner
tubes, then flows down through the annulus between the inner and outer tubes
where it absorbs heat to generate steam. The steam-water mixture leaves the
catalyst cooler to be separated in the steam drum. Makeup boiler feed water is
delivered to the steam drum through a flow controller which is cascaded to signals
from the drum level and steam generation flow transmitters. Steam flows from the
drum through a stop check non-return valve and a superheater (either part of the
flue gas cooler or a fired heater) before entering the refinery steam header.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 55




Figures 31-35 show some examples of catalyst coolers and catalyst cooler-
regenerator configurations that have been constructed.

Figure 31
Flow Through Catalyst Cooler
UOP Catalyst Cooler General Arrangement




157048-1
Equipment
Page 56




Figure 32
UOP Backmix Catalyst Cooler



157048-1
Equipment
Page 57




Figure 33
Examples of Bubbling Bed Regenerators
with Catalyst Coolers





Water
Water and
Steam
Cooled
Catalyst
Standpipe
Lift Riser
Lift Air
Distributor
Air
Aeration
Air
Water
Aeration
Air
Water and
Steam
Backmixed Flow Through
157048-1
Equipment
Page 58




Figure 34
Examples of High Efficiency Regenerators
with Catalyst Coolers

Side Mounted Hybrid Cone Mounted Flow Through
Cone Mounted Backmix



157048-1
Equipment
Page 59




Figure 35
RCC Regenerator with Catalyst Coolers
Example of an RCC Regenerator with Multiple Catalyst Coolers



UOP 2119-27
Air
Fluffing Air
Air
Backmix
Catalyst Cooler Flow-Through
Catalyst Cooler
Fluffing Air
157048-1
Equipment
Page 60




Operating the catalyst cooler with sufficient water circulation to ensure that the tube
walls are always wet so that they can not overheat and limiting the fluffing air so that
the tubes are not subjected to erosion are critical in ensuring mechanical integrity
and long life of the cooler. In new units the flow controller regulating the water flow
to the cooler has been eliminated so the water flow is set by the pump curve. The
spare pumps are instrumented to start automatically on low water flow. If the water
flow is not recovered by the auto start the cooler is shutdown by closing the cooled
catalyst slide valve and the fluffing air control valve. The fluffing air rate should
never exceed a flow that will result in a superficial velocity in the shell of more than
1 ft/sec (0.3 m/sec).

In recent years, as catalyst cooler reliability has improved, UOP has shifted from a
reactive to a proactive approach to catalyst cooler design. Several design
modifications have been developed recently.

Tie Rod Support

Previous designs had the tie rods, which support the eggcrate bracing, protrude
through a hole in the upper tubesheet. The tie rod was welded to the tubesheet on
the steam (bottom) side. While this method was acceptable under normal operating
circumstances, the tie rod could potentially push through the tubesheet if tie rod
growth was restricted due to an obstruction or thermal binding. This would create a
path for the steam to enter into the catalyst side of the cooler, having the same
effect as a tube leak. The current design eliminates the hole through the tubesheet,
using instead a cup into which the tie rod is inserted (see Figure 36). This cup is
countersunk and welded into the catalyst (top) side of the tubesheet. The tie rod is
welded around the rim of the cup above the refractory face providing easy access
for bundle maintenance or refurbishment. This design eliminates the possibility of
the tie rod creating a steam leak.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 61




Figure 36
Modifications to Tie Rod Supports

Refractory Lining
Upper Tubesheet
Old Method
New Method
Egg-Crate
Support Bracing
Bracing Bars
Tie Rods


157048-1
Equipment
Page 62




Tie Rod / Eggcrate Connection

Several recent catalyst cooler inspections have revealed tie rod deformation,
usually more severe in the upper section between the eggcrate supports. While this
by itself had not caused any operational problems, it suggests that the fit between
the eggcrates and the outer tubes is extremely tight. Thermal expansion of the
eggcrates causes binding on the outer carbon steel tubes which are water cooled.
The hot stainless steel tie rods expand a greater amount and do not have adequate
strength to move the eggcrates as they are intended. Their thermal growth being
restricted, the tie rods buckle. As a result, the eggcrates are no longer welded
directly to the tie rods which allow them to expand independently of each other (see
Figure 36). The eggcrates are supported by minimal friction on the tubes
themselves. The hot tie rods are free to expand within the eggcrates. As a
precaution, large washers are welded to the tie rods a few inches above and below
the eggcrates to limit any unexpected movement of the eggcrates either during
operation or bundle handling.

Flat Tube Caps

The fluffing air headers and lances are supported by arms that are welded near the
top of the air lances (see Figure 37). Originally, each arm was welded to a stainless
steel pipe support stool that was welded to the outer tube hemispherical tube cap.
Later, the arm to support stool weld was removed in order to allow for a greater
degree of flexibility for the fluffing air headers and lances. In the current design, the
support stools have been replaced with flat tube caps (see Figures 37 and 38).
These new tube caps are machined bar stock that are rounded on the inside and
flat on the top. The removal of the pipe support stools has several advantages :

A weld to a pressurized tube cap is no longer necessary.
A postweld heat treatment step has been eliminated.
Tube alignment is easier.
A more uniform surface on which the air lances can rest has been created.

The small additional cost of the flat tube caps is recovered in assembly time.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 63




Figure 37
Modifications to Outer Tube Caps

Aeration Pipe Header
Outer Tubes
Lance Support
Arms
Pipe Support
Plate
Pipe Support
Stool
Aeration Lance
Flat Tube Cap
Old Method
New Method
157048-1
Equipment
Page 64




Figure 38
Flat Tube Cap



Inner Tube Wall Thickness

The wall thickness of the inner tube has been increased on most recent catalyst
cooler designs. The resulting smaller diameter increases the inlet water pressure
drop which ensures a uniform distribution of water to all of the tubes and guarantees
the tube cap and inside wall of the outer tube are fully wet.

Eight-Foot Cooler

As FCC and RFCC units become larger and are required to process very heavier
resid, the heat removal demand increases. In anticipation of this, UOP now offers
an eight foot diameter cooler (96" ID of shell). This cooler can provide about 40%
more duty than the typical seven-foot design. This is particularly beneficial when the
157048-1
Equipment
Page 65




required duty is slightly higher than the duty of a seven foot catalyst cooler, making
a single eight foot cooler a less expensive alternative to two smaller coolers.

Update: Debris Screens

Since 1991, debris screens have been installed in all existing units. Debris screens,
which are installed at the entrance to the cooler, have become standard supply for
all coolers mounted on the lower regenerator cone or head. The screens prevent
large refractory pieces or other loose debris from accumulating at the bottom of the
tube bundle where the debris can restrict or divert the flow of air from the air lance,
potentially causing catalyst impingement on a tube and an eventual tube leak. Aside
from some minor improvements in the anchoring method, the screens have held up
well in operation and have performed their function. There have not been any tube
leaks caused by accumulated debris in coolers with debris screens.

Update: Air Lance Pressure Testing

Because the internal air piping and lances are not subject to code requirements,
UOP implemented a required shop pressure test of the completed aeration
assembly in 1991. Since that time, there have been no reported air leaks or weld
failures in any operating coolers that have received this testing. Prior to the shop
testing, air leaks had occurred in at least five units, three of which lead to tube
leaks.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 66




CYCLONES

The flue gas leaving the dense bed will entrain some of the catalyst particles with it.
Some of these settle back to the bed; others are carried higher. Measurements of
the entrained particles taken at increasing heights above the bed show a gradual
decrease in the amount of fines entrained. At some point above the bed, the
concentration of particles entrained levels out. This is called the Transport
Disengaging Height, or TDH.

Early FCC units used a number of small tubes, called multi-clones to remove
particles. These were not particularly effective and were difficult to maintain. The
cyclone design shown in Figure 39 was the next step. The shaveoff was intended
to increase efficiency, but also proved difficult to maintain. The cyclones used in the
modern FCC unit use a fairly simple principle to remove most of the particles. See
Figure 40. The catalyst bearing gas enters a cylinder through a tangential opening.
The catalyst is 500-1000 times as heavy as the gas, and is subjected to forces
several hundred times that of gravity as the gas swirls around the cylinder. The
larger particles are removed through centrifugal forces which force the particle
outward to collide with the wall. The collisions slow down the particle so that they
fall by gravity into the dust hopper and are returned to the vessel through the
diplegs. The viscous drag forces of the gas tend to carry some of the catalyst
particles with it. Generally only the smaller particles are light enough to stay with the
gas, because the inertial and centrifugal forces acting on them are small.

The catalyst separated from the gas stream swirls downward due to the force of
gravity. The chamber below the entrance of the cyclone tapers downward and tends
to keep the catalyst against the wall which is away from the cleaner area at the
center core (where the gas disengages and moves up). There is more disengaging
area in the hopper, which feeds catalyst to the dipleg; this disengaging area also
decreases the amount of erosion which could be created by the vortex of the
catalyst particles.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 67




Figure 39
Cyclone-Catalyst Fines Collector with Shaveoff




UOP 2119-28
Catalyst-Free
Gas Outlet
Gas Out
Stream Pattern-
Lower Portion
Catalyst-Laden
Gas Inlet
Stream Pattern-
Upper Portion
(Principally Finer Particles)
Note:
Because of the High Maintenance
Required on the Catalyst Shave-Off
(Caused by Erosion) many Refiners are
Choosing to remove this Device
Catalyst Shave-Off
Bypass
Dip Pipe
Re-Entry
Opening
Disengaging
Hopper
Catalyst
Outlet
Catalyst-Laden
Gas Inlet
Bypass
Catalyst
Shave-Off
157048-1
Equipment
Page 68




Figure 40
Cyclone-Catalyst Fines Collector




There is a pressure drop between the cyclone inlet and dipleg outlet. If the catalyst
is to be returned to the bed, the dipleg must hold a head of catalyst sufficient to
overcome this differential. If the catalyst in the dipleg stops flowing, the gas will
simply carry the catalyst out the top. If the dipleg is submerged in the bed, then the
pressure at the bottom will increase and catalyst will be forced out as the level in
the leg rises. The required head will determine the dipleg length.

There are two general types of dipleg termination devices the trickle valve and
counterweighted flapper valve. The trickle valve in Figure 41 is generally used on
submerged diplegs. The valve is simply a flat plate held closed by gravity and
external pressure until the catalyst head in the dipleg is sufficient to open it. The leg
dumps, and the trickle valve swings shut. The counterweighted flapper valve in
157048-1
Equipment
Page 69




Figure 42 is another method, with a better seal than the trickle valve. The
counterweight holds the flapper closed until the catalyst head is sufficient to open
the flapper.

UOP has updated the design of the counterweighted flapper valve to improve its
mechanical reliability and maximize the unit onstream efficiency.

The major revisions to the design are:

1. Addition of a stop bar to prevent the valve from opening more than 45 (see
Figure 42).

2. Addition of a stiffener bar on the fixed portion of the pivot mechanism to
minimize warpage or movement over the course of repeated thermal cycles.

3. Minimizing the tolerance between the concentric bushings to 3 mm plus 1.6
mm minus 0 mm (1/8" plus 0.0625" minus 0") to allow for thermal growth
(see Figure 43).

4. Requirement that the hard surfacing used on the pin and bushings be crack
free. There is some concern that surface cracking may contribute to
roughness and thus restrict smooth motion of the hinge mechanism.
Alternative hard surfacing such as Waspalloy, Wallex 50 and Triten should
be considered as options for hard surfacing of the pin and bushings.

5. Increasing the amount of counter weight used (Table 1).
157048-1
Equipment
Page 70




Figure 41
Trickle Valve

Hinge
Flapper Plate
Stop
3-5 From Vertical


157048-1
Equipment
Page 71




Figure 42
Counterweighted Flapper Valve

Closed Position Open Position
STIFFENER
LUG
DETAIL
1
1
157048-1
Equipment
Page 72




Figure 43
Bushing Detail

LUG ON DIPLEG
OF BUSHING
ECCENTRIC BUSHING
CONCENTRIC BUSHING
OF BUSHING
ANDHOLE
OF BUSHING
OF BUSHING
OF HOLE
CONCENTRIC
BUSHING
(BOTH SIDES)
ECCENTRIC
BUSHING
1/8" (BOTH SIDES)
+0.0625"
-0.000"
C
C
C
C
C
3
"
(
7
5
m
m
)
D
I
A
7/8"
(22mm)
2
9
/
3
2
"
(
5
8
m
m
)
D
I
A
2
9
/
3
2
"
(
5
8
m
m
)
D
I
A
3mm
+1.6mm
-000mm
3/8"(10mm)
(INCLUDES 1/8"(3mm)
HARDSURFACING)
3/8"(10mm)
(INCLUDES 1/8"(3mm)
HARDSURFACING)
1
/
8
"
(
3
m
m
)
1
/
8
"
(
3
m
m
)
H
A
R
D
S
U
R
F
A
C
I
N
G
3
"
(
7
5
m
m
)
D
I
A
1
/
8
"
(
3
m
m
)
H
A
R
D
S
U
R
F
A
C
I
N
G
7/8"
(22mm)
1
1
/
2
"
P
L
U
S
/
M
I
N
1
/
3
2
"
I
D
3
8
m
m
P
L
U
S
/
M
I
N
.8
m
m
I
D
1
1
/
2
"
P
L
U
S
/
M
I
N
1
/
3
2
"
I
D
3
8
m
m
P
L
U
S
/
M
I
N
.8
m
m
I
D
157048-1
Equipment
Page 73





TABLE 1
FLAPPER VALVE COUNTERWEIGHT

Dipleg Counterweight
Diameter Lbs / Kg

6 (150 mm) 1.9 0.9
8" (200mm) 3.3 1.5
10" (250mm) 5.4 2.4
12" (300mm) 7.8 3.6
14" (350mm) 9.6 4.4
16" (400mm) 12.8 5.8
18" (450mm) 16.4 7.4
20" (500mm) 20.5 9.3
22" (550mm) 25.0 11.4
24" (600mm) 30.0 13.6

Two important factors in cyclone efficiency are the velocity of the gas and the size
distribution of the particles. In general, the higher the velocity, the higher the
efficiency. It should be remembered, however, that higher cyclone velocities may
mean higher vessel velocities, with more catalyst carried up to the cyclones. If these
are larger particles, most of them will be collected, but in extreme cases, the
cyclones could be overloaded and the larger particles lost. Higher velocities also
means higher rates of erosion and catalyst attrition. The solids distribution is not
under immediate control, except by minimizing attrition of the catalyst by avoiding
areas of high velocity. In general, the small fines, less than 20 microns, will be lost,
with most of the larger size particles collected. The reactor cyclones generally do a
better job because here the coke on the catalyst fines makes them larger and
easier to collect.

The design of the cyclone is the important factor in its efficiency as well as the
resistance to erosion; it is normally handled by the cyclone manufacturers.
However, in the early 1980's, erosion in the cyclones and cyclone diplegs increased
noticeably. Units were beginning to process larger quantities of heavier and more
contaminated feeds. These feeds produce more coke, which increases air demand
and regenerator temperatures. The net result is increased erosion as a result of an
157048-1
Equipment
Page 74




increase in catalyst loading and cyclone velocities. Competition among vendors was
another factor leading to an increase in instances of erosion. In some cases,
vendors supplied cyclones with key geometric ratios, such as L/D, minimized for
cost reasons.

To address these problems, UOP began to specify cyclone geometric relationships
and velocity criteria. The purpose was to ensure that all cyclone vendors bid on the
same basis and that the cyclones supplied met the process and mechanical
requirements set by UOP.

The requirements set forth in the "Mechanical Considerations In FCC Design" paper
presented at the 1996 UOP FCC Symposium have significantly reduced erosion
problems. These requirements are as follows:

Single-Stage Reactor Cyclone Criteria

Inlet velocity shall not exceed 65 ft/sec (19.8 m/sec).
Outlet velocity shall not exceed 100 ft/sec (30.5 m/sec).
Ratio of barrel area to inlet area shall be 5.5 minimum.
Ratio of the main cone outlet diameter to the barrel diameter shall be 0.4
minimum.
Ratio of cyclone height, measured from the roof of the cyclone to the outlet of
the dust hopper cone, to its barrel diameter shall be 5.0.
Projected apex point of the main cone shall terminate at a minimum distance of
0.3 x barrel diameter above the outlet of the dust hopper cone (0.5 x barrel
diameter for eccentric diplegs).
Ratio of the dust hopper diameter to the main cone outlet diameter shall be 1.5
minimum.
Ratio of the dust hopper cone height to the barrel diameter shall be 0.45
minimum.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 75




Regenerator Cyclone Criteria

First Stage

Inlet velocity shall not exceed 65 ft/sec (19.8 m/sec).
Outlet velocity shall not exceed 80 ft/sec (24.4 m/sec).
Ratio of barrel area to inlet area shall be 3.7 minimum.

Second Stage

Inlet velocity shall not exceed 75 ft/sec (22.9 m/sec).
Outlet velocity shall not exceed 120 ft/sec (39.6 m/sec).
Ratio of barrel area to inlet area shall be 4.3 minimum.

Both Stages

Ratio of the main cone outlet diameter to the barrel diameter shall be 0.4
minimum.
Ratio of cyclone height, measured from the roof of the cyclone to the outlet of
the dust hopper cone, to its barrel diameter shall be 5.0.
Projected apex point of the main cone shall terminate at a minimum distance of
0.3 x barrel diameter above the outlet of the dust hopper cone.
Ratio of the dust hopper diameter to the main cone outlet diameter shall be 1.5
minimum.
Ratio of the dust hopper cone height to the barrel diameter shall be 0.45
minimum.

The reactor cyclones are normally a low alloy steel, such as 1 Cr, Mo. Some
older partial CO combustion regenerator cyclones used 5 Cr or 12 Cr, with 1 Cr
diplegs sometimes. For the higher temperatures of modern, complete CO
combustion, Type 304 stainless steel (18 Cr, 8 Ni) is used. Abrasion resistant lining
is used on all cyclones to protect them from catalyst erosion. The inlet horn, the gas
outlet pipe, barrel, disengaging hopper, and part of the dipleg will be lined. The
157048-1
Equipment
Page 76




extent of the dipleg lining will depend on accessibility and prior experience; erosion
in one area usually leads to a lining at the next turnaround. The exterior of the
diplegs must be protected with an abrasion lining where they are subject to catalyst
impingement, such as from the spent catalyst inlet or from another dipleg discharge.


ORIFICE CHAMBER

Orifice chambers (Figure 44) are used on FCC units when the regenerator pressure
is controlled by flue gas slide valves. The chamber is a cylindrical vessel with a
series of perforated grid plates (Figure 45). These plates hold a backpressure
downstream of the slide valves. By reducing the pressure drop across the valves,
their operating life is greatly extended because there is no sudden acceleration of
the catalyst bearing gas stream. The flow through the orifice chamber may be
upflow or downflow depending on downstream equipment. There are no moving
parts, so no adjustments can be made on stream. UOP designs the orifice chamber
as follows:

the flue gas slide valve is designed for approximately one-third of the pressure
drop and the orifice chamber is designed for the remaining two-thirds of the
pressure drop.
enough grids are installed to limit the pressure drop across each individual grid
while maintaining a specified velocity across each hole.
the distance between the top grid and the flue gas slide valve is kept at a
maximum. In revamp situations, this distance may be short and lining will be
required for the first grid only. Additionally, the installation of a shroud at the
inlet has proven to be beneficial in reducing erosion.

Given the UOP design philosophy of using cold wall construction whenever
possible, UOP has developed a cold wall orifice chamber. As a result, the chamber
walls are no longer prone to buckling, cracking, bulging and other phenomena
associated with high temperature stainless steel design.
Because of the high inlet temperature of the orifice chamber, the grids must be
designed for stainless steel metallurgy (if a waste heat boiler is installed upstream,
then carbon steel or low chrome can be used). The grids are supported by a
157048-1
Equipment
Page 77




cylindrical skirt section; typically two grids are supported from one skirt section. The
cylindrical skirt is supported by a tapered skirt section which is then welded to the
chamber wall. The tapered skirt requires a certain length to accommodate the
thermal expansion of the stainless steel grid relative to the cold wall shell. A gap is
also provided between the skirt and the refractory lining to allow for this expansion.
Blanket insulation is provided behind the tapered skirt to allow for the thermal
deflection.

The cold wall orifice chamber significantly reduces the amount of thermal growth of
the flue gas line (as compared to the hot wall design). This reduction will reduce or
eliminate the amount of expansion joints required. Given the change in thermal
movements, as well as the additional weight (due to the refractory), the entire flue
gas system should be reviewed for both support and flexibility for revamps.

Inspection

UOP has developed two types of orifice chambers to accommodate various revamp
inspection requirements. The first option allows external manway access to each
pair of top skirt grids (due to the skirt support scheme, external access to all grids is
not possible). To accommodate the external manways, extra tangent length for the
orifice chamber is required.

In the event there are space limitations, a shorter version has been developed.
Inspection access for this design requires the use of internal manways on each grid.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 78




Figure 44
Cold Wall Orifice Chamber

FLOW
Internal
Manways
Inlet Shrould


157048-1
Equipment
Page 79




Figure 45
Orifice Chamber Details


CERAMIC FIBER
BLANKET
INSULATION
HIGH DENSITY
REFRACTORY
LINING
+
-
A
I
R

S
P
A
C
E
HIGH DENSITY
REFRACTORY LINING
ABRASION
RESISTANT LINING
AIR GAP
LINING TRANSITION
R
I
N
G

N
O

1
R
I
N
G

N
O

2
R
I
N
G

N
O

4
R
I
N
G

N
O

5
INTERNAL MANWAY
GRID C
R
I
N
G

N
O

3
GRID C
RING NO 4
RING NO 3
RING NO 2
STAGGER HOLES
WHERE POSSIBLE
RADIUS RING NO 1
RING NO 5
157048-1
Equipment
Page 80





ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATORS

Electrostatic precipitators (Figure 46) are used to remove catalyst fines from the
flue gas. The equipment consists of a large rectangular steel shell which contains a
number of wires called discharge electrodes, and a number of flat collecting plates.
The wires and plates are hung vertically, in alternating rows. A high electrical
potential is put on the discharge electrode wires, and the plates are electrically
grounded. A corona discharge surrounds the discharge electrode because of the
high potential. Gas ions formed by this corona move rapidly towards the collecting
electrode. When an ion strikes a catalyst fine, it becomes charged. The electrical
field between the electrodes causes the particle to deposit on the collecting
electrode. As more particles collect, a layer of fines builds up on the plate. A
mechanical rapper periodically strikes the frame of the collecting plate, and the
particles are knocked off. The fines tend to agglomerate into larger particles which
fall into dust hoppers under the electrodes. There is no physical change in the
particles, simply an agglomeration which makes them large enough for gravitational
forces to exceed the carrying force exerted by the gas.

Precipitators usually operate at pressures slightly above atmospheric. Inlet
temperatures range from 400-800F (205-425C). The temperature is especially
important if the flue gas has acidic components such as SOx or NOx. These may
condense and combine with water to form corrosive agents. The precipitator shell
may be insulated to hold the metal temperature high enough to prevent
condensation.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 81





Figure 46
Electrostatic Precipitator


UOP 2119-34
Discharge
Electrode
Rapper
Insulator
Collecting Surface Rapper
Transformer Rectifier
Gas Out
Hopper
Catalyst Fines Out
Discharge
Electrode
Gas Flow In
Collecting
Surface
157048-1
Equipment
Page 82




Collection efficiencies range from 70-99%, with 90-95% more common. The factors
affecting the efficiency are:

1. Effective voltage and other electrical factors
2. Resistivity of fines
3. Size distribution
4. Gas flow rate
5. Collector plate area
6. Rapping cycles

As the effective voltage increases, the efficiency increases. Too high of a voltage
can lead to arcing, which will damage the electrodes. Arcing can also occur if the
weights holding the discharge electrode wires fall off and allow the wires to swing
over towards the collecting plate. The precipitator should be designed with the
proper number of power supplies and control equipment to prevent excess
sparking.

The resistivity of the fines is approximately constant. It may be decreased for better
collection efficiency by adding small (<20 ppm) amounts of ammonia, but this is
usually not required. Spray water is also used in some cases.

The size distribution will be determined by cyclone performance in the regenerator.
Large solids rates to the precipitator, even with high efficiencies, may still lead to
emission problems, so it is better to have lower loadings to the unit. Larger particles
are easier to collect, because the smaller ones are more easily carried with the gas.

Typical gas flow rates are 5-6 ft/sec (1.5-1.8 M/s). Lower flow rates will give greater
efficiency. A higher collecting area will also increase efficiency.

The final factor, the rapping cycle, is normally designed for one strike from each
rapper every 1-3 minutes. Greater power and frequency of rapping will increase
efficiency, but must be balanced against cost. Both collecting and discharge
electrodes are fitted with rappers, most of them positioned on the collectors.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 83




CATALYST STORAGE HOPPER

The FCC unit is normally built with two or three catalyst hoppers (Figure 47). One is
for fresh catalyst, the other is for equilibrium catalyst. RFCC units or FCC units with
high metals feed stocks may have a third hopper for storing low metals equilibrium
catalyst. The vessels are normally carbon steel, constructed to withstand a full
vacuum, although this should be checked before the first use. Many units are built
with automatic gauging devices, but these are not always accurate because the
float tends to sink in the catalyst. For accurate measurement of the catalyst level,
the hopper should be fluffed with air from the bottom and the catalyst allowed to
settle. A hand gauge can then be used to read the tons of catalyst from a chart of
inventory as a function of hopper ullage. Exact settled densities for a given type of
catalyst may be determined by measuring level change after a weighed amount of
catalyst has been loaded or unloaded by truck or cartons. A discussion of catalyst
loading and hopper operation is provided in the procedure section.

CATALYST LOADING AND UNLOADING LINES

The catalyst transfer line at the bottom of the regenerator is normally used to
remove catalyst from the regenerator when the unit is shut down. Most of the
catalyst will be loaded and unloaded through a connection (4-6 inch or 100-150
mm) in the dense bed area. For rapid transfer, a large line is used. For gradual
fresh catalyst addition, a smaller line is used which connects into the large line just
before the regenerator at an angle to minimize erosion. The catalyst lines are
usually carbon steel. The catalyst withdrawal lines from the regenerator should be
1 Cr, Mo (up to the second block valve). It may be cased in places for
personnel protection, but should be allowed to cool off to the atmosphere so that
the temperature limits of the metal are not exceeded when hot catalyst is unloaded.
Some units have finned pipe to help in cooling off the unloaded catalyst.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 84






Figure 47
Catalyst Storage Hopper

Vacuum
Nozzle
Auto Gauge
Instrument
Manual
Gauge Hatch
Relief Valve
Inlet
Grate with
Wire Mesh
Outlet
Manway
Catalyst Makeup
(Fresh Catalyst Only)





157048-1
Equipment
Page 85




CATALYST STANDPIPES AND EXPANSION JOINTS

Catalyst flows through refractory-lined standpipes from the regenerator to the base
of the riser, from reactor to the regenerator, and from the upper regenerator to the
combustor. Expansion joints (Figure 48) are placed in these large catalyst-transfer
lines to absorb thermal movement within the system and thereby minimize stresses
imposed on vessel nozzles. The expansion joint is lined to protect the bellows from
catalyst erosion. Pantographic linkages are used on the expansion joints to assure
equal movement of both expansion bellows during temperature changes.

Parameters affecting expansion joint design are movement to be absorbed, process
environment, mechanical construction, and specified cycle life. During the last 10
years, advances have been made in the engineering and metallurgy of expansion
joints. For a hot wall regenerator standpipe using 304H SS, the expansion joint had
Inconel 625 bellows that were annealed after forming [for combined resistance to
polythionic attack (PTA) and stress corrosion cracking (SCC), Inconel 625 is one of
the recommended alloys]. The maximum allowable bellows temperature for this
design was 1200F. Today we use cold wall design for the standpipe and expansion
joint. The expansion joint bellows use Inconel 625 LCF (low cycle fatigue) with a
maximum allowable temperature of 1000F and it is not annealed after forming.
Annealing reduces the strength of the bellows as well as the fatigue properties.

It is important that the bellows material not get too hot so age hardening does not
occur. It is also important to stay above the dew point of the process so the bellows
stay dry and corrosion is avoided. For example, the regenerator expansion joint
bellows temperature would be close to the dew point so UOP specifies external
insulation of 25 mm which is enough to raise the bellows metal temperature to 600-
800F and to stabilize it from external changes caused by the weather.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 86






Figure 48
Expansion Joint Location

Spent Catalyst
Expansion Joint
Regenerated Catalyst
Expansion Joint
Recirculation Catalyst
Expansion Joint
Spring Hangers
Structural Bumper
Top of Support
Top of Support
157048-1
Equipment
Page 87




The typical components of a UOP specified expansion joint are shown in Figure 49.

Figure 49
Expansion Joint Components

Flow
Bellows
Convolution
Cover
Liner
Root
Ring
Purge
Connection



Bellows Design UOP presently specifies single ply bellows. Dual Ply bellows are
acceptable provided each ply is designed for full temperatures and pressure. Dual
Ply bellows should include a method for pressure leak detection (preferably a
positive pressure gage) as shown in Figure 50. When adding a dual ply
replacement to an existing expansion joint, the piping system should be reviewed
for the additional loads induced by the higher spring rates of the dual ply.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 88




Figure 50
Two-Ply Bellows

WEEP HOLE
FOR LEAK
DETECTION
PROCESS PIPE
SEAL BAND TO ISOLATE
BELLOWS ATTACHMENT
WELD
TWO-PLY TESTABLE
BELLOWS
ATTACHMENT
WELD

Control Rod Design The control rods are intended for control and stability of the
expansion joint and are not intended to take the full bellows pressure thrust force.
The control rods should be used for reference when determining the installed
position of the expansion joint as well as a reference during operation and shutdown
(for future trouble shooting information).

Equalizing Rings UOP presently specifies a self equalizing expansion joint. Root
rings are an acceptable alternative to equalizing rings. (UOP specifies a minimum
area requirement for root rings). Equalizing rings and root rings are intended for
added protection in the event of over pressure.

Bellows Packing Details Several methods of packing the bellows are shown in
Figure 51. External insulation is required on packed bellows to minimize the
potential of condensation during operation. UOP currently uses packed bellows for
all expansion joints except for the spent catalyst expansion joint which is
continuously steam purged to remove hydrocarbon and minimize coking. Several
refiners have successfully used packed bellows for the spent catalyst expansion
joint. UOP is currently evaluating several FCC units before packed bellows for this
service is incorporated in the project specifications.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 89





Figure 49 illustrates a typical expansion joint with an aeration connection. The
purge prevents an accumulation of catalyst between the bellows and inner wall
which would restrict the movement of the expansion joint. The purge should be 5-10
psi (0.35-0.70 kg/cm
2
) above standpipe pressure; the purge is normally controlled
with a restriction orifice.


Figure 51
Packing Details of Expansion Joints




The expansion joint of the spent catalyst standpipe is of hot-wall construction to
match the spent-catalyst stripper. Based on the location of vessel supports, this
157048-1
Equipment
Page 90




expansion joint absorbs both axial compression and lateral offset. These forces are
due to the regenerator expanding upward, the spent catalyst stripper downward,
and the standpipe compressing during operation. This standpipe is relatively short
and therefore not subjected to out-of-plane movement that occurs on inlet and
outlet nozzles connected to large-diameter vessels. Early units used carbon steel
standpipes and slide valves for the spent catalyst to the regenerator. Most of the
newer units use 1 Cr, Mo; although a few have stayed with insulation lined
carbon steel.

On new units, the regenerated catalyst standpipe and the lower portion of the
reactor riser are of cold-wall construction. On this type of unit, the expansion joint
needs to absorb axial extension and lateral offset, mainly as a result of the large
thermal growth from the hot-wall stripper and upper reactor riser. On older units
having a hot-wall wye section and regenerated catalyst standpipe, the primary
movement during operation is still axial extension and lateral offset. However, on
shutdown of the unit, the expansion joint may need to absorb axial compression,
which occurs when the raw oil is cut from the unit, steam is added at the bottom of
the riser, and the regenerated catalyst slide valve is closed. The steam cools the
reactor riser while the regenerator standpipe remains at operating temperature
because of hot catalyst filling the standpipe above the closed slide valve. The
regenerated catalyst standpipe can also be subjected to additional movements
because of the long length of reactor riser and standpipe. Any bowing of the riser or
the stripper or sagging of the standpipe affects the amount of axial movement and
lateral offset the expansion joint has to absorb. The regenerated catalyst standpipes
and slide valves range from 5% Cr on conventional units to stainless steel (Type
304) in older higher temperature units and cold wall design in modern high
temperature units.

Thermal movement is absorbed within the expansion joints by means of a flexible
item referred to as bellows. The bellows are formed into a corrugated shape from
thin-gauge material of a metallurgy selected to perform in the process environment
encountered; the expansion joint bellows are normally Alloy 625. The geometry and
number of corrugations used relate to the total movement capacity of a bellows.
The bellows design is based on equations outlined in the Standards of the
157048-1
Equipment
Page 91




Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA). These equations were
developed from engineering efforts with expansion joint manufacturers, extensive
testing programs, and operating history. See Figure 52. The expansion joint must
also conform to the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.3.

The expansion joint bellows absorb movement by means of axial compression or
extension, angular rotation, and lateral deflection. See Figure 53. The expansion
joints used in the FCC unit standpipe are subjected to both axial movement and
lateral deflection. For this reason, two separate sets of bellows, called a dual
element expansion joint, are incorporated in the design. The lateral deflection
occurs in the vertical plane, parallel to the expansion joint pantographic linkage, and
is absorbed by means of angular rotation of the bellows.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 92




Figure 52
Bellows Movement

TAN =
h
L

2

2
=
+
If Ends are Parallel: = =
h
L
E
D
C
A
B

F
Ratios:
C A F
D B E
= =
Tan ( ) = ( )( )
or
( )( )

2
C - A
F

2
D - B
E

2
157048-1
Equipment
Page 93




Figure 53
How Motion is Absorbed by Bellows




157048-1
Equipment
Page 94




SLIDE VALVES

Slide valves are used to control catalyst flow. These are gate-type valves driven by
a hydraulic actuator. The primary problems encountered with slide valves were
associated with erosion and corrosion. The elimination of guide steam purges have
alleviated many of the corrosion problems. However, if guide steam purges are
present, then the steam purge can be used once or twice a shift to keep the guides
free of catalyst. In some cases, a continuous purge is used, but its flow should be
restricted to prevent erosion of the guides. To prevent erosion, the valve disc is
covered with an abrasion-resistant refractory anchored by stainless steel hexmesh.
Hard metal surfacing is used on other parts of the valve exposed to catalyst flow
(see Figures 54 and 55). The clearances between the support guides on the sides
of the valve and the disc are set by the manufacturer. The entire system will expand
when it gets hot, so these clearances should be checked to avoid binding or
sticking. The new slide valves are designed such that no guide purge is required.

Cold wall design which uses carbon steel (see Figure 54) has also eliminated some
corrosion problems as well as many of the cracking problems generally associated
with hot wall design (specifically polythionic attack on the stainless steel). By
working closely with many slide valve suppliers, UOP has also incorporated design
and geometry guidelines which minimize erosion during normal operation. These
changes include locating the orifice plate upstream of the valve and sloping the
bottom of the bonnet a minimum of 30 from the horizontal. The sloped bottom
prevents catalyst accumulation in the bonnet. The support guides for the disc are
recessed a minimum of 3" (75mm) from the sides of the inlet port. Other design
improvements recently developed are as follows:

1. Five second stroke time for normal operation.
2. Two second stroke time for emergency shutdown.
3. Emergency shutdown features are testable on stream.
4. Offset port to center flow during normal operation.
5. Development of cold wall valves for spent catalyst standpipe service.
6. In shop hot stroke test required to guarantee trouble free operation in the field.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 95




Figure 54
Cold Wall Slide Valve

Port Opening
Guide Bolting
Drain Slots
Guide
Bonnet
C Port
L
C Valve
L
C Port
L
C Valve
L
Flow
Bonnet
Stuffing Box
Stem Disc
Orifice
Plate
Carbon
Steel
Shell

157048-1
Equipment
Page 96




Figure 55
Hot Wall Slide Valve




HYDRAULIC OIL SYSTEM

A hydraulic oil cylinder is used to drive the slide valve because of its size and the
required fast response. A low capacity, high head pump supplies the oil through the
controlling pilot valve. A manual control valve, the joystick, is also provided in case
the pilot valve plugs. Most slide valves are equipped with a handwheel for use
during total hydraulic oil failure. When the bypass valve between the two ends of
the hydraulic oil cylinder is opened to equalize pressures, the handwheel is
engaged. It is somewhat risky to attempt control on handwheel during normal
operation, because the handwheel is usually very slow. A typical response time for
a slide valve on a conventional hydraulic oil operation would be fully open to fully
closed in 30 seconds maximum. Many older systems unfortunately are slower than
this. Startup should never be attempted with handwheel control as valve closings
will be slower than required. The handwheel should never be engaged until the
hydraulic cylinder is bypassed. The equipment may be damaged if the hydraulic
cylinder exerts force against the hand wheel.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 97




A typical FCC slide valve hydraulic oil system, used in earlier designs, is shown in
Figure 56. The hydraulic oil is pumped out of the low pressure tank through a filter
to the slide valve. It circulates back from the valve or from two flow by-passes. One
of these is a hand controlled valve at the end of the hydraulic header; the other is a
minimum flow bypass on automatic control. These keep the oil circulating and
prevent pump damage that might occur if the pump were to run against a closed
system, such as when the pilot valve is holding the valve in one position. A spare
pump with auto start is used to maintain flow if the first pump fails. The high
pressure oil tank will supply sufficient hydraulic oil to close the slide valves if both
pumps go down. This tank is not large enough to hold oil pressure for more than
one to two minutes. If both pumps are lost, the unit should be brought down until at
least one is running again. Modern plants are designed with a separate oil system
for each valve, but it is more common to have one hydraulic oil system for all slide
valves. Small multi-stage centrifugal pumps are gradually replacing the
reciprocating pumps on older plants.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 98




Figure 56
FCC Slide Valve Hydraulic Oil System

UOP 2119-44
Legend
D
F
FH
FIC
F & W
HC
HPR
HV
IA
LPR
PV
RO
SV
=Drain
=Filter
=Flexible Hose
=Flow Indicating Controller
=Filling & Withdrawal
=Hydraulic Cylinder
=High Pressure Receiver
=Hand Valve
=Instrument Air
=Low Pressure Receiver
=Piolet Valve
=Restriction Orifice
=Safety Valve
N
2
IA
Must Drain
RO
D
LPR HPR
PI
SV
FIC
M P P T
F & W
HV
FH
FV
HC
From Control
Instrument
F
F
F


157048-1
Equipment
Page 99




UOP currently specifies electrohydraulic actuator assemblies with an individual
hydraulic power source for each slide valve (see Figure 57). The individual
hydraulic power source has several advantages in that the valves act independently
and eliminate all interconnecting piping.

A continuous running variable displacement pump maintains the system's hydraulic
pressure. When no valve movement is required, the pump operates near its no-load
current level and reduces heat generated in the reservoir. Hydraulic oil flows from
the pump through a set of filters into the accumulators and actuator. The actuator is
electronically controlled and directs hydraulic oil pressure to either end of the
cylinder, positioning the slide valve in response to the process demand.

An accumulator makes the fast response of the valve possible. When necessary,
this accumulator will drive the valve two complete cylinder strokes at an
approximate speed of 5 seconds per stroke. If the accumulator becomes depleted,
the pump motor itself can supply power to move the slide valve 10% of its stroke
every 10 seconds.

There is an emergency accumulator, which normally is isolated from the hydraulic
system and can be used only if directed from the control room. This accumulator
will also generate two actuator cylinder strokes.

If the pump and spare motors are lost and the emergency accumulator is not used,
there are two means of manually positioning the actuator. One mode of manual
operation uses a hand pump to move the cylinder. During normal operations, the
hand pump is isolated from the system. The other mode uses a mechanical jack or
manual handwheel to move the cylinder. When the handwheel is put into operation,
the hydraulic cylinder is automatically bypassed to prevent damage should hydraulic
power be restored.

The hydraulic pilots are very sensitive mechanisms and it is imperative that the oil
supplied to them is absolutely clean. It is important that the hydraulic oil used has
the proper viscosity and meets all the specifications given by the valve
manufacturer.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 100




Figure 57
Slide Valve Actuator
Component Arrangement and Hydraulic Circuitry



REACTOR RISER DISENGAGER DESIGNS

The heart of any catalytic process is the reaction site. In the case of the modern
FCC unit, this is the riser. With the introduction of riser cracking, the reaction site
has changed from the reactor vessel to the riser. Today's reactor could be more
properly called a disengaging vessel. A historical progression of riser termination
devices (from the 70's to early 90's) is illustrated in Figure 58. These include: the
traditional T-type disengager, downturned arms, vented riser, and direct-connected
cyclones or suspended catalyst separation.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 101




Downturned arms had essentially replaced T-type disengagers in revamp situations
where the scope did not extend to a change in reactor cyclone design. The
downturned-arm separation device began to replace the traditional T-type
disengager in 1984. Currently, UOP has nine of these designs in operation.

The downturned-arm design offers an increase in separation efficiency compared to
the traditional T-type disengager. The T-type disengager has a separation efficiency
in the range of 70%. Modeling work performed by UOP indicates that the separation
efficiency of the downturned-arm separation device is about 80%. As a result of the
improvement in separation efficiency, a reduction in catalyst loss from the reactor is
observed if the existing cyclones are heavily loaded with catalyst. The reduction in
abrupt changes of catalyst direction has reduced erosion compared to the T-type
disengager.


Figure 58
Reactor Riser Disengaging Devices














157048-1
Equipment
Page 102




Vented-riser systems, which use the momentum of the catalyst exiting the riser for
ballistic separation, have been successfully operating for more than 10 years and
are well proven in commercial applications. UOP has 11 vented-riser designs in
operation. On later vented riser designs, no mechanical or erosion problems have
been observed. However, limited erosion has been noticed on units revamped to a
vented-riser when the catalyst flux is high. As a preventative measure, UOP now
recommends additional " (19 mm) abrasion-resistant refractory lining to be
installed in the following areas on vented-riser reactor systems (Figure 59):

The reactor head extending approximately 3 ft beyond the tangent line. The
refractory lining is used to cover a target area on the head of the reactor
where the catalyst impacts directly. The lining is a precaution since erosion
has not been observed in this area.

DA points. Half-pipe shields coated with refractory lining are installed over
the DA points to protect them against erosion.

Manways. Refractory lining is installed in the lower half of the manways in
active areas. The most important site for installation of the refractory is on
the large manway.

TI points. Half-pipe shields coated with refractory lining are installed over the
TI points to protect them against erosion. The thermowells are to be the hard
surfaced type. The control point is moved to the reactor plenum chamber.

The reactor shell above the cone section. A stainless steel taper bar should
be used to terminate the abrasion resistant lining being added. The angle of
this taper bar should be as small as possible. The abrasion resistant lining is
usually extended a minimum distance of 3' (0.9 M) above the reactor cone.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 103




Figure 59
Extent of Reactor Cladding and Hex Lining
For Vented Riser Terminations


Direct-connected cyclones are now a well-proven technology. They represented a
continuing evolution toward minimizing counterproductive post-riser residence time
and maximizing separation efficiency.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 104




In this design, the combined catalyst and product vapor mixture exits the riser and
passes directly into the riser cyclones for separation. The product vapors exit the
riser cyclone gas tube and pass through a second stage of cyclones before exiting
the reactor. The catalyst flows down the cyclone diplegs into the catalyst stripper.
The vapors carried down the diplegs and the vapors from the catalyst stripper are
swept from the reactor system back into the cyclone system with steam into a vent
tube entering the cross over duct between the cyclone stages.

Because all of the catalyst flows into the cyclones, erosion was concern in the
design of a direct-connected cyclone system. Reports from the operating UOP
direct-connected cyclone systems that have undergone scheduled mechanical
turnarounds indicated only negligible erosion in the riser and cyclone areas.

Because of the transfer piping now incorporated between the primary and
secondary cyclones, the hydrocarbon vapor product and hot catalyst are no longer
in contact with the reactor shell. Consequently, a large thermal differential is
introduced between the reactor internals and the adjacent reactor shell at startup, at
shutdown, and during emergency situations. The mechanical design of the reactor
must accommodate this thermal gradient. UOP's standard design practice is to use
a thermal differential, which is based on the difference between the reactor design
temperature and the steam condensation temperature.

The thermal gradient is not limited to the reactor internals. The reactor riser, reactor
vapor manifold, and reactor vapor line are also subjected to the same thermal
differential. As a result, all guides, supports, and other attachments to the reactor
shell must be designed to accommodate this condition. UOP's experience has been
that all support guides, and sometimes the actual vapor line, require some type of
modification when the direct-connected cyclone system is incorporated into the
design. In summary, the addition of direct-connected cyclones affects the entire
reactor system and is not just limited to the internals.

During the 90's, UOP developed and put into commercial operation the suspended
catalyst separation system which combines the features of the vented riser
(allowing pressure upsets) and direct connect (high containment) systems (see
Figure 60). This system is a two cyclone vented riser which operates with a similar
flow pattern to the direct connect system, but the riser above the first stage is open.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 105




The riser fills with a dense zone of catalyst above the inlet to the first stage cyclone
during normal operation, but during a pressure upset the catalyst is free to
discharge harmlessly into the reactor. It was also proven that the suspended
catalyst separation system had the same advantage as the direct connect system;
post riser cracking is minimized because all of the vapor goes to the first stage
cyclone.

Figure 60
Suspended Solids Separation Riser Design


157048-1
Equipment
Page 106




The most recent commercially proven riser termination technology developed by
UOP is the Vortex Separation Technology. This includes the Vortex Separation
system (VSS) for internal risers and the Vortex Disengager Stripper (VDS) for
external risers. (see Figures 60 and 61).

The operating principle of the VSS riser termination system is quite simple. Catalyst
is discharged centrifugally in the horizontal plane, swirls downward along the wall of
the chamber, and contacts the prestripping vapors before entering the stripper
vessel. The vapor outlet from the VSS chamber is directly connected to a single
stage of conventional cyclones.

The base of the VSS is submerged in a fluidized dense phase of catalyst in the
reactor cone. The catalyst discharging from the cyclone diplegs easily
communicates with the catalyst level within the VSS chamber to maintain a
controlled catalyst level. Tray and baffle arrangements at the bottom of the VSS
chamber and top of the stripper direct stripped hydrocarbon vapors and stripping
steam rising from the stripper up through the VSS chamber for use as prestripping
media. Any vapors entrained down the cyclone diplegs, along with fluidization
steam, and purge steam flow out of the reactor vessel on pressure balance through
vent nozzles in the VSS outlet duct.

The top of the vessel, the lower section above the stripper and the reactor riser
above the stripper are lined with abrasion resistant lining for erosion protection.
Material of construction is normally 1 Cr Mo. The vessel normally operates at
510-530C (950-990F). External insulation is required not only for personnel
protection but to prevent excess coke formation. Formation of coke in the reactor
prevents the use of air for heat up during normal startup procedures.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 107




Figure 60
Vortex Separation System (VSS)

Dipleg
Vortex
Chamber
Section A-A
Internal
Riser
Catalyst
Level
Vortex
Chamber
Prestripping
Steam
Spent Catalyst
Stripper
A A
Prestripping
Section
Gas
Catalyst
157048-1
Equipment
Page 108




Figure 61
Vortex Disengager Stripper (VDS)


To Main
Column
Riser
Cyclones
Vortex
Disengager
Prestripping
Section
Spent
Catalyst
Stripper
Counter Weighted
Flapper Valves
Fluffing
Steam Ring
Fluffing
Steam Ring
Stripping
Steam Ring
Spent Catalyst To
Regenerator
Plenum
Catalyst Return
Slots
Gas Flow To
Cyclones
Catalyst Flow to
Stripper
Reactor Shell
Support
Brackets
157048-1
Equipment
Page 109




REACTOR RISER

The reactor riser is a vertical pipe in which the desirable cracking reactions take
place. Hot catalyst enters the wye section at the bottom of the riser and is lifted up
to the feed injection point by the lift gas/steam mixture. Two wye designs, a hot wall
and a cold wall, have been used. The two wye sections differ in wall temperature
and resulting stresses. The modern cold wall wye with 5" (125 mm) of refractory
lining has a lower wall temperature and reduced stress, permitting the metallurgy to
be changed from 304H stainless steel to carbon steel. The cold wall wye and the
hot wall wye are illustrated in Figures 62 and 63. A mixture of lift gas and steam is
injected through the lift nozzle at the bottom of the wye section. Catalyst and lift
media travel up the riser to the feed distributors where the riser diameter increases.
This increase allows for the increased volume of hydrocarbon vapors as the oil is
injected and vaporized when it meets the catalyst. Because the riser volume is
small it limits the contact time between the catalyst and hydrocarbon. This prevents
overcracking of the products. Below the point where the riser enters the reactor
stripper, the riser is carbon steel with castable refractory lining. This lining is
abrasion resistant and insulates the carbon steel from the high catalyst
temperatures. Above the point at which the riser enters the reactor stripper, the riser
becomes hot wall so the metallurgy is upgraded to typically 1 Cr Mo.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 110




Figure 62
Cold Wall Wye




Reinforcing Rings
Bumper
Lift Gas Distributor
5 High Density Refractory
Carbon Steel
157048-1
Equipment
Page 111




Figure 63
Hot Wall Wye



157048-1
Equipment
Page 112




REACTOR RISER FEED DISTRIBUTION

The earliest feed distributors were simple open pipe bayonets located in the base of
the wye section. Figure 64 shows an example of this type. Efforts were then made
to generate some feed dispersion by using multiple nozzles at the exit point of the
distributor. This led to the design of the "showerhead" distributor shown in Figure
65. This change generated a substantial improvement in overall process
performance. Figure 66 shows the effect on cross-sectional temperature profiles in
the riser when changing from a single nozzle bayonet to the multi-nozzle
showerhead design.

In the late 1970's and throughout the 1980's, much emphasis was placed on
atomizing the oil into very fine droplets and evenly dispersing these droplets into the
flowing catalyst. UOP's efforts led to the development of the WYE premix distributor
shown in Figure 67. Steam is injected into the feed upstream of the distributor. The
combined stream is then "pre-mixed" inside the distributor to obtain a pseudo
emulsion phase before it exits the nozzles at the distributor tip. The expanding
steam at exit conditions helps to break up the oil into fine droplets to achieve rapid
vaporization and even mixing with the catalyst.

Further refinements to the wye feed distributor were made by utilizing an annular lift
around the base of the distributor. Either steam or gas can be used as the lift
media. The intent is to provide some pre-acceleration of catalyst around the
distributor before the catalyst is contacted with feed. This serves to reduce the
degree of backmixing in the wye and lower riser. Figure 68 shows a wye premix
distributor with annular lift.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 113




Figure 64
Reactor Riser Feed Distributor
Bayonet Type



157048-1
Equipment
Page 114




Figure 65
Reactor Riser Feed Distributor
Jet Nozzle Type





157048-1
Equipment
Page 115




Figure 66
Effect of Feed Distributor

UOP 3110-9


157048-1
Equipment
Page 116




Figure 67
Premix Feed Distributor (Wye)




157048-1
Equipment
Page 117




Figure 68
Premix Feed Distributor with Annular Lift (Wye)



157048-1
Equipment
Page 118




ELEVATED FEED SYSTEM

During the 1990's, the industry widely accepted that elevated radial injection system
on the riser is the preferred feed injection location. A typical elevated feed injection
system is shown in Figure 69. The wye section, acceleration zone, and mix zone
are the main elements. The term system must be emphasized because the best
result will not be realized without all the parts functioning in the proper manner. The
UOP system has evolved over many years from a combination of strong process
understanding, commercial testing, cold flow modeling, and mathematical modeling.

Acceleration Zone

The base of the wye section is quite turbulent because the huge mass of catalyst
changes direction here. Significant backmixing occurs as the catalyst begins to
move up the riser. Clearly, injecting the feed at this location cannot be desirable.
Restoring an even flow of catalyst is important before injecting the feed. Restoring
an even flow is the function of the acceleration zone.

A carrying gas, either steam, dry gas, or a combination of both, is injected at the
base of the wye. Proper acceleration of the catalyst results in a more even catalyst
flow distribution and a lower slip factor. The slip factor is the ratio of the gas-phase
velocity to the catalyst-particle velocity. The catalyst is always moving at a lower
velocity and slips relative to the gas phase. At higher gas-phase velocity, the slip
factor decreases. A riser flow with a high slip factor is a less uniform and more
unstable system. The goal is to minimize backmixing when the feed is injected.
Uneven catalyst flow and high slip in the riser can lead to localized areas of high
temperature and feed overcracking, which result in greater amounts of coke and dry
gas and reduce selectivity to desired products. In addition, lift gas has proven to
passivate metals which further reduces the dry gas yields.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 119




Figure 69
Elevated Feed Injection System

UOP 2569B-1
Mix Zone
Acceleration
Zone
Feed &
Steam
Steam or Gas
Catalyst


157048-1
Equipment
Page 120




Catalyst Velocity and Density

Computational fluid-solid dynamic modeling work has indicated that the catalyst flow
in the riser can be subject to undesirable slugging phenomena at low velocities.
Increasing the catalyst velocity helps to reduce such slugging and improves the
initial contact with feed. All evidence, both commercial testing and theoretical
principles, confirms that an accelerated, moderate-density catalyst phase is the
ideal environment for feed injection in a flowing riser.

Mix Zone

The last part of the feed distribution system is the mix zone, the point of contact
between the flowing catalyst and injected feed. At this location, the feed is
vaporized rapidly, and cracking reactions begin. This zone is a complex three-phase
system: flowing solids, liquid feed spray, and vaporized gas phase. Rapid and
intimate mixing at this point is critical to achieving the best yield performance. The
number of feed nozzles, location and angle of injection, spray pattern and riser
coverage, and droplet size and velocity are all important parameters that are
optimized to generate the best performance.

A final objective of the mix zone is to achieve a plug-flow environment as quickly as
possible once the catalyst and feed have been mixed. An even distribution of
catalyst and hydrocarbon vapor helps promote and complete the desired reactions
as the mixture flows up the riser. Backmixing of catalyst at the point of contact must
be minimized. Riser gamma scans at this location have helped identify and optimize
the desired flow patterns.

The first generation of elevated feed system used the elevated premix feed
distributor shown in Figure 70.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 121




Figure 70
Elevated Riser Premix Feed Distributor



157048-1
Equipment
Page 122




Optimix Feed Nozzle

After the elevated premix feed distributors were proven successful, UOP instituted a
program to further improve the atomization and dispersion characteristics of its feed
nozzles. The result of these efforts is the new Optimix feed nozzle (see Figure 71).

The important features of the Optimix nozzle are:

Small average droplet size
Narrow droplet size distribution
Flat fan spray pattern
Even liquid flux across spray
Moderate pressure drop
Three stages of atomization
Short residence time after internal droplet generation
High turndown efficiency

The Optmix nozzles have been commercially proven in more than twenty units and
major performance benefits with the Optimix nozzle system have been achieved in
dry gas reduction and gasoline yield improvement.

The feature most recently added to the Optimix distributor is the DUR O LOK
coupling. This coupling provides a means for replacing the tips for maximum
flexibility in both maintenance and modification for changes in design charge rate.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 123





Figure 71
UOP Optimix Feed Nozzle
Steam
Oil
DUR O LOC
TM
Coupling

REACTOR PLENUM

The direct-connected cyclone reactor systems prompted the development of new
reactor plenum designs. In a direct-connected system, the area surrounding the
cyclones is relatively inactive. The traffic in this area is limited primarily to the
vapors being carried out of the reactor stripper. During startups and shutdowns, the
temperatures observed at the reactor shell and cyclones can therefore be
substantially different. To accommodate the large differences in thermal expansion,
new plenum designs were required. Different approaches to this problem are shown
in Figure 72. UOP typically uses an internal plenum design to minimize overall
vessel height and cost.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 124





Figure 72
UOP Plenum Chamber Designs




External Plenum Internal Plenum
External Manifold


SPENT CATALYST STRIPPER

The spent catalyst stripper (Figure 73) surrounds the upper portion of the reactor
riser. Catalyst descending from the reactor passes into the stripper where it flows
over stripper baffles. The steam to the stripping section is distributed through a
number of small holes in two opposing semi-circular steam rings. A rate of 1.5-2
lb/1000 lb catalyst is typical. The stripping steam displaces oil vapors from the voids
between the catalyst particles and in the catalyst pores and returns this vapor to the
reactor. The catalyst flows out the spent catalyst standpipe with some entrained
steam. A small quantity of steam is injected into the base of the stripper cone
through an additional semi-circular steam ring which maintains catalyst fluidization
and assures an even temperature distribution at this section.

Improved stripping of hydrocarbon from the spent catalyst provides significant
advantages: catalytic coke from higher conversion replaces entrained hydrocarbon
due to the increased catalyst-to-oil ratio resulting from lower regenerator dense bed
157048-1
Equipment
Page 125




temperatures. Alternatively, a lower coke yield for the same conversion can be used
to increase throughput on main air blower limited units.

In 1998 and 1999 UOP conducted an extensive research program to evaluate the
existing commercial stripper tray designs and develop a more efficient design. A
commercial scale Plexiglas model was built to allow visual observations of the
catalyst and gas flow patterns. Catalyst circulation rates greater than commercial
flux rates were possible in this model. Helium tracer gas injected to the catalyst
entering the top of the model was used to quantify the stripping efficiency for each
tray type.

The three stripper tray designs which were used commercially in the past by UOP
and tested in the model are shown in Figure 74.

The classic UOP tray, which had 2 rows or large holes on the top of the tray was
used up to the mid 1980s. The stripper tray style with three rows of holes in the
skirt was used from the mid 1908s to early 1990s. In the early 1990s the jets were
returned to the top of the trays with longer skirts which allowed more pressure drop
across the tray for better steam distribution. Each of these designs perform well at
low to moderate catalyst flux rates, up to ~60,000 lb/hr/ft
2
(290 kg/hr/m
2
). Above
these rates the efficiency falls quickly and fluidization problems can occur which
limit the capacity of the stripper.

The modern tray design developed from the cold flow modeling is shown in Figure
75. This tray uses a larger number of smaller jets on the top of the tray spread out
over a larger percentage of the tray than in previous designs. This provides for
better steam/catalyst contacting resulting in improved stripping efficiency. Another
advantage resulting from this is that all areas of the bed are uniformly fluidized
resulting in smoother catalyst flows and uniform catalyst flux. This improved
fluidization has allowed the upper limits on catalyst flux to be pushed above 100,000
lb/hr/ft
2
( 490,000 kg/hr/m
2
) while maintaining very high stripping efficiency. The
catalyst flux is based on the annular area between the riser and stripper shell.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 126




The modern stripper is also designed for higher catalyst residence times than the
early models. This residence time is important to allow completion of bed cracking
reactions of the absorbed hydrocarbons which continue to generate strippable
vapors that can be removed before the catalyst enters the regenerator. The uniform
catalyst flux in the modern stripper also increases the effective catalyst residence
time by eliminating areas of stagnant catalyst and areas of high catalyst flux.

Figure 73
High Efficiency Spent Catalyst Stripper
Stripping
Steam
Stripping
Steam
Fluffing Steam
Abrasion Resistant
Lining
Riser
Stripper Shell
Insulation
FCC-E005
157048-1
Equipment
Page 127




Figure 74
Historical Stripper Tray Designs



Classic UOP Tray
Up to Mid 1980's
Short skirt
Holes on top near the edge
Mid 1980's to Early 1990's
Longer skirt
Holes on vertical skirt
Modified Classic UOP Tray
Early 1990's to 1999
Long Skirt
Jets on top near the edge
FCC-E006
157048-1
Equipment
Page 128




Figure 75
Modern Stripper Tray Design

C Spent Catalyst
Stripper
L
Detail
12-14 Gage
Tubing
Abrasion
Resistant Lining
Stripper
Shell
Riser
FCC-E007
157048-1
Equipment
Page 129




REFRACTORY LlNING

Refractory lining is used extensively in the reactor and regenerator. The types of
refractories generally fall into three categories: abrasion resistant, insulating, and
castable. Castable refractory lining exhibits both abrasion resistant and insulating
properties. In recent years, abrasion resistant plastic linings have entered the
market. Plastics have become popular for small repair jobs because of their ease of
application. The material is putty-like and comes ready for installation without
addition of water. A listing of the various applications is given in Table 2.

TABLE 2
REFRACTORY LlNING

Abrasion
Application Resistant Castable Insulating
Reactor X
Reactor Stripper X
Upper Regenerator X X
Lower Regenerator X X
Standpipes X X
Upper Reactor Riser X
Lower Reactor Riser X X
Cold Wall Wye X
Hot Wall Wye X
Feed Distributor X
Expansion Joint X
Slide Valve X X
Cyclones X
External Mixer X
Flue Gas Line X X
Catalyst Cooler X
157048-1
Equipment
Page 130




UOP has made several modifications to the refractory specifications to ensure the
proper use of materials, installation procedures, and inspection and testing
methods. Some of the major revisions to the UOP Standard Specifications include
the following:

The anchor spacing has been reduced from 12 (300) for high density
vibrocast refractory and gunned refractory:

Anchor Location Anchor Spacing
Top head of Vertical Vessels
Plenum Areas
Overhead Areas

1.0 x Lining Thickness
Horizontal Shells
Catalyst Transfer Lines
Overhead Vapor Lines

1.5 x Lining Thickness
Vertical Shells
Bottom Head of Vertical Vessels
Downhand Areas

2.0 x Lining Thickness


The straight-leg anchor design has been replaced with a "steerhorn"-style
anchor. The steerhorn-style anchor provides more positive anchorage and
minimizes slippage.

The coating on the anchor has been reduced to the tip of the leg. Coating on
just the top " (13mm) of the anchor leg allows a greater bond and allows
thermal expansion of the tips without spalling the lining on the surface.

Metal reinforcing fibers are incorporated in the refractory. The use of
stainless-steel metal fibers are required to improve the strength of the
refractory lining for cold crushing, modulus of rupture, and thermal shock and
to minimize cracking. The quantity of fibers is minimized (2 lb/ft
3
or 32 kg/M
3
)
to ensure uniform mixing and to reduce handling problems.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 131




The heat drying procedure has been modified. The modified procedure is
required to ensure refractory quality by incorporating a controlled, slow heat-
drying rate.

The installation temperatures are controlled to ensure that the lining is not
freezing or being subjected to incomplete hydration.

Mandatory testing of materials is now required to ensure the quality of the
materials and skill of the installers. Materials and installers must pass all
testing requirements prior to installation.

Figure 76
Steerhorn Anchors for Gunned and Vibrocast Refractory Lining
60
Cap
1-1/2 (38 mm)
1(25 mm)
5/16 (8mm)
Diameter Anchor
1/2
(13mm)
Radius
Shell
Weld
3/8
(9 mm)
Radius
157048-1
Equipment
Page 132




THERMOWELLS

Reactor thermowells are protected with a hard metal surfacing. The number will
depend upon the size of the unit. The most important temperatures are the riser
outlets for a modern unit, or the dense bed for an older unit. These can be checked
with the reactor over head and stripper bottom outlet thermowells. The catalyst in
the stripper usually is 5-10F (3-6C) hotter than the cyclone outlets, because heat
transfer from the catalyst to the oil is not perfect. Thermowells may inadvertently be
placed in a dead area, where false, usually low, readings are obtained. False
readings can be detected by comparing the different readings obtained around the
reactor.

The thermowells used in the regenerator are protected by a stellite hard surface
coating. Wear will vary, depending on location. During the inspection, each
thermowell should be carefully checked and replaced if necessary.


DRY STEAM, DRY AIR and DRY GAS SURGE POINTS

The instrument connections on the reactor and regenerator must be protected from
catalyst damage. The fluidized catalyst will behave like a liquid and "flow" into any
instrument opening. Once the catalyst is out of the fluidized area, it tends to settle
and pack. The instrument tap is blocked off and a false reading given. To avoid this
problem, a stream of dry air, gas or steam is injected into the line between the
vessel and the instrument to provide a buffer seal. This system is shown in Figure
76. It is important to point out that if air is used as the purge gas, its flow should be
minimal to prevent localized burning or harmful oxidation reactions. The amount of
steam injected is controlled by restriction orifices, 1/8" (3mm) for steam and 1/16"
(1.6mm) for air or gas. The pressure to the orifice should be 5 psi (0.35kg/cm
2
)
higher than the vessel pressure. For differential instruments, there is no error in
measurement because the isolating medium injected is the same for each tap. For
single instruments, any error introduced is negligible.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 133




Figure 76
DA, DG and DS Piping

Nozzle on Vessle
Or Standpipe
3/4 '' Instrument Air for "DA" Points
3/4 '' Purge Gas for "DG" Points
P
Strainer
1/16" Restriction
Orifice
1/2" Pipe to Instrument
Provide 6' (1800) or More
Clearance to Enable Use of
Reamer
3/4" SCH 160 Piping
Minimum Run Straight
Piping Between Fittings
3/4 '' Purge Steam for "DS" Points
FCC-E008
157048-1
Equipment
Page 134




During inspection, the pressure taps (and pressure taps used for level indication)
should be cleaned and the surrounding refractory should be checked. The reamer,
shown in Figure 77, can be used to clean out the taps when the unit is on stream,
or when it is down.

Figure 77
Pressure Tap Reamer
FLEXIBLE GRAPHITE
PACKING
ROUND HEAD
STEEL PLUG
STEEL GLAND
STEEL STUFFING BOX
6'' (150) DIAMETER HANDWHEEL
1/4 '' (6) STEEL ROD
5
'
-
0
'
'

(
1
5
2
5
)
3/4 '' FORGED STEEL
SCREWED TEE
3/4 '' SCHEDULE 80
SEAMLESS STEEL PIPE
NIPPLE 9'' (230) LONG
1/4 '' (6) DRILL
(WELD TO ROD)
3/4 '' NPT (NATIONAL
STANDARD PIPE
TAPER THREAD)
(NOTE 2)
FCC-E009
157048-1
Equipment
Page 135




MAIN COLUMN

The FCC main column is shown in Figure 78. The column may be divided into two
sections: the regular fractionator and the lower disc and doughnut trays. The bottom
six trays are designed for high vapor and liquid flow rates. The trays are shown
schematically in Figure 79. A coke trap, shown in Figure 80, prevents large pieces
of coke or other debris from entering the bottom line.

The steam ring may be used on some units to steam strip the bottoms material of
any lighter hydrocarbons. The column is fitted with three sample lines which are
normally called try lines; the bottom try line is also used as a sample line. These are
used to check the bottoms level because the level glass and indicator are subject to
occasional plugging by fines or coke particles. Both level instruments are protected
with an LCO flush which flows into the level instrument from the top.

The FCC main column is mounted on a table top instead of the skirt mounting seen
on most columns. Table top mounting simplifies maintenance work on the bottoms
lines, which are subject to plugging from coke or catalyst fines. A separate suction
line to each pump allows operation to continue through one line while the other is
cleaned. As an additional note, every valve in the bottoms circuit should be installed
with the stem up to keep catalyst fines out of the bonnet. If plant layout does not
allow a stem to be straight up, it should be as close to the vertical position as
possible.

The upper part of the tower is similar to any other fractionator. Sidecut streams
must be stripped to remove absorbed light material. Stacked heavy cat naphtha and
light cycle oil strippers are shown in Figure 81. Steam is the most common
stripping method, although reboiler strippers are sometimes used. Reboiler
strippers decrease the amount of sour water that must be treated. The overhead
vent from each stripper returns to the main column in a vapor space.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 136




The overhead from the column is condensed by air or water coolers, normally a
combination of the two. Water from the gas concentration section washes the
ammonia and some other salts from the last bank of condensers. If it were injected
before this, much of the water could vaporize, decreasing its effect. The sour water
is separated in the overhead receiver (see Figure 82) and sent to a sour water
stripper. Gasoline and gas go to the gas concentration section, with some gasoline
returned to the tower for reflux.

The main column is made of regular or killed carbon steel, with a 1/8 inch (3 mm)
thick Type 405 or 410 (12 Cr) cladding from below the naphtha or LCO draw tray to
the bottom outlet. Any nozzles or manways in this clad section should also be alloy
lined. All the trays and caps in the column are Type 410 stainless. The inspector
should look for any evidence of pitting, cracks or bulging in the alloy lining. Metal
thickness should be checked and recorded for future reference. A general
inspection should be made for loose caps, clips and bolts, and for general metal
loss or tray distortion. The upper part of the column is usually not subject to severe
corrosion. The bottom of the column should be checked for integrity of the lining
and for any signs of coke buildup. Excess amounts of coke may indicate that the
bottoms temperature was too high during operation. The coke trap and steam ring
should be cleaned and checked for corrosion. The steam ring should have the
nozzles pointing upward, to avoid erosion to the bottom head lining.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 137




Figure 78
Main Column
26
27
30
32
37
34
35
38
36
33
17
21
19
18
7
6
4
3
1
31
29
28
5
20
Reflux
Manway and
Vent Vapor Out
HCN Liquid
Return
HCN Stripper
Vapor Return
HCN Reflux
Draw
HCN Pumparound
and Product Draw
HCN Reflux
Return
LCO Pumparound
Return
LCO Reflux
Draw
LCO Pumparound
and Product Draw
LCO Stripper
Vapor Return
LCO Reflux
Return
HCO Pumparound
Return
Feed Surge Drum
Equalizing Line
HCO Pumparound
and Reflux Draw
HCO Reflux Return
MCB Pumparound
Return
Reactor Vapor Inlet
Try Lines
Coke Trap
Steam Out
Quench
Bottoms Pumaparound
and Product Draw
410S or 405
cladding
FCC-E400
157048-1
Equipment
Page 138




Figure 79
Typical Disc and Donut Pans
VESSEL
VESSEL
OPEN AREA
PLAN OF DISC
NO HOLES AT FEED POINTS
C
VESSEL
VESSEL
OPEN AREA
C
C
*
*
SECTION A-A
SUPPORT
RING
VESSEL
C
SYMMETRICAL
ABOUT CENTERLINE
A A
OMIT HOLES FOR
TOP DONUT ONLY
DOWNCOMER
OF TRAY
SUPPORT
RING
1-3/8" DIAMETER HOLES
ON 5" EQUILATERAL
TRIANGULAR PITCH
1-3/8" DIAMETER HOLES
ON 2-1/2" EQUILATERAL
TRIANGULAR PITCH
4" HIGH WEIR FOR
TOP DONUT ONLY
TRAY
1-3/8" DIAMETER HOLES
ON 5" EQUILATERAL
TRIANGULAR PITCH
1-3/8" DIAMETER HOLES
ON 2-1/2" EQUILATERAL
TRIANGULAR PITCH
C
PLAN OF DONUT
DONUT TRAY
DISC TRAY
FCC-E401
157048-1
Equipment
Page 139




Figure 80
Typical Coke Trap




120
1
5
0
50 (TYPICAL)
SUPPORTS
150
100
25 R
(BOTTOMS OUT)
OPENINGS
4
0
PROVIDE 2 DRAIN
OPENINGS, LOCATED
180 DEG APART.
OD OUTLET NOZZLE
FCC-E402
157048-1
Equipment
Page 140




Figure 81
Heavy Cat Naphtha Stripper (Top)
Light Cycle Oil Stripper (Bottom)
BAFFLE
1
6
Vortex Breaker
1
6
Manway and Vent
Vapor to Main Column
HCN from Main Column
Stripping Steam
LC-LG
Vapor to Main Column
Vent
Stripped HCN Product
LCO from Main Column
Stripping Steam
Vortex Breaker
LC-LG
Stripped LCO Product
FCC-E403
157048-1
Equipment
Page 141





Figure 82
Main Column Overhead Receiver




Inlet Distributor
(Detail)
PC
LC & LG
LC & LG
Water
Vent and Ventilation
Vapor Outlet
Water Boot
Water Outlet
Hydrocarbon
Outlet
Vortex Breakers
Manway
Steam Out
Slots Must Face
Nearest Head
1/2" Drain Hole
FCC-E404
157048-1
Equipment
Page 142




MAIN COLUMN BOTTOMS

The main column bottoms pumps are detailed in Figure 83. The minimum
distances shown are important to prevent catalyst fines from settling in a line that is
not in service and plugging it. The draw stream for heavy oil out of the unit (i.e. to
the slurry settler or storage) always comes off the bottom of the main column
bottoms header. Any catalyst or coke which has a tendency to settle will be drawn
off and removed from the circulating loop. Steam and LCO lines are provided for
flushing on shutdown and for cleaning. If the unit is shut down without flushing,
catalyst fines may settle, or the heavy oil may set up causing problems with
cleaning.

The suction and discharge lines of the main column bottoms pumps range from 5
Cr, Mo to 9 Cr, 1 Moly. The exchanger metallurgy ranges from carbon steel to 5
Cr, Mo. Carbon steel does not last long if it is exposed to hot main column
bottoms so the slurry service side of the tubes, tube sheets, and heads should be
clad with a chrome alloy, such as Type 410. After the first exchanger, most of the
piping is carbon steel. All piping and exchangers should be inspected for corrosion
and fouling at each turnaround, and the appropriate records kept.

The recommended main column bottoms velocities through the tubes are 3.75 to
7.0 ft/sec for straight tubes and 3.75 to 5.75 ft/sec for U-tubes. Deviations outside of
these ranges will show up as excessive amounts of settled catalyst fines or erosion
to the tubes.

The main column bottoms pumps normally have steam turbine drivers. Speed is
limited to 2000 rpm to minimize erosion. The shaft is tungsten carbide or stellite
coated, with a light cycle oil flush to the throat bushing and wear rings and HCO to
the mechanical seal. UOP recommends aluminum foil packing with light cycle oil
flush for cooling and lubrication. Graphite or asbestos have occasionally been used
in this service. Many refiners have installed mechanical seals with good success.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 143




M
IN
B
L
A
N
K
O
F
F
S
T
E
A
M
F
L
U
S
H
IN
G
O
IL
P
D
I
P
D
I
F
L
U
S
H
IN
G
O
IL
F
O
R
P
U
M
P
W
A
R
M
U
P
/C
O
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
L
U
S
H
I
N
G
O
IL
T

3
/4

''
M
P
S
T
E
A
M
S
T
E
A
M
C
O
N
D
E
N
S
A
T
E
L
P
S
T
E
A
M
T
O
C
IR
C
U
L
A
T
IN
G
M
A
IN
C
O
L
U
M
N
B
O
T
T
O
M
S
R
E
T
U
R
N

H
E
A
D
E
R
C
O
K
E
S
T
R
A
IN
E
R
C
O
K
E
S
T
R
A
I
N
E
R
M
P
S
T
E
A
M
M
P
G
P
G
H
E
A
V
Y
C
Y
C
L
E
O
IL
F
O
R
P
U
M
P
W
A
R
M
U
P
/C
O
O
L
D
O
W
N
T
I
M I N
M
IN
H
E
A
V
Y
C
Y
C
L
E
O
IL
F
O
R
P
U
M
P
W
A
R
M
U
P
/C
O
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
L
U
S
H
IN
G
O
IL
F
O
R
P
U
M
P
W
A
R
M
U
P
/C
O
O
L
D
O
W
N
T
I
M I N
M
IN
P
P
3
/4
''
T
r
y

L
in
e
s
M
I
N
M I N
F
L
U
S
H
IN
G
O
IL
M
M
M
O
V
M
O
V
M
P
S
T
E
A
M
T
O
C
IR
C
U
L
A
T
IN
G
M
C
B
H
E
A
D
E
R
F
i
g
u
r
e

8
3
M
a
i
n

C
o
l
u
m
n

B
o
t
t
o
m
s

C
i
r
c
u
l
a
t
i
n
g

P
u
m
p
s
F
C
C
-
E
4
0
5
157048-1
Equipment
Page 144




Besides the turnaround, the bottoms pumps usually require some repair work
during the course of the run. The seal flush system should be checked for
cleanliness, and the packing replaced if necessary. The packing is especially
vulnerable to the hot, erosive conditions. There may also be wear to the pump case
and rotor. If this is severe, a hard surfacing material may be applied to the rotor.
The inspector should also check the pump suction strainer for corrosion and holes.


SEAL AND GLAND FLUSH

The main column bottoms pump is protected by gland and seal flushes to keep
catalyst fines out of the throat and to lubricate and cool the packing. HCO is used
as the flushing medium. LCO is not used as a flush to the main column bottoms
pumps because suction will be lost when vapors are formed in the pump casing.
For earlier units, all main column bottoms and slurry flow instruments and control
valves are flushed with LCO to keep out fines that could plug up or erode the
equipment. The total amount of LCO required will depend on the number of flushing
points. The flush to each instrument will not be exactly the same because of the
pressure drops through the system, although this can be partially balanced by the
globe valve provided at such point. The primary control is a 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
restriction orifice after the globe valve. These orifices must be kept clean. A rough
number for total LCO required is 1000-2000 BPD (6.5-13 M
3
/hr). Smaller units
usually have fewer exchangers and, therefore, require fewer control valves and less
oil. The LCO which enters the main column bottoms stream will flash off when it is
returned to the column. Excessive flush will cause cooling problems in the bottoms,
and should be avoided.

Currently, UOP designs slurry flow instruments which do not use flushing as shown
in Figure 84.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 145




Figure 84
Slurry Service Orifice Meter Piping Assembly
Closed Coupled Above Orifice for ANSI Class 300/600

"
Globe

"
Gate
(Install on Vertical Tap)
Screwed Cap
(do not seal
weld)

"
Pipe
minimum
Transmitter
Mounting
Bracket
Single
Valve
Equalizing
Manifold
2" Field Fabricated
Instrument Pipe
Support

"
Pipe

"
Solid Plug
m
i
n
i
m
u
m
Pipe Strap
Flow
Flange Adapters
P
Capsule
H
L
FCC-E406
157048-1
Equipment
Page 146




SLURRY SETTLER

In earlier units when the cyclone efficiency was not as high, the main column
bottoms stream contained catalyst fines which had to be removed to meet certain
product specifications. Part of the bottoms stream was sent to the carbon steel
settler (sometimes called a clarifier) where the fines would settle out and were
returned to the reactor with a slurry recycle. Clarified oil came off the top of the
vessel. The settler operated liquid full, with a cross-sectional area designed for an
upward oil velocity of 30 BPD/ft
2
(2.1 M
3
/hr/M
2
) or less at normal charge rates.
Heavy cycle oil or raw oil diluent could be used to flush the fines back to the reactor.

Figure 85
FCC Slurry Settler
UOP 2119-67
Vent
Relief Valve
Manway
Dilute Oil
Inlet and
Distributor
Main Column
Bottoms Inlet
Nozzle and
Wear Plate
Clarified Oil Outlet
Steamout
Slurry Outlet
Flushing
Nozzle

157048-1
Equipment
Page 147




SLURRY FILTRATION

Filtration of the slurry product to achieve product specifications of 100 wppm total
solids or lower is becoming increasingly common. Sales of the slurry product as
carbon black feedstock and desire to minimize the increasing cost of tank cleaning
are driving this trend.

The most common type of filters use pourous, sintered metal filter elements. A
typical filter system will have 2 or 3 vessels with a number of filter elements in each.
One vessel is typically in filtration mode while another is in backflush mode to
remove the filter cake from the elements. When enough catalyst fines have
deposited on the filter elements to increase the pressure drop across the filter to a
pre set limit the vessel is taken off line for back flushing. Once the filter vessel is off
line and drained the vessel is filled with backflush liquid, either HCO or LCO, and
allowed to soak to help dissolve any heavy aromatic compounds on the elements.
The top of the vessel is then pressured up with either fuel gas or nitrogen to provide
the driving force for a high velocity back flush. The back flush material is collected in
receiver vessel and pumped back to the reactor riser or to the spent catalyst
stripper. A typical arrangement for the filtration equipment is shown in Figure 86.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 148





Figure 86
FCC Slurry Filter

FILTER
VESSEL
#1
FILTER
VESSEL
#2
FILTER
VESSEL
#3
BACKFLUSH
RECEIVER
VENT
BACKFLUSH
TO
REACTOR
BACKFLUSH
GAS
BACKFLUSH GAS
ACCUMULATOR
SLURRY
IN
HCO or
LCO
SOAK IN
CLEAN
PRODUCT
OUT
FCC-E407
157048-1
Equipment
Page 149




GAS CONCENTRATION SECTION

The gas concentration unit is relatively easy to operate and usually trouble free. It
may be forgotten in the planning for the turnaround. This can prove to be a serious
mistake because the vessels and lines are sometimes subject to severe corrosion.
The amount and type of corrosion will depend on the feedstock, vessel metallurgy,
and the methods used to combat this corrosion

Corrosion in this unit can be broken down into three classifications:

1. Hydrogen blistering and/or embrittlement.

2. Corrosion of steel by hydrogen sulfide, cyanides, and other acids.

3. Ammonia attack on Admiralty tubes.

The first of these, hydrogen blistering, is the most common problem with general
metal attack by the various acids a close second. Hydrogen blistering occurs in
steel where surface corrosion is active. Blisters are formed by the diffusion of
atomic hydrogen into steel and then accumulate at slag or inclusions within dirty
steel. The atomic hydrogen then converts into molecular hydrogen, and the
resultant pressure forms the blister. Blisters may rupture to the thin side of the
defect. The presence of cyanides (Prussian blue) greatly increases susceptibility of
H
2
blistering in steel. The inspector should look for a bluish color when the plant is
first opened, because this is a good indication of areas where corrosion and/or H
2

blistering may be found. Hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S) also contributes to blistering and
corrosion; it is present in most gas concentration units. The inspector should look
for H
2
S pitting, blisters, and general metal loss. Inspection of the equipment should
be thorough, and when corrosion is found, the type and extent of the corroded
areas should be determined. It is not unusual to find one head or one particular
plate in a vessel full of blisters, with the remaining portion of the vessel in good
condition. Repairs can be made by replacing the damaged areas and still maintain
the equipment in service.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 150




Ammonia attack on Admiralty tubes in the condensers or coolers is not severe if
there is sufficient wash water during operation. Stress corrosion of brass tubes may
be seen in exchangers where the pH is high. Galvanic corrosion and dezincification
of brass tubes may be found where dissimilar metals are used in the condensers or
coolers. Water side erosion or corrosion of the tubes may occur if dirty or
contaminated water is used. This could be caused by suspended solids, or if there
were salts or other chemical species, for which the exchanger was not designed.
The type and amount of problems will vary between refineries. It may even change
over a period of time for one unit, as feed or cooling water quality changes. Every
turnaround a good inspection should be made with precise records on each piece of
equipment. Previous records should be available, and corrosion rates determined
each time. Changes of materials in bundles or shells, should be considered if
exchanger life is too short.

Gas plants are usually easy to gas free and open for inspection. Some units that
have been coated with an epoxy type paint cannot be subjected to steam for gas
purging. These items must use water or inert gas to clean for entry, which makes
the job more difficult. Knowledge of protective coatings and locations is a must for
the refinery safety and inspection departments. Operations supervisors should have
written orders for each piece of equipment which detail the correct procedures to
follow in flushing and opening these items.

Admiralty tube bundles should be handled in special slings to eliminate over-
stressing and potential stress cracking of the tubes at the lifting areas. Good
supervision of opening and removing of equipment is critical in this unit.

The inspector should follow the flow from the low and high pressure receivers to the
final condensers. Corrosion found in any item should be followed to the next item in
the flow pattern to determine the extent and area the corrosion has covered.
Because there is a certain amount of crossover flow, such as wash water from the
HPS to the MC overhead, there may be some backtracking. The corrosion
products, such as iron sulfide scale, will not necessarily be in the same area as the
most severe corrosion. Should hydrogen blistering be found, the blisters should be
measured, drilled if necessary with air drills, and the ruptured metal should be
measured to determine if the corrosion allowance has been exceeded. If blisters are
small, " (13mm) or less, they can be covered with a protective lining to eliminate
157048-1
Equipment
Page 151




future growth. Corrosion allowance in the blistered areas should be maintained if
possible. General corrosion, such as H
2
S pitting, may require replacement of all or
part of a vessel or line. Scabbing is usually not effective, but can be used if time is
short and if the scabbing is done well.

If repairs are not made, the item should be programmed for the next turnaround as
necessary work. Various metal corrosion test samples can be installed in the
corroded area to determine the best material to be used to resist the corrosion.
Hydrogen probes, electrical resistance corrosion probes, and corrosion coupons
can be used to indicate the rate and severity of corrosion activity during the run. On-
stream inspection of piping can also be used to monitor present problems and to
find areas that should be checked carefully or shutdown.

If corrosion or blistering is found, there is usually a question concerning
replacement with a higher quality material. All equipment eventually wears out; it is
a matter of comparing cost with possible benefits. Replacement of trays and other
tower internals is easier than replacing the vessel shell. If the refiner feels that the
equipment is wearing out too quickly, then a higher alloy may be justified. Before
the decision is made, a careful investigation should be conducted to determine
other ways of resisting corrosion. For the FCC gas concentration section, the best
method to resist corrosion is to maintain the wash water injection at a rate of 6.5-7.0
vol.% of the feed. This has greatly limited or eliminated corrosion in most cases.
Inhibitors have been used in some cases, but they are usually not necessary.

Most of the material used in the gas concentration section is carbon steel. Killed
steel is common for towers and the upper trays in the absorbers. The debutanizer
reboiler is very often 5% chrome, % moly steel. A lower alloy steel, such as
1% chrome, % moly, may be used in areas that have had corrosion problems.
In severe cases, the affected area may be lined with a 12% chrome, such as Type
405 or 410. The compressor rotor is usually a specially tempered 1% chrome,
% moly steel.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 152




WET GAS COMPRESSOR

The compressor of an FCC unit separates the relatively low pressure of the main
column from the higher pressure gas concentration and recovery section. Positive
displacement reciprocating or centrifugal machines can be used; the latter have
become more common because of better performance at lower cost.

During the turnaround, thickness measurements of piping headers and manifolds
should be made each down period and compared to previous readings. Severe
corrosion may be found in the discharge manifolds and piping to the receivers. The
manufacturer's instructions should be followed for the gas compressor inspection.
This machine normally requires maintenance work on the seals or packing.


CENTRIFUGAL MACHINES

Centrifugal compressors (Figure 87) are multi-stage machines, contained within the
two external stages. Each of the two stages is protected by an anti-surge device
which will over-ride normal controls to protect the machine. Gas leakage out of the
casing is prevented by suction and discharge end labyrinth seals. These seals are
backed by either buffer gas or seal oil, normally oil. The seal oil system runs 5 psi
above suction gas pressure, using a seal oil head tank or differential pressure
controller to hold this differential pressure even if suction pressure varies
somewhat. A balancing drum is used to offset axial thrust, so suction pressure is
maintained at both ends of the compressor. The seal oil system must be kept in
operation while the casing is under pressure or gas will leak out.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 153




Figure 87
Centrifugal Compressor

FCC/DS-R00-45


157048-1
Equipment
Page 154




RECIPROCATING MACHINES

Reciprocating compressors can be driven by gas engines, turbines, or electric
motors. They are usually constant speed machines. Suction valve unloaders and
clearance pockets are provided on some machines for greater operating flexibility.

A reciprocating machine should never be run with discharge valves blocked in.
Liquid slugging is also very dangerous, as the liquid is incompressible and will lead
to broken piston rods or a cracked head. Suction knockout drums should be
checked frequently for any liquid.

The reciprocating machine uses packing to prevent gas leakage from the
compressor. This simple system should work quite well as long as the packing is
tightened correctly. Over tightening will lead to excess wear and then leakage.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 155




FIRST AND INTERSTAGE SUCTION DRUMS

These vessels are designed to remove any liquid from the gas streams to the
compressor. They are normally carbon or killed steel, with a stainless steel mesh
blanket to remove any entrained droplets. The first stage liquid is drained to a
blowcase, and pressured back to the overhead receiver. The liquid from the
interstage drum is pumped to the HPS. A typical drum is shown in Figure 88. Pitting
corrosion has been found in the lower portion of the shell and bottom head.
Hydrogen blistering and embrittlement has also been found.

Figure 88
Compressor Suction Drum
Mesh Blanket
(Demister Pad)
Ventilation and
Vent Nozzles
Gas Out
Gas Inlet with
Distributor
LC-LG
Steamout
Liquid Out
Vortex breaker
Manway
FCC-E700
157048-1
Equipment
Page 156




WASH WATER

The overhead stream from the main column contains various contaminants which
may cause corrosion, plugging, or fouling. These would include ammonia, sulfides,
cyanides, chlorides, and phenols. A wash water stream is used to remove them,
because most of them are ionic or polar species, readily soluble in water. Flow rates
are usually maintained at 6-7 vol% of the fresh feed rate.

The water should be clean, preferably steam condensate, to prevent adding more
problems such as salts or dissolved oxygen to the system. The water is injected
after the compressor first stage and is pumped out of the interstage suction drum to
the HPS. Here it collects in a water boot and is pressured back to the main column
overhead condensers. It collects in the overhead receiver water boot and is pumped
out to the sour water stripper for disposal.

There is always water present in the main column and gas concentration section
from stripping steam and other sources. If the wash water is not used to flush out
the sulfides, ammonia, cyanides, and other species, the water present can become
highly corrosive from absorption of these contaminants. Sulfide levels of greater
than 20,000 ppm have been reported in the overhead receiver water. Hydrogen
blistering and general corrosive attack may become quite severe, especially if feed
sulfur is greater than 1%, or nitrogen greater than 1000 ppm. Also, while the
overhead receiver water may be basic, pH >7, most of the ammonia that is
responsible for this will drop out in the main column receiver.

The water in the gas concentration section may become acidic from H
2
S and CN
-
. If
there is any oxygen present, elemental sulfur may be formed from oxidation of the
sulfides. This will cause problems in meeting gasoline product specifications. Wash
water will solve many of these problems by diluting the corrosives, and keeping the
water pH at 8-9, where sulfide oxidation is greatly reduced.


157048-1
Equipment
Page 157




HIGH PRESSURE SEPARATOR

The HPS Figure 89 receives the liquid streams from the interstage suction drum
and primary absorber bottoms, and the gas streams from the second stage
compressor discharge and the stripper overhead. The vessel is carbon or killed
steel; it looks very similar to the main column overhead receiver shown in Figure
82, with a slotted pipe distributor instead of a baffled inlet. Sour water is pressured
from the boot to the main column overhead, while gasoline is pumped to the
stripper. The gas goes to the primary absorber. Pitting corrosion has been found in
the lower section. Hydrogen blistering and embrittlement has also been found.

Figure 89
High Pressure Separator


Slotted Pipe
Distributor
Inlet
Pressure Relief
Manway
Steam Out
PI & PC LI & LC
Ventilation
and Vent
Vapor Out
Liquid Out
Vortex
Breaker
LI & LC
Water Boot
Water Out
FCC-E701
157048-1
Equipment
Page 158




PRIMARY ABSORBER

The primary absorber (Figure 90)is a killed steel column with about 30-40 trays.
The trays are normally carbon steel with Type 410 stainless steel fittings. Valuable
light products such as LPG are absorbed from the gas as it travels from the bottom
to the top outlet. The most common tower design uses two intercoolers to remove
the heat of gas absorption from the gasoline as it fails down the tower. This
temperature rise is roughly 20-25F (11-14C). These intercoolers are located
roughly one-third and two-thirds of the way down the tower. The gasoline circulation
through the water coolers may be pumped or gravity driven. Water drain pots are
required on the gravity circulation systems to prevent accumulation of water as the
gasoline cools; a water head would stop gasoline circulation. Pumped systems are
better from a velocity, and thus heat transfer, viewpoint.

Another design that has become popular recently uses debutanized FCC gasoline
as a final wash before the gas leaves the tower. A cooled slipstream from the
bottom of the debutanizer is introduced at the top of the column, with the gasoline
from the main column overhead receiver entering the tower 5 to 7 trays lower. This
system allows the use of only one intercooler with the same or better C
3
recovery
efficiency, i.e., the amount of C
3
recovered in the debutanizer overhead compared
to the total amount produced. The gasoline from the bottom of the primary absorber
is pumped to the HPS; the gas flows to the sponge absorber.

Serious corrosion can occur in this column from H
2
attack. Hydrogen blistering can
be severe in the upper section and top head, and is also seen occasionally in the
middle of the tower and in the intercoolers. The shell and heads should be
inspected at each turnaround. The inspection of the internals should pay particular
attention to stagnant areas around weirs, downcomers, and nozzle extensions.
Bolts and trays should be inspected for tightness and embrittlement of materials.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 159




Figure 90
Primary Absorber
1
Distributor
8
9
12
13
14
26
27
28
40
Distributor
Recycle Gasoline Inlet
Vent and Ventilation
Vapor Outlet
Manway
Upper Inter Cooler Return
Lower Inter Cooler Return
Upper Inter Cooler Draw
Lower Inter Cooler Draw
Vapor Inlet
LC & LG
Liquid Outlet
FCC-E702
Unstabilized
Gasoline Inlet
157048-1
Equipment
Page 160




SPONGE ABSORBER

The sponge absorber (Figure 91) is a "guard" tower which uses LCO to absorb any
remaining liquid from the gas. If any significant quantities of C
5
or C
6
remain in the
gas stream, these will cause problems with treating. If the gas is sent directly to the
fuel system, condensation of heavy material is dangerous.

The sponge absorber is fabricated with killed steel. It used to be designed with 25
carbon steel trays; the tray fittings were Type 410 stainless. Currently, UOP designs
all sponge absorbers with packing towers which minimizes the risk of foaming. A
mesh blanket, Type 304 stainless, is installed at the top of the absorber to trap any
entrained liquid.

The gas leaves the tower on pressure control. Absorption LCO is flow controlled,
with a lean oil/rich oil exchanger to heat the rich sponge oil as it leaves the
absorber. This decreases the temperature effects when the LCO is returned to the
main column. The lean oil is water cooled after it leaves the rich oil exchanger, to
100F (38C) maximum.

The inspector of the tower should follow the same pattern of inspection as the
primary absorber. The sponge absorber is subject to corrosion and hydrogen
blistering, but usually somewhat less than the primary.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 161




Figure 91
Sponge Absorber
Pre-Distributor
Manway
Vapor Inlet
Steam Out
Liquid Out
Re-Distributor
Hold Down Grid
Mesh Blanket
Vapor Outlet
Vent and Ventilation
Bed Support
LC-LG
FCC-E703
157048-1
Equipment
Page 162




STRIPPER

The stripper (Figure 92) removes light hydrocarbons and H
2
S from the gasoline. A
LCO reboiler is used to heat the tower and to preheat the gasoline feed. The off-gas
goes to the HPS; an FRC in the gas line controls the LCO to the reboiler.

The stripper is made of killed carbon steel with about 30-40 carbon steel trays. Tray
fittings are Type 410 stainless. Some units have experienced high corrosion rates in
the stripper. The reboiler is usually carbon steel, but may be 5% Cr % Mo in
cases where severe corrosion has occurred. This corrosion is not common and can
usually be corrected without the additional expense of a chrome reboiler. Inhibitor
has been used in some cases, but this protection can be lost with unstable
operating conditions. The inspector should check metal thickness and the reboiler
should be checked for unusual wear during the turnaround.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 163




Figure 92
Stripper
1
18
19
36
Vent and Ventilation
Vapor Outlet
Liquid Inlet
Distributor
Manway
LC & LG
Reboiler Return
Reboiler Draw Off Well
Liquid Out to Reboiler
Steam Out
Liquid Out
Vortex Breaker
FCC-E704
157048-1
Equipment
Page 164




DEBUTANIZER

The stripped gasoline is pressured to the debutanizer for vapor pressure
adjustment. The LPG product after treating can be used for fuel or further
processed for petrochemicals. The gasoline product usually requires treatment for
sulfur, and the addition of inhibitors for better stability.

The most common method of pressure control is a hot vapor bypass around the
overhead condenser. The reflux back to the tower is temperature controlled by a
TRC device located on the fourth tray from the top. This scheme gives a better split
than overhead temperature control. Heat is supplied by a HCO reboiler,
occasionally supplemented by a main column bottoms reboiler. Hot fluid to the
reboiler tubes is FRC controlled. Insufficient heat will not give good fractionation,
too much heat will flood the tower.

The debutanizer (Figure 93) is killed steel with 35-40 carbon steel trays. Tray
fittings are Type 410 stainless. The overhead system is usually carbon steel, with
inhibited Admiralty tubes in the water condenser. The shell of the reboiler is carbon
steel; the tubes, tube sheet and floating head cover are 5% Cr % Mo. Carbon
steel clad with Type 410 stainless may be used instead of 5% Cr. Hot fluid flow is
through the tubes. This vessel and associated piping are occasionally subject to
severe corrosion and hydrogen blistering. The best solution to this and to the
corrosion problems of the other vessels is water injection at the interstage receiver.
As mentioned above, some refiners have also used alloy steel or monel instead of
carbon steel for severe cases of corrosion in the debutanizer.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 165




Figure 93
Debutanizer
1
7
8
19
20
35
36
40
Vent and
Ventilation
Vapor Outlet
Reflux
TIC
Stripper
Bottoms
Inlet
Manway
Reboiler
Return
Manway
Steam Out
Liquid Out to
Reboiler and
Product
LC & LG
Vortex Breaker
FCC-E705
157048-1
Equipment
Page 166




CORROSION


Steel Corrosion

It has been established that steel corrosion, hydrogen blistering, and weld cracking
problems come from a water, hydrogen sulfide, ammonia, and/or cyanide
environment. The overall corrosion reaction for steel is:

Fe + 2HS
-
= FeS + S
-
2

+ 2H (1)

The amount of bisulfide ion (HS-) formed depends on the pH, temperature, and
hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S) partial pressure and comes from the H
2
S dissociation:

H
2
S = H
+
+ HS
-
(2)

The iron sulfide (FeS) scale provides some protection against corrosion if the
system pH is about 8. However, dissolved hydrogen cyanide (HCN) accelerates
corrosion by destroying the protective FeS film and converting it into soluble
ferrocyanide complexes:

FeS + 6CN
-
= Fe(CN)
6
-
2
+ S
-2
(3)

The ferrocyanide (Fe(CN)
6
-4
) is easily recognized by its blue color (Prussian blue)
when water samples are allowed to dry.

Hydrogen Blistering

Some portion of the hydrogen atoms formed in the corrosion process (Equation 1)
gradually penetrates the steel through surface imperfections and diffuse into the
steel as atomic hydrogen. This diffusing hydrogen reacts to form molecular
hydrogen:

2H = H
2

157048-1
Equipment
Page 167




The hydrogen molecules are larger in size and are trapped in the steel cavities
causing local pressure to build up. The result is blistering and fissures in the metal.
High quality killed carbon steel usually has less inclusions today than in earlier
times, and blistering is usually less of a problem than before.

Water Wash

Most refiners feel that wash water is adequate for cyanide control. Hydrogen
blistering has not been a problem in most of the FCC Gas Concentration units.
Cyanide is effectively kept out of the Gas Concentration Unit through the use of an
adequate wash to the Main Column overhead receiver and to the wet gas
compressor Interstage suction drum. An effective water wash dilutes and scrubs the
corrosive species such as hydrogen sulfide, ammonia, chlorides, and cyanides from
the FCC light hydrocarbon streams.

As stated previously, the water wash rate should be at least 6-7 Vol% on fresh feed
to the FCC Unit. There should be no entrainment of water from the overhead
receiver to the primary absorber column. Recommended water wash sources
include oxygen free water, steam condensate, and boiler feed water before
alkalinity adjustment. If the wash water contains oxygen, gum formation will
increase and wet gas compressor fouling may occur. If the wash water contains
magnesium or calcium salts, these components will precipitate increasing the
fouling problems. Also, if oxygen is present, elemental sulfur may be formed
causing copper strip corrosion in the gasoline.

Condensate pH

Overhead streams in the fractionator and gas concentration section consist mainly
of hydrocarbon vapors, steam, and relatively small amounts of contaminants.
During condensation, the water phase absorbs some of the contaminants and can
become highly corrosive. The FCC Process condensate develops a pH of 7 to 9
because of the higher concentration of ammonia relative to the acid contaminants
and because ammonia is more soluble in water than hydrogen sulfide or hydrogen
cyanide.

157048-1
Equipment
Page 168




It is recommended to maintain the pH of the condensate in the range of 8.0 - 8.5 to
prevent elemental sulfur formation and reduce the corrosion rate. Polysulfide can
decompose at a pH below 7.8 forming H
2
S and free S. This will cause the gasoline
to be corrosive. The pH measurement of the high pressure separator and main
column overhead receiver water must be made at site with portable pH meters. The
pH of a water sample can change as much as 2 pH units if the sample is taken to
the laboratory.

Polysulfide Injection

Some Refiners who are processing feed with high nitrogen content and have high
cyanide concentrations in the Unit are using ammonium polysulfide to reduce the
overall corrosion rate. The ammonium polysulfide is an additive that converts
cyanides to thiocyanates by the reaction:

(NH
4
)
2
S
3
+ HCN = NH
4
SCN + S
2
-2


The refiner should monitor the Gas Concentration Unit carefully when injecting
polysulfide, since these compounds could sometimes cause more problems than
benefits. The following are some disadvantages of the ammonium polysulfide:

1) The pH of the system should be higher than 8.0. At lower pH values the
polysulfide decomposes into ammonia (NH
3
), hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S), and
elemental sulfur (S). The H
2
S will increase the corrosion rate and the
elemental sulfur (S) will give corrosive gasoline and equipment plugging
problems.

2) The polysulfide will commence salting out at temperatures below 38F and
plug pump suction and discharge lines.

3) The polysulfide will decompose at temperatures close to 250F producing H
2
S,
NH
3
, and S. As stated previously, the H
2
S will increase the corrosion rate and
the S will give corrosive gasoline and equipment plugging problems.
157048-1
Equipment
Page 169




4) An excess of 10 to 15 ppm of polysulfide over the stoichiometric amount of
cyanide is desired. If over 30 ppm is present, there will be enough found in the
sour water stripper bottoms to give problems in the effluent treating. Upon
neutralization the (NH
4
)
2
S
3
decomposes into NH
3
, H
2
S, and S. This can result
in bacterial kill in biotreating and equipment plugging.

5) Wash water requirements are generally higher to assure that the polysulfide
stays in solution. If the polysulfide does not stay in solution equipment plugging
will increase. Also, processing the additional sour water can be costly.



157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 1





FLUIDIZED SOLIDS


Introduction

A fluidized bed is formed by passing a gas upwards through a bed of solid particles.
If the gas velocity (U) is above a minimum gas velocity, U
mf
, the solids become
fluidized and the mixture behaves like a liquid.

Figure 1
Fluidized Beds Behave Like a Liquid




No Flow
Flow
U > U
mf
U < U
mf
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 2





A fluidized catalyst bed provides a number of key processing advantages.
Fluidization facilitates the transfer of catalyst, which permits the continuous
reaction/regeneration cycle of the FCC unit. Catalyst addition and removal is easy,
simplifying catalyst management. High mass and heat transfer in a fluidized bed
allow for efficient operation. For a given material and gas velocity, pressure drop is
lower in fluidized beds than in fixed catalyst beds. These characteristics make the
fluidized bed an attractive choice as a chemical or physical processing tool.

Fluidized Bed Theory

An unfluidized bed of catalyst is referred to as a fixed bed. The catalyst particles are
in close contact with each other and contain void spaces. The voids are due to the
spherical shape of the catalyst and the efficiency with which spheres can be
packed. By introducing a fluidization medium air, hydrocarbon vapor, or steam
the catalyst can be made to behave like a liquid. Once fluidized, the catalyst will
assume a level surface and exert a pressure profile similar to that of a liquid. In this
state, the catalyst can be made to flow through a pipe as in the case of the
standpipes and reactor riser. In essence, it is a liquid stream. It is this principle
which permits circulation of catalyst between the reactor and regenerator.

When a fluidization gas is initially introduced to a fixed bed of catalyst, there is no
change in the bed; the gas simply flows through the void spaces. As the velocity of
the gas increases, it begins to exert a force on the bed to lift the catalyst. The void
volume begins to increase as the bed expands. With a further increase in gas
velocity, there is a point at which the drag (friction) force exerted on the particle is
just equal to the force exerted by gravity on the catalyst. This gas velocity is referred
to as the incipient fluidization velocity or minimum fluidization velocity (U
mf
). Any
further increase in gas velocity allows the catalyst to freely move in the flowing gas,
constantly colliding with other catalyst particles. At this point the catalyst bed is
fluidized and behaves like a liquid.

157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 3





This behavior will change as more gas is pressured through the bed. Bubbles of gas
begin to appear in the bed. The point at which this occurs is defined as the
minimum bubbling velocity (U
mb
). The bubbles may be small ones which disappear
after a short rise, or larger ones that grow as they pass through the bed. As the
velocity is increased further, the bubbles begin to occupy more of the bed. The
bubbles bursting through the surface throw catalyst into the area above the bed.
The surface of the bed is violently disturbed by the slugs, yet remains fairly distinct.
As gas velocity is further increased, the bed enters a turbulent state, where the
upper surface of the bed is not well defined. Slugging by large gas bubbles
decreases. Bubbling bed regenerators typically operate in this region. Advantages
of this regime are high solids mixing and therefore high heat and mass transfer
rates, contributing to the combustion of coke off the catalyst. The mixing is primarily
in the vertical direction and is driven by catalyst particles being pushed upwards on
top of the bubbles then falling off and dropping down behind the bubbles as shown
in Figure 2.

Eventually, the gas velocity exceeds the terminal velocity of some of the particles in
the bed. This regime is known as fast fluidization. Combustors typically operate in
this regime. At this point, a fluidized bed is not maintained unless catalyst is
recycled to the bed. Further gas rate increase moves into the pneumatic conveying
regime. Without recirculation of catalyst, all catalyst will be blown out of the vessel.


157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 4






Figure 2
Bubble Driven Catalyst Mixing
Bubble
Wake
Drift
Catalyst
Flow
Gas
FCC-F001
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 5





Figure 3 illustrates the pressure drop across a bed as a function of fluidization gas
superficial velocity. Initially, the pressure drop increases with velocity to the point of
initial fluidization, U
mf
. For typical FCC catalyst this value is around 0.01 ft/sec.
Once fluidized, the catalyst exerts a pressure profile similar to that of a liquid. The
pressure head exerted by the bed will be about equal the weight of catalyst and the
gas contained in it. As a result of frictional losses, the pressure drop across the bed
is slightly greater than its weight. Between the point of initial fluidization and the
point at which entrainment begins, the behavior of the catalyst may be described by
the following equation:

AP =(
cat
+
gas
) * h where
gas
~ 0
AP = Pressure Drop, psi
= Density, lbs/ft
3

h = Bed Height, ft/144

At higher velocities, we approach the pneumatic conveying regime in which the
entire bed is eventually entrained; hence a sharp pressure drop.

157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 6





Figure 3
Pressure Drop Across a Fluidized Bed


AP = (cat + gas) * h gas ~ 0
AP = Pressure Drop, psi
U = Gas Velocity
U
mf
=

Minimum fluidization Velocity
U
mb
= Minimum bubbling velocity
Bubbling
Bed
Regenerator
Initiation of
Fluidization
Entrainment
Begins
Pneumatic
Conveying
Gas
Combustor
Reactor
Riser
U-U
mf
< U
mb
Fixed
Bed
Bubbling
Regime
Slug Flow
Regime
U>U
mb
Fast
Fluidization
Turbulent
Regime
Increasing Gas Velocity
U<U
mf
Particulate
Regime
I
n
c
r
e
a
s
i
n
g

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

D
r
o
p

A
c
r
o
s
s

t
h
e

B
e
d
= Density, lbs/ft
3
h = Bed Height, ft/144
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 7





FCC Catalyst Fluidization

FCC catalyst is a fine powder, generally smaller than most refinery catalysts. The
physical properties of the catalyst effecting the fluidization characteristics are
density, particle shape, and size distribution. In the Geldart powder classification
system, FCC catalyst is considered a Group A material. The A representing
aeratable. The classes of particles under the Geldhart classification system are
shown in Figure 4.

FCC catalyst bulk density (non-fluidized) is about 50-55 lb/ft
3
(800-880 kg/m
3
) and is
a result of catalyst composition and the manufacturing process. FCC catalyst is
roughly spherical in shape. This shape is advantageous to fluidization as it tends to
pack less tightly when defluidized. Spheres also lack the sharp edges which can
contribute to plant erosion problems. FCC catalyst is a mixture of particle sizes
ranging from 10-130 microns. The presence of fines (particles <40 microns) is
helpful for fluidization. Fines are introduced with the fresh catalyst and are produced
during operation of the unit by attrition. These smaller particles move more easily in
the gas and act as a lubricant between the larger particles to lower the minimum
velocity required for fluidization. Generally, the more fines in the catalyst inventory,
the easier the catalyst is to fluidize and the longer it takes to defluidize once the
aeration medium is stopped. The physical properties of the gas also have a strong
influence on fluidization. The primary factors are the gas viscosity and density.

FCC unit design takes into consideration all the fluidization parameters. Changing
temperatures, pressures, bed heights, and gas velocities are considered when
sizing and orienting process equipment.


157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 8





Figure 4
Geldarts Particle Classification
10,000
5,000
3,000
1,000
200
2,000
500
100
300
10 20 50 100 200 500 1,000 2,000
d
p
, Microns
P
p
,

P
g
,

K
g
/
m
3
C
A
B
D
A: Aeratable (U
mb
>U
mf
) Have Significant Deaeration Time
B: Bubbles Above U
mf
(U
mb
=U
mf
)
C: Cohesive
D: Spoutable
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 9





Fluidization in Regenerator

Superficial velocities in the FCC regenerator are considerably higher than minimum
fluidization. This is because the air rate is set by the coke make in the unit, not the
fluidization requirements. Less air would leave the unit behind in burning, with most
of the coke still on the catalyst. The regenerator diameter could be increased to
drop the superficial velocity but this would add considerable cost in construction.
Additionally, uniform distribution of air is more difficult in very large vessels. The
FCC design takes into account the need to regenerate catalyst, maintain
fluidization, retain catalyst inventory, and minimize capital expenditures.

The conventional or Bubbling Bed regenerator, shown in Figure 5, generally
operates with superficial air velocities of 2-3.5 ft/sec. This velocity is in the turbulent
fluidization regime. This regime exhibits violent bubbling and gas slugging which
causes catalyst to be thrown upward into the freeboard area above the bed. Most of
the catalyst settles back to the bed by gravity. However, some of the catalyst,
especially fines, is carried up above the freeboard area. The regenerator vessel can
thus be divided into two sections, the dense bed and the dilute phase.

The dense bed is all the catalyst contained below the established bed level. The
dilute phase is where larger catalyst particles separate from the gas and fall back to
the bed. Any catalyst particles that do not separate in the dilute phase, enter into
the regenerator cyclones. Catalyst entering the cyclones is separated by centrifugal
force with the larger particles being returned to the bed via the cyclone diplegs.
Catalyst fines too small to be separated by the cyclones are carried out of the
regenerator with the flue gas.

In a bubbling bed regenerator it is important that the coke and air are evenly
distributed. The air bubbles rising through the bed result in thorough mixing in the
vertical direction but little mixing horizontally. Therefore if the spent catalyst, and
therefore the coke, is not uniformly distributed the areas with more coke may be
short of air allowing CO to breakthrough the bed. The other areas with less coke
operate with excess oxygen. This combination results in afterburning and high
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 10





temperatures in the dilute phase. For this reason a spent catalyst distributor or ski
jump is used on all spent catalyst standpipe outlets. In many cases the air grid jet
plugging pattern will be shifted to areas expected to have less coke present to
reduce the air in that area.

The design distance between the cyclone inlet and the surface of the dense bed is
determined by the Transport Disengaging Height, or TDH. The TDH is a function of
the superficial gas velocity, vessel diameter, and the particle size distribution. The
amount of catalyst entrained in the gas above a fluidized bed decreases with the
height above it. A given particle reaches a distance above the bed where
gravitational forces overcome the upward drag forces of the gas, and the particle
falls back to the bed. The smaller the particle, the greater the distance. A height is
reached where the amount of entrained solids becomes constant, no more particles
are overcome by gravitational forces. The particles here are to small to settle. This
height, the TDH, determines what minimum distance above the bed the cyclones
inlets must be placed. Other considerations for setting the cyclone design inlet level
include dense bed level variations and minimum required dipleg length. To account
for these considerations, the cyclone inlet height will be greater than the actual
TDH.

As illustrated in Figure 6, if a regenerator is operated in such a manner that the
distance between the catalyst bed and the cyclone inlet is less than the TDH, the
catalyst density at the cyclone inlet will be higher. This will increase the catalyst
loading to the cyclone and potentially increase catalyst losses from the cyclone.

In a bubbling bed regenerator the discharge of the primary cyclone diplegs which
are returning hot catalyst to the bed can be directed to heat colder areas of the bed,
typically near the spent catalyst inlet.


157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 11





Figure 5
Conventional FCC Regenerator
Air
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
D
i
s
e
n
g
a
g
i
n
g
H
e
i
g
h
t
F
r
e
e
b
o
a
r
d
Catalyst
Movement
Gas
Bubbles
Dense
Bed
Flue
Gas
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 12






Figure 6
Schematic Depiction of TDH
TDH
H
e
i
g
h
t
Density of Solids
U
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 13





The combustor section of aHigh Efficiency regenerator operates at much higher
velocities than the conventional regenerator. The lower part of the regenerator, the
combustor, operates at the low end of the fast fluidization regime at a velocity on
the order of 5-6 ft/sec. At this velocity catalyst is carried upward. The catalyst
travels up the combustor riser in pseudo plug flow. Much of the catalyst slips behind
and backmixes as it moves upward. At the top of the combustor riser the
regeneration gas and catalyst undergo a primary separation. The upper regenerator
vessel is designed to operate with superficial gas velocities on the order of 2-3
ft/sec. Since the regeneration gas does not pass through the catalyst bed in the
upper regenerator, a small stream of fluffing air is directed into the dense bed to
keep it aerated. Since the combustor velocity is so high and the net catalyst flow is
up, external catalyst recycle is necessary to maintain density in the combustor. The
density in a high efficiency combustor is controlled with a slide valve on a recycle
standpipe. The amount of catalyst circulated from the dense bed in the upper
regenerator controls the density and temperature in the combustor.

Figure 7 represents fluidization data for a commercial combustor operation at
various catalyst loadings and superficial air velocities. The figure shows the
pressure gradient, or fluidized density in lb/ft
3
, measured across the combustor
section. The catalyst loading, W (lb/ft
2
/sec), is referred to as the flux and is the
summation of both the reactor-regenerator catalyst circulation and the combustors
external recirculation. Lines A through D represent lines of constant gas velocity.

The gas superficial velocity A lies well below the catalyst transport velocity;
however, at low solids flux (region X-Y) dilute phase flow exists. At condition Y, the
solids flux is sufficient to choke the system and any further increase in solids
loading (region Y-Z) results in a substantial density (inventory) increase. At the
higher gas velocities B & C, choking takes place at much higher solids flux and
results in a less abrupt change in combustor density with further increases in flux.
Such a region can be referred to as fast-fluidized. Eventually, at higher velocities
like D, true transport flow will be generated under which conditions no solid flux can
choke the system.

157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 14





This operating data demonstrates how flexible the system is in adjusting combustor
inventory/coke burning capacity for various operating conditions. Consider the
operating condition E at gas velocity B. If the superficial velocity is now increased to
C either by a change in regenerator pressure or air rate, the combustor density will
decrease to condition F at constant solids loading. However, if necessary, the
combustor density may be reestablished at condition G by means of increasing the
solids flux (opening the external recirculation slide valve). Note that an adjustment
in combustor density also changes the combustor inventory and a change in the
upper regenerator level (surge inventory).

The catalyst bed density in a regenerator is primarily a function of superficial
velocity. For typical bubbling bed regenerator velocities, bed densities would range
from 30 to 40 lb/ft
3
. By contrast, typical combustor densities range from 10 to 15
lb/ft
3
. Figure 8 gives a correlation between bed density and superficial velocity.
Figures 9, 10, & 11 show normal catalyst densities in various unit configurations.


157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 15





Figure 7
Combustor Operation

D
G E
F
(Z)
Gas Velocity, ft/sec Combustor Catalyst
Inventory, I =
Density x Volume
C
o
m
b
u
s
t
o
r

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
,

l
b
/
f
t
3
3
(X)
(Y)
(Y)
Catalyst Loading (W) lb / sec/ft
2
B
C
A
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 16





Figure 8
Catalyst Bed Density



60
50
40
30
20
10
0
B
e
d

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
,

l
b
/
f
t
3
0 3.0 1.0 0.1 10.0
Superficial Velocity, ft/sec
*Adapted from a paper "Fluidization and the FCC Process" by W.S. Letzch of Katalistiks
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 17





Figure 9
Catalyst Densities
Side by Side FCC with Bubbling Bed Regenerator/
Tee Disengager Riser Termination
35
(560)
3
(50)
35
(560)
5
(80)
40-45
(640-720)
2
(30)
Densities in lb/ft
3
(kg/m
3
)
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 18





Figure 10
Catalyst Densities
High Efficiency Regenerator/ Highly Contained
Riser Termination/ Elevated Feed
8-12
(130-200)
40
(640)
3
(50)
1
(20)
<1
(<15)
40-45
(640-720)
5
(80)
35
(560)
15-20
(240-320)
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 19





Figure 11
Catalyst Densities
RFCC 2 Stage Regenerator
<1
(<15)
40-45
(640-720)
5
(80)
15-20
(240-320)
35
(560)
35
(560)
35
(560)
3
(50)
3
(50)
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 20





Fluidization in Standpipes

Fluidized catalyst can be made to flow through pipe in the same manner as a liquid.
Standpipes generate static head which allows transport of catalyst between the
reactor and regenerator. The static head generated must be enough to overcome
any pressure differences between the reactor and regenerator. As catalyst travels
down the standpipe it carries gas with it which keeps the catalyst fluidized and
flowing smoothly. The pressure will increase as the catalyst progresses down the
standpipe because of the additional head. This increase in pressure causes the
entrained gas to compress and the void volume to decrease. If the gas is
compressed too much the catalyst in the standpipe becomes dearated, it will no
longer flow smoothly and can cause circulation problems. A condition know as slip-
stick flow can ensue where the catalyst breaks away from the dearated mass and
passes down the standpipe. Reactor temperature and reactor level swings can be a
symptom of this phenomenon. Standpipe design criteria are set to ensure that
pressure head build up, flux rate and velocity, and aeration levels are adequate to
ensure stable operation.

Figure 12 illustrates the pressure profile in a standpipe. Troubleshooting of low or
erratic standpipe flow should start with a single gauge pressure survey to ensure
that the right amount of head is generated in the standpipe. The head generation
should be the density in the standpipe, typically 35 lb/ft
3
(560 kg/m
3
) times the
elevation change. Another useful troubleshooting exercise is to check the flow
through the slide valve versus the expected flow predicted by the slide valve
equation:
W =
A x Cd x (DP x )
1/2
1.5
Where: W = Catalyst Mass Flow (lb/sec)
A = Total Slide Valve Open Area, in2
Cd = Valve Coefficient (0.9 Typical)
DP = Slide Valve Pressure Drop (psi)
= Standpipe Density (35 lb/ft
3
Typical)
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 21





Flow problems in standpipes can have several causes including:

+ Too much gas entrained into the standpipe
+ Insufficient gas to keep the standpipe fluidized
+ Shallow standpipe angle
+ Elbows in standpipes
+ Poor catalyst fluidization properties (typically lack of fines <40 )


Figure 12
Standpipe Pressure Profile

Height
Pressure
Slide Valve Entrance Effects
Slide Valve DP
Standpipe Entrance
Effects
Head Generation
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 22





Fluidization in Reactor Riser

Elevated feed systems use steam and/or lift gas to accelerate catalyst up the riser.
Typical velocities in the lift zone are 12-18 ft/sec (3.6-5.5 m/sec). This velocity is in
the conveying regime and transports the catalyst up the riser with minimum
slippage. This velocity region results in a moderate and uniform catalyst density
profile at the point of feed injection. The moderate density allows the feed droplets
to penetrate the catalyst more easily resulting in more uniform catalyst/oil
contacting. Feed is radially injected roughly 1/3 the distance up the riser where
rapid vaporization and reaction take place. The vapor expansion results in a
dramatic increase in velocity up the riser. Riser exit velocities of 60 ft/sec are
typical. Feed riser residence times are on the order of two to four seconds. This
would be considered dilute phase pneumatic conveying. During startup, shutdown,
or emergency situations, it is important to maintain lift media in the riser to ensure
that catalyst does not slump and plug the riser. Typically, lift steam is added to the
wye to ensure adequate velocity in the riser in such situations.

Because fluidized solids flow like a liquid they will flow into any stagnant area.
Therefore it is important to keep the feed nozzles purged with steam any time there
is catalyst in the riser without feed.

Fluidization in Reactor

Depending on the reactor riser termination, catalyst and oil exiting the riser are
separated in a ballistic manner or by centrifugal force in a vortex chamber or
cyclone system. The catalyst, once separated from the reaction products, falls down
into the reactor stripper. With modern, highly contained riser terminations, the
reactor is essentially a large disengaging device as the majority of the reaction
takes place in the riser.

As in standpipes, the catalyst flowing down the diplegs is kept fluidized by the
reactor vapors which are entrained with the catalyst. In direct connected cyclone
systems with almost all of the catalyst circulation flowing down the primary cyclone
157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 23





diplegs this gas volume can be very large, as much as 6 wt% of the total product.
Once the catalyst exits the dipleg the entrained gas is exposed to high temperatures
for an extended period of time in the large reactor shell volume resulting in higher
light ends and coke make. This is one of the reasons for development of the vortex
separation technology which provides a highly contained riser termination without
the entrainment of hydrocarbons back into the reactor through the diplegs.

Fluidization in Reactor Stripper

The reactor stripper is similar in principle to a dense bed in the regenerator. The key
difference is that the fluidization, or stripping, medium is steam and not air. Steam is
introduced through pipe distributors and flows up through the bed displacing
hydrocarbons from the interstitial and void spaces of the catalyst. Roughly 1.5 to 2.5
pounds of steam per thousand pounds of catalyst is required for a well designed
stripper. The stripping action helps to recover valuable reaction products and
maintains proper fluidization of the catalyst as it moves back to the regenerator.
Typical superficial velocities are in the range of one to three feet per second.

Poor stripper design can result in uneven distribution of the vapor flow. As a result
of this, some of the catalyst may become defluidized while the catalyst flux in other
areas of the stripper increases. This can reduce stripping efficiency due to poor
catalyst/steam contacting, excessive gas entrainment down the stripper and lower
residence times in the active portion of the stripper. As the catalyst flux in the active
area of the stripper increases more gas can be entrained down the stripper and into
the standpipe resulting in lower densities, less standpipe head generation and lower
slide valve pressure drop.

157048
Fluidized Solids
Page 24





Fluidization in Catalyst Coolers

As stated earlier, bubbles rising through a catalyst bed result in thorough mixing in
the vertical direction. In a catalyst cooler this phenomena is used to continually
replace cooled catalyst with hot catalyst from the regenerator vessel by bubbling air
injected near the bottom of the tubes. As the fluffing air rate is increased the rate of
hot catalyst entering the catalyst cooler increases. The heat transfer coefficient
between the catalyst particles and the tubes also increase with increasing fluffing air
as the bed becomes more turbulent.

Flow through type catalyst coolers also use a standpipe and slide valve to
continually circulate hot catalyst from the regenerator through the cooler. This
increases the temperature of the catalyst in the cooler further so that ~50% more
duty can be obtained from a flow through cooler than a back mixed cooler.
157048
Catalyst
Page 1





CATALYST


INTRODUCTION

The FCC catalysts in use today are a complex blend of technologies. The
workhorse catalyst in this complex system is, itself, a complex blend of
technologies. The main component in the workhorse catalyst is a crystalline silica-
alumina material known as a zeolite, or alternatively known as a molecular sieve.
The quantity and the properties of the zeolite in the catalyst can be altered to fit the
individual activity and product yield requirements of the refinery. A second active
component in the workhorse catalyst is typically an active alumina, included in the
workhorse catalyst to provide conversion of the very large and heavy molecules in
the feed, which are difficult for the molecular sieve to process. This second
component also can protect the molecular sieve from contaminants in the FCCU
feed, which can damage the performance of the molecular sieve. A third component
is added to this catalyst cocktail to make the catalyst hard enough to meet the
stringent particulate emissions requirements of the FCCU.

In todays world, other catalytic components are frequently combined with the
workhorse catalyst, as catalyst additives. These additives can be included to
provide increased gasoline octane, increased yields of light olefins, principally
propylene, enhanced coke burning characteristics in the regenerator, and
decreased SOx and NOx emissions from the regenerator.



HISTORY

The first FCC catalysts were finely ground, naturally occurring clays. By today's
standards, these catalysts were inexpensive, but they suffered from poor stability,
activity, and integrity. Activity was less than half what it is today, and erosion caused
157048
Catalyst
Page 2





by the jagged edges of natural catalyst created maintenance problems which
required high makeup rates to keep up unit inventory.

The first major improvement in FCC catalysts was the introduction of the all-
synthetic catalysts in 1946. These new catalysts were amorphous silica-alumina
materials containing approximately 12% alumina and 88% silica. They were spray
dried as the final step in their manufacture, which resulted in a roughly spheroidal
particle. This improved particle shape provided improved fluidization characteristics
and decreased equipment erosion problems. These low alumina catalysts were
more active than the ground clays and produced higher octane gasoline.

The early 1950's saw the next major improvement in these amorphous FCC
catalysts. The catalyst alumina content was increased to 25%. Catalyst activity
increased with increased surface area.

Shortly after the development of the higher alumina catalyst, a silica-magnesia
catalyst was introduced. Though advertised to be selective for middle distillate (light
cycle oil) production, these catalysts did not regenerate sufficiently to be
commercially acceptable.

A breakthrough in FCC catalyst technology for maximizing gasoline selectivity
occurred during the early 1960's, when it was discovered that molecular sieves
could be excellent cracking catalysts. The silica - alumina chemical composition of
the catalyst remained basically the same, but the structure was radically different.
The crystalline zeolite has a well ordered, repeatable framework structure in
contrast to the amorphous, sponge-like structure of the previous low and high
alumina catalysts. The zeolite, when first synthesized, contains ion exchangeable
Na
+
cations. In that form the zeolite is a poor cracking catalyst. The break through
discovery occurred when it was found that the replacement of Na
+
with either H
+
or
rare earth (principally lanthanum and/or cerium) cations by ion exchange converted
the zeolite into an outstanding cracking catalyst.

157048
Catalyst
Page 3





There are over 30 different naturally occurring zeolites, but only 8 exist in sufficient
quantities to permit commercial exploitation. Over 100 have been synthesized in the
laboratory. The zeolite used in todays FCC catalyst is called a Type Y sieve and is
close to a rare natural mineral called faujasite. Large quantities of this material are
synthesized by the catalyst industry; roughly 50 million pounds per year are used for
FCC catalyst.

When zeolites were first tested as FCC catalysts, a pure zeolite was used. In the
pilot plants in operation at that time, this zeolite proved far too active, more than 100
times as active as amorphous catalysts. But when the zeolites were incorporated
into an amorphous base, the catalyst showed great promise. The first commercial
catalysts were made with 8-10% zeolites, and showed an activity 1.5 to 2 times that
of the amorphous types. To utilize this higher activity, UOP introduced the short
contact time, all riser cracking concept. The short contact time minimized
undesirable over cracking, while the high activity maintained good conversion.
Since virtually all the cracking could be done in one pass, it was no longer
necessary to recycle large quantities of heavy oil from the main column. Obviously,
the fresh feed rate was increased. However, for distillate operations, the low reactor
severity desired still required a high recycle rate.

The Y-zeolite is made up of regularly reoccurring cage-like structures. The cage has
openings into the cage of approximately 7 in diameter. The zeolite is, thus,
sometimes referred to as a molecular sieve, since the constrained entrance into the
zeolite cage acts as a sieve. Molecules up to a certain size can enter the cage while
larger molecules are kept out. Cracking occurs inside the cage at the locations of
the active sites, which are associated with the aluminum atoms inside the cage. The
cracked products must then exit the catalyst. At this time, the accepted theory is
that the reaction is not diffusion-controlled or limited, although the effect is present.

When exposed to the severe hydrothermal conditions that exist in the regenerator,
the crystalline structure of the zeolite is susceptible to significant destruction of its
structure, resulting in loss of catalytic activity. A major advancement in catalyst
technology occurred in the late 1960s, when it was discovered that a controlled
157048
Catalyst
Page 4





hydrothermal pretreatment could improve the stability of the zeolite. The resulting
product was designated as ultra-stable Y-zeolite, commonly referred to as US-Y.

The 1970s ushered in the age of Environmental Sensitivity. Air pollution concerns
impacted the operations of the FCCU. This in turn ushered in the age of Catalyst
Additives. The first environmental concerns that effected FCC operations were in
the areas of CO pollution from the FCC regenerator and lead pollution from car
exhausts.

Prior to 1970, burning coke in the regenerator resulted in equal volumes of CO and
CO
2
in the flue gas. It was impossible to convert the CO to CO
2
in the FCCU without
creating unacceptable temperatures in the upper part of the regenerator.. A
modestly sized FCCU (20,000 BPD) without a CO boiler typically emitted over
20,000 lbs/hr of CO into the atmosphere. In the early 1970s it was discovered that a
small amount of platinum (~ 1ppm) in the FCC catalyst inventory allowed the CO to
be completely converted to CO
2
without causing excessive temperatures in the
regenerator. In addition to eliminating CO, complete combustion had economic
advantages as well. Today, the 1 ppm of platinum is typically added as a catalyst
additive, which contains a high concentration of Pt (500 1000 ppm).

Prior to the 1970s, tetra ethyl lead (TEL) was used to increase gasoline octane but
concerns were raised that it also resulted in toxic lead emissions in automobile
exhaust. In the 1970s, legislation in the U.S. was passed that reduced, and
eventually eliminated, the amount of TEL that could be used in gasoline. Refiners
had to take steps to regain the lost octane. The use of US-Y zeolites in the FCCU
was found to help increase FCC gasoline octane. At the same time, a new zeolite
with a smaller pore than Y-zeolite, designated as ZSM-5, was developed which,
when added to the FCC catalyst inventory, was found to increase gasoline octane.
An additive containing ZSM-5 was frequently used for this purpose in the 1980s.

Sulfur oxide emissions (SOX) from the regenerator flue gas became an
environmental concern in the 1980s. This led to another catalyst additive which
refiners could blend with their FCC catalyst. The additive captured the SOX
157048
Catalyst
Page 5





produced in the regenerator and carried it back to the reactor, where the sulfur was
released as H
2
S and left the FCCU with the product gases. The sulfur could then be
recovered as elemental sulfur in a Klaus plant.

In the late 1990s, concerns about nitric oxide (NOX) emissions from the regenerator
began to be raised. Catalyst suppliers began to provide additives that could be used
to reduce NOX. With the aid of the NOX additive NOX was converted to N
2
and left
with the regenerator flue gas.

Also in the late 1990s, demand for propylene increased to the point where
propylene became an FCC product of considerably greater value than FCC
gasoline. Refiners who could produce a high quality propylene product began to run
their cat crackers to maximize propylene. The use of a ZSM-5 containing additive
became the variable that had the biggest impact upon increasing FCC propylene
yields. Whereas, in the 1980s, a ZSM-5 additive was used to increase gasoline
octane, at the start of the 21
st
century, ZSM-5 additives were primarily being used to
increase FCC propylene yields. The trend towards increasing value of propylene
continued during the period 2000 2005, during which time the price of propylene
increased from ~$500 / metric ton to ~$900/ metric ton. Refiners have increased
their use of ZSM-5 additives during this period and catalyst suppliers have
responded by increasing the content of ZSM-5 zeolite in their additives. In the
1980s, ZSM-5 additives typically contained 10% ZSM-5 zeolite. By 2005, additives
containing 40% ZSM-5 were common. Catalyst suppliers were also beginning to
supply a multi-functional catalyst which contained, within one catalyst particle, both
a Y-zeolite component and a ZSM-5 zeolite component.


157048
Catalyst
Page 6





MODERN FCC CATALYSTS

PURPOSE OF THE CATALYST

Understanding some basic principles regarding fluid catalytic cracking (FCC)
catalyst performance is important to understanding catalyst technology. The modern
FCC catalyst carries out a variety of functions.

One important function is to provide all the process heat requirements This is
achieved by the burning of coke on the catalyst in the regenerator, which:

Heats the hydrocarbon feed up to the reaction temperature
Provides for the endothermic heat of cracking
Compensates for all the unit's heat losses
Heats the air from the air blower up to the temperature of the
regenerator

On the reactor side, the catalyst must have sufficient activity to carry out catalytic
conversion of the hydrocarbon feed before any significant amount of thermal
cracking occurs and must have the selectivity characteristics that provides the type
of products required by the refinery.

Thus, the catalyst must have the thermal stability to maintain particle and catalytic
integrity under severe regenerator conditions. It must have the physical strength to
maintain particle morphology under the severe impact and erosion forces so that it
remains in the unit, and it must have the proper flow characteristics to allow it to
readily flow between the regenerator and the reactor.

Thermal (free radical) cracking is the predominant cause for the removal of
hydrocarbon groups from the ends of a hydrocarbon chain, producing most of the
methane, and a large portion of the ethane and ethylene produced. Significant
quantities of the larger fragments (C
3
and greater) are generally not produced by
157048
Catalyst
Page 7





thermal cracking. Small amounts of C4 to C16 o-olefins are produced. A high
percentage of the olefins that are formed condense directly to coke.

Catalytic cracking, by comparison, produces fewer C
2
fragments and relatively few
C
1
fragments. With catalytic cracking, cracking occurs at the strong acid sites in the
zeolite cage where the Brnsted acid sites occur. Cracking is by beta scission. The
fragments that are cracked off the large gas-oil molecule are mainly in the C
3
to C
6

range. A large number of olefins are produced. Because of the ability of the catalyst
to achieve rapid double-bond shifts, the linear olefins are generally in thermal
equilibrium with each other. However, since hydrogen transfer (H-transfer) is a
principal reaction and is selective for tertiary olefins, the isomeric olefins are present
in less than thermal equilibrium, since some of the isomeric olefins are converted to
the saturated isomer before desorbing from the catalyst surface.

Basically, the catalyst carries out two classes of reactions:

Primary reactions, which involve only a single molecule.
Secondary reactions, in which bimolecular reactions take place. These
reactions involve molecules formed from the primary reactions.

Cracking of the original large gas-oil molecule is a primary reaction. Such reactions
can be:

Paraffin smaller paraffin + olefin
Alkyl naphthene naphthene + olefin
Alkyl aromatic aromatic + olefin
Multiring naphthene alkylated lesser-ring naphthene

The secondary reactions are mainly associated with H-transfer reactions of one kind
or another and generally result in the saturation of an olefin:

Olefin + paraffin paraffin + olefin
Olefin + naphthene paraffin + aromatic
Olefin + olefin paraffin + diolefin (or coke)
157048
Catalyst
Page 8





Olefin + olefin paraffin + aromatic

The isomerization of a straight-chain olefin, after the initial formation of the olefin, is
another important secondary reaction.

CATALYST COMPONENTS

To carry out its functions, the modern FCC catalyst is typically made up of four
separate but important components:

Zeolite (molecular sieve)
Active matrix component
Inactive matrix component
Binder

The inactive matrix component and the binder control the overall activity of the
catalyst by diluting the highly active components down to the proper activity level
and provide the proper particle strength and morphology. In the area of particle
strength, all catalyst suppliers have made major advances in catalyst attrition
resistance. In the 1990s, achieving good catalyst attrition resistance is generally not
a problem.

From a catalytic point of view, the zeolite and the active matrix components are the
items of principal interest.

The Zeolite

The zeolite provides controlled Brnsted (proton donor) acidity from its crystalline
structure and both Brnsted and Lewis (electron acceptor) acidity from the
nonframework alumina. Non-framework alumina exists as a result of the hydro-
thermal removal of alumina from the silica - alumina zeolite framework. Some basic
zeolite concepts help to understand how the zeolite functions.


157048
Catalyst
Page 9





Zeolite Reaction Pathways

Zeolitic cracking is believed to begin with the transfer of a proton from the catalyst
surface to an olefinic double bond in the hydrocarbon molecule, thus forming a
carbenium ion. The double bond was initially created through a free radical thermal
cracking step or by a Lewis acid reaction initiated by an active alumina surface.
These steps are illustrated below.

Initiation: nC
10
H
22
CH
3
(CH
2
)
6
CH=CHCH
3
+H
2


Carbenium ion formation (Brnsted Acidity)

The carbenium ion migrates freely through the hydrocarbon molecule to
increasingly stable locations, and arrives at a position where the flexing of the CC
in the position sufficiently weakens the bond, cracking the bond to a smaller,
stable carbenium ion and an olefin. This mechanism is known as Beta scission.

(Hydrocarbon)
(Protonated Catalyst Surface)
C
7
H
15
CH = CH CH
3
+
O
|
Si
|
O

O AL O
H+
|
|
O
O
Hydrocarbon Adsorbed on Catalyst
Surface in Carbenium Ion Form
O
|
Si
|
O

O AL O
|
O
O
C
7
H
15
C C CH
3
-
+
H
H
H
C
6
H
13
C C CH
2
CH
3
O
|
Si
|
O
O AL O
|
O
O
+
-
C
6
H
13
+ CH
2
= CH CH
2
CH
3
O AL O
|
O
O
+
-
|
|
H H
H
157048
Catalyst
Page 10





In this illustration, the -CH
3
fragment at the other C-C position can not generate
enough vibration to crack the bond.

The carbenium ion also promotes rapid skeletal isomerization to the tertiary carbon
location, which is the most stable configuration, as:

C
2
H
5
CH
2
CH
2
CH
2
O AL O
|
O
O
-
+
C
2
H
5
C

CH
3
O AL O
|
O
O
-
+
CH
3
|


It also promotes the bimolecular H-transfer reaction:












In this illustration, the hydrocarbon molecule receiving the H atom is no longer
attached to the zeolite particle and desorbs into the product stream. The molecule
which donated the H atom is now doubly attached to the zeolite particle, making it
more difficult to desorb. As the molecule continues to donate H atoms, it becomes
more and more strongly attached to the catalyst particle, to the point where it may
be impossible to desorb. It is then classified as coke.
CH
3
,
C
2
H
5
C CH
3
+ C
10
H
21
O AL O O AL O
, ,
O O
+
+
- -
O O
CH
3
,
C
2
H
5
C CH
3
+ C
10
H
21
O AL O O AL O
, ,
O O
++
++
-- --
O O
CH
3
,
C
2
H
5
CH CH
3
+ C
10
H
20
O AL O O AL O
, ,
O O
+
+
-
-
O O
CH
3
,
C
2
H
5
CH CH
3
+ C
10
H
20
O AL O O AL O
, ,
O O
++
++
--
--
O OO
157048
Catalyst
Page 11





Zeolite Structure

The zeolite used in today's FCC catalyst is the Y-type faujasite. The tetrahedral
structure is the basis for the entire geometry of the Y-type faujasite. The tetrahedron
is present at the beginning when silicon and aluminum atoms are combined with
four oxygen atoms (Figure 1) in a tetrahedral arrangement. The silica and alumina
tetrahedra are then arranged at the vertices of a truncated octahedron known as the
sodalite cage. This cage has 8 hexagonal faces, 6 square faces (Figure 1), and 24
silica and alumina vertices.

Figure 1
Zeolite Molecular Structure



The sodalite cages also combine tetrahedrally, through the hexagonal faces, with
other sodalite cages (Figure 2) to form the supercage, also known as the unit cell.
Eight sodalite cages make a unit cell. Some important dimensions of these
structures in a Y-type faujasite crystal are:

Sodalite cage
Entrance diameter 2.2

Tetrahedron
Oxygen
Silicon
or
Aluminum
Sodalite
157048
Catalyst
Page 12





Supercage
Entrance diameter 7.4
Internal diameter 13
Unit cell (as synthesized)
External diameter 24.67

Figure 2
Zeolite Molecular Structure

Zeolites are frequently referred to as either a large pore zeolite, with a 12 member
ring pore entrance; as a medium pore zeolite, with a 10 member ring opening; or as
a small pore zeolite, with an 8 member ring pore opening. The Y-zeolite is a large
pore zeolite with a 12 member ring.

Sodalite
Cages
Hexagonal
Prisms
Supercage
157048
Catalyst
Page 13





The key to the performance characteristics of this crystal is that aluminum is
trivalent and thus does not fit comfortably into a tetrahedral arrangement with four
oxygen atoms, whereas silicon, being tetravalent, does. In such an arrangement,
the silicon atom is electrically neutral, but each aluminum atom takes on a negative-
one charge. This charge is counterbalanced by a cation, such as Na
+
, NH
4
+
, Ce
+2

or La
+3
. The presence of these charged particles directly or indirectly produces the
protons on the catalyst surface that create the catalytic properties of the zeolite.

Zeolite Ion Exchange

When the catalyst is first manufactured, the charged particle on the catalyst surface
is not a proton. Rather it is a sodium cation that comes from the sodium aluminate
and sodium silicate used to produce the zeolite. Each supercage thus initially has
the formula:

Na
54
(AlO
2
)
54
(SiO
2
)
138
(H
2
O)
250


Each aluminum atom has a corresponding sodium atom. Also, when manufactured,
approximately seven aluminum atoms are in each of the eight sodalite cages, for a
total of 54 aluminum atoms per super cage.

In the sodium form, the crystal has poor hydrothermal stability because sodium
promotes dealumination of the crystal lattice. The sodium cation is therefore
removed by ion exchange during catalyst manufacturing and is replaced with either
ammonium cations, which form the Brnsted acidity protons directly upon heating in
the FCC unit, or with rare earth cations (principally lanthanum or cerium). The rare
earth cations hydrolyze water molecules on the catalyst surface and thereby create
the necessary protons. The rare earth cations are the most successful in preventing
crystal dealumination. Consequently, the early zeolitic catalysts used in the 1960s
and 1970s were fully rare earth exchanged.
157048
Catalyst
Page 14





Zeolite Dealumination

Under the conditions of steam and high temperature that exist in an FCC
regenerator, all Y-type faujasite zeolites dealuminate to some degree, even if fully
rare earth exchanged. The crystal structure is attacked by water molecules, which
extract the aluminum and deposit it within the supercage as Al(OH)
3
:


The non-framework alumina (NFA) that is deposited has catalytic activity (Lewis
acidity). It tends to catalyze the formation of C
2
and lighter gases, olefins, and coke.

The hydroxyl nest, which is formed when aluminum is removed from the framework,
represents a point of framework weakness that can lead to crystal collapse. In some
cases, silicon atoms migrate from the crystal surface into the crystal lattice in an
annealing type of operation and fill the vacancies left by the departing aluminum
atoms. Also, in other cases, silicon atoms from a collapsed framework react with the
NFA to form silica-alumina compounds.

A further effect of dealumination is that the crystalline structure shrinks in size, the
O-Si-O bond being smaller than the O-Al-O bond. The greater the degree of
dealumination, the smaller the crystalline unit cell size. Also, as aluminum is
removed from the crystal structure, the ratio of SiO
2
to Al
2
O
3
in the remaining
framework increases. The measurement of unit cell size by X-ray diffraction
techniques then becomes a convenient way to determine the SiO
2
/Al
2
O
3
ratio of
the zeolite in a catalyst. Such a relationship is shown in Figure 3.

O
|
O Al
-
O + 4 H
+
OH
-
|
O
OH
OH OH + Al(OH)
3
+ Cation OH
OH
157048
Catalyst
Page 15






Figure 3
Effect of Dealumination on Unit Cell Size


Because rare earth exchange prevents dealumination, the degree of dealumination
can be controlled by controlling the amount of rare earth exchange. Thus,
decreasing the degree of rare earth exchange decreases the number of aluminum
atoms in the unit cell and results in a smaller unit cell size (Figure 4).
24.70
24.60
24.50
24.40
24.30
24.20
5 8
10 20 30 40 50 60
SiO
2
/Al
2
O
3
mol Ratio in Unit Cell
0 30 50 60 70 80 85
% Dealumination (Starting with 5.0 SiO
2
/Al
2
O
3
)
U
n
i
t

C
e
l
l

S
i
z
e

(
a
o
)
o
f

N
A
-
Y

Z
e
o
l
i
t
e
,

90
24.66
24.52 (US-Y)
157048
Catalyst
Page 16





Figure 4
Effect of Rare Earth Exchange on
Equilibrated Unit Cell Size


One of the important catalyst developments in recent years was the realization that
important selectivity benefits can be achieved by reducing the amount of alumina in
the crystal structure. Because only the presence of aluminum atoms causes the
protons to exist on the catalyst surface, decreasing the aluminum atoms causes the
catalyst activity to decrease. Reducing the number of aluminum atoms also spreads
the active sites further and further apart, making bimolecular secondary reactions
(H-transfer) more difficult. This site reduction results in less olefin saturation (more
olefin production) and less coke formation and also increases the strength of the
individual acid sites by decreasing the interaction between sites. The net result is an
increase in C
3
and C
4
production and an increase in aromatic hydrocarbons in the
gasoline fraction. An important benefit is an increase in gasoline octane. These
trends are seen in Figures 5 to 9.
24.45
0
% RE
2
O
3
on 100% Y-Zeolite
24.40
24.35
24.30
24.25
24.20
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16







Z
e
o
l
i
t
e

U
n
i
t

C
e
l
l

S
i
z
e
,

(
A
f
t
e
r

5

h
r

8
1
5
o
C

S
t
e
a
m
i
n
g
)
157048
Catalyst
Page 17





Figure 5
Delta Coke at 65 wt% Conversion

157048
Catalyst
Page 18





Figure 6
Gasoline Olefin Content at 65 wt% Conversion


157048
Catalyst
Page 19





Figure 7
C6-C8 Aromatics at 65 wt% Conversion
157048
Catalyst
Page 20





Figure 8
Gasoline RONC at 65 wt% Conversion
157048
Catalyst
Page 21





Figure 9
Gasoline MONC at 65 wt% Conversion
157048
Catalyst
Page 22





Changing the degree of zeolite dealumination has some other subtle effects on the
cracking reaction and on FCC operating conditions. Increased dealumination (lower
unit cell size) increases the endothermic heat of cracking and also increases
cracking activation energy. The multiple effects of changing unit cell size are
illustrated in Figure 10. Although the higher heat of reaction and lower delta coke
resulting from lower unit cell size increases the catalyst circulation rate and lowers
regenerator temperature, it also increases coke yield because of the effect of
increased heat of reaction on the FCC heat balance.


Figure 10
Effect of Equilibrium Zeolite Unit Cell Size



24.25 24.30 24.35 24.40 24.45
Specific Catalyst Activity
A Coke
Heat of Reaction
Octane
Activation Energy
Equilibrium Zeolite Unit Cell Size ,
157048
Catalyst
Page 23





The ZSM-5 Zeolite for Octane and Olefin Production

The ZSM-5 zeolite cage, with a 10 member ring pore entrance, has a smaller pore
mouth (~ 5.5 ) than the Y zeolite, with a 12 member ring and a 7.4 pore mouth.
ZSM-5 is designated as a shape selective zeolite, meaning that the hydrocarbons
that can enter the Zeolite cage are limited to the smaller molecules, such as the
linear and singly branched molecules in the gasoline boiling range. Large
molecules, such as found in VGOs, can not enter the ZSM-5 cage. ZSM-5 is
considered to be a medium pore zeolite, compared to the Y-zeolite, which is known
as a large pore zeolite.

ZSM-5 also has significantly fewer aluminum atoms in the cage structure than the
Y-zeolite, hence it has higher SiO
2
/ Al
2
O
3
ratios. Depending on the zeolite synthesis
procedure, ZSM-5 type zeolites, as produced, can have SiO
2
/ Al
2
O
3
ratios in the 30
-50 range (the most common range) up to a 300 500 ratio. The latter are
commonly designated as Silicalites, since they are nearly 100% silica. Despite the
fact that these zeolites have very few aluminum atoms in the cage structure, and
hence, very few active sites, they still have surprisingly good activity.

ZSM-5 mainly cracks the larger olefinic molecules (C
7
= to C
12
=) in the gasoline
range, reducing them to smaller olefins, mainly C
3
= and C
4
=, with C
3
=/ C
4
= ratios
typically > 1. Some ethylene is also produced from the cracking of the large
gasoline molecules. At typical FCC riser temperatures, ZSM-5 does not crack the
saturated paraffins nor the aromatics in the gasoline boiling range.

Since the high molecular weight , paraffinic molecules in gasoline are low octane
components, removing them via ZSM-5 cracking, with the corresponding
concentration of aromatics, results in an increase in gasoline octane, both RON and
MON. Consequently, in the 1980s, ZSM-5 containing additives were used to
enhance gasoline octane. They did, however, have the disadvantage of reducing
the yield of gasoline.

157048
Catalyst
Page 24





As the demand for propylene increased in the 1990s, ZSM-5 additives began to be
used to increase the yield of FCC derived C
3
=. That trend has continued to
accelerate in the 21
st
century. Placing a high concentration of ZSM-5 crystalline
zeolite into the FCC catalyst blend can produce high C
3
= yields. Yields of up to 20
wt% C
3
= can be achieved with the proper feed and operating conditions, compared
to a C
3
= yield of 3-4% at conventional FCC conditions.

Catalyst suppliers are actively working to produce more effective ZSM-5 additives.
The additives produced in the 1980s typically contained 10% ZSM-5 crystalline
zeolite. As the demand for C
3
= increased, the need arose for FCC catalyst blends
containing higher amounts of ZSM-5. However, using large quantities of the 10%
additive resulted in a dilution of the base Y-zeolite catalyst. Since only the Y-zeolite
could crack VGO, the dilution resulted in an unacceptable loss of VGO cracking
activity. Additives containing higher contents of ZSM-5 were developed. A second
generation of additives containing 25% ZSM-5 was provided to the industry. Going
higher in sieve content and maintaining adequate attrition resistance proved to be
difficult, but eventually that problem was resolved. Additives containing 40% ZSM-5
with good attrition resistance are now available. Catalyst suppliers are now working
on developing a single particle catalyst which contains both a Y-zeolite and a
ZSM-5 zeolite.

Todays ZSM-5 additives are modified by the addition of phosphorous to the zeolite.
Phosphorous combines with aluminum atoms in the zeolite crystal structure,
through an oxygen bond, and enhances the stability and acidity of that alumina site.
Catalyst suppliers now routinely include the equilibrium catalyst phosphorous
content on their equilibrium catalyst report. Knowing the phosphorous content of the
fresh additive allows the refiner to tract the amount of ZSM-5 additive in their
equilibrium catalyst blend.

A typical set of results for increasing amounts of ZSM-5 additive is shown in
Figures 11 and 12.


157048
Catalyst
Page 25






Figure 11
Effect of ZSM-5 on Product Yields
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
ZSM-5 Crystal Content in FCC Catalyst - wt%
C
2
=
,

C
3
=
,

&

C
4
=

Y
i
e
l
d
s

-

w
t
%
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
G
a
s
o
l
i
n
e

Y
i
e
l
d

-

w
t
%
Gasoline
Butylenes
Propylene
Ethylene





157048
Catalyst
Page 26







Figure 12

Effect of ZSM-5 On Gasoline Octane
157048
Catalyst
Page 27





The Matrix

The matrix is defined as the entire catalyst particle except the zeolite. Its function is
to provide catalyst hardness, as well as to adjust the catalyst activity to the proper
level by diluting the zeolite, and to provide some special properties, such as
bottoms cracking activity and metals traps.

Zeolites have one major drawback: their porosity. The pore opening is too small
(7 to 8 ) to allow the large molecules with high molecular weight to enter the
zeolite cage. For this reason, some precracking must occur before the zeolite can
play a major role.

To some extent, the zeolite itself can provide this precracking function. The zeolite
has some external, active surface area that can be reached through the large inert
pores provided by the kaolin-silica binder matrix. Some mesopores in the 20 to 50
region are also created within the zeolite as a result of sieve collapse. These
mesopores can then provide some access to the zeolite interior. Consequently, the
zeolite itself can precrack a large percentage of the paraffinic molecules in the feed.
The large, multi-ring aromatic molecules create a more-difficult problem.

Active Alumina Matrix

The active alumina matrix component provides the catalyst with the ability to crack
these large molecules. As seen in Figure 13, the active alumina matrix provides
significant surface area and hence active sites in the 50 to 200 region. These
pores are sufficiently large to provide easy access to the large molecules and thus
allow precracking to occur.


157048
Catalyst
Page 28





Figure 13
Effect of Matrix on Pore Size Distribution






When precracking is insufficient, as it usually is when no active alumina matrix is
present, too few intermediate products are fed to the zeolite, and the zeolite tends
to overcrack these intermediates. The net result is a loss in LCO yield (poor LCO
selectivity). Thus, the addition of an active alumina matrix benefits LCO selectivity,
and the benefit is greater for an aromatic feed than for a paraffinic feed (Figure 14).

Figure 14
157048
Catalyst
Page 29





Effect of Matrix on LCO Yield




The typical active alumina matrix achieves its activity to a large degree through
Lewis acid sites. These sites are well known to cause coke and H
2
formation. Thus,
the selectivity achieved via active alumina cracking is expected to be substantially
poorer than with zeolitic cracking. This reaction occurs for both paraffinic feeds and
aromatic feeds (Figures 15 and 16).




Figure 15
27
20
Aromatic Feed
@ 60% Conversion
Matrix Area, m
2
/g
25
23
21
19
17
15
40 60 20 100 120 140 160
L
C
O
,

w
t
-
%
Paraffinic Feed
@ 75% Conversion
157048
Catalyst
Page 30





Effect of Matrix on Coke Yields

5.2
20
Aromatic Feed
Matrix Area, m
2
/g
4.4
3.6
2.8
2.0
1.2
40 60 20 100 120 140
C
o
k
e
,

w
t
-
%

F
F
Paraffinic Feed
157048
Catalyst
Page 31





Figure 16
Effect of Matrix on Dry Gas Yields

157048
Catalyst
Page 32





Catalyst Contaminants and Poisons

Contaminant Metals (Coke and H
2
Production)

A number of metals typically found in FCC feed are deposited on the catalyst.
These metals, including nickel, vanadium, copper and iron can catalyze unwanted
dehydrogenation reactions to produce large quantities of coke and H
2
. Nickel is
typically the strongest dehydrogenation catalyst of these metals. Vanadium
generally considered to be as strong. Iron, which originates as organically bound
iron in the hydrocarbon molecules of the feed, deposits on the catalyst and is an
active dehydrogenation agent. However, most of the iron deposited on the catalyst
originates from equipment scale and is inactive. The combined iron content, which
is thus relatively inactive, is typically considered to be approximately 1/10 as strong
a dehydrogenation agent as nickel. Copper has as much dehydrogenation activity
as nickel but is usually present in much smaller amounts.

A frequent method for expressing the combined contaminant potential of these
metals is through the use of an equivalent nickel value, where: E
q
Ni = Ni + Cu + V/4
+ Fe/10. Since Copper is usually present in very low quantities and iron is such a
weak dehydrogenation catalyst the equivalent nickel is often expressed simply as Ni
+ V/4.

The ratio of hydrogen to methane is an indication of metals catalyzed
dehydrogenation reactions. A sponge absorber off gas H
2
/C
1
ratio for
uncontaminated catalyst should be 0.1 to 0.3. A figure of 1.0 or greater would
indicate metals contamination.

One method of evaluating the effect of contaminant metals on catalyst selectivity is
to monitor the equilibrium catalyst performance in a standardized laboratory test
(see page 61) as the metals content changes. Some typical catalyst coke and H
2

responses to increasing equilibrium catalyst (E-cat) metal contamination are shown
in Figures 17 and 18. As seen in these figures, the response varies significantly
from catalyst to catalyst.
157048
Catalyst
Page 33





Figure 17
Effect of Metals on Coke Factor


Figure 18
Effect of Metals on H
2
Factor
3.0
1,000
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
Catalyst
F
A
B
Equivalent Nickel (Ni + V/4), wt-ppm
C
o
k
e

F
a
c
t
o
r

o
f

E
q
u
i
l
.

C
a
t
a
l
y
s
t
V/Ni
3.3
2.4
0.5
Catalyst F
Catalyst A & B
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
Equivalent Nickel (Ni + V/4), wt-ppm
H
2

F
a
c
t
o
r

o
f

E
q
u
i
l
.

C
a
t
a
l
y
s
t
Catalyst F
Catalyst B
Catalyst A
Catalyst
F
A
B
V/Ni
3.3
2.4
0.5
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
157048
Catalyst
Page 34





Extrapolation of Figures 17 & 18 would indicate that nickel levels above 10,000
ppmw would result in totally unacceptable H
2
and Coke Factors. Recent experience
has shown that these factors do not continue to increase linearly with increasing
nickel content. Rather, as seen in Figure 19, they reach an upper limit, which
depends upon catalyst design. It is believed that there is a limiting catalyst surface
area for supporting the deposited nickel. Once the metal has covered the available
area, additional metal deposits on top of already deposited metal and does not
generate any additional catalytic metal surface area.

Figure 19
Effect of Nickel Upon E-Cat H2 & Coke
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000
Ni ckel on E-Cat - ppmw
E
-
C
a
t

H
2

Y
i
e
l
d

-

w
t
%
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
E
-
C
a
t

C
o
k
e

Y
i
e
l
d

-

w
t
%
Coke
Hydrogen


Metals Passivation

The FCC feed additives that form chemical complexes with nickel have been
successful in reducing the dehydrogenation activity of nickel. Antimony compounds,
which have been in use for more than 30 years, are effective chemical additives.
157048
Catalyst
Page 35





Data showing the reduction in H
2
yield as a result of using antimony are shown in
Table 1.

Bismuth-containing additives have also been found to reduce the dehydrogenation
activity of nickel. Although somewhat less effective than antimony, the bismuth
additives have the advantage of being less of a concern from an environmental
point of view.

TABLE 1

HYDROGEN YIELD DECREASE EXPERIENCED BY
PHILLIPS LICENSES USING METALS PASSIVATION


Hydrogen Yield, SCFB FF


License
Catalyst
4 Ni + V,
Ppm


Unpassivated


Passivated


% Charge
1 3,600 92 58 37
2 16,200 202 104 49
3 6,540 64 21 67
4 10,820 126 62 51
5 8,800 87 55 37
6 6,140 161 103 36
7 8,300 105 85 19
8 10,800 71 19 73
9 9,300 159 109 31
Average 44
Reference: W.C. McCarthy, et al. Paper No. 13, Katalistiks 3rd FCC Symposium, 1982.
157048
Catalyst
Page 36





Perhaps the most-active area in catalyst development in recent years has been the
development of active matrices that minimize the adverse effect of metals. One
advancement has been achieved through pore-structure adjustments and alteration
of the surface chemistry of the aluminas, using a large-pore boehmite alumina.
Such a matrix alumina is believed to encapsulate the nickel, so that the nickel
surface is no longer exposed and cannot make contact with the hydrocarbons to
catalyze dehydrogenation. With this technology, antimony additives provide only a
small additional benefit. Equilibrium catalyst material data illustrating the
performance of such a nickel trap are seen in Figure 20.

Figure 20
Catalyst Performance with Nickel Trap and
Antimony


0.25
0
Without Nickel Trap & with Sb
Nickel, ppm (thousands)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
H
2

Y
i
e
l
d
,

w
t
-
%
V=1,000-2,000
wt-ppm
With Nickel Trap
With Sb
Without Sb
{
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
157048
Catalyst
Page 37





Contaminant Metals (Catalyst Deactivation)

Vanadium destroys the zeolite. In the presence of steam and high temperature
(regenerator conditions), vanadium forms vanadic acid, a highly mobile compound
that moves freely across the catalyst surface. It reacts with the aluminum in the
zeolite structure to form a low melting point eutectic compound that causes the
crystal structure to collapse. This collapse destroys activity. A typical example of the
effect of vanadium on equilibrium catalyst activity is shown in Figure 21.

Figure 21
Effect of Vanadium on Catalyst Activity

Vanadium traps have also been an area of considerable R&D activity. One family of
vanadium traps that appeared to have great promise was the titanate family,
particularly barium titanate. Laboratory testing in 1984-1985 indicated that catalysts
containing a barium titanate metals trap could sustain high levels of vanadium with
70
3,000
Vanadium Content of Equilibrium Catalyst, wt-ppm
3,500 4,000 4,500 5,000 5,500 6,000 6,500 7,000
E
q
u
i
l
i
b
r
i
u
m

C
a
t
a
l
y
s
t

M
A
T

A
c
t
i
v
i
t
y
68
66
64
62
60
58
56
54
52
Catalyst Addition Rate
~ Constant at 1.7%
of Inventory/Day
157048
Catalyst
Page 38





little loss in activity and with little increase in H
2
and coke production. Unfortunately,
when placed in actual commercial use, the titanates appeared to be sensitive to
sulfur poisoning and have not lived up to their laboratory performance. As yet, they
have shown little trapping capability in refinery use.

Rare-earth-based vanadium traps, which are much less susceptible to permanent
sulfur poisoning, have been considerably more successful in commercial refinery
use. This technology, which was originally commercialized by Katalistiks in the late
1980s, is now being used by Grace, designated as their RV technology. Grace
catalysts that incorporate the RV trap are called Residcats. The RV trap can be
used either as a separate additive or incorporated into the cracking catalyst particle.
Because of its high mobility, vanadium readily jumps from particle to particle,
seeking those particle locations where it has a high affinity. Separate particle
vanadium traps thus work nearly as well as in-catalyst traps. An illustration of the
effectiveness of the rare earth vanadium trap is given in Figure 22.
Figure 22
Effect of Vanadium Trap
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Vanadium on Equilibrium Catalyst, wt-ppm
Base Case
Vanadium
Trap
70
72
68
66
64
62
60
58
E
q
u
i
l
i
b
r
i
u
m

C
a
t
a
l
y
s
t

M
A
T

A
c
t
i
v
i
t
y
157048
Catalyst
Page 39





Sodium and other alkalis or alkaline earths such as calcium, potassium and lithium
are strong catalyst poisons which can have an immediate and significant impact on
catalyst activity. Sodium is usually present in the feed as salt resulting from
operational problems in the crude unit desalter or from purchased feeds from
tankers. Poor steam quality can also be a source of these contaminants. An
increase in sodium of just 0.1 wt% can cause a drop of up to 3 numbers in catalyst
activity.

Iron is another potential catalyst poison in high concentrations. If enough iron
accumulates on the surface of the catalyst the access to the active catalyst sites
may be blocked resulting in lower effective catalyst activity. Several units have
reported significant loss in catalyst activity when the iron on the equilibrium catalyst
exceeds ~3000 5000 wt ppm above the fresh catalyst iron level.

Basic nitrogen compounds in the FCC feed are temporary poisons that bond with
the active acid sites making them inaccessible for cracking reactions. The nitrogen
is oxidized off the catalyst during regeneration and leaves as NOx compounds in
the regenerator flue gas. The deactivation effect, thus, lasts only as long as the
basic nitrogen compounds are present in the feed. Typically, basic nitrogen
compounds make up about 1/3 of the total nitrogen compounds in the feed.

Coke can also be considered as a temporary catalyst poison, which sits on the
catalyst active sites and is removed during regeneration. If coke is not completely
removed during regeneration, a loss in actual catalyst activity will result. Typically a
loss of 1.0 1.5 activity numbers occurs for every 0.1wt% coke left on the catalyst.
Note that the activity numbers reported on a catalyst vendors equilibrium catalyst
report are determined after any remaining carbon is burned off. If the catalyst
leaving the regenerator does have a significant amount of unremoved coke, the
reported activity on the equilibrium catalyst sheet will thus not reflect the actual
lower, working activity in the reactor.


157048
Catalyst
Page 40





CATALYST ADDITIVES

CO Combustion Promoters

In the early 1970s, researchers discovered that certain Group VIII metals,
particularly platinum, can be incorporated into an FCC catalyst system at low
concentrations (13 wt ppm) to catalyze the combustion of CO to CO
2
effectively.
Of even greater importance was their discovery that at this low incorporation, the
Group VIII metals did not catalyze undesirable dehydrogenation reactions during
the cracking reaction. The cracking-selectivity characteristics achieved by the
cracking catalyst in use in the FCCU are thus not altered when such a CO
combustion promoter is added to the catalyst inventory.

The use of 12 ppm platinum in FCCU circulating catalyst inventories is now widely
practiced throughout the world to catalyze the combustion of CO to CO
2
in the
FCCU regenerator. The promoter is added to the FCC catalyst inventory either as
an integral part of the fresh FCC catalyst, where it is included in the fresh catalyst at
12 wt ppm, or as a separate additive. The additive, which typically contains
5001000 wt ppm of platinum, is added to the FCCU by a small metering system
that is independent of the fresh cracking-catalyst addition system. In the United
States, the separate additive approach is generally used; in Europe, the additive is
most commonly incorporated with the fresh cracking catalyst.

Through the use of a combustion promoter, CO combustion occurs readily in the
dense phase at temperatures well below 700C (1292F). It has been reported that
promoted CO combustion occurred as low as 650C (1202F) in a commercial
FCCU operation.

Promoted combustion has a number of important benefits. First, the afterburn
problem, i.e., burning in the dilute phase, is greatly reduced. By consuming CO in
the dense phase, the potential heat release from burning in the dilute phase is
significantly decreased. A commercial example of a 90F reduction in regenerator
afterburn by using a CO combustion promoter is as follows:

157048
Catalyst
Page 41






Without promoter With promoter
Typical flue gas temperature, F 1290 1220
Typical dense phase temperature, F 1225 1245
Afterburn T, F + 65 - 25

The increased flexibility of FCCU operations resulting from using a CO combustion
promoter is an even greater advantage. When using a promoter, the air rate to the
regenerator can be varied to achieve any degree of CO combustion that is desired.
By this mechanism, heat can readily be added to or removed from the regenerator
to produce changes in regenerator temperature, catalyst circulation rate, coke yield,
and reactor feed conversion.

In actual practice, the regenerator temperature is normally controlled at the
maximum temperature allowed by the regenerator metallurgy. Variations in feed
quality in the FCCU can result in significant regenerator temperature excursions if
the degree of CO combustion is unchanged (constant heat of combustion). With a
CO combustion promoter present, the degree of CO combustion can be varied to
hold the regenerator temperature constant at the desired maximum value even
though significant changes in feed quality have occurred. This flexibility is achieved
mainly through regenerator air rate control. To a lesser degree, additional flexibility
is achieved by controlling the addition rate of fresh CO combustion catalyst to the
catalytic cracker. When a CO combustion promoter is used, changes in the air rate
affect the amount of CO converted to CO
2
both in the dilute and in the dense
phase. Changing the amount of CO burned in turn affects both the dense- and
dilute-phase temperatures. Increasing the amount of excess O
2
in the regenerator
causes an increase in CO burning in the regenerator dense phase as indicated by
an increase in dense-phase temperature. Additional burning in the dilute phase also
occurs, causing an increase in AT (afterburning) between dense and dilute phases.
As a typical example, a decrease in CO content in the regenerator flue gas from 5
to 3 vol % would result in a dilute-phase temperature increase of 55F, a dense-
phase temperature increase of 29F, and an increase in dilute-dense AT of 26F.

157048
Catalyst
Page 42





The amount of promoter used can also be a variable in influencing the degree of
CO combustion. A promoted catalyst system can be classified as fully or partially
promoted. A partially promoted system is one in which an increase in promoter
content results in a decrease in the dilute-dense AT. Conversely, a fully promoted
system sees no effect on afterburn AT when the promoter level is changed. An
increase in the promoter content increases the proportion of CO that is burned in
the regenerator dense phase, and decreases the dilute-dense AT, as seen in
Figure 23 . The change in dilute-dense AT is mainly because of changes in the
dilute-phase temperature. Changes in promoter concentration have only a small
effect on dense-phase temperature but greatly affect dilute-phase temperatures.


Figure 23




Additives to Reduce Sox in Regenerator Flue Gas

Recently, governmental regulations, particularly in the United States, have
significantly reduced the allowable FCCU emissions for sulfur oxides. A new 50
MBPD unit or an existing 50 MBPD unit being significantly revamped in 2002 would
be required to meet <0.7 t/d of sulfur oxides in the regenerator flue gas.
157048
Catalyst
Page 43






Currently, many refiners find that the use of a SOx adsorbing additive is the most
effective way to comply with the EPA regulations.. With such an additive, the
following steps occur:

SO
2
is oxidized to SO
3
in the regenerator:
2 SO
2
+ O
2
2 SO
3

SO
3
is adsorbed in the regenerator by the SOx additive
SO
3
+ MO MSO
4

MO = metal oxide and M is most commonly magnesium:
The metal sulfate is reduced in the reactor
MSO
4
+ CH
4
MS + CO
2
+ 2 H
2
O
Release of H
2
S is released in the stripper
The metal oxide adsorbent is regenerated
MS + H
2
O MO + H
2
S
The H
2
S is carried out with the reactor products, goes through the product-recovery
system of the FCCU, and eventually to further processing for sulfur recovery. The
metal oxide adsorbent recirculates with the spent cracking catalyst back to the
regenerator for the next SOx adsorption cycle.

The first commercially effective metal oxide adsorbent consisted of a solid solution
of a pure magnesium aluminate spinel (MgAl
2
O
4
) with MgO. Such a solid solution (
Mg
2
AlO
5
) does not destroy the spinel framework. The adsorption activity of the
dispersed MgO in the spinel is much greater than that of pure MgO itself.

Cerium is effective in oxidizing SO
2
to SO
3
. Consequently, a cerium-impregnated
Mg
2
Al
2
O
5
actively converts the SO
2
to SO
3
, which is then strongly adsorbed by the
dispersed MgO as MgSO
4
. A completely cyclic SOx removal catalyst contains, in
addition to the above component, a fourth metal component such as vanadium to
catalyze the conversion of MgSO
4
to MgO.
Multifunctional SOx removal catalyst systems have been in commercial use since
1985 in the United States. Such systems have successfully reduced SOx
157048
Catalyst
Page 44





emissions in the FCCU regenerator by typically 20-60%, with reductions up to 90%
reported. Additive levels in the circulating catalyst inventory range from 1-10%. The
additive level and the amount of SOx reduction depend on conditions, such as feed
quality, the presence or absence of a CO combustion promoter, regenerator
temperature, regenerator mixing efficency, and excess O
2
content.

Hydrotalcite, a MgO/Al
2
O
3
containing compound, has also been found to have SO
X

adsorbent capability and is now being used in some SO
X
adsorbent additives.
Recently, both spinel and hydrotalcite types of SOx reduction technology have been
upgraded to higher performance standards, frequently by the addition of more
magnesium oxide component.

Because O
2
is necessary to convert SO
2
to SO
3
, decreasing O
2
in the regenerator
has been found to reduce the effectiveness of the SOx removal additive. The SOx
additives used in regenerators operating in a partial CO combustion mode, where
excess O
2
is frequently limited to <0.2vol in the flue gas, are less successful in
reducing SOx. In such cases, SOx removal is typically 2030% less than for a full
CO combustion ( 1+ excess O
2
) case.

Additives to Reduce NOx in Regenerator Flue Gas

NOx (nitrous oxides ) emissions are now recognized as a significant contributor to
photochemical smog and acid rain, and therefore have come under greater
regulatory scrutiny than in the past. In terms of tons emitted per year, the FCCU
regenerator is one of the largest point source of NOx emissions. Only a small
portion of the NOx present in the flue gas is produced through the oxidation of N
2
in
the regenerator air stream. The main source of the NOx comes from the
combustion of organic nitrogen, originating in the FCC feed of which approximately
50% ultimately reaches the regenerator section in the coke. However, only 5% to
20% of the organic nitrogen compounds entering the regenerator end up as NOx,
predominantly NO. The remainder is converted to N
2
. Since most of the organic
nitrogen ends up as N
2
, there is likely a secondary reaction with CO or coke to
reduce NO to N
2
. Although feed nitrogen is the source of NOx, researchers have
found that final NOx concentrations are due more to the type of N in the feed and to
157048
Catalyst
Page 45





the regenerator conditions, than they are to the absolute content of N in the feed.
The amount of excess oxygen may have a more direct correlation with the final NOx
concentration leaving the regenerator. Increasing the O
2
in the regenerator flue gas
from 0.1 to 1.6% has been reported to double NOx emissions when no CO
combustion promoter is present. Adding a platinum-based combustion promoter,
which increases the available atomic oxygen, can increase the NOx content much
more.

An emerging picture of the complex NOx chemistry in the FCCU regenerator
includes the following reaction networks:

Pyrolysis Oxidation
N (Coke) HCN N
2
, NO, N
2
O
N (Coke) NH
3
N
2
, NO, N
2
O

NO Reduction
2NO + 2 CO
coke
N
2
+ 2 CO
2

NO + C
FAS*
1/2N
2
+ CO * FAS = Free Active Surface

The use of platinum based CO combustion promoters, which decrease the CO
concentration in the regenerator, have been found to result in increased NOx
emissions. It is also believed that platinum promotes the combustion of HCN, further
increasing NOx.

Catalyst additives have had mixed results in reducing flue gas NOx emissions.
Recent research in NOx additives has taken two approaches: the development of
CO combustion promoters that do not catalyze NOx formation and additives that
directly reduce NOx emissions. Non-platinum combustion promoters such as
palladium and cerium on alumina have had some success. Copper on alumina has
had some success in converting NOx to N
2
.

Additives to Reduce Sulfur in Gasoline
157048
Catalyst
Page 46






The latest additive development has been directed at reducing the sulfur content in
gasoline, which is believed to be largely due to the presence of thiophene and
alkylated thiophenes in the FCC gasoline. The additives are intended to
dehydrogenate the thiophenes which then can crack, releasing H
2
S. Zinc based
catalysts on an alumina support have had mixed results.

CATALYST SELECTION

An enormous amount of flexibility is available in the design of FCC catalysts. The
catalyst designer can choose from a large variety of zeolites. Depending on the
zeolite chosen, the designer can vary the amount of zeolite, the type of ion
exchange, and the type of active matrix and can include metals traps or additives.
This complexity is illustrated in Figure 24. Each unique combination of these factors
provides a uniquely different result, and each has some specific positive and some
negative benefits. Catalyst suppliers are continuously working to improve the
catalyst to provide more flexibility to meet the specific needs of each individual
refiner.

The catalyst advancements are mainly related to improved coke and gas selectivity
in the presence of contaminant metals and in the presence of increased matrix
activity for better bottoms cracking and LCO selectivity.

Because of the wide variability in catalyst options and the individuality of each
refinery's situation, generalizing as to which catalyst is best should be avoided. The
choice is best arrived at when the refiner and catalyst supplier work closely together
to take advantage of the catalyst flexibility available. UOP can also assist in this
selection process by providing an assessment of the various catalyst options based
on commercial experience in other UOP units and on standardized testing in UOP
pilot plants.
157048
Catalyst
Page 47






Figure 24
Catalyst Formulation

Plus
Rare Earth Variations
Variations in Total Sieve Content
Combustion Promoter
Bottoms Cracking Additives
Environmental Additives
Low-Activity Matrix
Active Alumina
Matrix
Nickel Trap
Vanadium Traps
ReHY
USY
Other Zeolite
Treatments
ZSM-5
157048
Catalyst
Page 48





TIME AND TEMPERATURE EFFECTS

High temperatures in the presence of steam will result in loss in catalyst activity.
This condition exists in the regenerator where steam is formed as a result of
burning the hydrogen in the coke and in the lift zone of the reactor. The rate of
hydrothermal deactivation is relatively slow at temperatures below 1300 F (700 C)
and increases rapidly at temperatures greater than ~1350 1400 F (730 760 C)
although thermal stability varies from catalyst type to catalyst type. Generally,
hydrothermal deactivation in the FCC unit is minimal because the temperatures are
typically lower than 1350 F (730 C). Steam used in the reactor for feed
atomization and spent catalyst stripping does not contribute significantly to
hydrothermal deactivation because of the relatively low temperatures in the riser
and stripper. For a given catalyst over a set period of time (say one hour), a
graphical representation of the resultant catalyst activities at various temperature
levels is shown in Figure 25.

Figure 25
Catalyst Hydrothermal Deactivation
60
65
70
75
80
1350 1400 1450 1500 1550
Deactivation Temperature, F
5 hours - 100% Steam
M
.
A
.
T
.

C
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
,

w
t
%
Catalyst A
Catalyst B
Catalyst C
157048
Catalyst
Page 49





Use of torch oil can also result in thermal deactivation if the oil is not properly
atomized.

CATALYST MANAGEMENT

The type of catalyst used in a particular FCC unit depends on feedstock properties,
the desired product make, and unit bottlenecks. The choice of catalyst should be
made after careful study of all factors, including cost. Any catalyst changeover will
take significant time to be effective. Varying feedstocks and operating conditions
may also change yields and cloud the results of catalyst changes.

Fresh catalyst is typically added to the unit for two reasons:

1. To maintain catalyst quality.
2. To replace physical losses.

If the unit holds catalyst well, it may be necessary to withdraw equilibrium catalyst
and add fresh to maintain a desired activity. If the catalyst has been damaged by
excessive use of steam or torch oil, or contaminated by metals, it may be necessary
to increase the catalyst makeup rate.

The desired catalyst activity is based on several factors, the first of which is
economics. The refiner should examine.

1. Relationship between yield and activity.

2. Value of any extra conversion.

3. Rate of catalyst degradation at higher yields.

4. Ability of downstream units to handle extra conversion.

5. Cost of catalyst.

The addition of fresh catalyst should be done as evenly as possible. There are a
variety of continuous loaders on the market which make this quite easy.
157048
Catalyst
Page 50





If a large batch of fresh catalyst is added too quickly, the relative activity increase
may cause overcracking with lower gasoline and higher dry gas yields.

The unit should be monitored with plots to follow:

1. Catalyst activity. This is normally done weekly by the catalyst supplier.
2. Makeup and withdrawal rates.
3. Reactor and regenerator temperature.
4. Conversion levels and product yields.
5. H
2
/C
1
ratio This will indicate possible metals poisoning.

These procedures are required for routine monitoring of the unit. Moreover, without
them, it is impossible to make intelligent decisions on catalyst management.
It may be necessary to add catalyst to make up physical losses. These can be due
to excessive or improper steam usage, equipment damage such as a bypassed
cyclone If catalyst losses are severe, or fresh catalyst addition is not desirable,
equilibrium catalyst can be added, either from a newly purchased stock or from on-
hand stock.

In some units, low metals equilibrium catalyst is added to replace higher metals
catalyst from the inventory. This is an effective way to reduce the levels metals and
therefore minimize the negative effects of the metals without the high cost of adding
large amounts of fresh catalyst. This is especially true in units with resid feed stocks
which are typically higher in metals than VGO.

Catalyst loading and use should be reviewed periodically to ensure proper unit
operation. This review should normally be done about every two months. If there
are special problems such as metals, the policy will have to be reviewed more
often. Care should be taken, however, that other factors such as different
feedstocks do not lead to hasty, inappropriate decisions.


157048
Catalyst
Page 51





CALCULATION OF FRESH CATALYST ADDITION RATE

The fresh catalyst addition rate is a critical factor in the operation of an FCC unit
and in maintaining a desired catalyst activity. The following sample calculation
illustrates a method of approximating the addition rate to achieve a desired activity.

Basis of calculation:

1. Fresh catalyst activity is 79.

2. Equilibrium catalyst activity is 69.

3. Desired catalyst activity is 73.

4. Present addition rate is 2.5 short tons/day.

5. Unit inventory is 200 short tons.

6. Catalyst retention factor is 0.80.

The retention factor is an index attrition number which accounts for the weight
fraction of fresh catalyst that is not lost from the regenerator during loading.
Generally, the retention factor will vary from 0.70 to 0.80 depending on the specific
catalyst.

1. Calculate average catalyst age

ACA = INV/CAR

where: ACA = Average catalyst age in days
INV = Unit inventory in short tons
CAR = Present catalyst addition rate in short tons per day

157048
Catalyst
Page 52





In our sample calculation:

ACA = 200 tons/2.5 tons per day = 80 days

2. Calculate the deactivation constant

DC = [LN ( FCA ) - LN (ECA)] /ACA

where: DC = Deactivation Constant
FCA = Fresh Catalyst Activity
ECA = Equilibrium Catalyst Activity
ACA = Average Catalyst Age in Days

In our sample calculation:

DC = [LN (79) - LN (69)]/80
DC = 0.00169

3. Calculate the new catalyst addition rate

NAR = [INV x DC x RF]/[LN (FCA) - LN (DCA)]

where: NAR = New Catalyst Addition Rate in short tons per day
INV = Unit Inventory in Short Tons
DC = Deactivation Constant
RF = Retention Factor
FCA = Fresh Catalyst Activity
DCA = Desired Catalyst Activity

In our sample calculation:

NAR = 1200 x 0.00169 x 0.80]/lLN (79) - LN (73)

NAR = 3.43 short tons per day
157048
Catalyst
Page 53





4. Calculate the time required for 75% turnover at the new addition rate.

Inventory Turnover = - LN 1 -
PCT
100



(

(
INV / NAR RF | |


where: PCT = Percent Turnover desired
NAR = New Catalyst Addition Rate in short tons per day
RF = Retention Factor

In our sample calculation:

Time Required for 75% Inventory Turnover

= - LN 1 -
75
100



(

(
200
| |
/ 3.43 0.80
| |


= 101 days
157048
Catalyst
Page 54






CALCULATION OF METALS ON EQUILIBRIUM CATALYST

Excessive metals concentration on equilibrium catalyst results in undesirable
dehydrogenation reactions and loss of catalyst activity. The following sample
calculation outlines a method of predicting the current metals concentration on
catalyst.

BASIS:

Feed Rate 20,000 BPD
Feed Specific Gravity 0.9042
Metals in Feed 3 ppm
Catalyst Addition Rate 2.5 Short Tons/day
Metals on Catalyst Addition ppm
Initial Metals on Equilibrium Catalyst 1,000 ppm
Equilibrium Catalyst Inventory 200 Short Tons

Find metals concentration after 100 days of operation at the above conditions.

EMF =
EMI - FCM
| |
-
0.175 SG FFR FFM
CAR



(

(



(

(
EXP -
CAR TS
INV



(

(



(

(
+
0.175 SG FFR FFM
CAR



(

(
+ FCM


where:

EMF = Final Equilibrium Catalyst Metals Concentration in ppm
EMI = Initial Equilibrium Catalyst Metals Concentration in ppm
FCM = Catalyst Addition Metals Concentration in ppm.
SG = Feed Specific Gravity
FFR = Feed Rate in BPD
157048
Catalyst
Page 55





FFM = Metals Concentration on Feed in ppm
CAR = Catalyst Addition Rate in Short Tons per Day
INV = Reactor/Regenerator Catalyst Inventory in short tons
TS = Time Period in Days

EMF =
1000 - 0
| |
-
0.175 0.9042 20000 3
2.5



(

(



(

(
EXP -
2.5 100
200



(

(



(

(
+
0.175 0.9042 20000 3
2.5



(

(
+ 0


EMF = 2996 ppm

CATALYST PROPERTIES AND TESTING

Catalyst manufacturers routinely test for their customers catalyst samples taken
from the FCCU circulating catalyst inventory. These are referred to as equilibrium
catalyst samples, or E-cat samples. Samples are taken generally on a weekly or bi-
weekly basis, but, in special situations, can be taken more frequently. Samples are
also sometimes taken of the fines leaving the FCCU, when the FCCU appears to
have a catalyst loss problem. The evaluation report which a catalyst manufacturer
prepares contains valuable information that provides the refinery with a better
understanding of the unit operation and enables him to improve the operation of the
FCC unit. If the FCCU is having problems, the E-cat data can tell the refiner if the
problems are related to deteriorating catalyst performance or whether he should
look to mechanical problems in the unit.

At present, there are no standard catalyst testing procedures used by the various
catalyst manufacturers. Results for the same sample will most likely differ from one
laboratory to another. Catalyst reports are more useful as trend indicators than as
reliable guides based on their absolute values.

157048
Catalyst
Page 56





A catalyst test report will include information on the physical, chemical, and catalytic
properties of the equilibrium catalyst.

Under the category of physical properties, information will frequently be found on:
Catalyst surface area total area, zeolite area, and matrix area
Zeolite unit cell size
Catalyst bulk density
Catalyst pore volume
Catalyst particle size distribution
Catalyst fluidization properties

Following is a description of the various tests performed by laboratories:

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Surface Area

The body of catalyst particles is made up of pores which contain the active sites
where the cracking reactions occur. Nearly all (90 95%) of the catalyst's surface
area is internal. The total surface area, measured in square meters per gram of
catalyst, is made up of two components, the zeolite surface area and the area of the
material around the zeolite, known as the matrix surface area.

The zeolite surface area is the larger of the two and is a good indicator of the
catalyst activity. The zeolite surface area measures the area within the pores of
about 50 or less. The matrix surface area measures the surface area in the pores
> 50, which provide the channels through which the hydrocarbons can reach the
zeolite. The active alumina incorporated for bottoms cracking is found in this higher
pore range.

Surface area is measured by nitrogen adsorption at very low pressure. Total
surface area is typically determined by the BET method which measures adsorption
at a single pressure. Matrix surface area is determined by the t-plot method, which
157048
Catalyst
Page 57





measures adsorption over a wide range of pressures. Zeolite surface area is
typically obtained by difference.

Typical surface area values for Y-zeolite based catalysts range from 70-200 m
2
/gm
for equilibrium catalyst and up to 400 m
2
/gm for fresh catalyst. ZSM-5 has a much
lower surface area than does Y-zeolite. Unlike Y-zeolites, ZSM-5 loses little, if any,
surface area upon exposure to regenerator conditions. A ZSM-5 additive containing
25% crystalline ZSM-5 zeolite would be expected to have a surface area in the 70 -
90 m
2
/gm range, both in the fresh condition and in the deactivated condition.

Apparent Bulk Density (ABD)

The apparent bulk density of the catalyst is its density measured in grams / cc.
Fresh catalysts have ABD's ranging from 0.7-1.0 grams/cc, while equilibrium
catalysts vary from 0.75-1.0. The ABD depends upon the chemical composition,
pore volume, and particle size distribution.

Hydrothermal deactivation causes the fresh catalyst to both lose moisture content
and to shrink somewhat in size. With regard to bulk density, these are counteracting
influences. Bulk density, thus, does not change greatly due to hydrothermal
deactivation. Thermal deactivation, which can occur with an extreme regenerator
temperature excursion, does cause significant collapse of both the sieve and matrix
and hence causes a significant increase in bulk density. Monitoring the equilibrium
catalyst bulk density can provide an indication of such an event.

FLUIDIZATION CHARACTERISTICS

Some catalyst suppliers routinely test the catalyst in a fluidization test stand and
report the ratio of minimum bubbling velocity / minimum fluidization velocity
U
MB
/U
MF
. This ratio is a measure of the range of catalyst densities within which a
smooth standpipe operation is obtained. The larger the value, the better.

Particle Density
157048
Catalyst
Page 58






Particle density is the weight per unit volume of catalyst. Particle density is defined
as:

Skeletal Density
(Skeletal Density Pore Volume)
+ 1

Particle density is always less than skeletal density. A comparison of density would
be:

Particle Density 2 ABD 1.7 CPD

Compacted Particle Density (CPD) is similar to ABD, but the catalyst is tapped until
it settles to a minimum volume.

Skeletal Density

Skeletal density is the density of the solid portion of the catalyst, exclusive of the
volume of pores or voids. The values are obtained with a pycnometer after
determining pore volume. Typical skeletal density for low alumina catalyst is 2.35
g/ml; for high alumina the density is 2.5 g/ml. The zeolites fall somewhere in
between these two.


Pore Volume

Pore volume is another indicator of the zeolite content of the catalyst. Higher pore
volume would usually indicate higher zeolite content for two catalysts of the same
type, but would not necessarily indicate higher activity. Pore volume can be
determined by N
2
adsorption, or by water titration. The values reported on the
equilibrium catalyst sheet are obtained from a water titration.

157048
Catalyst
Page 59





The pore volume of equilibrium catalyst generally ranges from 0.2-0.5 cc/gm. The
variation here is because of the many different types of catalyst, and because of
different manufacturing techniques. Hydrothermal deactivation causes a slight
decrease in pore volume, while thermal deactivation causes a greater decrease.

Pore Diameter

This is a convention used to describe the average pore size. The assumption is
made that the pores are in the form of minute cylinders of diameter, PD, and length,
L. By definition then, the following equations apply:

SA = t (PD)L

Pore Volume (PV) =
t (PD)
2
L
4

Therefore:
PV
SA
= tL
(PD)
2
4



(

(
1
t (PD) L



(

(
=
PD
4


Therefore:
PD =
4 PV
SA

Using:
SA in m
2
/g
PV in cc/g
PD in Angstroms

The equation then becomes:

PORE DIAMETER (PD) =
4 PV 10
4
SA




157048
Catalyst
Page 60





Attrition Resistance

The attrition resistance of catalyst is an indication of its strength and hardness. A
more attrition-resistant catalyst will erode at a lower rate as it circulates through the
unit. Each catalyst supplier has their own technique for measuring attrition
resistance. Comparing one suppliers attrition value with another suppliers value is
not recommended.

Typical FCCU catalyst loss due to attrition is approximately 1 wt% of the catalyst
inventory per day.

Particle Size Distribution

The fluid properties of the catalyst are largely a function of the range of particle size.
Typical particle size distributions are:

% under 20 microns 1
% under 40 microns 10
% under 60 microns 33
% under 80 microns 55
% under 100 microns 73

Average Particle Size (APS) 75 microns

The average size, in microns, of the particles contained in a catalyst sample is
determined by the 50% point on a weight distribution plot. Equilibrium catalyst
usually has an APS of 65-85 microns.

The desirable particle size distribution is the coarsest one that still gives good
fluidization. This coarse distribution will also result in minimum catalyst entrainment
with the exiting gases. The catalyst will erode with time and provide its own supply
of fines, leading to a gradual catalyst loss.

157048
Catalyst
Page 61





Satisfactory fluidization demands a range of particle sizes. The percentages of
particles under 40 microns and over 100 microns are good indicators of the
performance to be expected from the catalyst. UOP FCC units are designed for
relatively coarse catalyst and normally operate quite satisfactorily with 5% or less of
particles smaller than 40 microns.

LOSS ON IGNITION

This is the amount of material which the catalyst loses after heating for a specified
period at temperatures in the range of 1000 to 1100F. Catalyst is usually sold on a
dry basis but shipped with some moisture present. Typical values are 10-15% by
weight. If the moisture content is too high, there may be problems with catalyst
packing in the hopper. If the value is too low, less than 5%, the catalyst has been
over dried. This could adversely affect activity and make smooth addition of fresh
catalyst difficult, due to static electricity.

CATALYTIC PROPERTIES

The catalyst's conversion ability is determined by testing in a small micro reactor
system at standard conditions. The test measures the equilibrium catalyst's activity
and selectivity. A decoked catalyst sample is used to crack a typical FCC feedstock
in a laboratory reactor. The resulting liquid and vapor products and the catalyst
coke content are analyzed and the results compared to a laboratory standard.

A catalyst activity number is reported, which is related to the conversion achieved in
the lab test, while the selectivity values relate to the catalyst's undesirable
characteristics of producing coke, light hydrocarbon gases, and hydrogen. These
data are found on each catalyst suppliers equilibrium catalyst sheet. Each
laboratory has its own unique feed and operating conditions for this test. Although
each catalyst suppliers reported values on the same sample will be different, their
values will not be greatly different, and changes reported from one sample to
another should be relatively the same.

157048
Catalyst
Page 62





The test method does not duplicate commercial performance so the results are only
relative. By comparing the results to a standard, however, the performance of the
sample in a commercial unit can be predicted. It is important to remember that the
sample is tested after any remaining coke is burned off so in units with high carbon
on regenerated catalyst the reported activity will not correlate with the activity in the
commercial reactor.

SELECTIVITY

The selectivity values reported for an equilibrium catalyst relate its tendencies to
form coke, C
1
-C
4
gases, and hydrogen to those of a standard reference catalyst
when corrected to the same conversion. Selectivity is affected by the catalyst type
as well as varying degrees of metals contamination.

The catalyst's coking characteristic is measured by the coke factor, CF, which is
dependent on the accumulated Ni + V level. This coke factor can be used to
separate the effect the catalyst type and its accumulated metals level has on coking
from the effects due to processing conditions such as the actual FCCU feedstock's
coking tendency and the FCCU reactor temperature.

Hydrogen (H
2
) production is also very sensitive to the catalyst metals
contamination. The H
2
producing tendency is measured by the H
2
/CH
4
factor which
usually varies from less than one up to two for metals levels up to 1500 ppm. Some
catalyst suppliers provide a H
2

yield value from their standard test.

The other selectivity value which relates to the catalyst's gas yield is the gas factor,
GF. This, like the coke factor, varies with the fresh catalyst type, but it is not as
metals sensitive as is the coke factor or the H
2
value . Generally, the gas factor will
not give an increasing trend until the metals accumulation exceeds 2000 ppm. This
factor is used to separate the effect the catalyst type and its contamination has on
light gas production from FCCU processing conditions such as reactor temperature,
regenerator temperature, or the feedstock quality.



157048
Catalyst
Page 63





CO COMBUSTION TEST

Some catalyst suppliers test the equilibrium catalyst for its ability to combust CO to
CO
2
. The reported value is given as the performance of the catalyst relative to a
catalyst that is considered to be fully loaded with a CO combustion promoter.











157048
Process Variables
Page 1




PROCESS VARIABLES


INTRODUCTION

Proper control of an FCC unit requires careful balancing of many variables. Within
certain limits, the system can be controlled to provide optimum performance. The
limits, or restrictions, include feedstock quality, equipment limitations, and environ-
mental constraints.

Of primary interest is the unit enthalpy balance which results from the many unit
operating conditions. The amount of coke produced in the reactor is a direct result
of the operating conditions imposed on the unit by the operator and is relatively
independent of the feed quality. The unit yields are directly related to the quality of
the feed and the operating severity set by the enthalpy balance. As these topics are
developed in this chapter, it will become clear that many of the assumptions made
by FCC operators are incorrect and a better understanding of the relationships of
the process variables is necessary to properly predict unit operation.


REACTOR-REGENERATOR HEAT BALANCE

The most fundamental principle in the operation of the FCC unit is that in steady
state operation the reactor will produce just the amount of coke necessary for the
regenerator to burn to satisfy the reactor energy demand. This is called the heat
balance. The calculation of the heat balance is shown in the calculation section of
this book. In this section, the relationship of coke burning to coke production will be
discussed.
157048
Process Variables
Page 2




The amount of energy flowing in the unit operation can be summarized as:

Energy In + Energy Produced = Energy Out + Energy Consumed

Energy In = Energy in the air to the Regenerator, raw oil, steam, and lift
gas

Energy Produced = Heat of Combustion from Coke

Energy Out = Energy in the Flue Gas, Reactor Vapor, Steam from the
Cat Cooler, Radiation Loss

Energy Consumed = Heat of Reaction, Sensible Heat of the Feed, and the Feed
Latent Heat of Vaporization

At steady state the net heat of combustion must equal the heat consumed by the
reactor. Stated mathematically:

NET HEAT OF COMBUSTION

[H
comb
- H
air
- H
loss
]
BTU
LB COKE


MUST EQUAL

TOTAL REACTOR HEAT LOAD

[H
feed
+ H
diluent
+ H
recycle
+ H
Rx
]
FEED LB
BTU

157048
Process Variables
Page 3




The coke yield from the unit can then be written as:

WT% COKE YIELD ON FEED =
100 AH
feed
+ AH
diluent

+ AH
recycle
+ AH
Rx
| |
BTU
LB FEED
AH
comb
- AH
air
- AH
loss
| |
BTU
LB COKE


Note that the coke yield depends on the energy balance of the unit and the only
term that represents feed quality is the heat of reaction. Thus as feed quality
changes and the heat of reaction changes, there will be a change in coke yield.
Otherwise, the coke yield is set by the operating conditions imposed by the
operator.

THE ENTHALPY OPERATING WINDOW

Let us take as an example a unit operating in full CO combustion with a heavy gas
oil feed in once-through (no recycle) operation. As shown in the calculation section,
the enthalpy changes for diluents and normal vessel heat losses are negligible, so
the coke yield equation can be simplified to:

WT% COKE =
100 AH feed + AH Rx | |
AH Comb Net | |


The unit control variables then become the feed temperature and the reactor
temperature. The usual range of feed temperature is 350-520F and 970-990F for
the reactor so a table showing the enthalpy changes for these ranges is:


CONTROL VARIABLE DEPENDENT VARIABLE

REACTOR TEMP. 970 - 990F H REACTION

FEED TEMP. 350 - 520F REGEN CAT. TEMP.

H FEED 409 - 530 BTU/LB FEED

157048
Process Variables
Page 4




Thus, the maximum range in coke yield variability for these operating ranges is
4.8-5.8 wt%. The potential change in coke yield due to any variation in dependent
variable such as heat of reaction, flue gas temperature, feed enthalpy and heat of
reaction is extremely limited. The following table shows the range of coke yields for
various variable changes.


DEPENDENT
VARIABLE RANGE ENTHALPY COKE YIELD

HEAT REACTION LOW/HIGH CONV. 100 - 200 4.6 - 5.5
BTU/Lb Fd

REGEN TEMP. 1250 - 1400F 3407 - 4010 5.14 - 5.39
BTU/Lb Coke

H
2
IN COKE 6.0 - 7.0 16547 - 17000 5.5 - 5.3
BTU/Lb Coke


The net coke yield is thus essentially independent of feed quality. The conversion
and the cat/oil ratio are the variables that change with varying feed quality. In
essence, conversion coke from the quality feed is replaced by contaminant coke
from the poor feed at a correspondingly lower conversion.

Another way to look at this balance is to look only at the components of the reactor
side heat balance.


BTU/Lb Feed %
Feed Enthalpy Requirement 530 72.6
Stripping Steam Enthalpy 5 0.68
Feed Steam Enthalpy Requirement 13 1.78
Heat of Reaction 180 24.67
Heat Loss 2 0.27
TOTAL 730 100

157048
Process Variables
Page 5




Over 70% of the coke produced in the unit is used just to heat up and vaporize the
feed. Only about one fourth of the coke is used to provide the heat of reaction. As
we saw above, the heat of reaction does not vary very much from feed to feed, so
the range of coke production can be seen clearly to be limited to less than half of
25% or about 10% of its typical value. In most units this corresponds to 5.5 wt%
plus or minus 10% (5.0 to 6.05) even for wide swings in feed quality and conversion
level.

THE DELTA COKE OPERATING WINDOW

Now that the coke yield on feed is known to be set by the operating conditions in the
unit, the next important term in the heat balance is the 'delta coke'. Delta coke is the
difference in coke content between the regenerated catalyst and spent catalyst.
Another way to express this is the coke yield on feed divided by the catalyst/oil ratio.

DELTA COKE =
ENTHALPY COKE
CAT/OIL
(or COKE YIELD)

Since the coke yield is set by the operating conditions, the cat/oil and the delta coke
must vary proportionally opposite to each other. The delta coke term is strongly
related to the regenerator temperature and thus the product selectivities.

T
Regen
= T
Rx
+
AC
C
p
AH
comb
- AH
air
- AH
loss
| |

where: C
p
= catalyst heat capacity
C = delta coke

Rearranging the equation, the cat/oil ratio can be calculated knowing the
regenerator and reactor temperatures, and the coke yield from the heat balance
calculation.

Cat /Oil =
Coke Yield wt% | |
100 C
p
| |

AH Comb Net | |
T
Regen
- T
Reactor
| |

157048
Process Variables
Page 6




At constant operating conditions if the delta coke is changed the regenerator
temperature and cat/oil ratio will vary as follows:


DELTA COKE 0.5 0.775 0.928 1.137

REGEN TEMP F 1250 1330 1390 1470

CAT/OIL 11.4 7.6 6.5 5.4

COKE YIELD WT% 5.7 5.91 6.03 6.18

BASIS: 980F Rx, 350F Feed, 190 BTU/Lb Feed H
Rx,
FULL CO
COMBUSTION, 1.0 CFR


The delta coke function therefore impacts conversion and selectivity enormously
due to its influence on regenerator temperature and corresponding cat/oil. At the
same time, since the regenerator temperature has little influence on the enthalpy
coke, the coke yield changes very little for large variations in delta coke at constant
heat of reaction.

HEAT REMOVAL FROM THE REGENERATOR BY CATALYST COOLING

Since we have just seen that the coke yield is set by the operating conditions and
not the feed quality, what can be done when a poor quality feed must be processed
and the conversion is not sufficient at the current operating conditions? At the same
time, this poor quality feed usually will result in a higher regenerator temperature as
well, causing a decline in liquid product yield. If a constant coke yield is required
due to an air blower limitation, any heat input to the reactor side must be offset by a
similar heat removal on the regenerator side. With the installation of a catalyst
cooler, the feed preheat can be increased to reduce the coke make, and a
corresponding heat removal via catalyst cooling can be done in the regenerator to
increase the cat/oil ratio and increase conversion to maintain constant coke
157048
Process Variables
Page 7




production. The overall yields can be greatly improved through the increase in
catalyst circulation. The higher E-cat activity resulting from the lower temperature
also improves the yields.

COKE YIELD FLEXIBILITY FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE

The prime objective of most FCC operations is the conversion of feedstock to
gasoline and other valuable products, while minimizing the production of less
valuable products such as clarified oil and coke. The unique feature of an FCC unit
is that it supplies its own fuel, not only for the conversion to the products it
produces, but also for the fractionation of the products as well. This fuel is the by-
product of the cracking reactions left on the catalyst, commonly referred to as coke.
It has been the quest of designers not only to minimize coke on catalyst from the
cracking reactions, but to minimize coke on catalyst from other sources as well. It
has been documented that coke on catalyst can come from feed contamination
such as metals, coke added by the high boiling fraction of the feed, and by
entrainment from the catalyst circulation through the reactor stripper. The objective
is to produce the most desirable yield pattern for a given feedstock with the least
amount of coke possible. Once a unit is designed, it has a certain coke burning
capability which the operator can utilize to increase cracking severity as much as
desired for each feedstock. With heavier feeds that contain less hydrogen and
inherently produce less liquid yield volume, high coke burning capabilities are
needed and a way to increase the coke yield to improve yields is needed. The key
is to produce enough coke to increase the conversion of the feed until the optimum
yield pattern is achieved.

QUALITY AND CONDITION OF CHARGESTOCK

The typical feed to an FCC unit is a heavy gas oil, such as heavy atmospheric, light
vacuum, and heavy vacuum gas oil. The unit can accommodate a range of different
rates and types of feed within its design limitations. Typically a unit may run at
design conditions, at a higher charge rate with moderate conversion, or at low
charge rates with very high conversion levels.

157048
Process Variables
Page 8




Some FCC units recycle heavy oil from the main column back to the riser. The
amount is defined by the combined feed ratio:

CFR =
BPD raw oil + BPD total recycle
BPD raw oil


Typical combined feed ratios for riser cracking units operating with a higher activity
catalyst would be 1.0-1.10. Older units running on low activity catalyst could range
from 1.2 to 1.8. If the oil can be cracked on one pass and not recycled, more fresh
feed can be processed. The recycle is generally heavy material which tends to be
more difficult to crack, and when it does crack, it makes more coke and light gas
than does the fresh feed. Many refiners run only enough recycle to return catalyst
fines to the reactor from the main column. This generally means a CFR of 1.05 or
less.

Proper control of upstream units, such as the vacuum column, is essential to good
feed quality. This control is mentioned only briefly in the following discussion
because it is beyond the scope of this work, but will affect all the variables listed
below.

There are several important characteristics which are used to describe the raw oil
charge. These relate to its ease of cracking and to most potential problems. The
major elements are:

RAW OIL CHARGE CHARACTERISTICS

1. API GRAVITY AND UOP K (HYDROGEN CONTENT)
2. BOILING RANGE
3. AVERAGE BOILING POINT
4. CARBON RESIDUE
5. METALS
6. SULFUR, NITROGEN, AND OXYGEN
157048
Process Variables
Page 9




API GRAVITY

API gravity is a specific gravity relating the density of oil to the density of water.
Feed to an FCC can range from 15 to 45 API, with 20-25 API the most common.
Any change in this number is due to a change in boiling range, crude type, or both.
If the API gravity increases because the feedstock is more saturated (paraffinic and
less aromatic), the following changes can be expected:

1. The charge will crack more readily for the same reactor temperature and there
will be greater conversion.

2. At a constant conversion level, there will be a greater gasoline yield, with a
slightly lower octane.

3. Products will be less olefinic.

A rough indication of the quantities of paraffins present is a characterization factor
which relates boiling point to specific gravity. This is the UOP K factor, which is
given by:

UOP K =
(CABP)
SG
60
1/3

where:

CABP = Cubic average boiling point, R
SG
60
= Specific Gravity at 60F

A detailed example of this calculation is given earlier. A UOP K factor of 11.2 would
show a more aromatic stock, while a K factor of 12.5 would indicate a more highly
paraffinic stock. One key feature of the FCC unit is that the hydrogen in the product
streams must come from the hydrogen in the feed. There is no added hydrogen in
this process. One good way to check the quality of FCC data and yield estimates is
157048
Process Variables
Page 10




to do a hydrogen balance across the unit as shown in the calculation section.
Gasoline yield is a very strong function of the H
2
in feed as shown:

GASOLINE YIELD vs. HYDROGEN CONTENT

















BOILING RANGE

The boiling point range of FCC feed usually varies from an initial point of 500F
(260C) to an endpoint of about 1050F (565C). The distillation must be conducted
under vacuum and corrected to atmospheric pressure, because thermal cracking
will occur above 700F (371C).

There are two boiling point ranges which are used to describe the lighter material in
the feed. These are "percent over 430F" (221C), and "percent at 650F" (343C).
The first quantifies the amount of gasoline in the feed. This material may be
cracked, but only at a very slow rate. Most of it merely passes through the unit, with
perhaps some small octane improvement. The octane improvement is somewhat
G
a
s
o
l
i
n
e

Y
i
e
l
d
,

V
o
l
-
%
Hydrogen in FCC Feed, Wt-%
11 12 13
50
60
70
157048
Process Variables
Page 11




higher for cracked gasoline, as compared to straight run material. Gasoline in the
FCC feed is not considered desirable because it occupies space which could be
used to process gas oil, and because it usually has a low octane number. It would
be better to remove this material in the crude unit and send it to a reformer.

The "percent at 650F" (343C) is a measure of the light fuel oil in the charge. The
boiling point of 650F is chosen because it corresponds to the normal LCO
endpoint. This material will crack, but not to the same extent as the heavier
molecules. It will produce more coke than will the gasoline, but again, less than the
heavier material.

The endpoint of FCC charge stock may vary, depending to some extent on the
suitability of the material for cracking operation. The presence of coke precursors,
such as polynuclear aromatics, organometallic compounds, and high sulfur material,
are, in many cases, good reasons for avoiding the inclusion of high boiling point
compounds in FCC feed. This depends very much on the individual stock.

AVERAGE BOILING POINT

The average boiling point of the FCC feed depends on the average molecular
weight. An increase in API and the molecular weight will typically cause the
following:

1. The charge will crack more readily, so at constant reactor temperature
the conversion will increase.
2. At constant conversion, the gasoline yield will increase about 1% for an
increase in the molecular weight of 20. This would correspond to an
increase of 2 API.
3. At constant conversion, the yield of C
4
and lighter will decrease.
4. The olefinic content of the products will decrease.
5. The regenerator temperature will tend to rise.

157048
Process Variables
Page 12




There are upper limits to these increases. An exceptionally heavy feed might prove
to be undesirable because of high Carbon Residue, Sulfur, and similar factors. The
exact changes will depend on the individual feedstock.
CARBON RESIDUE

The carbon residue of a feedstock is an indirect measure of its coke producing
nature. The value may be determined by either the Conradson or Ramsbottom
methods. An increase in residue of a feed from one crude source will generally
result in an increase in regenerator temperature. The exact nature of coke laydown
is somewhat complicated so this characteristic is not always reliable for comparing
feeds from different crudes.

The carbon residue can be a useful number for determining possible contamination
in storage, or of problems in the upstream feed preparation units. Because
entrainment in the vacuum tower is a common cause of increased carbon residue, a
higher metals level may be observed at the same time. Gas oil having a carbon
residue over 0.5% should be considered suspect.
157048
Process Variables
Page 13






157048
Process Variables
Page 14




COLOR

Color may be used as a possible indication of problems. Darker stocks tend to have
higher carbon residues, sulfur, and metal problems. This method is especially
valuable because it is a relatively quick and easy test.

METALS

Organometallic compounds in the FCC feed can cause serious overcracking if the
metals deposit on the catalyst. The cleanliness of a chargestock is given by a
metals factor:

Fm = V + 10 (Ni + Cu)

where:
Fm = Metals factor
V = Vanadium concentration, wppm
Ni = Nickel concentration, wppm
Cu = Copper concentration, wppm

All metal concentrations are ppm by weight in the feed. A factor of 1.0 is considered
safe, over 3.0 indicates a danger of poisoning.

Normal dry gas make at 60-70% conversion is 50-100 SCF/bbl. A heavily
contaminated stock would produce 200 SCF/bbl or more. The ratio H
2
/C
1
will
increase as dehydrogenation reactions are catalyzed by the metals, especially Ni.
An H
2
/C
1
ratio of 1.0, as compared to the normal 0.3-0.5, would again indicate
metals poisoning. A third indication of metals would be an increase of 10-15% in the
olefin content of the C
3
stream, to as high as 85%.

Sodium and vanadium pose a different threat to the catalyst than nickel. These
metals are mobile at high temperatures and can destroy the zeolite in the catalyst
causing low activity and conversion. Even with metal traps in the catalyst, high
157048
Process Variables
Page 15




catalyst usage will be required to flush these metals from the unit to maintain
reasonable activity, conversion and selectivity.

Proper control of the feed preparation units is necessary to prevent these metals
from contaminating the feed. Most of the metals are concentrated in the heavier
fractions, although a few may be volatile at lower temperatures. Keeping
entrainment in the feed towers to a minimum will keep metals level down to a safe
value.

SULFUR

Sulfur is as undesirable in cat cracker charge as it is in the feed to most refining
units, causing corrosion of the equipment and increased difficulty in treating
products. At 50% conversion, about 35% of the sulfur charged is converted to H
2
S,
and at 70%, this figure will rise to about 50%. The sulfur content of a 400F
endpoint cat gasoline will be about 10% of that of the raw oil charge, but this
fraction increases rapidly as the endpoint is raised above 400F. As would be
expected, the higher the sulfur content of the gasoline, the lower will be its lead
response, although lead response is no longer important in many parts of the world.

Hydrotreating will significantly improve FCC feedstock. The effect is twofold: the
removal of impurities and the hydrogen addition to saturate molecules. The first of
these is important when the charge is contaminated with sulfur, nitrogen or metals.
These poisons may cause both process and environmental problems. Hydrogen
addition to the feed, especially to the large polynuclear aromatics, will give higher
conversion and a decreased coke yield by making these heavy compounds easier
to crack.

The FCC product sulfur distribution is not even; it tends to concentrate in the heavy
products and as H
2
S. Table 1 is a typical product sulfur distribution for a non-
hydrotreated feed.
157048
Process Variables
Page 16




TABLE 1

COMMERCIAL SULFUR BALANCE
(80.7 LV-% CONVERSION)

STREAM PERCENTAGE
COMPOSITION OF FEED
WT-% SULFUR SULFUR

FEED: VIRGIN GAS OILS 1.04 100.0

PRODUCTS: SPONGE ABS. OH
DEBUT. OH
H
2
S 44.4
RSH 3.8
GASOLINE 0.15 6.5
LIGHT CYCLE OIL 1.35 16.7
CLARIFIED OIL 2.08 17.1
FLUE GAS 9.1
SOUR WATER 1.9
99.5

Much of the feed sulfur comes off as H
2
S because H
2
S, once formed, is fairly stable
under the conditions encountered in the reactor. This desulfurization is beneficial
because concentrating the feed sulfur in one product stream decreases the
difficulties in treating other products.

Higher sulfur feedstocks that are mildly hydrotreated will tend to produce a lesser
percentage of H
2
S, and leave a larger portion of the feed sulfur in the heavy
products. The effects are shown in Table 2 for cycle oil sulfur content.
157048
Process Variables
Page 17




The results of this sulfur concentration in heavy products will vary with the refinery's
needs. Product specifications and uses must be balanced against changes in
corrosion rates and required metallurgy, and should be examined on a case by case
basis.

TABLE 2

SULFUR DISTRIBUTION
EQUIVALENT PROCESSING CONDITIONS

TOTAL PERCENTAGE
CYCLE OIL OF FEED
SULFUR SULFUR
SULFUR, CONTENT, IN CYCLE
FEEDSTOCK TYPE WT-% WT-% OILS

RAW 2.68 4.31 43.7

HYDROTREATED 0.56 1.40 55.8

HYDROTREATED 0.26 0.76 67.6

Metals

The reduction of metals by hydrotreating follows the same pattern as nitrogen and
oxygen removal. It is possible to reduce the feed metals factor, Fm, by 50-90% in a
moderate severity hydrotreater.

Hydrogen Addition

Hydrotreating an FCC feedstock to improve quality is generally more attractive if
gasoline or LPG is the desired product. Moderate severity LCO production may not
justify hydrotreating unless there is a high concentration of feed sulfur or other
contaminants. Table 3 shows the yield changes for a charge stock under equivalent
cracking conditions at three levels of hydrotreating.

157048
Process Variables
Page 18




The increase in conversion in Table 3 is accompanied by an increase in gasoline
efficiency, except for the severe hydrotreating case where potential alkylate (C
3
and
C
4
) is significantly higher. The decrease in sulfur content would be accompanied by
a decrease in nitrogen and metals, while the decreasing carbon deposition will
indicate a slightly higher product yield, with less feed being converted to coke.


TABLE 3

EFFECT OF FEEDSTOCK
HYDROTREATING: EQUIVALENT CRACKING CONDITIONS

FEED RAW HYDROTREATED

GRAVITY, API 21.7 25.5 26.4 33.3
SULFUR, WT-% 2.68 0.53 0.28 0.01
CONVERSION (LV-%) 78.1 80.7 81.7 92.0
C
5
+ GASOLINE (LV-%) 55.5 60.1 61.0 68.2
POTENTIAL ALKYLATE (LV-%) 33.6 37.2 37.1 41.8
RELATIVE CARBON DEPOSITION 1.0 0.78 0.76 0.43

FCC GASOLINE RESEARCH
CLEAR OCTANE NUMBER 93.8 93.9 94.0 92.0

RATIO ISOBUTANE/BUTYLENES
IN C
4
FRACTION (MOL-%) 0.68 0.72 0.79 0.81

GASOLINE EFFICIENCY
VOL-%, GASOLINE/CONVERSION 0.71 0.74 0.75 0.74


A detailed analysis for two different feedstocks is given in Table 4. Two obvious
changes are the increase in API gravity and UOP K, indicating a greater degree of
hydrogen saturation. There is some small degree of hydrocracking, as shown by the
decrease in average molecular weight and boiling point.
157048
Process Variables
Page 19




TABLE 4

FCC FEEDSTOCK PROPERTIES

GACH SARAN
(HEAVY IRANIAN) L. A. BASIN

SEVERELY
HYDRO- HYDRO- HYDRO-
RAW TREATED RAW TREATED TREATED

API 22.9 26.3 22.2 26.3 35.0
K 11.78 11.98 11.45 11.7 11.99
MW 385 380 316 298 266
S, WT-% 1.83 0.14 1.30 0.1 0.001

CON. CARBON, WT-% 0.34 0.06 0.1 0.1 0.0

N
2
, PPM 1880 1570 3380 2190 2

AROMATICS, WT-% 48.5 42.1 53 51 30.5

ASTM D 1160
IBP 504 458 382 360 360
10 661 632 548 530 440
30 760 739 653 628 518
50 822 799 724 707 594
70 877 856 795 779 682
so 958 933 880 868 810
95 983 990 965 954 920
% RECOVERED 98 98 98 98 98

FM FACTOR 2.3 1 2.9 0.0 0.0

PILOT PLANT
CONVERSION VOL-% 77 83 68 76 89
157048
Process Variables
Page 20




Feed hydrotreating is becoming more common as the quality of FCC feedstocks
decreases. Table 5 summarizes the advantages of hydrotreating. The economic
question of increased cost for hydrotreating versus increased yields and other
benefits must be solved for each plant.

TABLE 5

ADVANTAGES OF HYDROTREATING

1. HIGHER CONVERSION

2. HIGHER GASOLINE YIELD

3. HIGHER C
3
-C
4
YIELD

4. LOWER SULFUR AND METALS

5. LOWER CLARIFIED OIL YIELD

6. LOWER COKE MAKE


J Cracking

A modification of feed hydrotreating is J cracking. This process treats the light cycle
oil stream, which is then recycled back to the riser with the raw feedstock. The
hydrotreated LCO can be cracked, increasing the yield of all the lighter products. J
cracking partially saturates the di-, tri-, and tetra-aromatics present in LCO. These
components then crack instead of forming coke when the stream is recycled. Table 6
compares the product yields for J cracking and normal operation for a hydrotreated
feed.

157048
Process Variables
Page 21




TABLE 6

FCC YIELD COMPARISON FOR J CRACKING

FEED: HYDROTREATED 25 API MIDDLE EAST GAS OIL

OPERATION
NORMAL + J CRACKING

CONVERSION, VOL-% 85 95

YIELDS
H
2
S, WT-% 0.15 0.25
C
2
MINUS WT-% 2.77 3.06
C
3
, VOL-% 12.5 13.7
C
4
, VOL-% 18.0 19.6
C
5
- 380F 90% GASOLINE, VOL-% 67.1 74.3
LCO, VOL-% 10.0 0.0
CLARIFIED OIL, VOL-% 5.0 5.0
COKE, WT-% 5.0 6.1
POTENTIAL C
3
-C
4
ALKYLATE, VOL-% 32.8 34.5
TOTAL 10 PSI RVP GASOLINE, VOL-% 110.2 120.1
RESEARCH OCTANEFCC GASOLINE 92.5 92.6
RESEARCH OCTANETOTAL GASOLINE 93.2 93.3
MOTOR OCTANETOTAL GASOLINE 85.3 85.2

NOTE: RVP IS REID VAPOR PRESSURE
157048
Process Variables
Page 22




OXYGEN AND NITROGEN

Oxygen and nitrogen pose different problems than sulfur. Oxygen may be present in
the feedstock chemically bonded to a hydrocarbon, or it may simply be absorbed by
the oil as it sits in storage. Dissolved oxygen, if not stripped, may cause fouling of
heat exchangers when the temperature approaches 400F (200C). Another source
of oxygen is the instrument purges or the entrained oxygen carried into the reactor
with the regenerated catalyst. This is more of a problem with the complete CO
combustion units than with the traditional plants, because regenerator oxygen levels
are high. Most of the oxygen in the reactor will be quickly converted to water, carbon
oxides, phenols, cresols, or acids. Other reactions, including the problems of free
oxygen, are discussed later under Product Treating.

A severely contaminated feedstock may contain 4000 ppm nitrogen, a good feed
less than 500-600 ppm. Much of the nitrogen will be converted to ammonia, which
can cause plugging problems in the main column overhead. Cyanides are also
formed, these contribute to blistering and corrosion in the gas concentration section.
Wash water to the main column overhead and gas plant is used to minimize these
problems.

Some of the nitrogen will stay with the catalyst as a constituent of coke. It burns off
in the regenerator to give nitrogen oxides and small amounts of ammonia. These
problems are discussed in Section XIII, Environmental. High nitrogen levels are
detrimental to catalyst activity, since the basic nature of the ammonia formed tends
to deactivate the acid sites on the catalyst. This deactivation is reversible and
catalyst activity will be restored with low nitrogen feed.

Difficulties with nitrogen and oxygen are normally not severe enough to justify
hydrotreating for only these poisons. But they rarely occur alone; a bad feedstock
will usually have high concentrations of sulfur or metals in addition to the oxygen and
nitrogen.
157048
Process Variables
Page 23




The amount of poisons removed again depends on what species are present, and
the severity of treatment. Moderate hydrotreating will remove 10-50% of the total
nitrogen. A high severity operation may run close to 100% removal. Treatment for
oxygen gives similar results.

PROCESSING OF RESIDUAL FEEDSTOCKS

There are several problems and penalties associated with processing residual
feedstocks. There is a loss of selectivity in liquid product yield since the feed
generally contains less hydrogen than the gas oil fraction. The increased boiling
range brings more contaminants into the unit, both as coke precursors and as
metals. The coke precursors will cause a higher delta coke on catalyst and will
result in a hotter regenerator and less conversion for the coke yield generated. The
higher metals will cause more light gas production as will the higher regenerator
temperatures. Catalyst activity will be effected by the high metals and by the
additional deactivation from the high regenerator temperature. The higher coke yield
will mean thruput will have to be reduced to stay within the coke burning capacity of
the unit.

157048
Process Variables
Page 24




The following table from a commercial unit illustrates what happens as the feed is
changed from VGO to Resid.


Commercial Operations
Changing from Gas Oil to Residue Processing

Feed A B C D
Composition, vol Ratio
VGO / Atm. Residue 100 / 0 38 / 62 25 / 75 0 / 100
Conradson Carbon, wt-% 0.16 2.25 2.96 3.95
Metals (Ni+V), wt-ppm 1.0 9.6 9.0 6.3

Commercial Performance
Conversion, lv-% 86.2 82.2 79.7 76.5
Gasoline Yield, lv-% 62.6 60.3 59.5 57.4
Coke, wt-% 5.6 7.2 7.1 7.5


As the contamination in the feed increased as a reflection of the poorer feed quality,
the coke make required to maintain conversion increased. However, by careful
selection of the crudes purchased, the metal content of the resid was controlled so
that their effect on the operation was limited and the additional coke burning
requirement was the major change. Note that the gasoline yield was reduced by
almost 5 LV% due to the change in feed.
157048
Process Variables
Page 25




This same dependency on feed quality is evident in the RCC unit as well. The
following tables show the performance of the unit on three different quality feeds:

RFCC Unit Feedstock Variation

Low Intermediate High
Carbon Carbon Carbon
Residue Residue Residue
API 22.8 21.3 19.2
Sulfur, wt-% 0.9 1.1 1.2
Nitrogen, wt-% 0.12 0.14 0.19
Conradson Carbon, wt-% 4.8 6.0 7.9
Metals
Nickel, wt-ppm 8 13 17
Vanadium, wt-ppm 17 31 52



Commercial RFCC Performance on Different Residues


Low
Carbon
Residue
Intermediate
Carbon
Residue
High
Carbon
Residue
Dry Gas, wt-% 3.4 3.2 4.0
C3s + C4s, lv-% 25.2 24.7 23.9
Gasoline
(430F EP), lv-%
59.1 56.6 55.6
Light Cycle Oil
(630F EP), lv-%
15.0 14.2 15.0
Clarified Oil, lv-% 7.5 10.2 10.9
Coke, wt-% 8.4 9.1 10.8
Total C5+ Liquid, lv-% 106.4 105.7 105.4
RON Gasoline 91.9 93.2 93.3



157048
Process Variables
Page 26




Figure 1 illustrates the relative loss in conversion as a result of an increase of
contaminants in the FCC feed, as expressed in terms of the Ramsbottom carbon. It
is assumed that the proper catalyst makeup policies have been followed, so as not
to operate with heavily contaminated catalyst (for example, total metals on catalyst
of less than 5000 ppm). The loss in conversion is, in part, attributable to the
deterioration of the feed quality, but the main cause is the decrease in catalyst
circulation resulting from the higher regenerator temperature experienced by the
unit.


157048
Process Variables
Page 27




Figure 2 summarizes the effect that contaminated feed has on the unit's regenerator
temperature.


157048
Process Variables
Page 28




These plots also summarize the experiences of most refiners, who found that the
units designed for VGO could not accommodate more than about 3.5 to 4.0 wt-%
Conradson carbon in the feedstock due to excessively high regenerator tempera-
tures. The high temperatures also resulted in severe catalyst deactivation and poor
unit performance. This fact, i.e., that residual stocks deposit more carbonaceous
material during the cracking cycle than can be effectively used to fuel the
conversions reactions, led to the development of alternative technologies directed
at:

Limiting the heat release during regeneration
Seeking external removal of heat

The first approach led to the development of the two-stage regeneration system that
is currently practiced in the Ashland RCC unit and the second to the development of
the catalyst cooler, also incorporated in the design of this unit.

Table 5 summarizes the relevant properties of an atmospheric resid that will be
used to illustrate the benefits that can be obtained by varying the heat removal in a
commercial unit. Case 1 found in Table 6 represents a very low coke make
operation where the regenerator temperature has been allowed to equilibrate at a
very high level, in the order of 1480F. The yield structure is poor and the gas make
extremely high. The subsequent cases illustrate the benefits that can be derived by
manipulating the heat balance forcing the unit to produce more coke. Even though
the unit is producing an additional amount of coke, the yield pattern improves. The
data in Table 6 is plotted graphically in Figure 3.


157048
Process Variables
Page 29





157048
Process Variables
Page 30




TABLE 5
RCC FEEDSTOCK FOR COKE YIELD VS. CONVERSION STUDY

API 20.8
Conradson Carbon 4.8
Metals, wt-ppm 20.0
UOP K 12.1
Source Atmospheric Resid


TABLE 6
RCC ESTIMATED YIELDS VS. UNIT COKE YIELD

Case 1 2 3 4

Coke Yield, wt-% 7.3 8.57 9.73 11.10
Conversion, LV-% 68.3 77.2 80.9 83.0
Dry Gas, wt-% 7.2 4.2 3.4 3.3
Gasoline, LV-% 46.0 56.3 58.5 59.1
LCO, LV-% 16.9 13.4 11.4 9.7
Slurry, LV-% 14.8 9.4 7.7 6.4
Total Liquid, LV-% 101.6 106.6 107.6 107.5
Heat Removal No No Yes Yes

Feed: Table 5

Gasoline, 380F at 90% Pt.
LCO, 600F at 90% Pt.

Installing a variable heat removal catalyst cooler enables the refiner to adjust the
heat removal required for a given feedstock to produce the optimum yield pattern.
Even though the coke yield has increased, the resulting yield pattern at the higher
coke make is more favorable than that which can be achieved at the lower coke
makes. These benefits are achieved at relatively low regenerator temperatures, of
less than 1350F, for good catalyst activity maintenance.
157048
Process Variables
Page 31




Commercial experience indicates that operations at regenerated catalyst
temperatures greater than 1350-1400F offer very little advantage, and, in fact,
result in poor yields and very high gas production. Units currently processing some
resid which are forced to operate at high regenerator temperatures are ideally
suited for the installation of a UOP catalyst cooler. In addition to the conversion and
selectivity benefits obtained by operating at the lower catalyst temperatures,
considerable savings can be obtained by the reduction in catalyst makeup. This is
due to the reduction in the hydrothermal deactivation of the catalyst as a result of
the lower regenerator temperature. If it is desired to keep the unit coke make
constant, another interesting application of this technology is illustrated in the
following case.

Table 7 shows the savings possible in a unit processing resid. As can be seen in
the table, the heat balance has been adjusted to keep the coke make constant to
satisfy the unit constraints. The reduction in regenerator temperature results in a
lower catalyst addition rate, since the hydrothermal deactivation of the unit's catalyst
has been reduced. For a 20,000 BPD unit, this catalyst savings amounts to
approximately 1.6 million dollars per annum.

TABLE 7
CATALYST COOLER ADDITION FOR
MORE PROFITABLE OPERATION AT CONSTANT COKE MAKE

Feed No Cat Cooler With Cat Cooler

API 27.0
Conradson Carbon, wt-% 3.0
Feed Temperature, F Base Base + 160
Reactor Temperature, F Base Base
Regenerator Temperature, F 1410 1350
Conversion, LV-% 85 85
Coke Yield, wt-% Base Base
Catalyst Addition Base 0.5 Base
Heat Removal No 2500 Btu/lb coke
Catalyst/Oil Ratio Base Base
157048
Process Variables
Page 32




The preceding discussions have illustrated the benefits that can be derived with the
installation of a catalyst cooler. This flexible technology permits:

Adjustments in the unit conversion to achieve the optimal yield pattern for a
given feedstock

Enhancement of the unit's capability to process more contaminated feedstocks

A more profitable unit operation while keeping the unit coke production
constant.

157048
Process Variables
Page 33




REGENERATION SECTION

The main purpose of the regeneration zone is to oxidize the coke on spent catalyst
and reestablish the catalyst activity of the fluidized particles prior to being returned
to the reactor riser. The heat from this combustion of coke in turn provides the
energy to satisfy the process requirements. Thus, the regeneration section has a
very fundamental significance.

Over the years this section has undergone fundamental design and mechanical
improvements. One of the first big movements occurred during the 1970's, with the
advent of total combustion. UOP moved away from the conventional bubbling or
turbulent-bed regenerator to a fast-fluidized, high-efficiency style combustor. Since
then this design has become well established as shown in Figure 8, and more than
45 units in commercial operation. Contrasting a modern high efficiency combustor
design with a typical bed style configuration of the past, as in Figure 6, the major
regenerator improvements are aimed towards:

Enhanced and controlled coke burning kinetics

Reduced catalyst inventory

Narrow catalyst residence time distributions

Ease of start-up and routine operability

Uniform radial carbon and temperature profiles

Limited afterburn and uniform temperature distribution at cyclones

Additional heat balance flexibility from
Total CO combustion
Dense phase catalyst cooling

Particulate, power and waste heat recovery

157048
Process Variables
Page 34




These benefits are principally derived from the combination of a more
homogeneous gas and solids contacting regime and reduced yet controlled particle
residence time distributions.

The following sections will discuss in detail the fundamental regenerator fluidization
regimes, mixing characteristics, combustor hydraulics and coke burning kinetics,
and how they relate to commercial performance and unit optimization.


FCC REGENERATOR FLUIDIZATION REGIMES

In commercial FCC regenerator designs, various fluidization regimes exist. The
schematics shown in Figure 4 serve to illustrate these various regimes pictorially.

FIGURE 4
FLUIDIZATION REGIMES

UOP 3106-6
(D) Transport
Riser Reactor
Gas Velocity
Catalyst Flux
(C) Fast
Fluidized Bed
(B) Turbulent
Fluidized Bed
A) Bubbling
Fluidized Bed
B
e
d

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
UOP 3106-6
(D) Transport
Riser Reactor
Gas Velocity
Catalyst Flux
(C) Fast
Fluidized Bed
(B) Turbulent
Fluidized Bed
A) Bubbling
Fluidized Bed
B
e
d

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
157048
Process Variables
Page 35




Bubbling Bed (Umb - 1.0 ft/s Superficial Velocity)

The bubbling bed regime ranges from the minimum bubble velocity Umb (which
typically for FCC type A particles is from 0.02-0.1 ft/s), up to about 1.0 ft/sec
superficial velocity. Here three distinct yet interchanging gas phases exist: the
bubble phase, the emulsion phase, and the gas phase inside the catalyst pores.
These three phases all flow at various relative velocities. Discrete bubbles of gas
flowing through the bed produce abrupt pressure fluctuations at the bed surface.
The relative fluctuations are determined by the bubble frequency or superficial gas
velocity Ug, as shown in Figure 5.


FIGURE 5
BUBBLING TO TURBULENT BED TRANSITION


157048
Process Variables
Page 36




Figure 6 represents a typical bubbling bed regenerator in which there is limited
solids entrainment and transport through the freeboard region. Most of the larger
particles that are entrained are returned to the bed through the two stage cyclone
diplegs. There exists a sharp, distinct catalyst bed level. The distance between the
primary cyclone inlet horn and the surface of the bed should be greater than the
transport disengaging height (TDH).


FIGURE 6
BUBBLING BED REGENERATOR


157048
Process Variables
Page 37




Turbulent Bed (1.0-3.5 ft/sec Superficial Velocity)

With higher gas velocities, the distinct bubble phase disappears and the bulk of the
gas flows as described by Yerushalmi "in voids which continually coalesce and split
tracing tortuous passages as they rise through the bed"
1
. The upper bed surface is
considerably more diffuse with reduced pressure fluctuations and substantially
higher entrainment of solids into the freeboard region (Figure 5 in Fluidization).
Because of the requirement for higher coke burning capacity and improved
contacting efficiency, the vast majority of commercial regenerators are operating in
the turbulent bed regime. In this regime the ultimate regeneration capacity is set by
the sharp increase in solids entrainment as velocity increases, see Figure 7, and by
the cyclone separation efficiency and dipleg hydraulics.

FIGURE 7
MAXIMUM DILUTE PHASE ENTRAINMENT
IN VERTICAL GAS-SOLIDS UPFLOW


1. Further Studies of the Regimes of Fluidization, Powder Technology.
157048
Process Variables
Page 38




Fast Fluidized Bed (3 -10 ft/sec Superficial Velocity)

The regime now extends into a complex transport phase where there is a sharp
increase in the rate of solids carryover as the transport velocity is approached. In
the absence of any solid recycle, the bed would rapidly disappear. Beyond this
velocity, catalyst fed to the base of the regenerator traverses it in fully entrained
transport flow with the voidage or density of the resulting suspension being
dependent not only on velocity of the gas but also on the solids flow rate (flux =
lb/s/ft
2
). If the solids rate is low, dilute-phase flow will result. If on the other hand,
solids are fed to the regenerator at a sufficiently high rate, for example by
recirculating solids carried-over back to the combustor, then it is possible to
maintain a relatively large solids concentration referred to as the fast-fluidized bed.

The transport velocity may therefore be regarded as the boundary which divides
vertical gas-solids flow regimes into two groups. Below the boundary lies the
bubbling, turbulent fluidized bed. Above lies the transport regime which, depending
on the solids flux, encompasses a wide range of states from dilute-phase flow to the
fast fluidized bed. Due to cluster formation, for FCC catalyst the transport velocity is
approximately 20 times the terminal velocity of a single 50 FCC particle.

157048
Process Variables
Page 39




COMBUSTOR HYDRAULICS AND MIXING CHARACTERISTICS

Figure 8 shows a typical high-efficiency style regenerator. The combustor section
can be operated either above or below the fluid cracking catalyst transport velocity.
The resulting catalyst/air suspension in the combustor depends not only on the gas
velocity but also on the solids flow rate (lb/sec/ft
2
). Adjustment in the quantity of
catalyst being externally recirculated (via slide valve control) can therefore be used
to control the catalyst inventory in the combustor for various air rates.


FIGURE 8
HIGH EFFICIENCY REGENERATOR

157048
Process Variables
Page 40




Figure 9 represents typical combustor hydraulics for various catalyst loadings and
superficial gas velocities. The combustor density is measured across the entire
combustor height and the solids loading W (lb/sec/ft
2
) is the summation of both the
spent catalyst circulation and the combustor external recirculation. The gas
superficial velocity (A) lies well below the catalyst transport velocity, but at a low
solids flux (region X-Y), dilute phase flow exists. At condition (Y), the solids flux is
sufficient to choke the system and any further increase in solids loading (region Y-Z)
results in a substantial density (inventory/residence time) increase.

FIGURE 9
COMBUSTOR OPERATION




















At the higher gas velocities (B) and (C), choking takes place at much higher solids
flux which results in a less abrupt change in combustor density with further
DD
CC
BB
G E
F
(Z)
AA
Gas Velocity, ft/s
Combustor
Catalyst
Inventory Is:
I = Density x V
Where V Is
The Combustor
Volume, ft.
3
C
o
m
b
u
s
t
o
r

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
,

l
b
/
f
t
.
3
(X)
(Y)
(Y)
Catalyst Loading (W) lb / s/ft
2
157048
Process Variables
Page 41




increases in flux. Such a region is the fast-fluidized regime. Eventually at higher
velocities like (D), true transport flow will be achieved where there is no solids flux
that can choke the system.

This relationship shows how flexible the system is in adjusting the combustor
hydraulics (inventory/residence time) for various operating conditions such as
temperature, pressure, superficial gas velocity, catalyst circulation and carbon
concentration. Consider the operating condition 'E' at a superficial velocity (B). If the
superficial velocity is now increased to (C) either by a change in pressure or
combustor air flow rate, the combustor inventory will decrease to condition 'F' at
constant solids loading. However, if necessary, the combustor inventory may be re-
established at condition 'G' via an increased solids flux (external recirculation slide
valve). It is important to keep in mind that any adjustment in combustor inventory
results in a change to the upper regenerator level (surge inventory).

Since the externally recycled solids are at final regeneration temperature, this will
set the pre-combustion temperature of the combined spent catalyst, recirculated
catalyst and combustion air streams. Figure 10 shows a typical response of the pre-
combustion temperature for various external catalyst recirculation rates. The control
of the quantity of solids being recycled to the combustor therefore sets both the pre-
combustion temperature and inventory (residence time) required for complete
combustion with limited afterburn and low carbon on regenerated catalyst (<0.05
Wt-%).
157048
Process Variables
Page 42




FIGURE 10
CATALYST PRE-COMBUSTION TEMPERATURE



Solids Mixing Characteristics

The bubble or gas induced solids mixing characteristics in the various fluidized bed
regimes have received considerable attention over the years. Although the bubble
induced vertical mixing rate of solids is extremely high, the radial mixing
characteristics are relatively poor (since bubbles flow vertically).

Since some commercial bubbling/turbulent bed regenerators exceed 50 feet in
diameter and have relatively low L/D bed ratios (<0.2), severe gas/solid
(carbon/oxygen) distribution problems can be encountered. This results in:

157048
Process Variables
Page 43




1. Thermal gradients, both inter-particle and within the bed.
2. Residence time distributions and short circuiting.
3. Afterburn in the dilute phase and cyclones.

Singer investigated catalyst mixing patterns in various commercial catalytic cracking
units (reactor/regenerator/stripper sections) via the use of certain radioactive
isotopes
2
. The measured distributions indicate that although the dense beds in the
regenerator approach good mixing, there are substantial deviations from perfect
mixing attributable to catalyst by-passing and regions of relatively immobile catalyst.
Over the years, in order to improve the radial mixing characteristics and residence
time distributions (short circuiting) of the turbulent/bubbling bed systems,
considerable attention has been placed on:

Dual diameter vessels

Fluidization bed length/diameter ratios

Air distribution, grid pressure drop and plugging patterns

Spent catalyst addition and withdrawal points, tangential swirls, deflector
plates, baffles and entry elevation within the fluidized bed

Cyclone dipleg discharge orientation

2. Catalyst Mixing Patterns in Commercial Catalytic Cracking, I&EC, 49.


Most of these intrinsic mixing problems were eliminated with the high efficiency style
combustor. Figure 11 compares the theoretical particle residence time distributions
of a modern high-efficiency style combustor with that of a conventional bubbling
bed. The basic difference in response curves is due to both the fluidization regime
(fast-fluidized) and the solids entry/exit configuration. The combustor regenerator
more closely approaches a plug flow reactor system where it is impossible for a
spent catalyst particle to leave the regenerator without passing through the dilute
phase combustion zone.

157048
Process Variables
Page 44




FIGURE 11
THEORETICAL RESIDENCE TIME DISTRIBUTIONS



Regarding radial/axial mixing, it is still highly desirable for the lower (5 feet)
combustor section to be operated with a pseudo-dense phase acceleration zone.
The relatively high slip and low voidage enhances the effective fast-fluidized bed
thermal conductivity, allowing rapid heat transfer between the hot recycled and
relatively cold spent catalyst particles up to the pre-combustion temperature. This
produces uniform radial temperatures in the lower combustion zone.
157048
Process Variables
Page 45




COKE BURNING KINETICS AND OPTIMIZATION

The coke deposited on the catalyst consists primarily of carbon and hydrogen along
with relatively small amounts of sulfur, nitrogen and metals. This discussion will
focus on the carbon and hydrogen species. The amount of hydrogen in coke has
typically decreased over the years to levels of 6-7 wt-% with the use of high
conversion, zeolite catalysts and modern stripper designs.

Catalyst regeneration, as a carbon removal process, is widely accepted as being
first order with respect to carbon concentration and oxygen partial pressure:


dC/ dt = KCPo
2


Where:
K = Rate constant, hr
-1
atm
-1

C = Wt-% carbon on catalyst
P
O
2
= oxygen partial pressure, atm

The reaction rate constant will be dependent on temperature and can be
represented via an Arrhenius type equation:


dC / dt = Koe
AE
RT
CPo
2
(1)

where:
E = Activation Energy
R = Gas Constant
T = Temperature, R

This relationship for the rate of carbon burning from fluid catalytic cracking catalysts
was found experimentally to hold over a wide range of temperatures with diffusional
limitation not controlling. A similar expression can be used for the hydrogen content
of the coke, with the oxidation of hydrogen proceeding more rapidly than that of
carbon:
157048
Process Variables
Page 46






dH / dt = ' K oe
AE
RT
HPo
2
(2)

Where:


' K o > Ko

H = Wt-% hydrogen on catalyst

When discussing coke combustion rates and kinetics, it is important to differentiate
between net coke yield and coke concentration (analogous to heat and
temperature). The net coke yield is set by the unit enthalpy balance with little direct
impact on the rate of coke combustion of individual particles.

Delta Coke

This is a dependent variable, which is difficult to accurately predict due to its
dependency on feedstock quality, processing conditions and catalyst formulation.
This term also sets the final regenerator temperature via:


T
Regen
= T
Rx
+ AC/ C
p
AH
comb
AH
FG
air AH
loss
| |


With a few simplifying assumptions, such as a plug flow combustor and total
combustion of coke to CO
2,
the differential equations (1) and (2) can be solved
numerically in order to gain insight into the impact and optimization of such process
variables as:

Temperature
Catalyst recirculation
Oxygen partial pressure
Carbon and hydrogen concentration

on the overall coke combustion rates.
157048
Process Variables
Page 47




Pre-combustion Mix Temperature and Catalyst Recirculation

As discussed in a previous section, controlled catalyst recirculation to the
combustor serves to:

increase residence time via combustor hydraulics
raise pre-combustion temperatures (Figure 10)

Pre-combustion temperature is the mix temperature of the cold spent catalyst, hot
recycled catalyst, and combustion air:



T
mix
=
0.275F CCR ( )T
Regen
+ 0.275 CCR ( )T
Rx
+ 0.273BT
B
0.273B+ 0.275F CCR ( ) + 0.275 CCR ( )


Where:
B = lb air/hr
F = Cat Recirculation, wt ratio of CCR
CCR = Cat Circulation Rate, lb/hr
T
B
= Blower Temp, F
0.275 = specific heat of catalyst, BTU/lb/F
0.273 = specific heat of air, BTU/lb/F

The table below shows the substantial impact of recirculated catalyst on the
combustion rates via the increased initiation temperature T
mix
.

Recycle Coke Concentration Mix Temperature Regen Time

Zero 0.8 to 0.05 Wt-% 913 121 sec's

1.5 CCR 0.8 to 0.05 Wt-% 1161 44 sec's

For identical conditions the overall combustion time is reduced by a factor of 3. In
reality this would be reduced further by additional internal recirculation (solids slip).
157048
Process Variables
Page 48




Regenerator Temperature and Coke Concentration

These two parameters are strongly interdependent since the final regenerated
catalyst temperature is set by:

T
Regen
= T
Rx
+ C/Cp [H
Comb
- H
Air
- H
losses
]

Where:
C = C
spent
- C
regen

With C
regen
--> 0 for most operations

The impact of temperature alone on the rate of carbon combustion is exponential
and quite dramatic:

Temperature 1100F 1200F 1300F 1400F

Relative combustion rate 1 2.5 6 18


And slows dramatically with carbon concentration on catalyst:

Carbon Reduction 1.0 to 0.9 Wt-% 0.15 to 0.05 Wt-%

Relative time required 1 10
For combustion

At constant temperature, oxygen partial pressure, and delta coke reduction.
157048
Process Variables
Page 49




Oxygen Partial Pressure

This parameter is set by the combination of regenerator operating pressure, excess
air, and oxygen concentration in the supply air. The relationship between the rate of
combustion and oxygen partial pressure is linear. Figures 12 and 13 show the
relative effect of total pressure and excess oxygen on the regeneration time at
various temperatures.

FIGURE 12

RELATIVE EFFECT OF EXCESS OXYGEN
CONCENTRATION ON REGENERATION TIME
AS A FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE

1. Total pressure assumed constant at 30 psig
2. Plug flow regeneration system
3. Carbon reduced from 1.10 to 0.3 wt-% on catalyst
4. Excess O
2
change made by adjusting main air rate

R
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r

T
i
m
e
,

s
e
c
Temperature,
o
F
10
100
1120 1140 1160 1180 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280
5% Excess O2
2% Excess O2
R
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r

T
i
m
e
,

s
e
c
Temperature,
o
F
10
100
1120 1140 1160 1180 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280
5% Excess O2
2% Excess O2
157048
Process Variables
Page 50




FIGURE 13

Relative Effect of Total Pressure on Regeneration Time
Requirement at Various Temperatures

1. Plug flow assumed.
2. Carbon level reduced from 1.10 TO 0.3 wt-%


















0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
0
10 20 30 40 50
1250F
1200F
1150F
R
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

T
i
m
e
,

S
e
c
Total Pressure, psia
157048
Process Variables
Page 51




COMBINED PROCESS VARIABLES

With some simplifying assumptions, all the process variables and their interactions
can be mathematically modeled via equations (1) & (2) in order to achieve
additional understanding and optimization of the combustor performance.

As an example of the model's use, Figure 14 and Table 8 show the calculated time
dependent responses of the numerous products of combustion for the following set
of typical combustor operating conditions:


Typical Process Conditions

Regenerator pressure 30.0 psig
lb air/lb coke 14.18
Hydrogen in coke 6.0 wt-%
Coke on spent catalyst 0.8 wt-%
Recycle catalyst temperature 1344F
Blower discharge temperature 320F
Catalyst recycle 1.5 Xs
Reactor temperature 980F
% oxygen in air 21 mol%
CO
2
/(CO
2
+CO) 1.0

Calculated Time Dependent Variables

Particle Temperature, F
Carbon Concentration, wt-%
Hydrogen Concentration, wt-%
Flue Gas Oxygen Concentration, mol%
Assumptions:
1. Complete combustion
2. Plug flow regeneration
157048
Process Variables
Page 52




FIGURE 14
COMBUSTOR COMPOSITION PROFILES




















0
5
10
15
20
25
0 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
Time (seconds)
C
o
m
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
C
a
r
b
o
n

W
t
-
%
F
lu
e
G
a
s
O
2
m
o
l-%
H
y
d
r
o
g
e
n

W
t
-
%
Temp,
o
F
157048
Process Variables
Page 53




TABLE 8

FCC COMBUSTOR MODEL
CALCULATED TIME-DEPENDENT VARIABLES

Carbon Hydrogen Flue Gas O
2

Time Temp, F wt-% wt-% mol%

0 1160 0.752 0.046 21.0
1 1177 0.708 0.036 18.3
2 1182 0.663 0.028 17.7
3 1206 0.616 0.022 16.2
4 1218 0.574 0.016 14.8
5 1230 0.532 0.012 13.7
10 1272 0.358 0.002 8.5
15 1295 0.246 0.001 7.0
20 1310 0.174 ------- 5.5
25 1319 0.126 ------- 4.6
30 1325 0.097 ------- 3.9
35 1330 0.076 ------- 3.5
40 1333 0.060 ------- 3.2
45 1335 0.046 ------- 2.9
50 1336 0.039 ------- 2.7
55 1338 0.032 ------- 2.6
60 1339 0.026 ------- 2.5

Total Combustion and CO Promoter

In the absence of a CO combustor promoter, large variations in CO
2
/CO ratios are
observed. At the catalyst surface it is believed that the ratio of CO
2
/CO is an
intrinsic function of the temperature at the burning site ("Arthur's ratio"). However,
the CO exiting the burning site may be further oxidized to CO
2
at a rate dependent
on temperature, CO, O
2
, and H
2
O partial pressures, active metals on the catalyst,
carbon/oxygen distributions within the fluidized bed, and even the catalyst
presence.
157048
Process Variables
Page 54




This burning of CO in the dilute phase known as "afterburning" can produce large
flue gas temperature increases above those in the dense phase. This is due to the
relative heats of combustion:

C CO 3,960 BTU/lb
C CO
2
14,150 BTU/lb



















As the amount of CO combustion is increased to 100%, the air required for
combustion also increases. This is partially offset by the improved utilization of the
heat of combustion, but full CO combustion will require a larger blower than a partial
CO combustion operation if the catalyst is regenerated reasonably clean.

Heat of Combustion vs.
CO
2
/CO Ratio in Flue Gas
11000
12000
13000
14000
15000
16000
17000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
H
e
a
t

C
o
m
b
u
s
t
i
o
n
,

B
T
U

/

l
b

C
o
k
e
Total Combustion
(16,500 BTU / lbCoke)
CO
2
/CO mol Ratio
157048
Process Variables
Page 55























In the absence of catalyst, a flue gas stream of 3/1 CO
2
/CO mol composition
undergoing complete combustion to CO
2
could see a temperature increase
> 600F. (Note: this temperature increase is moderated due to the sensible heat of
any entrained catalyst.)

In the 1970's, in order to exploit the higher activity, more coke selective zeolite
catalysts, operations with high temperature, once through total combustion were
utilized for the processing of conventional high quality vacuum gas oils. Table 9
shows a comparison between old and modern operations.
Combustion Air Requirement
vs. CO
2
/CO in the Flue Gas
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
i
r
/
C
o
k
e

(
w
t
-
R
a
t
i
o
)
CO
2
/CO mol Ratio
Complete Combustion
with No Oxygen
in Flue Gas
Complete Combustion
with 2% Oxygen
in Flue Gas
157048
Process Variables
Page 56




TABLE 9

CATALYST FORMULATION AND PROCESS DESIGN MODIFICATIONS

Amorphous Catalyst RE-Y Zeolite
Components Wt-% LV-% Wt-% LV-%
H
2
S 0.5 0.4
C
2
4.5

3.75


C
3
6.75 6.45
C
4
11.95 11.45
C
5
+
Gasoline 45.4 54.4 50.2 59.8
LCO 12.8 12.4 12.55 12.0
CLO 8.7 7.6 9.4 8.0
Coke 9.4 5.8
100 100

Process Conditions Process Conditions
Bed cracking = 935F Riser cracking = 980F
CFR = 1.3 CFR = 1.0
Partial burn Total combustion
Capacity = Base Capacity = 1.7 x Base
RONC = 92.5 RONC = 91.8

From the unit enthalpy balance:

100
AH
feed
+ AH
Rx
+ AH
diluents
+ AH
recycle
| |
AH
comb
- AH
air
- AH
losses
| |

BTU/Lb feed
BTU/Lb coke
= wt% coke on feed

The total combustion, no recycle operation resulted in substantially lower coke
yields (9.4 > 5.8 Wt-%), higher liquid volume yields, and capacity increases (1.7) at
equivalent conversion. These changes resulted from several major process
changes, described below:

157048
Process Variables
Page 57




H
comb:
9055 14,150 BTU/lb coke
H
recycle:
Zero BTU/lb feed


With the combustor operation, complete CO combustion (< 50 ppm CO in flue gas)
can be achieved thermally, without promoter at temperatures greater than 1270F
and 2 mol % excess oxygen in the flue gas.

However, Mobil discovered that certain Group VIII metals, particularly platinum,
could be used at very low levels (1-3 wt ppm) to effectively catalyze the combustion
of CO to CO
2
either as an integral part of the fresh FCC catalyst or as a separate
additive. In the combustor operation these additives are also frequently used but at
lower concentrations than the conventional bubbling bed regenerators.

The optimization of the combustor operation is simply the optimization of coke
burning kinetics, with a slight twist over conventional bubbling bed systems because
of the fast-fluidization regime. The combustor operation is normally quite stable, and
with only a little attention from the operator, optimal conditions can be maintained
without difficulty.

The focus of where to begin lies in only two areas: carbon on regenerated catalyst
and afterburning control. If these are both within acceptable values, no further
optimization is required. To adjust these values, we need to examine the areas of
control for the combustor.

Temperature

The primary control point for optimization is the combustor temperature. Although
the other factors are important, the temperature can be considered the one truly
independent variable for the operator.
157048
Process Variables
Page 58




The catalyst recirculation slide valve controls the combustor temperature by
adjusting the amount of hot catalyst recycled to the vessel. It is normally operated
on TRC control. With adequate excess oxygen, combustor density and normal
velocity, an upper combustor temperature of 1275F should be sufficient. This
temperature may need to be increased for the following reasons:

Dilute temperatures are too high due to afterburn

Combustor density is low due to high air rates

Flue gas oxygen is low due to blower limits

CRC is high due to above situations

The ability to increase temperature in the combustor is, however, limited. Once the
recirculation slide valve is full open, no further increase in temperature can be
gained with hot recycle catalyst. The effect of other factors, such as the use of CO
promoter or increased coke operation, can lead to additional temperature
increase.

It should be noted that a flow-through catalyst cooler can limit the effectiveness of
the recirculation catalyst to raise combustor temperature. The cooled catalyst flow
will require additional hot catalyst recycle to maintain desired temperatures.
Somewhat compensating is the high coke operation that calls for the catalyst
cooler in the first place. However, if it becomes necessary, the cooled catalyst slide
valve can be adjusted to help optimize the combustor temperature.

Density

Density and velocity together determine the residence time of the catalyst within the
combustor. It is desirable to maintain at least 6 lb/ft
3
density in the combustor and if
possible, 9 - 10 lb/ft
3
should be a normal operating target.
157048
Process Variables
Page 59




The combustor density is a dependent variable, since the temperature controls the
recirculation slide valve, unit capacity determines the velocity based on air rate, and
spent catalyst flow is dependent on the catalyst/oil ratio. However, where possible
the density (residence time) should be increased for the following situations:

CRC is high due to insufficient combustion time

Dilute temperatures are too high due to afterburn

Increased density will promote better thermal mixing and will increase residence
time to help resolve these conditions. Also keep in mind that as density increases,
the combustor catalyst inventory increases and the upper regenerator level will
decrease.

Velocity

Combustor velocity is a dependent variable determined by the amount of air needed
to complete the combustion and thus is not a variable available to the operator to
optimize other combustor conditions. However, excessive levels of flue gas oxygen
(>2.5%) provide little benefit and only serve to increase combustor velocity
unnecessarily.

A good range for combustor velocity is 4 to 5.5 ft/s. The lower end of the range is
generally better when there is a choice. When velocity exceeds 5.5 ft/s, the unit can
become combustion limited and increased afterburning may be observed. At high
combustor velocities due to capacity demands, CO promoter can be a valuable
addition. Although velocities in excess of 6 ft/s have been observed commercially,
they have been run in a promoted operation.

Combustor velocity may be too high if the following conditions are observed:

Afterburn increases despite other efforts to minimize

CRC increases even with high combustor temperature
157048
Process Variables
Page 60




Excess Oxygen

The air rate and regenerator pressure will determine the oxygen partial pressure in
the combustor. Although higher levels of excess oxygen via increased air rate are
beneficial to the combustion kinetics, they are counterproductive to the unit
economics. Velocity will increase as air rate is increased, negating some of the
advantages of higher oxygen partial pressure. Thus, flue gas oxygen should be
maintained at or below 2 mol%.

There are certain situations when an increase in oxygen beyond normal flue gas
levels may be warranted:

Velocity is low and combustor temperature cannot be increased further

CRC is high despite other efforts to minimize

One element that can be considered to increase oxygen partial pressure in the
combustor without increasing air rate is the use of pure oxygen injection. In certain
situations this may be economically feasible.

CO Combustion Promoter

If all other conditions in the combustor are optimized, the use of promoter will not be
required. However, it is perhaps inevitable that the FCC unit will be pushed to the
limits such that the combustor conditions will generally exceed optimum values. In
this case, the use of promoter can provide an additional measure of safety for
controlling afterburn and avoiding excessive dilute phase temperatures.

Particularly when maximum unit capacity is required beyond design levels, the use
of promoter can be beneficial. The following conditions might suggest that promoter
should be considered:

Velocity is high, density is low and recirculation catalyst is maximized

Dilute temperatures are high due to the previous conditions

Afterburn is high despite high combustor temperatures
157048
Process Variables
Page 61




Maximum Capacity

Since many units operate on the basis of pushing the FCC capacity to the limit, it is
appropriate to discuss what will happen in the combustor. Prior comments on the
operating variables have addressed some of the concerns of higher capacity
operation, but an overall perspective is needed.

In general, pushing capacity to the maximum will result in a combustor operating at
high velocity, low density and low catalyst residence time. Directionally, this will tend
to increase afterburn and carbon on regenerated catalyst.

From earlier data shown regarding coke burning kinetics, carbon is reduced to
levels around 0.15 wt% very quickly, but to get to 0.05 wt% requires substantial
additional time. In a maximum capacity operation, there may not be sufficient time in
the combustor to reach carbon levels of 0.05 wt% or below.

It is important to point out that this is not all bad, and in fact may be economically
advantageous. With the use of promoter to maintain control of after burning, it is
possible to allow the CRC to increase as a trade off for more feed capacity.
Although effective catalyst activity is reduced, the reduction may be small enough to
justify the higher capacity operation.

Optimization Summary

All of the above variables need to be thoroughly understood, especially how they
interact with each other. Application of this knowledge properly will result in arriving
at the best operation for each particular unit. Optimization should be considered as
a continuous effort, since what is optimal in one set of circumstances may not be in
another.

As a final note, it should be emphasized that UOP is always interested in obtaining
feedback on the operation and experiences of these units from the refiner. Our
Technical Service department is always available to provide assistance or
consultation as needed. Only through working together can we hope to continue to
improve our designs and their performance capability.
157048
Process Variables
Page 62




MAIN COLUMN BOTTOMS AND SLURRY SETTLER


INTRODUCTION

The main column bottoms system on an FCC presents some unusual mechanical
and operating problems. The vapors entering the column are superheated and
contain catalyst fines which may cause erosion or plugging. Heavy oil cascading
down the disc and doughnut (side-to-side on some units) trays cool and condense
the heavy vapors so that they can be fractionated. The catalyst fines are washed
down to the bottom of the column by this cascading stream.


COKE

Many units have some coke buildup in the reactor, vapor line, and bottom of the
main column. The amount in the reactor and vapor line can be minimized by good
insulation. The coke buildup in the main column is influenced by three factors:

1. Hydrocarbon characteristics

2. Temperature

3. Residence Time

Some hydrocarbons have a greater tendency to thermally crack and produce coke
than others. The Conradson or Ramsbottom carbon residue tests may be used to
get some idea of this tendency, but it is difficult to compare one stock with another.
The amount of catalytic cracking that has taken place in the reactor will influence
the coke production of the hydrocarbons in the main column. The operation of the
FCC unit and of the upstream units that produce FCC feed are controlled by other,
more important variables than the main column bottoms coke make. Temperature
and residence time control are used to minimize the bottoms coke problem.

157048
Process Variables
Page 63




The maximum allowable temperature in the bottom of the tower is usually given as
700F (370C). Experience with a particular feed may raise or lower this somewhat,
but it is better to run lower to prevent coke problems. Many refiners use 680-700F
(360-370C) as the normal operating point.

The major control on the bottoms temperature is by the composition of the material,
but the quench line may also be used to sub-cool the bottoms material. This line
returns cool oil directly to the bottoms level, instead of to the disc and doughnut
trays. It is generally used at high throughput, when there is adequate flow to the
discs and doughnuts, and the heat input to the column is high.

Residence time refers only to the time spent in the column, not in the entire slurry
system. The oil begins to cool as soon as it leaves the tower. There may be some
minor coking in the slurry settler and associated piping, but usually this is not
enough to affect plant operations. If the oil is in the tower too long, at too high a
temperature, serious coking can plug the bottom. Removal is difficult, because
chipping away with hammers usually leads to lining damage. Other methods, such
as chemical cleaning, are usually ineffective.

At low charge rates, the bottoms circulation through the exchangers must be
reduced to heat balance the tower. The oil cascading down the discs and
doughnuts decreases to a point where the trays run dry. Because the hot reactor
vapors are not cooled, they can cause warping and distortion of both the disc and
doughnut trays and those above as this large volume of vapors tries to pass up the
column. Catalyst fines will be carried up into the HCO and LCO circuits, which can
be quite serious, because these areas are not designed for fines removal. Product
specifications will be adversely affected.

The solution to this problem and that of long residence times at low circulation rates
is to use the minimum flow line which bypasses the exchangers and returns oil
directly to the column, over the disc and doughnut trays. The flow over these trays
should be at least 50 gpm/ft tower ID (37.3 m
3
/hr/meter tower ID). This line is
usually used on startup, when the charge rate is low and the tower is cool. As
157048
Process Variables
Page 64




charge rate increases, the flow rate through the minimum line is decreased to force
oil through the heat exchange circuits. There should always be a small amount of oil
flowing through the line, so that the oil does not set up. The same is true for the
quench line to the bottom of the fractionator.

Some units have used a large impingement baffle to break up the reactor vapors as
they enter the column. Many of these baffles proved to be a good starting point for
coke, and the baffles were removed. Inevitably, there is some coke buildup; pieces
may break off with thermal shock or other stresses. If a chunk of coke could enter
the bottom line, it could cause plugging or pump damage. A coke trap made of Type
405 or 410 stainless steel is used at the bottom of the column to keep these large
chunks out of the line. Smaller pieces of coke pass through it and are caught by the
pump suction screens. These can be cleaned on stream, while the larger chunks of
coke might prove difficult to remove from the line.


CATALYST CARRYOVER

The amount of catalyst carryover from the reactor will depend on unit design,
cyclone efficiency, catalyst type, and unit throughput. Unusual problems such as
high reactor level, cyclone failure through cracks or plugged diplegs, or pressure
surges can increase the catalyst carryover to unacceptable levels. A conventional
unit of older design (single stage cyclones) should lose less than 0.4 LB/bbl charge
over to the main column, with most of this returning with the slurry recycle. A new
unit with a riser "Tee" and high efficiency cyclones should lose less than 0.05
LB/bbl.

It is not practical to actually measure the catalyst content of the main column inlet
vapors. The catalyst content of the circulating bottom stream is, however, a good
indication of the catalyst losses. A general assumption may be made that very little
catalyst is entrained up into the HCO or LCO products. If this is not the case, the
bottoms circulation over the disc and doughnut trays should be increased as much
as possible, within the limits imposed by other operating variables. The lower part of
157048
Process Variables
Page 65




the tower should be inspected carefully at the next turnaround to determine if the
problem is here.
The main column bottoms pump discharge manifold is constructed to direct the
catalyst fines and coke particles out of the circulating system. The lines to the
various exchangers come off the top of the manifold. The line to the slurry settler
will come off the end of the manifold from the bottom. If there is no settler, the
reactor recycle and bottoms product lines will both come off the bottom of the
manifold. This obviously will not achieve a complete removal of catalyst fines or
coke, but it will help prevent a buildup in the main column bottoms circulating
system.


SLURRY SETTLER

The slurry settler process flow is shown in Figure 16 in Process Control section.
Main column bottoms enter the settler through a tangential nozzle; this gives it a
swirling motion that promotes a more even distribution of the heavy oil as it moves
up towards the outlet. The catalyst fines settle out and are carried back to the
reactor. The carrying medium will depend upon the operation.

1. Low activity catalyst with large amounts of recycle:

This would be typical of older units that require the high recycle rates to get desired
conversion. The recycle consists of main column bottoms and HCO, which is cooler
and has a higher flowing specific gravity than the bottoms material. The HCO is
injected into the upper diluent point and flows down with some of the bottoms and
most of the catalyst that enters the settler. A plant operating in this mode would
have a CFR of 1.2 to 2.0.
157048
Process Variables
Page 66




2. Higher activity catalyst with little or no recycle:

The use of the new higher activity catalysts and better reactor design enable the
refiner to crack most of the feed on the first try. The heavy oil product make is
lower; it is also a more refractory material which tends to go to coke and dry gas
when recycled to the reactor. The carrying material used in this case may be HCO,
but for many units, raw oil is the better choice. The bottom diluent injection point is
used to minimize the amount of raw oil that will go up into the settler. If the raw oil
thermally cracks or goes out with the CSO, it may cause problems with the CSO
product specifications. To help prevent this, the flow back to the reactor should
always be higher than the diluent flow to the settler.


SETTLER OVERHEAD

The amount of CSO that comes off the top of the settler will also depend upon the
operation. The decreased heavy oil make of the newer units can lead to a buildup of
catalyst in the main column because there is less main column bottoms leaving the
tower to take it out. This refers to oil leaving the system, not to the bottoms
circulation streams. The concentration of fines in the tower may build up enough to
cause serious erosion and plugging problems. The most effective solution is to use
a return line from the top of the settler to the main column disc and doughnut trays.
The flow to the settler can then be increased by the amount of oil which is returned
to the main column relatively free of catalyst.

Typical settler flow rates are shown in Table 11. For this table, it was assumed that
catalyst is coming overhead from the reactor at a rate of 100 LB/day. The catalyst
can only leave the system through the outlet to the settler; therefore, the
concentration will be equal to the amount of catalyst (100 LB/day), divided by the
flow to the settler.
157048
Process Variables
Page 67




TABLE 11

SLURRY SETTLER FLOW


CASE A CASE B CASE C

Feed to FCC, BPD 10,000 10,000 10,000

Main Column Bottoms
To Slurry Settler, BPD 1500 500 1500

Main Column Bottoms Catalyst
Concentration, lb/bbl 0.067 0.20 0.067

Diluent, BPD 500 500 500

CSO Product, BPD 1,000 500 500

Recycle to Reactor, BPD 1,000 500 500

CSO Return to Main Column, BPD 0 0 1,000

Case A would be an operation with lower activity catalyst and a higher CSO product
make. Case B would be a conversion to higher activity operation, decreasing the
amount of recycle and the CSO product. Neither Case A or B uses a return line
from the top of the settler to the main column. Case C is similar to B in that a higher
activity catalyst is used, with a small amount of main column bottoms produced. The
use of the return line from the top of the settler back to the main column allows the
flow to the settler to be increased to 1500 BPD. A limit on flow to the settler is the
velocity of fines settling. The liquid velocity should never exceed 30 BPD/ft
2
(50
m
3
/d/m
2
) of settler cross sectional area. Above this, there may be problems with
catalyst carry over into the overhead stream.
157048
Process Variables
Page 68




FCC UNITS WITHOUT SLURRY SETTLER

Some of the new units have incorporated a reactor cyclone configuration which
decreases the amount of catalyst carryover to the main column. The reactor riser
ends with a pair of outlet arms, and a two stage cyclone system on the reactor
outlet eliminates most of the catalyst in the overhead vapors. With this system,
some refiners have elected not to use a slurry settler. The recycle to the reactor and
the bottoms product come directly from the main column bottoms pump discharge
manifold.


PLUGGING

There are occasional problems with plugging in the lines or exchangers of catalyst
bearing streams. If there is a plant upset which causes large amounts of catalyst to
go overhead, such as a sudden dip in column pressure, immediate action should be
taken to remove the extra catalyst from the system. Increased slurry recycle and
clarified oil product would be the two most important steps. These should be
continued until the laboratory confirms that the BS & W content of the bottoms
stream is back to normal.

In the event of a major upset that completely fills the bottoms of the column with
catalyst, care must be taken to avoid further complications. Catalyst holds heat fairly
well and conducts it poorly, so the cool-down period may be on the order of several
days. The thermocouples in the column will be well insulated by the catalyst close to
the wall, so the readings will probably be lower than the actual temperature of most
of the catalyst. Introduction of cold oil or wash water will produce severe pressure
surges that may damage the column internals. The oil soaked catalyst is both a fire
and breathing hazard. The shutdown for cleanout can be estimated at one week, a
good argument against hasty measures that could lead to excessive catalyst
carryover to the column.

157048
Process Variables
Page 69




MAIN COLUMN BOTTOMS EXCHANGERS

To prevent catalyst plugging or erosion in the exchangers, UOP calls for the
following velocities in the tubes:

1. Straight tubes: maximum velocity 8.0 ft/sec, minimum 4.00 ft/s.

2. U-tubes: maximum velocity 8.00 ft/sec, minimum 4.00 ft/s.

In general, the optimum velocity is 8.00 ft/s. Straight tube construction is
recommended. It is important to think of these numbers when changing raw oil
charge or exchanger flow rates. Plugged exchangers are difficult to clean. A catalyst
bearing stream is never routed through the shell side of an exchanger because the
catalyst fines will settle to the bottom of the exchanger. There will be a progressive
loss of heat transfer area as more and more tubes are covered by the fines.


MAIN COLUMN BOTTOMS HEAT REMOVAL

The main column bottoms circulation rate is adjusted to control the column's heat
removal requirement. The bottoms stream generally exchanges heat with the raw oil
feed and is utilized in the production of superheated steam in the steam generators.

A reduction or increase in the bottoms heat removal must be compensated by an
increase or reduction in heat removal in another section. Provided no other changes
are made, the overhead reflux rate will compensate for any changes in bottoms
heat removal. As illustrated in Table 12, a decrease in the bottoms stream heat
removal results in an increase in reflux rate. The bottoms stream heat removal
should be adjusted to minimize the reflux rate and maintain good product
distillations.
157048
Process Variables
Page 70




TABLE 12

Feed Rate, BPD 17550 17550

Overhead reflux rate, BPD 10488 11581
Net ovhd light gas yield, MMSCFH 13.81 13.81
Net ovhd liquid yield, BPD 7973 7993
Ovhd heat removal, MM-BTU/hr 42.81 45.24

Net heavy naphtha yield, BPD 2782 2782
Circ. heavy naphtha heat removal
MM-Btu/HR 12.32 12.32

Net LCO yield, BPD 1790 1790
Circ. LCO heat removal,
MM-BTU/hr 10.17 10.17

Net bottoms yield, BPD 967 967
Circ. bottoms heat removal,
MM-BTU/hr 31.0 28.57


GASOLINE/DISTILLATE PRODUCTION

The main column draw temperatures are dependent on the stream's composition
and vary with changes in draw rate. As the gasoline product draw is reduced, liquid
will drop down the column to the LCO draw tray and require an increase in LCO
product draw. The reduced gasoline draw rate will result in a lighter gasoline
product having a lower ASTM distillation end point and a lower draw tray
temperature. The LCO product also becomes lighter because of light material
dropping to the LCO draw tray. The LCO initial boiling point temperature will
decrease with a slight decrease in the draw tray temperature. Table 13 illustrates
the changes which result to the main column and product streams as the LCO yield
is increased by reducing the gasoline endpoint and yield.
157048
Process Variables
Page 71




TABLE 13
Gasoline:
API 57.9 57.2 56.3
Product rate, BPD 15800 16200 16600
90% BP temp., F 372 381 392
RONC 90.7 90.6 90.4
MC overhead temp., F 311 316 323

Light cycle oil
API 20.1 19.8 19.3
Product rate, BPD 6000 5600 5200
Flash point, F 198 204 212
10% BP temp., F 462 471 482
90% BP temp., F 624 624 624
End point, F 664 664 664
MC draw temp., F 482 485 499

Slurry
API 6.2 6.2 6.2
Product rate, BPD 2800 2800 2800


GASOLINE CUT PROPERTIES

Gasoline or any other liquid stream can be broken up into numerous cuts, each
having distinct properties. Examining the cuts which comprise a typical gasoline
sample will show how overall product quality can be improved.
157048
Process Variables
Page 72




A FCCU gasoline sample from a high severity operation was broken up into nine
cuts, each having a narrow TBP range as illustrated in Table 14. The properties of
the individual cuts are shown in Figures 6 and 7.

TABLE 14

Cut No. Cumulative TBP Fraction, F
Vol -% 75 - 93
1 20 93 - 145
2 30 145 - 181
3 40 181 - 210
4 50 210 - 250
5 60 250 - 286
6 70 250 - 286
7 80 286 - 334
8 90 334 - 387
9 100 387+

157048
Process Variables
Page 73




FIGURE 15: FCC GASOLINE CUT PROPERTIES
0
100
200
300
400
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasoline Cut
A
v
g
.

B
o
i
l
i
n
g

P
o
i
n
t

T
e
m
p
,

F

20
40
60
80
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasoline Cut
A
P
I

G
r
a
v
i
t
y

80
84
88
92
96
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasoline Cut
R
O
N
C
157048
Process Variables
Page 74




FIGURE 16: FCCU GASOLINE CUT PROPERTIES
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasoline Cut
S
u
l
f
u
r
,

w
t

%

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasol i ne Cut
B
r
o
m
i
n
e




N
u
m
b
e
r

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gasol i ne Cut
L
i
q
u
i
d

V
o
l

%
Paraf f in/Naptha Aromatic Olef in

157048
Process Variables
Page 75




The sulfur content of gasoline increases sharply in the last 387+ TBP fraction as
indicated in the Wt-% SULFUR graph. The overall sulfur content of gasoline hence
could be reduced by lowering the gasoline end point temperature.

The RONC graph of the various cuts indicates a reduction in octane at CUT 4
(181-210 TBP) and CUT 9 (387+ TBP). A slight increase in the overall gasoline
octane can be obtained by reducing the end point temperature of the gasoline. If it
were possible to remove CUT 4, gasoline octane could be further increased.
157048
Process Variables
Page 76




ROUTINE PROCESS VARIABLE CONTROL
REACTOR REGENERATOR SECTION

This tabulation of process conditions is intended to assist the operator in selecting
the optimum operating conditions for different operations. It may be noted here that
process units rarely operate at their design conditions.

Variable Operating Conditions

Raw oil charge rate As desired.

Raw oil temperature To balance coke yield, conversion, and RON
requirements.

Slurry recycle rate Normally at minimum.

HCO or raw oil to Equal to or slightly less than total flow of slurry
slurry settler recycle to reactor, or until clarified oil gravity
changes.

Heavy recycle rate Heavy recycle rate can be varied to adjust
conversion product yields or increase coke yield.

Combined feed temperature Normally as high as possible provided neither
reactor nor regenerator temperature is excessive.

Reactor temperature As necessary to obtain desired conversion and
RON.

Reactor pressure Equals fractionation column receiver pressure plus
fractionation pressure drop.

Reactor level (Riser To cover top stripping grid.
cracking operation)

Reactor level (Bed cracking Minimum level needed to achieve desired
operation) conversion.

Emergency steam to riser Used to initiate catalyst circulation on startup and
to avoid plugging the riser on an emergency
shutdown. Normally not used.
157048
Process Variables
Page 77




Variable Operating Conditions

LCO or gasoline to riser Used to control regenerator temperature when the
unit is "behind in burning".

Stripping steam Just enough to strip catalyst. This value can be
arrived at by observing the effect of decreasing the
stripping steam on regenerator temperature.
1.5-2 lb/1000 lb catalyst circulation is typical.

Steam to feed nozzle Normally adjusted to maximize feed distributor
pressure drop within feed pump hydraulic
constraint. Usually 1-2 wt% of feed.

Regenerator air rate As necessary to control regenerator temperature
spread or to give good control using automatic
snort. On total CO burning units to obtain 1-4%
oxygen in flue gas.

Regenerator dense Normally cracking conditions are varied to
phase temperature optimize regenerator dense phase temperature.
Too cold and catalyst will not be well regenerated.
Too hot and reaction with oil will be thermal with
resultant loss of gasoline and increase in gas.

Regenerator dilute phase The difference between regenerator dense, dilute
or flue gas temperature and flue gas temperatures is an indication of the
(on conventional partial amount of excess oxygen present, and is the
CO burning units) criterion by which the air rate is varied.

Regenerator pressure Equals the reactor pressure plus the reactor
(conventional) regenerator differential pressure.

Regenerator pressure (with Regenerator pressure controlled, reactor-regener-
flue gas power recovery) ator differential allowed to swing within reasonable
limits.

Regenerator level The catalyst level can vary from about 35" to 80"
of H
2
O with the unit inventory and regenerator
velocity.

Reactor-regenerator Varied to obtain stable slide valve differentials and
differential pressure minimum utility consumption.
157048
Process Variables
Page 78




Variable Operating Conditions

Slide valve differential Dependent on vessel differential and catalyst
pressure condition. Over-rides are normally set at 1-2 psi.

Steam to spray and Flow will be almost zero except when sprays are
torch nozzles in service.

Torch oil rate Used on startup and to control afterburning on
partial CO combustion units.

Torch steam pressure Only used when necessary to atomize torch oil
and normally 5-10 psi higher than regenerator
pressure.

157048
Process Variables
Page 79




TABLE 15

MAIN COLUMN

Variable Operating Conditions

Main column bottoms Adjust clarified oil yield and quench to hold long
temperature enough to prevent coking.

Circulating slurry rate As necessary to control fractionating column heat
removal requirements. To minimize top reflux to
obtain minimum gap (25-40F) on gasoline
between 90% and E.P.

Slurry return temperature Of little interest. Dependent on cleanliness of
exchangers, number in service and circulation
rate.

Clarified slurry yield, or As necessary to control fractionating column
main column bottoms bottoms temperature and level.
yield if no slurry settler

Main column bottoms BS&W Adjust flow to slurry settler, clarified oil return to
main column, and slurry recycle. If no slurry
settler, adjust bottoms recycle and bottoms
product.

Heavy recycle oil circulation Rate is set as desired to transfer heat to various
reboilers.

Heavy recycle deck Depends on distillation range on heavy recycle
temperature and on tower pressure.

Light cycle oil yield Depends on charge rate and conversion, and is
varied to maintain desired properties of light cycle
oil. Also used to control bottoms level.

Flush oil As required to keep catalyst out of instruments.
Normally 1500-2000 BPD, but this will vary
between different units.

157048
Process Variables
Page 80




Variable Operating Conditions

Light cycle oil Enough to meet flash point specifications.
stripping steam

Light cycle oil Depends on distillation range of light cat gas oil
deck temperature and on tower pressure.

Unstabilized gasoline top Is varied to control tower top temperature and
reflux rate depends on amount of heat removed lower in
column.

Circulating top Depends on water temperature and flow rates.
reflux temperature

Fractionator column top Varied to control endpoint of unstabilized
temperature gasoline.

Overhead receiver pressure Can be varied as discussed.

Overhead receiver Should always be as cold as is economically
temperature possible.

Unstabilized gasoline yield Depends on charge rate and conversion.

Wet gas molecular weight Minor variations in density will be due to changes
in receiver conditions, but major changes will be
due to increased hydrogen production. At low
densities, the compressor will have an increased
tendency to surge.

Wet gas flow Dependent on compressor speed but must be
adequate to handle production plus spillback for
control. Must be above minimum to keep out of
surge.

157048
Process Variables
Page 81




TABLE 16

GAS CONCENTRATION SECTION

Variable Operating Conditions

Wet gas compressor Run at minimum governor until spillbacks close.
Variable speed

Fixed speed centrifugal Butterfly valve opens away from limiting stop as
spillbacks close.

Fixed speed reciprocating On spillback control.

Wet gas spillbacks Vary as needed to hold main column overhead
receiver and interstage pressure. Used to keep
centrifugal machine out of surge.
High pressure separator
Temperature 80F-100F (27-38C)

Pressure Rides on primary absorber backpressure.

Primary absorber
Top and intercoolers Less than 100F (38C)
temperatures

Intercooler flow rates As needed for good absorption efficiency.

Pressure Rides on sponge absorber backpressure.

Sponge absorber
Top temperature As cool as economically practical.

Lean oil flow rate As needed for good absorption efficiency. Do not
flood tower.

Pressure Controlled to give good absorption efficiency and
hold correct backpressure on HPS.

157048
Process Variables
Page 82




Variable Operating Conditions

Stripper Overhead vapor flow Controlled by heat input to column to give
rate sufficient C
2
-
and H
2
S stripping.

Heat input to column Controlled to give proper overhead vapor rates.

Pressure Rides on high pressure separator backpressure.

Debutanizer
Top temperature Controls reflux to give desired RVP of gasoline.

Top reflux temperature Should be as cold as economically possible.

Reboiler heat As required to give good fractionation.

Pressure Varied as needed for good fractionation, but must
be high enough to allow condensation of C
3
-C
4

stream by air fin fans or cooling water.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 1



PROCESS CALCULATIONS


INTRODUCTION

Throughout the years the Fluid Catalytic Cracking process has been a very versatile
and flexible tool for the refiner, and has become the basic conversion step in the
modern refinery. This process has survived and prospered because of its ability to
handle the many changes in catalyst, operating conditions, and feedstocks that have
occurred over the years.

The FCC Unit produces large volumes of high octane gasoline, olefinic LPG, fuel oil
(LCO and MCB), fuel gas, steam, and electricity. The yields are mainly determined by
process variables (i.e. feedstock, operating conditions, mechanical features, and type of
catalyst). Process variables have varying degrees of interdependence and may change
frequently producing changes in the yield structure of the products. A performance test
conducted at least once a week is recommended to evaluate the effect of process
variables on yield. The tests can be used to chart a history of the unit and to find
conclusions at different operating conditions.

The performance test provides accurate yield structures at a particular set of operating
conditions and provides a base point for further testing. The Performance Test normally
includes a heat balance, material balance, and a pressure survey. In those cases where
more information is desired, a Mechanical Evaluation Test is recommended. The refiner
can use this test to assess the potential of the unit and determine possible bottlenecks.

This section explains how to accomplish an acceptable Heat and Material balance and
how to do some of the most important calculations in the FCC Unit. An FCC
Performance Test Procedure is available on request from the Technical Service
Department. This procedure explains in detail how to conduct a performance test in the
FCC Unit.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 2



MATERIAL BALANCE

A material balance on an FCC Unit is done by drawing an envelope around the unit in a
manner that flow rates are known for all streams. This envelope includes the Reactor,
Regenerator, Main Column, and Gas Concentration sections. Normally, the Gas
Concentration Unit includes the primary absorber, sponge absorber, stripper column,
and debutanizer column.


1. Data

Flow rates, flowing temperatures and laboratory analyses are required for each stream.
Pressure is also needed for the gas streams. The following table shows the information
needed to do a material balance:

INPUT DATA FOR HEAT AND MATERIAL BALANCE
Stream Flow Temp. Pressure API Distillation GC Meter Factor
Feed Yes Yes Yes D-1160 Yes
Air* Yes Yes Yes Yes
MCB Yes Yes Yes D-1160 Yes
LCO Yes Yes Yes D-86 Yes
Gasoline Yes Yes Yes D-86 Yes Yes
LPG Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sponge Gas Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Flue Gas Yes
Notes *Ambient temperature and relative humidity of air are needed.
Reactor, Regenerator, and combined feed temperature are needed for Heat Balance

The method for including extraneous streams is straight forward as long as flow rates
and analyses are known. These additional streams coming into the Main Column and
Gas Concentration Unit are subtracted from the product streams.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 3



2. Liquid Streams

Calculate corrected liquid flow rates using the following equation:

Q = K R (G
f
)
1/2
/ G
b


Where: Q = flow rate
K = flow meter constant ("K" factor)
R = chart reading
G
b
= base gravity @ 60F
G
f
= gravity at flowing temperature

The flowing gravity G
f
is calculated using the following equation:

G
f
= G
b
x VCF

Where: VCF = Volume correction factor

VCF = EXP [ (-o) T(1+0.8 o T) ] 0.9545

Where:
Go = density at 60F in kg/m
3
926
T = observed temperature in F 173
T= T - 60 113
o = coefficient of thermal expansion at 60F, (1/F)

The set of correlations for the coefficient of thermal expansion based on API Data
Tables are:

o = (Ko + K1 Go + K2 Go )/ Go 0.00039779

Where:
157048
Process Calculations
Page 4




Product API Range Ko K1 K2
Crude Oils 0 100 341.0957 0 0
Gasoline 52 85 192.4571 0.2438 0
Gasoline/Jet 48 52 1489.0670 0 -0.0018684
Jet Fuels 37 48 330.3010 0 0
Fuel Oils 0 37 103.8720 0.2701 0
Lubricating Oils -10 45 0 0.3488 0

For FCC Raw Oil Feedstock (VGO); Ko = 341.0957, K1 = 0, K2 = 0

The following rounding is applied to the input and output of all routines.

Temperature: 0.1F
Density: 0.1 API or 0.5 kg/m
3

VCF: five significant figures for computation

Example: Raw Oil Charge

K = 3,380 in BPSD
R = 8.9
G
b
= 0.9260
VCF = 0.9545
G
f
= 0.9260 x 0.9545 = 0.8839

Q = 3,380 x 8.9 x (0.8839)
1/2
/ 0.9260= 30,542 BPSD

Q = (BPSD) x 5.614583 ft
3
/bbl x (G
b
x 62.3635 lb/ft
3
H
2
O)/24 hr/day
Q = 412,615 lb/hr

Similar calculations are done for all C5+ liquid streams. LPG streams are treated as follows:

157048
Process Calculations
Page 5




Estimation of VCF for LPG

The following equation approximates VCFs from API Tables #33 and #34:

( )
( ) ( ) 1.0 60 T 10 VCF
B *Gb A
+ =
+


Where:
T = Flowing Temperature, F
Gb = Specific Gravity @ 60F, in g/ml
A = 2.64641798
B = 1.40583481
157048
Process Calculations
Page 6



3. Gas Streams

Calculate corrected gas and air flow rates as follows:

Q = K x R x (P
f
/(T
f
x SG))
1/2

Where: Q = flow rate
K = flow meter constant ("K" factor)
R = flow meter reading
P
f
= Pressure at flowing conditions (absolute)
T
f
= Temperature at flowing conditions (absolute)
SG = specific gravity of gas = MW
gas
/MW
air
(1.0 for air)

Example: Sponge Gas

Q = K x R x [(P
f
/(T
f
x SG))]
1/2


Where: K = 91,848 scfh
R = 6.5 chart reading
P
f
= 173 psig + 14.7 = 187.7 psia
T
f
= 113F + 460 = 573R
SG = 0.7054 from Sponge gas calculations
MW = 18.9 from Sponge gas calculations

Q

= 91,848 x 6.5 x [(187.7)/(573 x 0.7054)]
1/2
= 406,837 scfh

M = Mass Flow = scfh x MW/379.67 = 20,261 lb/hr

Where: 379.67 is the conversion factor for scf / mol

Similar calculations are done for all gas, vapor, and air streams.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 7




4. Calculate Coke

The coke make is calculated from the Heat Balance. (Refer to Heat Balance calculation
section.)


5. Calculate the as Produced Yields

A product yield is defined as the product rate divided by the raw oil rate.

The volume percent of each product stream is:

Vol-% (A) = (A, bpsd)100/Fresh Feed, bpsd

The weight percent is:

Wt-% (A) = (A, lb/hr)100/Fresh Feed, lb/hr

Where: A = any product stream
157048
Process Calculations
Page 8



6. Weight and Liquid Volume Recoveries

Once the weight and the volume flows are known for each stream, the Weight recovery
and the Liquid volume recovery can be calculated. Proper data analysis requires that
the Weight recovery must be 100.0 2.0 wt-%. Errors outside this range are significant
and cast doubts on the validity of the test data. The Sponge Gas used to calculate the
Weight recovery should not include the inert gases (N
2
, O
2
, CO, CO
2
). In addition, the
as-produced Liquid Volume recovery does not include the C
3
+ from the sponge gas.

Weight % Recovery = (Products, lb/hr x 100)/(Fresh Feed + Extraneous Feeds) lb/hr

Liquid Volume % Recovery = (Products, bpsd x 100)/(Fresh Feed + Extraneous
Feeds)bpsd


7. Conversion

Conversion is defined as the volume percentage of raw oil converted to gasoline and
lighter components. This is calculated as:

Conversion, Vol% =
Feed - LCO - HCO - MCB
Feed
100

This conversion is called as-produced or apparent conversion because is not corrected
for cut-points. The corrected or true conversion is calculated using the same equation
after the gasoline and LCO yields are corrected for cut-points.

8. Gasoline and LCO Yield Adjustments

It is important to correct the gasoline and LCO yields on a constant cut-point basis. It is
inaccurate to compare gasoline yields at different 90% or EP temperatures. The gasoline
yield must also be adjusted by removing the C
4
's and adding the C
5
's and C
6
's from the
LPG and Sponge Gas streams. The procedures to adjust the liquid yields and to calculate
the C
4
's in the gasoline are attached in this section.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 9



9. Gasoline Selectivity

The gasoline selectivity is the corrected gasoline yield divided by the true conversion:

Gasoline Selectivity =
(Corrected Gasoline Yield)
True Conversion
100


10. LPG and Sponge Gas Calculations

These procedures use the mol percentage from the GC analysis, the molecular weight,
and the specific gravity to calculate the flow rate of each component. Also, the stream
specific gravity and molecular weight are calculated. The procedure is attached in this
section.


11. C
3
and C
4
Recovery

The C
3
and C
4
recovery indicate how the Gas concentration is performing. The C
3

recovery is calculated as:

C
3
Recovery, Vol% =
C
3
in LPG
(C
3
in LPG + C
3
in Fuel Gas)
100

The C
4
recovery is calculated as:

C
4
Recovery, Vol% =
C
4
in LPG
(C
4
in LPG + C
4
in Fuel Gas + C
4
in Gasoline)
100

157048
Process Calculations
Page 10





FCC Unit Material Balance


Refiner: _______________________________ Location: _______________________ Date: __________
TI - Tag FE - Tag Gravity Vol.Corr. Flowing Meter
Temp. F Readings Gb@60F Factor Gravity Gf "K" BPSD lb/Hr Vol% Wt%
1 Fresh Feed (FF) TI10 FRC-10
173 8.90 0.9260 0.9545 0.8839 3,380 30,538 412,601
2 Main Col Bottoms
(MCB)
TI-20 FRC-20
462 4.80 1.0412 0.8806 0.9169 418 1,843 28,005 6.04 6.79
3 Light Cycle Oil
(LCO)
TI-30 FC-30
101 9.00 0.9200 0.9838 0.9051 700 6,515 87,450 21.33 21.19
4 Gasoline (DebBt) TI-40 FRC-40
148 7.60 0.7599 0.9489 0.7211 2,118 17,987 199,434 58.90 48.34
5 LPG TI-50 FRC-50
87 7.20 0.5612 0.9653 0.5418 632 5,964 48,833 19.53 11.84
6 LPG (ELPG)
Extraneous Feed
TI- FRC-
0 0 0.00 0.00
7 Coke Seeattached Heat Balancecalculation sheet. 25,187 6.10
PE-Tag
Press, psig SCFM
8 Sponge Gas (SGas) TI-60 FC-60 PRC-60 W/o Inerts 6,589 18,821 4.56
113 6.50 0.6519 173 1,518 6,996 20,887
8 Gas (HGas)
Extraneous Feed
TI- FC- PRC- W/o Inerts 0 0 0.00

9a Air to Regenerator
(Dry Back)
TI-70 FIC-70 PI-70
415 6.83 1.00 44.5 46,000 81,721 374,251
9b Air to Cat. Cooler TI-72 FIC-72 PI-72
230 5.00 1.00 56 325 520 2,382
9c Air to Distributor 2 TI-74 FIC-74 PI-74
230 6.20 1.00 56 635 1,260 5,771
9 Total Air to Regen (Wet Basis) 83,502 382,405

As produced Calculations

10 Weight Rec Inert Free = [MCB lb/hr+LCO lb/hr+DebBt lb/hr+LPG lb/hr+SGas lb/hr+Cokelb/hr]*100/
[FF lb/hr+ELPG lb/hr+EGas lb/hr] =
= 98.82 Wt%

11 Liquid Vol. Recovery = [MCB bpsd+LCO bpsd+DebBt bpsd+LPG bpsd]*100/[FF bpsd+ELPG bpsd] = 105.8 Vol%

12 Conversion = [FF bpsd-MCB bpsd-LCO bpsd]*100/[FF bpsd] = 72.6 Vol%

For Liquids : BPSD =Units K [SQRT(Gf)]/Gb
: lb/hr =[BPSD (Gb) (5.6146ft3/bbl) (62.3689lb/ft3)]/(24h/d) =(14.591) ( BPSD) (SG)
For Gases or Air : SCFM = K Units SQRT{psia/(R*Gb)} lb/hr = (scfm MW 60min/hr)/379.5
LV% = (stream, bpsd)(100)/(FF, bpsd) Wt% =(stream, lb/hr)(100)/(FF, lb/hr) uop1292rc

157048
Process Calculations
Page 11





FCC Unit Material Balance Continuation
Refiner: _______________________________ Location: ____________________ Date: _____________

Yields Adjustment for Gasoline @ 380F - 90% and LCO @600F - 90%.

IBP, F 10%, F 70%, F 90%, F EP, F API BPSD lb/hr
Gasoline 367 410 54.71 17,987 199,434
LCO 319 460 569 618 653 22.30 6,515 87,450
MCB 524 710 4.40 1,843 28,005
Totals 26,346 314,889
Gasoline
GasolineFactor (F1) =[(380-T90)/(EP-T90)](1/9)+1 = [ ( 380 367 )/(410-367)] (1/9) +1= 1.034 F1
LCO Factor (F2) =[(380-IBP)/(T10-IBP)](1/9) = [ ( 380 - 319 )/(460-319)] (1/9) = 0.05 F2

cGasoline, BPSD =(Gasoline, bpsd)(F1) +(LCO,bpsd)(F2) = 18,587 cBPSD 60.9 cLV%
c API =API +37.5(LV% - cLV%) / LV% = 52.13 c API 0.771 cSG
cGasoline, lb/hr =cBPSD x cSG x 14.591 = 208,974 c lb/hr 50.6 cWt%

Gasoline Yield Adjustment for C4's, C5's, & C6's. lb/hr BPSD
C4's in Gasoline = 3,390 380
C5's +C6's in LPG = 423 46
C5's +C6's in SGas = 248 26
C5's +C6's in Extr Feeds = 0 0

13 Corrected Gasoline, BPSD =cGasoline-C4's+C5's+C6's Extr(C5+C6) = 18,587 corrBPSD 60.9 corrLV%
14 Corrected Gasoline, lb/hr =cGasoline-C4's+C5's+C6's-Extr(C5+C6) = 208,974 corrlb/hr 50.6 corrWt%
15 Corrected API =((141.5*BPSD*14.591)/(lb/h*24))-131.5 = 52.13 corrAPI

LCO
LCO Factor (F3) =[(600-T70)/(T90-T70)](0.2)+0.7 = [ (600-569)/ (618-569)] (0.2) +0.7 = 0.827 F3
MCB Factor (F4) =[( 600-IBP )/( T10-IBP )]( 0.1 ) = [ ( 600 -
524
)/ (710-524)] (0.1) = 0.041 F4
GasolineFactor (F5) =Gasoline- cGasoline = ( 17,680) - (18,587) = -907 F5
16 Corrected LCO, BPSD =[(LCO bpsd)F3 +(MCB bpsd)F4 +F5]/0.9 = 5,059 corrBPSD 16.6 corrLV%
17 Corrected LCO API =API +5( LV%-corrLV% )/LV% = 23.42 corrAPI 0.913 corrSG
18 Corrected LCO, lb/hr =corrBPSD x corrSG x 14.591 = 67,416 corrlb/hr 16.3 corrWt%
MCB
19 Corrected MCB, BPSD =Total C5+ Liq. Yield - Corr Gasoline- Corr LCO =
=17,689+6,515 +1,843-18,587 -5,059 = 2,392 corrBPSD 7.8 corrLV%
20 Corrected MCB, lb/hr =Total C5+ Wt. Yield - Corr Gasoline- Corr LCO =
=196,715+ 87,450+ 28,005-208, 974-67, 416 = 35,780 corrlb/hr 8.7 corrWt%
21 Corrected API =[( 141.5 * BPSD * 5.6146 * 62.3689 )/( lb/h * 24 )] - 131.5 = 6.5 corrAPI

22 True Conversion =[FF bpsd - corrMCB bpsd - corrLCO bpsd]100/[FF bpsd] = 75.6 corrVol%

*Notethat Total C5+ yield =cGasoline+LCO +MCB API =(141.5/SG) - 131.5
Note- TheFactor equations arevalid only if theas produce90% temperatures arebetween 360-400F for gasolineand 580-620F for LCO.
TheFactor Equations weredeveloped fromthe90% plus 10% Method. Used this method if the90% Temp. arenot in thespecified range.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 12



Sponge Gas Calculations Example

Refiner: ______________________________Location: _____________________________ Date: _______________

A B C=AxB D E F
Component MW mole% g/100mol Ib/hr sp gr bpsd (scfh)
O2 32.00 0.04 1.3 14 (168)
CO 28.01 0.00 0.0 0 (0)
CO2 44.01 1.47 64.7 716 (6,170)
N2 28.01 4.31 120.7 1,335 (18,091)
Total Inertes (t) 5.82 186.7 2065 (24,429)

H2 2.02 28.29 57.0 631 (118,745)
H2S 34.08 2.57 87.6 969 (10,787)
C1 16.04 28.21 452.6 5,006 (118,409)
C2 30.07 15.83 476.0 5,265 (66,445)
C2= 28.05 15.55 436.2 4,825 (65,270)
C3 44.10 0.48 21.2 234 0.5077 31.6
C3= 42.08 1.48 62.3 689 0.5220 90.4
iC4 58.12 0.59 34.3 379 0.5631 46.2
nC4 58.12 0.25 14.5 161 0.5844 18.8
1-C4= 56.11 0.24 13.5 149 0.6013 17.0
i-C4= 56.11 0.25 14.0 155 0.6004 17.7
t-C4= 56.11 0.12 6.7 74 0.6100 8.4
c-C4= 56.11 0.06 3.4 37 0.6271 4.1
1,3-C4== 54.09 0.00 0.0 0 0.6272 0.0
i-C5 72.15 0.00 0.0 0 0.6248 0.0
n-C5 72.15 0.00 0.0 0 0.6312 0.0
C5= 70.14 0.00 0.0 0 0.6496 0.0
C6+ 86.18 0.26 22.4 248 0.6640 25.6
Total Products 94.18 1,702 18,821 259.8
TOTAL (T) 100.00 1,888 20,887 (404,086)

MW =TC/TB = 18.9 Pres. Psig = 173 =14.7=psia 187.7
SG =MW/28.966 = 0.6519 Temp. F = 113 +460=R 573.0
Mole % Inerts=tB= 5.82 Meter Units = 6.5
Wt% Inerts=100tD/TD=9.89 Meter K = 91,100
Inerts =tD = 2,065 Ib/hr

Gas with Inerts: V =Vol. Flow =KxUnitsxSQRT{psia/(R*SG)} =419,742 scfh
M =Mass Flow =scfh x MW/379.5 = 20,887 Ib/hr

Inert-free Gas: Mass = (M Inerts) =M(100-wt%Inerts)/100 = 18,821 Ib/hr
Vol. Flow=(V)-(tF)=V-(V x M%Inerts/Tmoles) = 395,313 scfh

bpsd =[Ib/hr x24]/[ SGx5.614583ft3/bblx62.3689lb/ft3] scfh =V x Mol%/TB

D =C x M/TC =C x Total Mass Flow/(Total gr/100 mol)

157048
Process Calculations
Page 13



Debutanizer Overhead (LPG) Calculation Example:

Refiner: ______________________________Location: _____________________________ Date: _______________

A B C=AxE D E=C/D F=MxCftC G=VxE/tE
Component MW mole% g/100mol SG cc/lOOmol lb/hr bpsd
H2S 34.08 0.0 0.0 0.7871 0 0
C2 30.07 0.0 0.0 0.3563 0 0
C2= 28.05 0.0 0.0 0.3680 0 0
C3 44.10 12.1 533.6 0.5077 1,051 5,216 704
C3= 42.08 36.2 1523.3 0.5220 2,918 14,891 1,955
iC4 58.12 10.7 621.9 0.5631 1,104 6,080 740
nC4 58.12 3.8 220.9 0.5844 378 2,159 253
1-C4= 56.11 8.5 476.9 0.6013 793 4,662 531
i-C4= 56.11 12.4 695.7 0.6004 1,159 6,801 776
t-C4= 56.11 9.2 516.2 0.6100 846 5,046 567
c-C4= 56.17 6.2 347.9 0.6271 555 3,401 372
1,3-C4== 54.09 0.3 16.2 0.6272 26 159 17
i-C5 72.15 0.4 28.9 0.6248 46 282 31
n-C5 72.15 0.2 14.4 0.6312 23 141 15
C5= 70.14 0.0 0.0 0.6496 0 0 0
C6+ 86.18 0.0 0.0 0.6640 0 0 0
TOTAL (t) 100.0 4,996 8,899 48,838 5,962

LPG S.G. = tC/tE =0.5614 Temperature,
0
F = 87
LPG MW = tC/tB = 50.0 Vol. Corr. Factor = 0.9653
Flow Gravity, Gf = 0.5419
Meter Units = 7.2
Meter K = 631.5

V=Vol.Flow=Units x K x [SQRT(Gf)]/SG = 5,962 bpsd



M = Mass Flow =(BPSD x SG x 5.6146ft3/bb1 x 62.3689lb/ft3)/24hr/d =

= 48,838 lbs/hr






157048
Process Calculations
Page 14




Propane and Butane Recovery Calculation Example:

( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) ( 5 ) ( 6 )
Sponge Gas Debutanizer Overhead Stabilized Gasoline
(Debut. Bottoms)
Component bpsd lb/hr bpsd lb/hr bpsd lb/hr
C3 32 234 704 5,215 0 0
C3= 90 689 1,956 14,888 0 0
Total C3s (t) 122 923 2,660 20,103 0 0

iC4 46 379 740 6,078 0 0
nC4 19 161 253 2,159 47 399
1-C4= 17 149 531 4,661 34 299
i-C4= 18 155 776 6,800 34 299
t-C4= 8 74 567 5,045 112 997
c-C4= 4 37 372 3,400 44 399
1,3-C4== 0 0 17 159 109 997
Total C4s (T) 112 956 3,257 28,301 380 3,390

C3 Recovery =t(4) * 100 / [t(2) +t(4)] = 95.6 wt-%

C4 Recovery = [T(4) +T(6)] * 100 / [T(2) +T(4) +T(6)] = 97.1 wt-%













157048
Process Calculations
Page 15




Yields Adjustment Composite 90% Plus 10% Method

This method uses the ASTM distillation of the liquid products to create a composite
curve and correct the yields to any specified 90% temperatures.

Procedure

1. Using the ASTM distillation and a straight line interpolation equation, calculate
the LV% distilled every 20F for all the product streams.

%x=[(Tx-Ta)/(Tb-Ta)](%b-%a)+%a : Straight line interpolation equation

%a < %x < %b
Ta < Tx < Tb

2. Calculate the composite volume and percent every 20F using the following
equations:

Cumulative BPD @ Tx =

BPD = [(%Gasoline) (BPSD Gasoline) + (% LCO) (bpsd LCO) + (% MCB)
(bpsd MCB)}/100

Cumulative LV% @ Tx = 100 BPD/Total BPD

3. Calculate Corrected Gasoline 90% @ 380F or Specified 90% Temperature:

Corrected Gasoline (Composite Yield @ 380F)/(0.9)

4. Calculate Corrected LCO 90% @ 600F or Specified 90% Temperature:

Corrected LCO = (Composite Yield @ 600F)-(Corr Gasoline)/(0.9)

5. Calculate Corrected MCB by difference:

Corrected MCB = Total Liquid Yield Correct Gasoline Correct LCO


157048
Process Calculations
Page 16




Data:

Gasoline LCO MCB Total
(%) (F) (F) (F)
IBP 94 319 524
10% 124 460 710
30% 165 503 759*
50% 222 533 807*
70% 294 569 876*
90% 367 618 1100*
EP 410 653 1200*

BPSD 17,680 6,515 2,227 26,422

Note - *These temperatures are not needed.


%x = ((Tx-Ta)/(Tb-Ta))*(%b-%a)+%a

%a < %x < %b

Ta < Tx < Tb

i,e,

= ((100-94)/(124-94))*(10-0) +0 = 2.5

BPD = [(%Gasoline)(BPSD Gasoline) + (% LCO)(bpsd LCO)+(% MCB)(bpsd MCB)}
/ 100

% = 100 BPD / Total BPD
157048
Process Calculations
Page 17




Data:

Gasoline LCO MCB Composite
Tx, F %x %x %x BPD* Percent
80 0.0 0 0
100 2.0 354 1.34
120 8.7 1,532 5.80
140 17.8 3,148 11.91
160 27.6 4,873 18.44
180 35.3 6,235 23.60
200 42.3 7,475 28.29
220 49.3 8,716 32.99
240 55.0 9,724 36.80
260 60.6 10,706 40.52
280 66.1 11,688 44.24
300 71.6 0.0 12,667 47.94
320 77.1 0.1 13,640 51.62
340 82.6 1.5 14,701 55.64
360 88.1 2.9 15,726 59.66
367 90.0 3.4 16,134 61.06
380 93.0 4.3 16,728 63.31
400 97.7 5.7 17,643 66.77
410 100.0 6.5 18,100 68.51
420 100.0 7.2 18,147 68.68
440 100.0 8.6 18,239 69.03
460 100.0 10.0 18,332 69.38
480 100.0 19.3 18,938 71.67
500 100.0 28.6 19,544 73.97
520 100.0 37.9 0.0 20,150 76.26
540 100.0 53.9 0.9 21,210 80.27
560 100.0 65.0 1.9 21,958 83.10
580 100.0 74.5 3.0 22,600 85.54
600 100.0 82.7 4.1 23,156 87.64
618 100.0 90.0 5.1 23,656 89.53
620 100.0 90.6 5.2 23,696 89.68
640 100.0 96.3 6.2 24,092 91.18
660 100.0 100.0 7.3 24,358 92.19
680 100.0 100.0 8.4 24,382 92.28
700 100.0 100.0 9.5 24,406 92.37


Corrected Gasoline = (Composite Yield @ 380F) / (0.9)
= (16,728 / 0.9) = 18,587 BPD

Corrected LCO = ((Composite Yield @ 600F) - (Corrected Gasoline)) / (0.9)
= (23,156 18,587) / 0.9 = 5,077 BPD

Corrected MCB = (Total Liquid Yield Corrected Gasoline Corrected LCO)
= (26,422 18,587 5,077) = 2,759 BPD

157048
Process Calculations
Page 18





REACTOR AND REGENERATOR HEAT BALANCE

Burning coke in the regenerator provides all the heat necessary for the operation of
the unit. Yet, roughly 30-40% of the heat generated by the combustion of coke exits
the regenerator in the form of hot flue gas. The remainder is absorbed by the
regenerated catalyst which carries it to the reactor riser where it is used to vaporize
and heat up the combined feed to the desired cracking temperature.

The amounts of energy associated with the unit's operation are determined from a
catalyst section heat balance. The energy balance equation at steady state may be
written as:

Energy in + Energy produced = Energy out + Energy consumed (1)

Regenerator Energy Balance

Energy in = Energy (air + spent catalyst + coke)

Energy produced = Combustion heat of coke

Energy out = Energy (flue gas + regenerated catalyst + removed +
radiation losses)

Energy consumed = 0

If the Regenerator temperature is the reference temperature then,

-H Air - H Spent Catalyst - H Coke + H Combustion of coke =
H
removed
+ H
radiation losses
or:

H Spent Catalyst = H Combustion of Coke - H Coke - H Air - H
removed
-
H
losses
(2)
157048
Process Calculations
Page 19




Reactor Energy Balance

Energy in = Energy (feed + regenerated catalyst + diluents)

Energy produced = 0

Energy out = Energy (reactor vapors + spent catalyst + radiation losses)

Energy consumed = Heat of reaction

If the Reactor temperature is the reference base temperature, then

-H
feed
- H
diluents
+ H
regenerated catalyst
= H
radiation losses
+ Heat of Reaction

or

H
regenerated catalyst
= H
feed
+ H
diluents
+ H
radiation losses
+
Heat of Reaction (3)

The enthalpy change for the spent and regenerated catalyst is given by

H
spent catalyst
= mass flow Cp (Rg Temp - Rx Temp) (4)

H
regenerated catalyst
= mass flow Cp (Rx Temp - Rg Temp) (5)

At steady conditions,

H
spent catalyst
+ H
regenerated catalyst
= 0 (6)
157048
Process Calculations
Page 20




Regenerator Heat Balance


A H C o mbustion
o f Coke
R a d i a t i o n L o s s e s
H e a t R e m o v a l
Flue Gas
Air
Spent Cata l y s t
Coke
Regenerate d C a t a l y s t





Reactor Heat Balance


AH Reaction
Radiation Losses
Diluents
Reactor Vapors
Spent Catalyst
Coke
Feed
Regenerated Catalyst

157048
Process Calculations
Page 21




Combining equations (2), (3) and (6)

H Combustion of coke = H Air + H Coke + H
removed
+
H
regen.rad. losses
+ H
feed
+ H
diluents
+
H
rx rad. losses
+ Heat of Reaction (7)

The equation (7) demonstrates that all the energy in the Reactor-Regenerator
system is provided by the combustion of coke. The radiation loss term in this
equation is not a major item, but since vessel insulation is not perfect, some
radiation losses do occur. The term H
removed
refers to the heat duty of catalyst
cooler(s). The heat of reaction is the energy required to convert the feed to products
via the catalytic reaction mechanism.

The heat produced by the combustion of coke, equation (7), can be calculated from
the coke product rate and the mode of the regeneration operation. If all the CO
were burned to CO
2
in the regenerator, more heat would be available per pound of
carbon than when the unit runs in this normal partial combustion mode. The heat
liberated by carbon combustion to CO
2
is 14,150 BTU/lb (7,860 kcal/kg or 32,910
kj/kg) of carbon whereas heat for combustion to CO is only 3,960 BTU/lb (2,200
kcal/kg or 9,210 kj/kg).

Conversion Factors:

kcal/kg

1.8 = BTU/lb
BTU/lb

2.326 = kJ/kg
kcal/kg

4.187 = kJ/kg

The heat of reaction is endothermic. Energy is consumed by the reaction which
breaks the heavy hydrocarbon molecules into smaller, light hydrocarbon products.
The heat of reaction must be calculated from the energy balance using equation (7).

The most important value that can be calculated from the energy balance is the
catalyst/oil weight ratio. This ratio is important because it is a major factor in
hydrocarbon conversion and coke lay-down.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 22





The following sample outlines the energy balance calculation method:

1. Data Required

This heat balance is for a 30,565 BPSD feed case with the FCC Unit in total
combustion mode. The process conditions are:

Temperatures: Reactor 970F
Combined Feed 375F
Lift Gas 100F
Lift Steam 380F
Feed Steam 380F
Stripping Steam 380F

Regenerator
Regenerated Catalyst 1371F
Flue Gas 1368F
Average Hottest in Rg 1375F
Air Blower Discharge 399F
HP Boiler Feed Water 220F
Catalyst Cooler Steam 463F

Pressures: Catalyst Cooler Steam 452 psig
157048
Process Calculations
Page 23




Flow Rates: Fresh Feed 412,923 lb/hr
(No Recycle)
Lift Gas 3,250 lb/hr
Lift Steam 12,900 lb/hr
Feed Steam 1,800 lb/hr
Stripping Steam 5,000 lb/hr
Total Air to Regenerator* 382,405 lb/hr
Catalyst Cooler Steam 56,033 lb/hr
Catalyst Cooler Blowdown 6,952 lb/hr

* Total air includes: air to combustor, air to upper regenerator, and air to catalyst
cooler.

Flue Gas Composition, mol% CO = 0.0
(by GC Method) CO
2
=
15.50
O
2
+ Ar = 3.47
N
2
=
81.03
SO
2
= 0.0
NO
2
= 0.0


2. Flue Gas Composition Adjustment

Unlike an Orsat analysis, a GC analysis includes Argon with the Oxygen. The first
step is to adjust the flue gas O
2
content for Argon (Ar). The Ar content is assumed
to be 1.2% of the nitrogen, therefore,

Ar = (0.012) (81.03) = 0.97 mol%.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 24




The corrected analysis is now:

CO = 0
CO
2
=
15.50
O
2
=
3.47 - 0.97 = 2.5
N
2
+ Ar = 81.03 + 0.97 = 82.0
SO
2
= 0
NO
2
= 0


3. Combustion Air Corrected to a Dry Basis

A psychometric chart is used to determine the moisture content of the regeneration
air. At atmospheric conditions of 62F and a relative humidity of 97%, the moisture
content is:

Moisture Content =
0.01152 lb H
2
O
lb dry air


Wet Air = 380,200 lb/hr

Dry Air = 380, 200 lb/hr wet air
1 lb dry air
(1 + 0.01152) lb wet air
= 375, 870 lb/hr

Water in Air = 380,200 lb/hr - 375,870 lb/hr = 4,330 lb/hr


4. Calculate Flue Gas Rate

The flue gas rate can be calculated from the regeneration air rate. These two
streams are related by the inert N
2
+ Ar content which remains constant through the
catalyst regeneration. From a Nitrogen balance,

Since, moles =
Weight
Molecular Weight

157048
Process Calculations
Page 25




Then

Dry Air = (375,870 lb/hr)/(28.966 MW) = 12,976 lb mol/hr

mol/hr (N
2
+ Ar) in dry air = mol/hr (N
2
+ Ar) in flue gas


12, 976 lb mol
hr

79 mol inerts
100 mol air
=
lb mol FG
hr

82 mol inerts
100 mol FG


Flue Gas (FG) = 12,501 lb mol/hr


5. Calculate the Carbon (C) Content of Coke

The carbon (C) content of the coke is calculated from the flue gas composition. One
mol of C is burned for each mole of CO or CO
2
produced.

C + O
2
+ H
2
+ S + N = CO + CO
2
+ H
2
O + SO
2
+ NO
2
+ O
2


C =
12, 501 lb mol
hr FG

0 mol CO + 15.503 mol CO2
100 mol FG

1 mol C
mol CO/CO2


C = 1,938 lb mol/hr of carbon


6. Calculate the Hydrogen Content of Coke

The hydrogen (H
2
) content of the coke must be calculated from an O
2

balance:

O
2
in regeneration air = excess O
2
in flue gas +
+ O
2
reacted to CO (0.5 mol O
2
/mol CO)
+ O
2
reacted to CO
2
(1 mol O
2
/mol CO
2
)
+ O
2
reacted to H
2
O (0.5 mol O
2
/mol H
2
O)
+ O
2
reacted to SO
2
(1 mol O
2
/mol SO
2
)
+ O
2
reacted to NO
2
(1 mol O
2
/mol NO
2
)
157048
Process Calculations
Page 26




Where:

O2 in regen. air =
12, 976 lb mol dry air
hr

21 mol O2
100 mol air
=
2,725 lb mol
hr
of O2

Excess O2 in FG =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

2.5 mol O2
100 mol FG
=
312 lb mol
hr
of O2

O2 reacted to CO =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol CO
100 mol FG

0.5 mol O2
mol CO


= 0 lb mol/hr O
2

O2 reacted to CO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

15.5 mol CO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol CO2


= 1,938 lb mol/hr of O
2

O2 reacted to SO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol SO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol SO2


= 0 lb mol/hr of O
2

O2 reacted to NO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol NO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol NO2


= 0 lb mol/hr of O
2

O
2
reacted to H
2
O (by difference) is:

O
2
Reacted to H
2
O = 2,725 - 312 - 0 - 1,938 - 0 - 0 lb mol/hr O
2
= 475 lb mol/hr of O
2


The hydrogen burned by oxygen in the regenerator is:

H2 burned by O2 =
475 lb mol
hr O2

2 mol H2
mol O2
=
950 lb mol
hr H2

157048
Process Calculations
Page 27




7. Calculate Coke from Carbon and Hydrogen

The mass of coke combusted to CO + CO
2
+ H
2
O is:

from carbon =
1, 938 lb mol
hr C

12.01 lb C
lb mol C
=
23, 275 lb
hr C


from hydrogen =
950 lb mol
hr H
2

2.016 lb H
lb mol H
2
=
1, 915 lb
hr H


Total = 23,275 + 1,915 = 25,190 lb/hr coke


8. Calculate Coke Yield Percent

The quantity of coke produced from the fresh feed is:

Coke Yield =
Coke, lb/hr
( )
100
( )
FF,lb/hr ( )


Coke Yield =
25, 190 lb/hr coke
412, 923 lb/hr raw oil
100 = 6.10 wt - % coke


9. Calculate Hydrogen in Coke

The H
2
content of the coke is:

H
2
in Coke =
H
2
, lb/hr ( )(100)
Coke, lb/hr


H
2
in Coke =
1,915 lb/hr H
25,190 lb/hr coke
100 = 7.6 wt - % hydrogen
157048
Process Calculations
Page 28




10. Calculate the Air/Coke Ratio

Air to Coke =
(Air, lb/hr)(100)
Coke, lb/hr


Air to Coke =
375,870 lb/hr dry air
25, 190 lb/hr coke
= 14.92
lb of dry air
lb of coke



11. Calculate the Heat of Combustion of Coke

Combustion heats are calculated based on the average hottest temperature in the
regenerator. The dense, dilute, cyclones, and flue gas average temperatures are
calculated and the hottest is used as basis.

The average hottest temperature is 1375F.

Hc (2C + O
2
2CO) = 46,216 + 1.47 (1375F) = 48,237
BTU
lb mole


= (0
lb mole
hr
of O
2
reacted to CO) (2) 48, 237
BTU
lb mole
|
\
|
.


= 0 BTU/hr

Hc (C + O
2
CO
2
) = 169,135 + 0.5 (1375F) = 169,822
BTU
lb mole


= (1,938
lb mole
hr
of O
2
reacted to CO
2
) (1) 169, 822
BTU
lb mole
|
\
|
.


= 329.12

10
6
BTU/hr
157048
Process Calculations
Page 29




Hc (2H
2
+ O
2
2H
2
O) = 104,546 + 1.585 (1375F) = 106,725
BTU
lb mole


= (475
lb mole
hr
of O
2
reacted to H
2
O) (2) 106, 725
BTU
lb mole
|
\
|
.


= 101.389

10
6
BTU/hr

H
Combustion of Coke
= (0 + 329.12 + 101.39)

10
6
= 430.51

10
6
BTU/hr

Using as basis 1 lb of coke

H combustion of coke =
430.51 10
6
BTU/hr
25, 190 lb/hr coke


= 17,090 BTU/lb coke

This heat of combustion must be corrected for the cokes hydrogen content
according to the equation

Correction = 1133 - 134.6 (wt-% H)
= 1133 - 134.6 (7.6) = +110 BTU/lb coke

The net heat of combustion of coke is:

H
Combustion
= 17,090 + 110 BTU/lb coke = 17,200 BTU/lb coke
157048
Process Calculations
Page 30




REGENERATOR HEAT BALANCE

Basis: 1 lb of coke

12. Heat Consumed to Heat Up the Regeneration Air

Since H = mass

Cp

T

Air is heated from the main air blower discharge temperature of 399F to the
average hottest temperature of 1375F at an average specific heat of 0.26 BTU/lb
F.

AH
Air
=
375, 870 lb/hr air
25,190 lb/hr coke
(1375- 399F)
0.26 BTU
lb F
= 3, 787 BTU/lb coke


13. Heat Consumed to Heat up the Regeneration Air Water Vapor
Water vapor is heated from 399 to 1375F at an average specific heat of 0.5 BTU/lb
F.

AH
H
2
O
=
4, 330 lb/hr H
2
O
25, 190 lb/hr coke

0.5 BTU
lb F
(1375 - 399F) = 83.9 BTU/lb coke


14. Heat Consumed to Heat Up the Coke

Coke is heated from the reactor temperature of 970F to the average hottest
temperature of 1375F at an average specific heat of 0.4 BTU/lb F.

H
Coke
= (1375-970F)

0.4 BTU/lb F = 162 BTU/lb coke

157048
Process Calculations
Page 31




15. Heat Consumed to Generate Steam in the Catalyst Cooler

Enthalpies for water and steam are obtained from steam tables.

Water in at 220F = (188 BTU/lb) (56,033 + 6,952 lb/hr) = 11.841

10
6
BTU/hr
Steam out at 463F = (1,205 BTU/lb) (56,033 lb/hr) = 67.52

10
6
BTU/hr
Blowdown out at 463F = (441 BTU/lb) (6,952 lb/hr) = 3.066

10
6
BTU/hr

Catalyst cooler duty = (67.52 + 3.066 - 11.841)

10
6
BTU/hr = 58.75

10
6
BTU/hr

Or

H
Removed
=
58.75 10
6
BTU/hr
25,190 lb/hr of Coke
= 2, 332 BTU/lb of coke


16. Regenerator Heat Balance

Using a typical regenerator heat loss rate of 250 BTU/lb coke, the heat consumed to
heat up the catalyst is:

Rg
Heat
= (H
Comb Coke
) - H
Coke
- H
Air
- H
H
2
O
- H
Loss
- H
Removed

H
regen
= 17,200 - 3,787 - 84 - 162 - 2,332 - 250

= 10,585 BTU/lb Coke

157048
Process Calculations
Page 32




17. Calculate the Catalyst Circulation Rate

The catalyst is heated from the reactor temperature of 970F to the regenerated
catalyst temperature of 1371F at an average specific heat of 0.275 BTU/lb F.

Since Q = m Cp T then m = Q/Cp T

CCR =
(Coke lb/hr)(Rg Heat BTU/lb Coke)
(0.275 BTU/lb F) (Cat T - RXT)


CCR =
25,190 lb/hr coke 10,585 BTU/lb coke
0.275 BTU/lb F (1371 - 970F) 60 min/hr
= 40, 299 lb/min

or

CCR =
40, 299 lb/min
2, 000 lb/ton
= 20.15 ton/min


18. Calculate the Catalyst/Oil Ratio

C/O =
CCR lb/hr
FF lb/hr


C/O =
40, 299 lb/min catalyst 60 min/hr
412,923 lb/hr fresh feed
= 5.86 wt/wt


19. Calculate the Regenerator Efficiency

Rg Eff =
Rg Heat 100
AH
Combustion of Coke
=
(10, 585 BTU/lb of Coke) (100)
17, 200 BTU/lb of Coke


= 62% (This number will be higher without catalyst cooler)
157048
Process Calculations
Page 33




20. Calculate the Delta Coke Wt-%:

ACoke
(100) (Coke, lb/hr)
Cat. Circ. lb/hr
=
25, 190 100
40, 299 60
= 1.04 wt%


REACTOR HEAT CALCULATIONS

1 lb of fresh feed is used as basis in the following calculations.


21. Heat Consumed to Heat and Vaporize the Combined Feed

Enthalpies for the raw oil feed are obtained by using the equation as discussed after
this section. The UOP K to use for entering the enthalpy table is calculated from
UOP Method 375 as discussed in the following section. UOP K Factor is a function
of API and Engler distillation. A high UOP K value of 12.5 indicates a more
paraffinic (saturated chain) hydrocarbon, while a lower value of 11.2 occurs for a
more aromatic (unsaturated cyclic) stock. Higher UOP K paraffinic feeds crack
easier yielding higher conversion at a given reactor temperature.

Raw Oil: UOP K = 11.8 API Gravity = 21.3

At the 375F riser inlet temperature, H
raw oil
= 252 BTU/lb

At the 970F reactor temperature, H
vapor
= 760 BTU/lb

H
raw oil
= 412,923 lb/hr

(760-2891 BTU/lb) = 194.487

10
6
BTU/hr

The heat required to heat up the combined feed is the H
raw oil
multiplied by the
Combined Feed Ratio (CFR),

where, CFR =
(raw oil + recycle) lb/hr
raw oil lb/hr
= 1.0

So, H
comb feed
= 194.487

10
6
BTU/hr

157048
Process Calculations
Page 34




AH
comb feed
=
194.487 10
6
BTU/hr
412, 923 lb/hr raw oil
= 471 BTU/lb raw oil


22. Heat Consumed to Heat Up the Lift Gas:

The lift gas is heated from 110F to 970F at an assumed average specific heat of
0.5 BTU/lb F.

AH
lift gas
=
3, 250 lb/hr lift gas (970 - 110F) 0.5 BTU/lb F
412, 923 lb/hr raw oil
= 3.4 BTU/lb raw oil


23. Heat Consumed to Heat Up Lift Steam, Feed Steam and Stripping Steam

Steam is heated up from the header temperature of 380F to the reactor
temperature at 970F at an average specific heat of 0.485 BTU/lb F.

AH
steam
=
(5, 000 + 12, 900 + 1, 800) lb/hr (970 - 380F) 0.485
412, 923 lb/hr raw oil
= 13.8 BTU/lb raw oil


24. Heat of Inert Gas Carried from Regenerator to Reactor by Regenerated
Catalyst

The inerts gas can be calculated from the sponge gas stream and the procedure is
at the end of this section. If this number is unknown, use 0.007% of fresh feed. Use
an average specific heat of 0.275 BTU/lb F.

H
inerts
= (inerts wt%) (Cp) (RxT - RgT)
= 0.007

0.275

(970 - 1371) = -0.8 BTU/lb raw oil

157048
Process Calculations
Page 35




25. Reactor Heat Balance

The total heat consumed in the reactor equals the sum of the heats consumed for
the combined feed, lift gas, all steam, the reactor losses, plus the heat of reaction.
Using a typical reactor heat loss rate of 2 BTU/lb raw oil, the heat balance is:

Rx Heat = H
comb feed
+ H
lift gas
+ H
steam
+ H
inerts
+ H
loss
+ H
RxN


H
reactor
= (471 + 3.4 + 13.8 - 0.8 + 2) BTU/lb raw oil + H
reaction

H
reactor
= 489.4 BTU/lb raw oil + H
reaction



26. Overall Heat Balance

The heat consumed in the reactor is supplied by the hot catalyst circulated to the
riser. At steady state, the heat consumed in the reactor must balance the heat
produced in the regenerator. The reactor heat is based on a per lb of fresh feed
basis while that of the regenerator is on a per lb of coke basis. These two can be
equated using the raw oil to coke weight fraction to determine the heat of reaction:

H
regenerator
BTU / lb coke
lb coke
lb raw oil


(

= H
reactor
[BTU/lb raw oil]


10, 585 BTU
lb coke

25, 190 lb/hr coke
412, 923 lb/hr raw oil
= 489.4 BTU/lb raw oil + H
reaction


H
reaction
= 119 BTU/lb raw oil

157048
Process Calculations
Page 36




FCC Unit Heat Balance Example
Refiner: Location: Date:

Combustion Air Correction to a Dry Basis Flue Gas Composition Adjustment:
(a) Ambient Temperature = 62 F GC, mol-% Corrected for Ar*
(b) Relative Humidity = 97 % (i) CO = 0.00 CO = 0.00
(c) Sat. Vapor Pressure = 10^[6.40375-(3165.36/(F+392.565))] (j) CO
2
= 15.50 CO
2
= 15.50
= 0.275586177 psia (k) O
2
= 3.47 O
2
- (0.012*N
2
) = 2.50
(d) lb H2O/lb dry air = [0.00622*(b)*(c)]/[14.7-0.01*(b)*(c)] (L) N
2
= 81.03 N
2
+ O
2
- Cor O
2
= 82.00
= 0.011520532 lb/lb (m) SO
2
= 0.00 SO
2
= 0.00
(e) Total Air to Regen = 380,200 lb/hr (n) NO2 = 0.00 NO
2
= 0.00
(f) Total Dry Air = (e)/[1+(d)] = 375,870 lb/hr Total 100.00 100.00
(h) H2O in Air = (e) (f) = 4,330 lb/hr *Correction required only for GC not for Orsat analysis.

Temperatures: Rg=Regenerator, Rx=Reactor
(o) Flue Gas Line = 1368 F (t) Air to Rg = 399 F
(p) Rg Avg Cyclone Outlet = 1368 F (u) Rx Temp = 970 F
(q) Rg Avg Dilute = 1375 F (v) Hot Rg T Air T = 976 F
(r) Rg Avg Dense (RgAT) = 1371 F (w) Rg Dense T Rx T = 401 F
(s) Avg Hottest Rg Temp = 1375 F

Oxygen Balance:
(y) (L) * (2 * 21 ) / 79 2(n) - 2(m) - 2(k) - 2(j) - (i) = 7.6 mol H2 / 100 mol Flue Gas
(z) 2.016*(y) =12.01[ (i) + (j) ] + 32.06*(m) + 46.01*(n) = 201.5 lb coke / 100 mol Flue Gas
(1a) Hydrogen = 2.016 * (y) * 100 / (z) = 7.6 wt-% Hydrogen in Coke
(1b) Air = 28.966 * 100 * (L) / [ 79 * (z) ] = 14.9 Air/Coke, lb/lb
(1c) Coke = Dry Air / [ Air / Coke ] = (f) / (1b) = 25,187 lb/hr of Coke
(1d) Fresh Feed S.G. = 0.926 = 412,923 lb/hr Feed
(1e) Coke Yield = (1c) * 100 / (1d) = 6.10 wt-% Coke (of Fresh Feed)

Combustion of Coke Basis: Average Hottest Regenerator Temperature:
(1f) Hc(CO) = 46,216 + 1.47 * (s) = 48,237 BTU/lb-mol
(1g) Hc(CO2) = 169,135 + 0.5 * (s) = 169,823 BTU/lb-mol
(1h) Hc(H2O) = 104,546 + 1.585 * (s) = 106,725 BTU/lb-mol
(1i) AH Comb = [ (1f) * (i) + (1g) * (j) + (1h) * (y) ] / (z) = 17,091 BTU/lb-mol
(1j) Correction Factor = 1133 134.64 * (1a) = 109 BTU/lb-mol
(1k) AH Combustion Coke = (1i) + (1j) = 17,200 BTU/lb-mol

Regenerator Heat Balance Basis: 1 lb of Coke
(1m) AH coke = 0.4 BTU/lb-mol F * (w) = 160 BTU/lb coke
(1n) AH air = (1b) * 0.26 BTU/lb F * (v) = 3,787 BTU/lb coke
(1o) AH H2O = (h) / (1c) * 0.485 BTU/lb F * (v) = 81 BTU/lb coke
(1p) AH Radiant Losses = 250 BTU/lb coke
(1q) Cat Cooler Heat Duty = 58.7 MM-BTU/hr (calculated separately)
(1r) AH removed = Cooler Duty / Coke = (1q) * 10^6 / (1c) = 2,331 BTU/lb coke
(1s) Rg Heat = (1k) (1m) (1n) (1o) (1p) (1r) = 10,590 BTU/lb coke
(1t) Rg Eff = Rg Heat * 100 / AHcombCoke = (1s) * 100 / (1k) = 61.6 % Regenerator Efficiency
(1u) Cat/Oil = (1s) * (1e) / 100 * (0.275 BTU/lb F) * (w) = 5.86 Catalyst-to-Oil Ratio
(1v) Cat Circ = (Cat/Oil) * (FF) / 60 = (1u) * (1d) / 60 min/hr) = 40,313 Catalyst Circulation, lb/min
(1w) ACoke = 100 * Coke / (60 * Cat Circ) = 100 * (1c) / 60 * (1v) = 1.04 ACoke, wt-%


157048
Process Calculations
Page 37




FCC Unit Heat Balance Example Continuation
Refiner: Location: Date:

Reactor Heat Calculations: Basis: 1 lb of Coke
(2a) Rx Temp (RxT) = 970 F
(2b) Combined Feed Temp. (CFT) = 375 F
(2c) Fresh Feed (FF) = 412,923 lb/hr
(2d) FF Enthalpy @ CFT (H @ CFT)* = 289 BTU/lb
(2e) FF Enthalpy @ RxT (H @ RxT)I = 760 BTU/lb
(2f) Recycle (Recy) = 0 lb/hr
(2g) Recy Enthalpy @ CFT (E @ CFT)* = 0 BTU/lb
(2h) Recy Enthalpy @ RxT (E @ RxT)* = 0 BTU/lb
*See Following Pages for Enthalpy Calculation Method

(2i) Inerts from Rg with catalyst (Inerts) = 2,748 lb/hr
(2j) Inerts Specific Heat (Cp) = 0.275 BTU/lb F
(2k) Lift Gas (LGas) = 3,250 lb/hr
(2m) Lift Gas Temp (LGasT) = 110 F
(2n) Lift Gas Specific Heat (LGas Cp) = 0.5 BTU/lb F
(2o) Steam Temp (StmT) = 380 F
(2p) Steam Specific Heat (Stm Cp) = 0.485 BTU/lb F
(2q) Stripping Steam = 5,000 lb/hr
(2r) Lift Steam = 12,900 lb/hr
(2s) Feed Steam = 1,800 lb/hr

(2t) Heat consumed by FF = (FF) * (H @ RxT H @ CFT) / (FF) = 471 BTU/lb FF
(2u) Heat consumed by Recycle = (Recycle) * (E @ CFT E @ RxT) / FF = 0 BTU/lb FF
(2v) Heat Consumed by Steam = (Total Stm) * (Stm Cp) * (RxT-StmT) / FF = 13.7 BTU/lb FF
(2w) Heat Consumed by Lift Gas = (LGas) * (LGas Cp) * (RxT-StmT) / FF = 3.4 BTU/lb FF
(2y) Heat from Inerts = (Inerts) * (Inerts Cp) * (RxT-RgAT) / FF = -0.7 BTU/lb FF
(2z) Reactor Heat Loss = 2 BTU/lb FF

(3a) Rx Heat = (H FF) + (H Recy) + (H Stm) + (H Lgas) + (H Inrts) + (H Loss) + (AH Rxn)
= 489.3 BTU/lb FF + AH Reaction

(Rg Heat BTU/lb Coke) * (Coke lb/hr) / (FF lb/hr) = Rx Heat = BTU/lb + AH Rxn

(3b) AH Rxn = [(Rg Heat BTU/lb Coke) * (Coke lb/hr) / (FF lb/hr)] BTU/lb = 157 AH Rxn BTU/ lb FF
157048
Process Calculations
Page 38




uop K Factor from API and Engler Distillation

Data: ASTM Distillation: Specific Gravity: 0.9258
Vol% Temperature, F
10 660
30 781
50 887
70 1015
90 1075

1. Calculate the volumetric average boiling point as the average of the 10, 30, 50, 70
and 90 vol-% temperatures.

VABP = (T10% + T30% + T50% + T70% + T90%) / 5
VABP = (660 + 781 + 887 + 1015 + 1075) / 5 = 883.6

2. Calculate the Engler slope as F per percent (F/%) by subtracting the 10 vol-%
temperature from the 90 vol-% temperature, and dividing the difference by 80.

Slope = (T90% T10%)/80 = 5.1875

3. Calculate the Cubic Average Boiling Point (CABP):

CABP = VABP * A + B

Where: A = (0.000297 * Slope + 0.001438)*Slope + 1.0
A = 1.01545
B = (-0.581 * Slope 1.339)*Slope
B = -22.5809
4. Calculate UOP K:

( )
SG
459.69 CABP
K UOP
3
+
= = 11.89
157048
Process Calculations
Page 39




Enthalpy of Heavy Petroleum Fractions

The Following equations can be used to calculate the Enthalpies for the feed and recycle
streams on the FCC unit.

Liquid Enthalpy Equation: Equation source is API Procedure 4.7.B4

A1 = (-1171.26 + (23.722 + 24.907 * SG) * UOP K)
A1 = A1 + (1149.82 46.535 * UOP K) / SG
A1= A1 / 1,000
A2 = (1 + 0.82463 * UOP K) * (56.086 13.817 / SG) / 1,000,000
A3 = - (1 + 0.82463 * UOP K) * (9.6757 2.3653 / SG) / 1E+09

The enthalpy of liquid FCC feedstock at the riser inlet conditions is:

H
in
= A1 * (TE 259.67) + A2 * (TE 259.67) + A3 * (TE 259.67)

Where: TE = Combined Feed Temperature, (F + 459.67)
SG = Fresh Feed Specific Gravity
UOP K = Fresh Feed UOP K

Vapor Enthalpy Equation: Equation source is a curve fit from UOP PD Chart PD-189

F1 = 3.0186E-04 * SG + 3.9975E-06 * UOP K * (UOP K 13.8584)
F2 = 0.67036000 * SG + 0.00675130 * UOP K * (UOP K 24.7770)
F3 = 85.52390000 * SG 4.73260000 * UOP K * (UOP K 21.9249) 459.6742

Enthalpy of feed in fully vaporized condition is:

H
out
= F1 * (T) F2 * T + F3
Where: T = Reactor temperature, F

157048
Process Calculations
Page 40




Heat of Combustion of Coke, BTU/lb-Mole

Table:
Temperature, F 77 1,100 1,200 1,250 1,300 1,350 1,400
CO 47,565 47,847 47,980 48,050 48,123 48,199 48,274
CO
2
169,332 169,677 169,735 169,760 169,784 169,808 169,835
H
2
O Vapor 104,129 106,279 106,448 106,529 106,610 106,687 106,765

Equations:
Hc(CO) = 46,216 + 1.47 * (T)
Hc(CO
2
) = 169,135 + 0.5 * (T)
Hc(H
2
O) = 104,546 + 1.585 * (T)

Where: T is in F
157048
Process Calculations
Page 41




MECHANICAL EVALUATION

The Mechanical Evaluation Test should cover all facets of the FCC Unit, including the
reactor, regenerator, main column, and the gas concentration unit. All major pieces of
equipment should be part of this test, including vessels, pumps, compressors, heat
exchangers, and piping hydraulics. The procedure for this test is long and involved,
but the information can be very useful for the Refiner and for UOP. If the Refiner
wants to revamp the unit, it is important to determine maximum throughput and actual
equipment limitations. Most of the information will be collected only once, although
parts of it (such as exchanger surveys) can be repeated to follow fouling or other
potential problems.

The lists and data sheets included in this section can be used as guidelines in
collecting the required data, although the Refiner may have to modify certain parts for
his particular unit. It is important to finish collecting the data within as short a time as
possible. A single survey is generally satisfactory and it is no necessary to use long
term average data. The Unit should be operating smoothly to get realistic and good
quality data. Label the data collected and prepare a report in an orderly fashion.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 42




GENERAL INFORMATION LIST

This list is only a guideline. Please modify or expand as required.

1. Ambient Air Conditions
a. Temperature
b. Relative Humidity
c. Barometric Pressure
d. Wind Velocity and Direction (show on rough plot plan)

2. General Description of Unit
a. Process Flow Diagram, including flow meter and control valve locations
b. Plot Plan showing Layout of Vessel and Equipment
c. Operational Mode (partial or complete CO Combustion)

3. Units used (USA, Imperial, Metric) and Standard Conditions (0C, 760 mm;
60F, 14.7 psia)

4. Limiting Factors
a. Environmental Constraints (CO emissions, special product
specifications)
b. Utility Limitation (shortage of steam or electricity, etc.)

5. Performance Data
a. Accurate Flow and Weight Balance including sample analyses

157048
Process Calculations
Page 43




HYDRAULIC AND PROCESS SURVEY LIST

1. Single gauge pressure survey of every point in reactor-regenerator circuit,
including air into regenerator and flue gas out to point of discharge.

2. Slide valve positions and hydraulic oil pressure at each valve.

3. Air blower suction and discharge pressures, total and net (to regenerator) flow
rates, relative humidity and temperature of air, with manufacturers data and
performance curve for comparison.

4. Electrical or steam consumption for blower driver.

5. Power recovery units should add flue gas temperatures and pressures around
expander, butterfly valve positions, electrical power consumed or generated
and single gauge pressure survey of third stage separator.

6. For electrostatic precipitator, or other flue gas treaters, take temperatures in
and out, power consumption, and amount and size distribution of particulates
removed.

7. Complete flue gas sample before and after flue gas treater.

8. Catalyst consumption and losses.

9. Single gauge pressure survey of main column and gas concentration section
(use one low pressure and one high pressure gauge, depending on location, for
better accuracy). Include feed flow rate and temperature, reflux flow rate and
temperature, reboiler heat input, overhead temperature and pressure and
enough other data to calculate a heat and weight balance around the column.

10. Samples of main column overhead receiver gas and liquid; and gas,
hydrocarbons, and water samples from high pressure receiver for phase
equilibrium studies.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 44




11. Compressor suction and discharge pressures, flow rates, composition, and
temperatures, with manufacturers performance curve for comparison. Include
amounts and compositions of liquids drained from knockout drums.

12. Compressor driver type and power consumption.

13. All pump suction and discharge pressures, flow rates, liquid compositions or
boiling ranges, and power consumption of driver, with manufacturers
performance data for comparison.

14. Data on streams not usually measured, such as LCO to the sponge absorber,
including flow rates, temperatures, composition or boiling range, and single
gauge pressure survey of circuit.

15. Pressures, temperatures, and flow rates of flushing oil to instruments and pump
seals and glands.

16. Utility consumption/product data:

Steam (all pressures)
Air (plant and instrument)

Purges to instruments, packing glands, and expansion joints (specify air,
steam, nitrogen, or fuel gas), with single gauge pressure survey of utility lines at
purge points).

Cooling water
Boiler feed water
Steam condensate
Utility water
Treating chemicals for boiler feed water (type and amount)
Inhibitor and anti-corrosion chemicals used
157048
Process Calculations
Page 45




EXCHANGERS INFORMATION LIST

1. Flow through exchangers on both sides (gas and liquid), composition or boiling
range, and mass flow.

2. Temperatures in and out of both sides, also between shells and bundles.

3. Pressures in and out of both sides, also between shells and bundles.

4. Any material bypassed around exchangers (give rough sketch).

5. If air coolers: air temperatures in and out, air velocity out, motor amps, note any
belt slippage, variable pitch position, louver position, etc.

6. In preparing data, submit overall heat transfer coefficient and specifics on
exchangers.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 46




FIRED HEATERS INFORMATION LIST

1. Process flow (volume and mass, composition, molecular weight and boiling
range).

2. Single gauge pressure survey for both process and fuel system.

3. Fuel type (gas or oil) and analysis (composition, sulfur, gravity, etc.), pressure
and temperature of fuel at heater.

4. Fuel consumption.

5. Steam or air pressure for fuel oil atomization.

6. Temperatures throughout the heater, such as firebox, convection points, stack,
air preheat, and all process points.

7. Draft in firebox and stack.

8. Design information: type of furnace, materials of construction, and number,
layout and materials of tubes; including dimensions of furnace.

9. Burner data: rating, design, number. Note any unusual problems such as
plugged or inoperative burners.

10. Refiner should obtain sufficient data to calculate heat flux from both process
and fire side, heat release, heater efficiency and steam balance.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 47




157048
Process Calculations
Page 48




To Main Column
ESP
Main Air
Blower
Atmospheric
Air
Flue Gas to
Stack
Feed
Orifice Chamber
Steam
Generator
Flue Gas
SV
DFAH
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19
20
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
22
Cat Cooler
Slidevalve
Reactor-Regenerator Pressure Survey

Refiner:
Location:
Date:
Time:
By:











Slide Valves % Open
Regenerated
Recirculating
Spent
Flue Gas A
Flue Gas B
Process Flow
Feed Rate
Air Rate




Pressure Survey: _____________Units of Pressure

1 11 A
2 12 B
3 13 C
4 14 D
5 15 E
6 16 F
7 17 G
8 18 H
157048
Process Calculations
Page 49




157048
Process Calculations
Page 50




157048
Process Calculations
Page 51




MAIN COLUMN SUMMARY BOTTOMS page ____________________________
date ____________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by ____________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Type of Operation: _________________________________________________________
No. of Trays: _________________ Reflux Ratio: _________________________________
Type of Trays: _____________________________________________________________

Main Column Bottoms Circulating
Circ. Quench CSO HCO LCO Other

Mass Flow _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

Temperature Out _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Return _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Pressure _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

Distillation _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
IBP _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
5% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
10% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
20% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
30% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
40% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
50% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
60% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
70% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
80% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
90% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
95% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
EP _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
API or S.G. _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

BS & W _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

Steam to Stripper _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________


(Sketch system showing flows, P, T, Q on separate page) __________________________
Weight balance _______________________ Heat balance _________________________
Deviations from UOP Specifications: ___________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 52




MAIN COLUMN SUMMARY page _______________________________
CYCLE OIL PRODUCTS AND OVHD. date _______________________________
Item No.: ____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: _________________________________________________________________
Type of Operation: _________________________________________________________
No. of Trays: ________________ Reflux Ratio: ________________________________
Type of Trays: ____________________________________________________________

Net
HCO LCO Naphtha Ovhd. Ovhd.
Product Product Product Reflux Liquid Gas

Mass Flow, _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Temperature _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Pressure _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Composition, ______ % _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
N
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
S _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
O _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
1
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
3
/C
3
=
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
iC
4
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
nC
4
/C
4
=
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
iC
5
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
nC
5
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
6
+ _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Avg. Mol. Wt. _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Gravity _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Distillation _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

IBP _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
5% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
10% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
20% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
30% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
40% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
50% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
60% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
70% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
80% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
90% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
95% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
EP _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Steam to Stripper _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Flash Point _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
157048
Process Calculations
Page 53




COLUMN SUMMARY page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Type of Operation: _________________________________________________________
No. of Trays: _________________ Reflux Ratio: _________________________________
Type of Trays: _____________________________________________________________
Net
Off Ovhd.
Feed Reflux Gas Btms. Liquid Other

Mass Flow _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

Temperature _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Pressure _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

Composition, ______ % _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
H
2
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
N
2
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
H
2
S _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
H
2
O _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
C
1
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
C
2
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
C
3
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
iC
4
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
nC
4
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
iC
5
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
nC
5
_______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
C
6
+ _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Avg. Mol. Wt. _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Gravity _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
Distillation _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

IBP _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
5% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
10% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
20% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
30% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
40% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
50% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
60% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
70% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
80% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
90% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
95% _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________
EP _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ ________

(Sketch system showing flows, P, T, Q on separate page) __________________________
Weight balance _______________________ Heat balance _________________________
Deviations from UOP Specifications: ___________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 54




ABSORBER SUMMARY page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: ____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: _________________________________________________________________
Type of Operation: _________________________________________________________
No. of Trays: ________________ Reflux Ratio: ________________________________
Type of Trays: ____________________________________________________________

Gas Liquid Gas Liquid Pumparound
In In Out Out Upper Lower

Mass Fl _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Temperature _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Pressure _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

Composition, ______ % _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
N
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
S _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
H
2
O _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
1
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
2
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
3
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
iC
4
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
nC
4
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
iC
5
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
nC
5
_______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
C
6
+ _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Avg. Mol. Wt. _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Gravity _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
Distillation, _______ _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
IBP _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
5% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
10% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
20% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
30% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
40% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
50% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
60% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
70% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
80% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
90% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
95% _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______
EP _______ _______ ________ _______ _______ _______

(Sketch system showing flows, P, T, Q on separate page) __________________________
Weight balance ______________________ Heat balance ________________________
Deviations from UOP Specifications: ___________________________________________

157048
Process Calculations
Page 55




CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR DATA
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________
Type, Model: ______________________________________________________________
No. of Stages: _____________________________________________________________

OPERATING CONDITIONS/PERFORMANCE
Flow Rate: ____________ Suction Temperature: ________ F
Suction Pressure: ____________ psig Discharge Temperature: ________ F
Discharge Pressure: ____________ psig Power: ________ hp
Differential Head: ____________ MW: ________
Polytropic q: ____________
Operating Speed: ____________ rpm

Type of Seal: _________________________________________
Lube/Seal Oil System: ________________________________________
Buffer Gas: (yes/no) Buffer Gas Rate: ______________ SCFH
Automatic Surge Control: (yes/no)

DRIVER
Motor Manufacturer: _________________________________________
Rating: ____________________ Service Factor: ______________
Insulation Class: ____________________ Voltage/phase/cycle:

Turbine Manufacturer: _________________________________________
Speed: ______________ Steam Supply: _______ psig ______ F
Steam Rate: ______________ Steam Exhaust: _______ psig ______ F

Gear Manufacturer: _________________________________________
Rating: ____________________ Service Factor: _____________
Type: ____________________ Power Loss: _____________

Deviations from UOP Specification: ____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 56





RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR DATA
page ___________________________
date ___________________________
Item No.: ______________________________ by ___________________________
Service: _______________________________
Manufacturer: ___________________________ Cylinder Lubrication: ____________
Type, Model: ___________________________ Clearance Pockets: (yes/no)
No. of Stages, No. of Cylinders: ___________ Sparing Description: ____________
OPERATING CONDITIONS/PERFORMANCE
Flow Rate: ____________ Suction Temperature: _________ F
Suction Pressure: ____________ psig Discharge Temperature: _________ F
Discharge Pressure: ____________ psig HP/stage: _________ hp
MW: ____________

Operating Speed: ____________ rpm Cylinder Diameters: _________
Piston Speed: ____________ ft/s # of Suction/Discharge Valves: _________
Actual Rod Loadings, T/C: ________________________________________ lbf
Max Allowable Rod Loadings, T/C: ________________________________________ lbf

DRIVER
Motor Manufacturer: ________________________________________
Rating: ____________________ Service Factor: _____________
Insulation Class: ____________________ Voltage/phase/cycle:

Turbine Manufacturer: ________________________________________
Speed: _______________ Steam Supply: _______ psig ______ F
Steam Rate: _______________ Steam Exhaust: _______ psig ______ F

Gear Manufacturer: ________________________________________
Rating: ____________________ Service Factor: _____________
Type: ____________________ Power Loss: _____________

Deviations from UOP Specification: ___________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 57




CONTROL VALVE SUMMARY
page ___________________________
date ___________________________
Item No.: ______________________________ by ___________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Description of Valve: _____________________ Design CV: ______________________
Mfgr. and Catalog No.: ______________________________________________________
Positioner? _______________________________________________________________



Actual Design
Percent open (valve position) ____________
Flow rate: ______________________ ____________ __________
Upstream pressure: ______________________ ____________ __________
Downstream pressure: ______________________ ____________ __________
Flowing temperature: ______________________ ____________ __________




Deviations from UOP Specification: ____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________

157048
Process Calculations
Page 58




AIR FIN COOLER SURVEY
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: ____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: _________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________
Type, Model: _____________________________________________________________
No. of Bundles: _______________________ No. of Passes: _____________________
No. of Tubes per Pass: _________________ Fans/bundle: ______________________
Tube Size _______________ ID x _______________ Gauge x _____________ Length
Piping Geometry: ______________________ Type*: ____________________________
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: _____________________________________________

Pressure Temperature
Inlet ______________ _____________
Outlet ______________ _____________

Air In ______________ _____________
Out ______________ _____________
No. fans on __________________________ Pitch control ________________________
Louver position _______________________

Air Process
Mass flow ______________ _____________
Q (calc.) ______________ _____________
Composition, ____ %
H
2
_____________
N
2
_____________
H
2
S _____________
H
2
O _____________
C
1
_____________
C
2
_____________
C
3
_____________
iC
4
_____________
nC
4
_____________
iC5 _____________
nC
5
_____________
C
6
+ _____________
Avg. Mol. Wt. _____________
Relative Humidity ______________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 59





Gravity
Distillation, ______
IBP _____________
10% _____________
30% _____________
50% _____________
70% _____________
90% _____________
EP _____________

Deviations from UOP Specification: ____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________

*Include sketch of piping geometry if different from UOP standard practice types.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 60




FLOW METER SUMMARY
page ___________________________
date ___________________________
Item No.: ______________________________ by ___________________________
Service: _________________________________________________________________
Type of Fluid: ___________________________ Normal Units of Flow: ______________
______________________________________
Type of Meter: ____________________________________________________________


Meter Reading: ___________________________________________________________
Pressure ________________
Temperature ________________
Sp. Gr.** ________________
Meter Factor ________________
Corrected Flow Rate ________________
Mass Flow Rate ________________
Avg. mol. wt. ________________
Molar Flow Rate ________________

**Sketch piping layout, showing distances in nominal pipe IDs.


157048
Process Calculations
Page 61




HEAT EXCHANGER SURVEY
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________
Type, Model: ______________________________________________________________
No. of Bundles: ____________________________________________________________
No. of Passes/Bundle: __________________ Tubes per Pass: ____________________
Tube Size ______________ ID x _______________ Gauge x ______________ Length
Heat Exchange Surface Area/Bundle: __________________________________________
Piping Geometry (sketch if necessary): _________________________________________
Length of Service: __________________________________________________________
Design Heat Transfer Coefficient: ______________________________________________

Stream Pressure Temperature
Shell Side Inlet A ______________ _____________

Outlet ______________ _____________

Tube Side Inlet B ______________ _____________
Outlet ______________ _____________

Q (calc.) Shell side ______________
Q (calc.) Tube side ______________


Composition, ______ % A B
H
2
______________ ______________
N
2
______________ ______________
H
2
S ______________ ______________
H
2
O ______________ ______________
C
1
______________ ______________
C
2
______________ ______________
C
3
______________ ______________
iC
4
______________ ______________
nC
4
______________ ______________
iC5 ______________ ______________
nC
5
______________ ______________
C
6
+ ______________ ______________
Mass Flow ______________ ______________
Avg. Mol. Wt. ______________ ______________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 62




Gravity
Distillation, _______
IBP ______________ ______________
10% ______________ ______________
30% ______________ ______________
50% ______________ ______________
70% ______________ ______________
90% ______________ ______________
EP ______________ ______________


Deviations from UOP Specification: ___________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 63




HEATER SURVEY
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________
Type, Model: ______________________________________________________________
No. of Passes: _________________________ Tubes per Pass: ____________________
Tube Size ______________ ID x _______________ Wall x ________________ Length
Geometry (Process): ________________________________________________________
Geometry (Flue Gas): _______________________________________________________

Stream Pressure Temperature
Radiant Inlet A ______________ _____________

Outlet ______________ _____________

Convection I Inlet B ______________ _____________
Outlet ______________ _____________

Convection II Inlet C ______________ _____________
Outlet ______________ _____________

Convection III Inlet D ______________ _____________
Outlet ______________ _____________

Fuel Gas E ______________ _____________

Fuel Oil F ______________ _____________

Flue Gas Under Convection I G ______________ _____________

Flue Gas Under Convection II H ______________ _____________

Flue Gas Under Convection III I ______________ _____________

Flue Gas Under Stack Damper J ______________ _____________

Flue Gas Above Floor K ______________ _____________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 64




HEATER SURVEY
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
by _______________________________

G,H,
Stream A B C D E F I,J,K
Mass Flow, ________ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
Composition, ______ % _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
H
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
N
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
O
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
CO _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
CO
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
H
2
S _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
SO
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
C
1
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
C
2
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
C
3
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
iC
4
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
nC
4
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
iC
5
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
nC
5
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
C
6
-205C (400F) _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
205C (400F)+ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Avg. Mol. Wt. _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Gravity _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Viscosity _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Total Sulfur, _______ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Metals, ___________ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ______
Q (calc.) Absorbed _____ _____ _____ ____ ______
Q (calc.) Released _____ _____
Heater Gross Efficiency ______
Excess Air, % ______
Tube Skin Temps:, _____
Burner Pressure ______________________ % of Rating ____________________

Provide sketch showing piping and controls for process piping.

Deviations from UOP Specification: ___________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 65




CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SURVEY
page _______________________________
date _______________________________
Item No.: _____________________________ by _______________________________
Service: __________________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: _____________________________________________________________
Type, Model: ______________________________________________________________
No., Size and Style (Mfgrs. Designation) ________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________

Pressure Temperature
Suction ______________ _____________

Discharge ______________

Other Information
Rated Flow (STP) _____________ Seal Type? Single, Tandem, Double, Bellow
Sp. Gr. _____________ Spillback? Yes/No
Viscosity _____________ NPSHR? _________________________
Static Suction Head _____________ Suction Specific Speed: ________________
Speed _____________
Differential Head (flowing condition) _________________________________________

Driver Type: ___________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: ___________________________________________________________
No., Size, Rating and Style (Mfgrs. designation): __________________________________
Rating: _________________ Insulation Class: _________________
Service Factor: _________________ Voltage/Phase/Cycle: _________________

Motor:
Power consumption ______________
Speed ______________

Turbine:
Steam consumption ______________ Pressure Temperature
Steam supply ______________ ______________

Steam exhaust ______________ ______________

Speed ______________

Supply copy of Mfgrs. pump curve and plot operating point.

Deviations from UOP Specification: ____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
157048
Process Calculations
Page 66





157048
Process Calculations
Page 67




SUPPLEMENTAL CALCULATIONS

REGENERATOR VELOCITIES

The following procedure shows how to calculate the superficial velocity in the
combustor, upper regenerator, and cyclones. This section presents two methods to
calculate the velocities in the regenerator. The first method is more precise but
requires more information and it is more laborious than the second method.

Method A

1. Required Information

The FCC Unit is in total combustion mode for this case and with no catalyst cooler.
The process conditions are:

Temperatures: Average Dense 1371F
Average Dilute 1375F
Average Cyclones 1375F
Air to Regenerator 399F
Ambient 62F

Relative Humidity 97%

Pressures: Regenerator 32 psig
Combustor 34 psig
Cyclones 31 psig

Areas: Combustor Cross sectional 300 ft
2

Regenerator Cross sectional 452 ft
2

First Stage Cyclones 24.5 ft
2

Second Stage Cyclones 21.3 ft
2

157048
Process Calculations
Page 68




Flow Rates: Air to Regenerator 83,615 scfm
= (scfm x 28.76 lb/mol x 60 min/hr)/(379.5 scf/mol)
= 380,200 lb/hr

Flue Gas: CO = 0
CO
2
=
15.50
O
2
=
2.5
N
2
+ Ar = 82.0
SO
2
= 0
NO
2
= 0


2. Combustion Air Correction to a Dry Basis

A psychometric chart is used to determine the moisture content of the air. At
atmospheric conditions of 62F and a relative humidity of 97%, the moisture content
is:

Moisture Content =
0.01152 lb H
2
O
lb dry air


Wet Air = 380,200 lb/hr

Dry Air = 380, 200 lb/hr wet air
1 lb dry air
(1 + 0.01152) lb wet air
= 375, 870 lb/hr

Water in Air = 380,200 lb/hr - 375,870 lb/hr = 4,330 lb/hr

157048
Process Calculations
Page 69




3. Calculate Flue Gas Rate

The flue gas rate can be calculated from the regenerator air rate. These two
streams are related by the inert N
2
+ Ar content which remains constant through the
catalyst regeneration.

Since, moles =
Weight
Molecular Weight


then,

Water in Air = (4,330 lb/hr)/(18 MW) = 241 mol/hr

Dry Air = (375,870 lb/hr)/(28.966 lb/mol) = 12,976 lb mol/hr

mol/hr (N
2
+ Ar) in dry air = mol/hr (N
2
+ Ar) in flue gas


12, 976 lb mol
hr

79 mol inerts
100 mol air
=
lb mol FG
hr

82 mol inerts
100 mol FG


Flue Gas (FG) = 12,501 lb mol/hr


4. Calculate the Water Produced by the Hydrogen Content of Coke

The overall reaction occurring in the regenerator is:

C + H
2
+ S + N + O
2
= CO + SO
2
+ NO
2
+ H
2
O + O
2

157048
Process Calculations
Page 70




The water produced by the hydrogen (H
2
) content of the coke can be calculated
from an O
2

balance:

O
2
in regeneration air = excess O
2
in flue gas +
+ O
2
reacted to CO (0.5 mol O
2
/mol CO)
+ O
2
reacted to CO
2
(1 mol O
2
/mol CO
2
)
+ O
2
reacted to H
2
O (0.5 mol O
2
/mol H
2
O)
+ O
2
reacted to SO
2
(1 mol O
2
/mol SO
2
)
+ O
2
reacted to NO
2
1 mol O
2
/mol NO
2


where:

O2 in regen. air =
12, 976 lb mol dry air
hr

21 mol O2
100 mol air
=
2,725 lb mol
hr
of O2


Excess O2 in FG =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

2.5 mol O2
100 mol FG
=
312 lb mol
hr
of O2


O2 reacted to CO =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol CO
100 mol FG

0.5 mol O2
mol CO
= 0 lb mol/hr O
2


O2 reacted to CO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

15.5 mol CO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol CO2
=1,938 lb mol/hr of O
2


O2 reacted to SO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol SO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol SO2
= 0 lb mol/hr of O
2


O2 reacted to NO2 =
12, 501 lb mol FG
hr

0 mol NO2
100 mol FG

1 mol O2
mol NO2
= 0 lb mol/hr of O
2

157048
Process Calculations
Page 71




O
2
reacted to H
2
O (by difference) is:

O
2
Reacted to H
2
O = 2,725 - 312 - 0 - 1,938 - 0 - 0 lb mol/hr O
2
= 475 lb mol/hr of O
2

Since
H
2
+ 1/2O
2
= H
2
O
Then

The water produced by Hydrogen and Oxygen in the regenerator is:

H2O Produced by O2 =
475 lb mol
hr O2

2 mol H2O
mol O2
=
950 lb mol
hr H2



5. Calculate the Wet Flue Gas Rate

The total moles per hour of wet flue gas are:

Wet Flue Gas = Dry Flue Gas + Water from Air + Water from H
2
in Coke =
12,502 mol/hr + 241 mol/hr + 949 mol/hr = 13,692 mol/hr

The actual cubic feet per second (ACFS) of the flue gas can be calculated by using
the Ideal Gas equation of state

PV = nRT then V = nRT/P

Where
R = 10.7 (psia x ft
3
)/(mol x R)
Prg = 32 psig + 14.7 = 46.7 psia
Pcomb = 34 psig + 14.7 = 48.7 psia
Pcycl = 31 psig + 14.7 = 45.7 psia
Tcomb = 1,275F + 460 = 1,735 R
Tdense = 1,371F + 460 = 1,831 R
Tdilute = 1,375F + 460 = 1,835 R
Tcycl = 1,368F + 460 = 1,828 R
157048
Process Calculations
Page 72





ACFS @Tcomb = 13,692 mol/hr x 10.73 x 1,735/(48.7x3600 sec/hr) = 1,454 ft
3
/sec

ACFS @Tdens = 13,692 mol/hr x 10.73 x 1,831/(46.7x3600 sec/hr) = 1,596 ft
3
/sec

ACFS @Tdilute = 13,692 mol/hr x 10.73 x 1,835/(46.7x3600 sec/hr) = 1,599 ft
3
/sec

ACFS @Tcyc = 13,692 mol/hr x 10.73 x 1,828/(45.7x3600 sec/hr) = 1,632 ft
3
/sec


6. Calculate Superficial Velocities

Regenerator Superficial Velocity
= (ACFS @ Tdens, ft
3
/sec) / (Rg Cross Sect Area, ft
2
) = 3.5 ft/sec

First stage Cyclones Superficial Velocity
= (ACFS @ Tdilute ft
3
/sec) / (Total Inlet Area, ft
2
) = 65.2 ft/sec

Second Stage Cyclones Superficial Velocity
= (ACFS @ Tcyc, ft
3
/sec) / (Total Inlet Area, ft
2
) = 76.6 ft/sec

Combustor Superficial Velocity
= (ACFS @ Tcomb, ft
3
/sec) / (Comb Cross Sec Area, ft
2
) = 4.8 ft/sec

157048
Process Calculations
Page 73




Method B

1. Required Information

This method does not require the flue gas analysis. The process conditions are:

Temperatures: Average Dense 1371F
Pressures: Regenerator 32 psig
Area: Regenerator Cross sectional 452 ft
2

Flow Rates: Air to Regenerator 83,615 scfm


2. Calculate the Actual Cubic Feet per Second

The volumetric flue gas rate can be calculated by using the Ideal Gas equation of
state

PV = nRT then R = PV/nT

For air we have R = P
1
V
1
/n
1
T
1


For the Regenerator Air R = P
2
V
2
/n
2
T
2


Combining the last two equations P
1
V
1/
n
1
T
1
= P
2
V
2
/n
2
T
2


Or V
2
= P
1
V
1
T
2
x n
2
T
1
P
2
n
1

Where:
P
1
= 0 pisg + 14.7 = 14.7 psia
T
1
= 60 F + 460 = 520 R
V
1
= 83,615 scfm/(60 s/m) = 1,393.6 ft/s
P
2
= 32 pisg + 14.7 = 46.7 psia
T
2
= 1,371F + 460 = 1,831 R
157048
Process Calculations
Page 74




n
2/
n
1
= 1.04 Assumed. This factor is due to the combustion of
Hydrogen to in the coke to water.

Then

V
2
= (14.7 psia)(1,393.5 ft/s)(1,831R)(1.04) = 1,606 ft
3
/s
(520R)(46.7 psia)


3. Calculate Regenerator Superficial Velocity

The superficial velocity is calculated by dividing the volumetric flow rate by the cross
sectional area:

Rg Velocity = 1,606 ft
3
/s = 3.6 ft/s
452 ft
2

The molar expansion factor n2/n1 can be approximated if the flue analysis is
available by using the following equation:

n
2/
n
1
= 2 - (79/N
2
%)

Where N
2
% is the Nitrogen percent form the flue gas analysis.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 75




REGENERATOR AIR DISTRIBUTOR PRESSURE DROP

The pressure drop across the regenerator air distributor can be calculated by the
following formula:

AP =
q
2

C
2
A
2
(2g) 144


where:

P = pressure drop, psi
q = air rate at flowing conditions, ft
3
/sec
r = density of air at flowing conditions, lb/ft
3
C = orifice coefficient, 0.60-0.80
A = total cross sectional area of holes, ft
2

g = acceleration due to gravity, 32.2 ft/sec
2

The perforated grid air distributor is designed for a pressure differential of about 0.7-
1.2 psi. This will give good air distribution for fluidization without causing catalyst
attrition. If the pressure differential is too high, the high velocity can cause attrition.
If the pressure differential is too low, less than 0.5 psi, it can cause poor distribution
of air and distributor erosion problems.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 76




REACTOR STRIPPER DENSITY

The following procedure shows how to calculate the density in Reactor Stripper.
The density indicator is a differential type instrument and for this case the range is
0-145 inches of water.


1. Calculate the Distance Between Taps

Lower Instrument Tap Elevation:
59' 8 7/8" or 59.7396'

Upper Instrument Tap Elevation:
74' 4 1/8" or 74.3438'

Distance Between Taps:
74' 4 1/8" - 59' 8 7/8" = 14' 7 1/4" or 175.25"


2. Calculate the Density

Instrument Readout: 75%
Instrument Span: 0-145 inches H
2
O

75% x 145 inches H
2
O = 108.75 inches H
2
O


3 2
2
2
2
2
ft
lb
38.7 =
ft
in 144

O H in 27.705
lb/in

ft
in 12

in 175.25
1
O H in 108.75

157048
Process Calculations
Page 77




Notes:

i) The Spent Catalyst Stripper Density is expected to range from 30 to 45 lb/ft
3
.

ii) In cases when the pressure taps are under the stripper baffles the distance
between taps should be replaced by the distance between the bottom edges of
the baffles.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 78




REACTOR STRIPPER LEVEL

This procedure shows how to calculate the level in the reactor. The level controller
is a differential type instrument and for this case the range is 0-300 inches of water.


1. Calculate the Distance Between the Taps

Lower Instrument Tap Elevation:
62' 3 7/8" or 62.3229'

Upper Instrument Tap Location:
127' 0" - 3' 3" - 1' 6" = 122' 3" or 122.2500'

Distance Between Upper Tap and Lower Tap:
122' 6" - 62' 3 7/8" = 60' 2 1/8" or 60.1771'


2. Data Required

Instrument Readout: 50%
Instrument Span: 0-300 inches H
2
O
Stripper Density of 36.25 lb/ft
3
(From Stripper Density Calculation)
Assume Reactor Vapor Space Density of 1 lb/ft
3


Distance Between Upper Tap and Lower Tap = 60.1771'
Elevation of Lower Tap = 62.3229'
Normal Reactor Catalyst Level = 84.500'
Cyclone Dipleg Outlet = 79.5417'

300 in H
2
O x 50% = 150 in H
2
O

157048
Process Calculations
Page 79




3. Method A - This is rough method.

Catalyst of ft =
lb 36.25
ft

ft
in 144

O H in 27.705
lb/in
O H in 150
3
2
2
2
2
2
21.51

Distance Relative to Normal Catalyst Level =
(62.32 + 21.51) - 84.50 = - 0.67 (i.e. ~ 8" below normal level)


4. Method B - This method is more precise than Method A since consider the
reactor vapor density.

X + Y = 60.18 ft => Y = 60.18 - X

Where: X = Catalyst height.
y = Reactor vapor height from catalyst bed to upper pressure tap.
60.18 ft = distance between pressure taps.

3 3 2
2
2
2
2
ft
lb
1 X) - (60.18 +
ft
lb) (36.25 X

ft
in 144

O H in 27.705
lb/in
O H in 150
779.64 lb/ft
2
= 35.25 X lb/ft
3
+ 60.18 lb/ft
2


Then

X = 20.41 ft above Lower Level Tap

Distance Relative to Normal Catalyst Level =
(62.32 + 20.41) - 84.50 = - 1.77 (i.e. 1' 9 1/4" below normal level)
157048
Process Calculations
Page 80




Notes:

i) The Spent Catalyst Stripper Density is expected to range from 30 to 45
Lbs/Ft
3
.

ii) In cases when the lower pressure tap is under the stripper baffle the distance
between taps should be replaced by the distance between the bottom edge of
the baffle and the upper tap.

157048
Process Calculations
Page 81




REACTOR RISER RESIDENCE TIME

Residence time, the time that hydrocarbons spend in the riser, is another design
variable utilized in controlling reaction severity. This variable is of particular
importance in operation using high activity zeolitic catalyst. Typical residence time
for current designs is two to three seconds.

Conversion is proportional to residence time in that it increases with prolonged
contact of catalyst and feedstock. Gasoline yields increase with residence time up
to a point after which over-cracking may occur. This results in a loss of gasoline
yields and a significant increase in conversion.

The method used to calculate riser residence time is as follows:

u = VR/[(1/3)(V
F
) + (2/3) (V
P
)]

u = Residence time in seconds

V
R
= Riser volume, ft
3


V
F
= Volume of vaporized feed, steam, lift gas, water, and inerts calculated at
the average conditions at the point of feed injection, ft
3
/s.

V
P
= Volume of vaporized products, steam, lift gas, water and inerts calculated
at the average conditions at the point of feed injection, ft
3
/s.

It should be noted that prior to the residence time calculation, the average
temperature and pressure at the point of feed injection must be estimated to obtain
V
F
and V
P
.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 82




The riser pressure at the point of feed injection can be approximated by assuming a
5 psig pressure drop, hence:

Riser Pressure = Reactor dome pressure + 5 psi

The average temperature at the point of feed injection is calculated as:



( )( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( )( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) | |
( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) | |
PL Po
OL Rx WL S W L PL Po R
C O L O S O W C O C
H H H O W T O S T O W T C O L To C T O C
Tavg
/ / / 495 . 0 / 2753 . 0
/ / / 495 . 0 / / 2753 . 0
+ + + +
A A A + + + +
=

Where:

C/O = Catalyst to Oil wt. ratio, calculated in reactor-regenerator heat
balance section

S/O = Steam to Oil wt. ratio

W/O = Water to Oil wt. ratio

L/O = Lift gas to Oil wt. ratio

T
R
= Regenerator dense bed temperature, F

T
O
= Oil feed temperature, F

T
L
= Lift gas feed temperature, F

T
S
= Steam feed temperature, F

T
W
= Water feed temperature, F

C
P
O
= Specific heat of vaporized oil feed, Btu/lb/F
157048
Process Calculations
Page 83





C
PL
= Specific heat of lift gas, Btu/lb/F

H
OL
= Latent heat of vaporization of oil feed at inlet temperature, T
o
,
Btu/lb

H
WL
= Latent heat of vaporization of water at inlet temperature, T
w
,
Btu/lb

H
RX
= Heat of reaction, Btu/lb, calculated in reactor-regenerator heat
balance section

T
avg
= Average temperature at point of feed injection, F

157048
Process Calculations
Page 84




HYDROGEN BALANCE

This document describes a manual method for calculating the Hydrogen balance for
an FCC Unit.

Data required:

A normalized to 100% recovery product summary in wt-%
A breakdown of the C
4
- components
The distillation and API of each C
5
+ product
The distillation and API of the feed

API Technical Data Book Figure 2B1.1
"Characterizing Boiling Points of Petroleum Fractions"

Figure 2 - UOP Chart 409B-12
"Hydrogen Content of Liquid Petroleum Hydrocarbons"

Description of the Calculation Method:

Step 1. Determine the molecular weight of Hydrogen per molecule for each C
4
-
product, e.g. H
2
S, H
2
, C
1
, C
2
, C
2
=, etc. See column 3 of the attached example.

Step 2. Determine the percentage Hydrogen in each C
4
- product component by
dividing the molecular weight of Hydrogen per molecule by the molecular weight of
each component. In the attached example this is column 3 divided by column 4
times 100. The result is given in column 5.

Step 3. Calculate the Volume Average Boiling Point (VABP) for each of the heavier
products (C
5
+ gasoline, LCO, and MCB). See Figure 2B1.1 comments for
procedure and definitions.

Step 4. Calculate the Engler Slope for each of the heavier products (C
5
+ gasoline,
LCO, and MCB). See Figure 2B1.1 comments for procedure and definitions.
157048
Process Calculations
Page 85





Step 5. Determine the Mean Average Boiling Point from API Figure 2B1.1.

Step 6. Determine the Hydrogen content of the hydrocarbon liquid from Figure 2.
See the lower half of column 5 in the attached example.

Step 7. Multiply the wt% normalized yield pattern for each component by the
percentage Hydrogen in each product component. In the attached example this is
column 2 times column 5. The result is given in column 6.

Step 8. Calculate the percentage of Feed Hydrogen in each component by dividing
the Wt% Hydrogen in each product component by the Wt% H
2
in the feed. In the
attached example this is the value in column 6 divided by the Wt% H
2
in the feed
(13%).

157048
Process Calculations
Page 86




Hydrogen Balance Summary

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Mass Balance wt-% #H/Molecule MW %H2 H2 wt-% % Feed H2
Results
Feed: 100.00 Values from Figures 2B1.1 & Fig. 2 13.00 100.00

H2S 0.04 2.0158 34.08 0.06 0.0021 0.02
H2 0.23 2.0158 2.02 1.00 0.2280 1.75
C1 0.89 4.0361 16.04 0.25 0.2245 1.73
C2 0.81 6.0474 30.07 0.20 0.1622 1.25
C2= 0.91 4.0316 28.05 0.14 0.1303 1.00
C3 1.30 8.0632 44.10 0.18 0.2375 1.83
C3= 4.64 6.0474 42.08 0.14 0.6662 5.12
IC4 2.69 10.0790 58.12 0.17 0.4665 3.59
NC4 0.63 10.0790 58.12 0.17 0.1094 0.84
C4= 4.88 8.0632 56.11 0.14 0.7007 5.39

C5+ Gasoline 44.55 13.80 6.15 47.29
LCO 27.60 Values to the right 11.30 3.12 23.99
MCB 5.22 were determined from Chart 10.20 0.53 4.10
Coke 5.62 2B1.1 & Fig 2. 4.44 0.25 1.92
Total Products 100.00 See attached method. Total 39.74 12.98 99.82


Laboratory Summary for Gasoline
Distillation D-86 F R (R)^1/3 SpGr 0.7286
IBP 96.8 556.8 --------- API 62.02
10% 131.9 591.9 8.3962 VABP 214.7
20% 145.4 605.4 8.4596 Engler Slope 2.40
30% 163.4 623.4 8.5426 Correction Factor 6.0
40% 182.3 642.3 8.6280 CABP, R Uncorrected 672.8
50% 203.9 663.9 8.7237 CABP, F Corrected 206.8
60% 230.9 690.9 8.8404 CABP, R Corrected 666.8
70% 259.7 719.7 8.9616 UOP K 11.99
80% 291.2 751.2 9.0904 Total Sulfur, wt% 0.0032
90% 323.6 786.3 9.2193 Octane (F1 C) 92
EP 371.3 831.3 --------- RVP @ 378C, kg/cm
2
39.6
Recovered Volume 99.5 %
Residue Volume 0.5 %
157048
Process Calculations
Page 87




Hydrogen Content of Liquid Petroleum
Hydrocarbons

157048
Process Calculations
Page 88





157048
Process Calculations
Page 89




Comments on Figure 2B1.1
Purpose:
The various average boiling points which are used to characterize petroleum fractions are correlated
in Figure 2B1.1 with the ASTM D86 distillation properties of the fraction. If these boiling points are
required for mixtures (or portions of a mixture) for which the composition is known, using the defining
equations (2-0.3) through (2-0.7) given in the introduction.

Reliability:
The reliability is unknown.

Notation:
The volumetric average boiling point of a petroleum fraction is the weighted average of the ASTM
D86 distillation temperatures after 10, 30, 50, 70 and 90 percent by volume have been distilled.
( )
5
90 70 50 30 10
T T T T T + + + +
. The slope is calculated assuming a linear ASTM D86 distillation curve
between the 10 and 90 percent points |
.
|

\
|

10 90
10 90
T T
in degrees Fahrenheit per percent distilled.
The relationships between the various average boiling points given in Figure 2B1.1 for petroleum
fractions are analogous to those defined by equations (2-0.3) through (2-0.7) for mixtures of
identifiable hydrocarbons.

Special Comments:
For ASTM D86 distillation temperatures above 475F, use the following correction for cracking:
T D - + = 00473 . 0 587 . 1 log (2B1.1-1)
Where:
D = correction to be added to T, in degrees Fahrenheit
T = observed distillation temperature, in degrees Fahrenheit

If the available distillation data are not from ASTM Method D86, they must be converted by the
methods of Chapter 3 to calculate the volumetric average boiling point.

Literature Sources:
This figure was developed by Smith and Watson, Ind. Eng. Chem. 29 1408 (1937). Equation
(2B1.1-1) was given by S.T.Hadden, Gulf Research and Development Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.,
private communication (1964).

Example:
Determine the molal average boiling point, weighted average boiling point, cubic average boiling
point, and mean average boiling point of a petroleum fraction having the following ASTM D86
distillation properties:
Distillation, percent by volume 10 30 50 70 90
Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit: 149 230 282 325 371

F VABP =
+ + + +
= 271
5
371 325 282 230 149
% 78 . 2
80
149 371
F Slope =

=
Using Figure 2B1.1, the average boiling points are calculated from the volumetric average boiling
point:
F MABP = = 241 30 271 F CABP = = 264 7 271
F WABP = + = 278 7 271 F MeABP = = 252 19 271
157048
Process Calculations
Page 90




Calculation of Flow Meter Constant K for Liquid Flow:

|
|
.
|

\
|
- - - - - - =
Gb
Gf
h Fc Fa D S N Q
m
2
max
Where:
Qmax = maximum flow rate at base conditions, (@ 60F)
N = constant based on flow units
D = Process pipe inside diameter
d = orifice diameter
S = discharge coefficient, f(d/D)
Fa = thermal expansion of plate
Fc = Reynolds correction factor
Gf = liquid specific gravity at flowing conditions
Gb = gas specific gravity at base condition (@ 60F)
h
m
= maximum differential pressure (design basis)

Note: N, S, Fa, and Fc can be found in L.Spinks Principles and Practices of Flow Meter Engineering

Example for Sponge Gas Meter

Flow, bpsd = 34,000
N, for bpd = 194.3
D = 7.981 in
d = 5.034 in
B = d/D = 0.6307
S = 0.2672
Fa = 1.001 for type 304 stainless steel plate
Viscosity, cS = 10
Re = 39,292; Re = 92.235*bpsd / (viscosity*D)
Fc = 1.015
h
m
= 100 in H
2
O
Temp, F = 173F
Gb = 0.9266
Gf = 0.8854 Gf = Gb*VCF = 0.9260 * 0.9562 = 0.8854
|
|
.
|

\
|
- - - - - - =
9266 . 0
8854 . 0
100 015 . 1 001 . 1 981 . 7 2672 . 0 3 . 194 max
2
Q

BPSD Q 119 , 34 max=

The K constant can be calculated by using the following equation:

( )
BPSD
Gf
Gb Q
K 360 , 3
10
max*
=
-
=

Where: 10: maximum units meter reading, MR, then:
|
|
.
|

\
|
- - =
Gb
Gf
MR Q 360 , 3 ; BPSD Q _________ =
157048
Process Calculations
Page 91




Calculation of Flow Meter Constant K for Gas Flow:
( ) Z Gb Tf
Pf
h Y Fc Fa D S N Q
m
- -
- - - - - - =
2
max
Where:
Qmax = maximum flow rate at base conditions, (@ 60F)
N = constant based on flow units
D = Process pipe inside diameter
d = orifice diameter
S = discharge coefficient, f(d/D)
Fa = thermal expansion of plate
Fc = Reynolds correction factor
Y = upstream orifice expansion factor
h
m
= maximum differential pressure (design basis)
Pf = absolute flowing pressure upstream of the orifice, psia
Tf = absolute flowing temperature, R
Gb = gas specific gravity at base condition (@ 60F)
Z = compressibility factor of gas

Note: N, S, Fa, Fc, Y and Z can be found in L.Spinks Principles and Practices of Flow Meter Engineering

Example for Sponge Gas Meter

Flow, scfm = 8,375 = lb/hr = 26,100
N = 128.78 for scfm and psi
D = 6.065 in
d = 3.5834 in
B = d/D = 0.5908
S = 0.2284
Fa = 1.0003, for type 304 stainless steel plate
Viscosity, cP = 0.011
Re = 2,472,487; Re = 6.32(lb/hr)/(viscosity*D)
Fc = 0.988
Y = 0.9944; Y = 1-(0.41-0.35B^4)(h/2)/(27.67Pf*(p/Cv))
h
m
= 200 in H
2
O
Pf = 187.7 psia
Tf = 573R
Cp/Cv = 1.27
Gb = 0.7054
Z = 0.965 f(Tr,Pr) Tr = Tf/Tc Pr = Pf/Pc
( ) 965 . 0 7054 . 0 573
7 . 187
200 9881 . 0 0003 . 1 065 . 6 2284 . 0 78 . 128 max
2
- -
- - - - - - = Q

scfm Q 490 , 10 max=

The K constant can be calculated by using the following equation:

scm
Pf
Gb
Tf
Q
K 539 , 1
10
max
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
- -
|
.
|

\
|
=

Where: 10: maximum units meter reading, MR, then:
Gb
Tf
Pf
MR Q - - - =1539 ; scfm Q _________ =
157048
Treating
Page 1




FEED/PRODUCT TREATING

INTRODUCTION

FCC feeds contain a number of contaminants that affect yields, product quality,
plant emissions and corrosion in the main column and gas concentration unit.
These contaminants are handled by a combination of treating either the feed or
products as well as unit design. This subject is of increasing importance to refiners
with the ever tighter limits on emissions from the plant, especially SOx and NOx and
on limits in liquid product sulfur levels. The industry trend towards processing resid
feeds which typically have higher concentrations of sulfur, metals and carbon
residue makes this issue even more important.

In the United States new fuel specifications are will limit the sulfur concentration in
both gasoline and high speed diesel fuels to less than 50 wppm. This is an issue
critical to the FCC because in a typical refinery gasoline pool 98% of the total
gasoline pool sulfur comes from the FCC naphtha even though the FCC naphtha
makes up only 30-40% of the pool. Limits on fuel oil sulfur will also require a
reduction in the MCB product sulfur. In some areas the limits on SOx emissions will
be more restrictive requiring less than 300 ppm in the flue gas. In the coming years
these restrictions will likely become even more stringent.

FEED TREATING

Light and heavy vacuum gas oils are the most common FCC feedstock with an
increasing trend towards atmospheric resid. Also, there are economic incentives
towards processing lower priced crudes which typically contain higher levels of
contaminants.

Hydrotreating is the most common and effective method of improving the FCC feed
quality. Hydrotreating not only reduces the contaminant concentration but also
improves yields. Hydrogen addition to the feed, especially to the large polynuclear
aromatics, makes these molecules easier to crack resulting in higher conversion to
desired products with less coke and light gas make. Table 1 shows the impact of
hydrotreating on both the FCC feed properties and the FCC yields.
157048
Treating
Page 2





Table 1
Feed Hydrotreating Benefits

Feed Desulfurization Untreated 90% 98% 99%
Feed Properties
Gravity, API 20.5 23.5 24.8 26.0
Sulfur, wt% 2.6 0.25 0.06 0.02
Nitrogen, wppm 880 500 450 400
Carbon Residue, wt% 0.4 0.25 0.1 0.1
Metals (Ni +V), wppm 5 2 1 <1
Yields, wt%
H2S 1.1 0.1 0.0 0.0
C2- 3.3 3.5 3.2 2.8
LPG 16.3 17.6 18.7 19.9
Naphtha 48.3 51.5 52.5 53.6
LCO 16.7 15.7 15.0 14.0
MCB 9.0 6.6 5.9 5.2
Coke 5.4 5.0 4.7 4.4
Conversion, lv% 74.3 77.7 79.1 80.8
Key Product Properties
Naphtha RONC 93.2 93.0 92.9 92.7
Naphtha MONC 80.5 80.8 81.1 81.0
LCO Cetane Index 25.7 25.7 26.4 26.5
Product Sulfur, wppm
H2S 10,100 750 190 95
Naphtha 3,600 230 55 18
LCO 29,700 3,400 900 300
MCB 57,800 11,000 3,000 1,100
SOx , vppm in flue gas 2,000 410 120 42
157048
Treating
Page 3




As more sulfur is removed the sulfur balance in the FCC shifts towards higher
percentage of the total feed sulfur going to the MCB product and SOx in the flue
gas. This is because the hardest to remove sulfur is in the heavy aromatic
compounds which tend to form coke or remain uncracked. From Table 1 the
percentage of sulfur in the feed ending up in the MCB product increases from 20 to
30% and the percentage of feed sulfur ending up in the naphtha decreases from 6.7
to 4.8% as the untreated feed is desulfurized by 98%.

Table 1 illustrates a case where hydrotreating is used primarily for reduction in
sulfur. In some units, especially those treating resid feeds, the reduction of carbon
residue and metals is more important. Hydrotreating can reduce feed metals and
carbon residue by 90% or more allowing processing of extremely contaminated
resid feeds in the FCC while still achieving good yields. This can also significantly
reduce the required fresh catalyst addition rate.

Nitrogen is also removed by feed hydrotreating. Some of the nitrogen in the FCC
feed is converted to ammonia which can cause salt formation and plugging in the
main column overhead. Basic nitrogen in the feed acts a temporary poison to the
FCC catalyst. Severely contaminated FCC feeds may contain as much as 4,000
wppm nitrogen while a clean feed may contain less than 500 wppm. Cyanides are
also formed from nitrogen in the feed which can cause blistering and corrosion in
the gas concentration unit. Wash water and proper control of the main column
overhead temperature is usually sufficient to prevent these plugging and corrosion
concerns so that these are usually not a significant factor when considering
hydrotreating as an option to improve profitability.

Oxygen may be present in the feed either chemically bonded in the hydrocarbon or
absorbed from storage. Dissolved oxygen may cause fouling of heat exchangers
when the temperature approaches 400F (200C). The best method for preventing
this is to blanket the raw oil tanks with either fuel gas or nitrogen. This is most
important for cracked feed stocks such as coker gas oil or highly olefinic feeds.
Once in the reactor the oxygen will quickly be converted to water, carbon oxides,
phenols, creosols or acids.
157048
Treating
Page 4




PRODUCT TREATING

FCC products contain undesirable material which must be either removed or
transformed into an inoffensive material if the product is to meet specifications for
use. The cycle oil, gasoline, LPG and fuel gas must be non-corrosive, stable in
storage and of acceptable odor. The specifications may also limit the allowable
amount of contaminants such as sulfur. Feed treating is effective in reducing nearly
all of these contaminants but it requires a very high capital investment.

The major undesirable constituents found in FCC products are:


1. Sulfur compounds. In the gasoline and lighter compounds there are
particularly hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, elemental sulfur, and carbonyl
sulfide. While the regenerator flue gas is not considered a product of the FCC,
reduction of SOx emissions from this stream is of increasing importance to
most refiners. SOx control is covered in more detail in the Environmental
section of this manual.

2. Oil soluble or ionic metals, principally copper.

3. Nitrogen containing compounds, such as pyridine, quinoline, and pyrrole. NOx
in the regenerator flue gas is also a common concern.

4. Oxygenated compounds, including phenols and carbonic acids.

5. Diolefinic hydrocarbons.

The degree of undesirability is modified and varies between groups of substances
as well as within families of compounds, depending upon the concentrations
present and the required product specifications. Synergistic and inhibiting
relationships are known to exist, as between thiophenols and olefins which intensify
gum formation, or between elemental sulfur and hydrogen sulfide which promote
copper strip corrosion. The distribution and concentration of objectionable
157048
Treating
Page 5




components in particular product are governed by FCC charge properties, catalyst
type and activity, the promotion of thermal cracking reactions, and fractionation
schemes. The following sections will discuss the impurities and what may be done
to render them harmless.

SULFUR

There are a variety of different sulfur compounds present in FCC product streams.
They vary in their potential damage, but overall rate as the most troublesome
impurity. Hydrotreating each product stream would remove them along with other
contaminants, but from both a process and cost basis this technique is rarely used
for LPG or gasoline treating. Hydrotreating is occasionally used for cycle oil treating.

Elemental Sulfur

Elemental sulfur may occur naturally, but because it is non-volatile it does not distill
to any product above the feed tray. Elemental sulfur formation can be a problem in
the gas concentration unit when oxygen in present. The most common source of
the oxygen is the wash water injected in the wet gas compressor interstage. It is
also possible that during startup catalyst circulation in the FCC oxygen will be
entrained into the reactor and enter the gas concentration unit which can cause
elemental sulfur formation for a short period after startup. The best solution to
minimize elemental sulfur formation is to eliminate all possible sources of oxygen
including using steam condensate for the wash water.

Elemental sulfur can also be found in the FCC gasoline or LPG products if there is
carry over of caustic from the Merox or other treating units.

Elemental, sometimes called free sulfur corrodes copper and consequently
produces a positive copper strip corrosion test. In the absence of H
2
S, as little as 5
wt. ppm free sulfur can give a failing copper strip test. If H
2
S is present, even in very
low concentrations, the amount of allowable sulfur is even less. When 0.3 wt. ppm
H
2
S is present, 0.5 wt. ppm elemental sulfur can give a filling copper strip test.
157048
Treating
Page 6




Elemental sulfur has a harmful effect on alkyl lead susceptibility for gasoline octane
improvement. Free sulfur will remain as a deposit when LPG is evaporated.

Removal of elemental sulfur is very difficult; hydrotreating or redistillation are two
costly removal methods. Chemical treatments such as scrubbing with sodium or
potassium polysulfide solutions or caustic-sodium sulfide, or reverse doctor treating
may be used but may not be completely effective. Certain additives may be helpful
in masking the sulfur corrosivity test. They should be used with caution. The best
treatment method is to avoid elemental sulfur formation by preventing H
2
S
oxidation.

Hydrogen Sulfide

Hydrogen sulfide results from the decomposition of sulfur compounds during the
cracking reaction and concentrates in the fuel gas and LPG products. It has an
obnoxious odor at low concentration, and is very poisonous. It paralyzes the
involuntary breathing function, leading to asphyxiation, unconsciousness and death.

Hydrogen sulfide in fuel gas will burn in a heater to form SO
2
. This acid gas may
cause corrosion and environmental problems due to its acidity when it dissolves in
water. In the presence of oxygen, H
2
S may oxidize in a product stream to form
elemental sulfur. H
2
S has a deleterious effect on lead susceptibility of FCC
gasoline. It promotes peroxide formation and prevents oxidation inhibitors from
functioning, thus reducing gasoline stability in storage. It is undesirable in HF acid
alkylation feedstocks as one pound of sulfur consumes about five pounds of
process acid, and H
2
S, along with some mercaptans, is sufficiently volatile to stay
with the C
3
and C
4
streams.

157048
Treating
Page 7




Dilute caustic soda or soda ash will remove H
2
S as well as CO
2
. The aqueous
caustic soda solution must be sufficiently dilute to prevent formation of sodium
sulfide crystals as the NaOH is converted to Na
2
S, and in the case of a dry feed, as
the solution dehydrates. Normal caustic concentrations are in the range of
10-15 Be to avoid Na
2
S crystallization.

The other principal treating method for the removal of H
2
S is regenerative
monoethanolamine (MEA) or diethanolamine (DEA) scrubbing. The stream to be
treated is contacted countercurrently with the amine to remove H
2
S, CO
2
, and COS.
The amine is then steam stripped to regenerate it. Although this treatment can
reduce H
2
S concentrations below 6 wt. ppm, it is equilibrium limited and therefore it
is normal to provide a dilute batch caustic scrubber following the amine scrubber as
a final cleanup and guard in case of an amine unit upset, e.g., when treating LPG.
Aside from pollution abatement benefits when operated in tandem with a sulfur
recovery process, amine treating usually becomes economically attractive strictly on
a chemical consumption basis when H
2
S levels exceed roughly 1000 ppm.

Mercaptans (RSH)

Mercaptans are found in all cracked products streams. Some of these may be
naturally occurring in the feed, but most mercaptans are formed during the cracking
reactions. Decomposition of other sulfur compounds or recombination reactions
between H
2
S and olefins are the major sources. There are two distinct types: alkyl,
open chain mercaptans, and aryl, aromatic mercaptans in which the SH group is
linked to a benzene ring structure. The aryl mercaptans are also known as
thiophenols and thiocresols. They tend to predominate over alkyl mercaptans in
FCC product streams boiling over 300F (150C).

The lower molecular weight mercaptans have a very obnoxious odor, particularly
noticeable due to their low vapor pressure. All mercaptans, like most sulfur
compounds, have a deleterious effect on lead susceptibility of motor gasolines.
Thiophenols promote gum and sludge formation reactions and cause storage
problems. Mercaptans can react with copper, particularly if basic nitrogen is
present, to form oil soluble cuprow compounds which can be oxidized to insoluble
157048
Treating
Page 8




copper oxide. The soluble copper can also then react with some oxygenated
compounds to form gelatinous copper phenolates.

Low molecular weight mercaptans may be extracted to some degree with caustic or
be sweetened, in a process which converts the mercaptans to less odiferous
disulfides. Mercaptans may be extracted from LPG to very low values, 0.5 wt. ppm
in some cases. Extraction of 50-95% of the mercaptans from gasoline is possible,
depending on boiling range. However, as mercaptans in FCC gasoline generally
represent only 10 to 35% of the total sulfur present, partial gasoline desulfurization
by extraction is usually not economical. The majority of FCC gasolines are currently
only sweetened to essentially eliminate mercaptans and produce a doctor negative,
or sweet, gasoline. Cycle oil is sometimes sweetened, but if low sulfur is desired,
the cycle oil must be hydrotreated.

Non regenerable caustic scrubbing to extract mercaptans is an old and expensive
process which may create or compound waste disposal problems. In many cases it
is not very effective. The most successful treating process for either extraction or
sweetening is the UOP Merox process. This process uses small amounts of caustic
to remove or transform mercaptans. A catalyst and oxygen supplied from
atmospheric air are used to regenerate the caustic. Further information on the
Merox process may be obtained from UOP.

Total gasoline sulfur may also be reduced by undercutting or reducing the endpoint
of the FCC gasoline. The sulfur concentration in the FCC gasoline increases rapidly
as the boiling range exceeds ~400 (200C). By reducing the endpoint of the
gasoline so that the heaviest 20% is included in the light cycle oil product the
gasoline sulfur content can be reduce by as much as 60%. Unfortunately, there are
significant product value losses associated with this for most refiners.

157048
Treating
Page 9




Carbonyl Sulfide (COS)

Carbonyl sulfide is produced during the cracking reaction. It boils slightly below
propane at -58F (-50C). Upon post fractionation the COS concentrates in LPG,
propane-propylene, and finally propylene as the distilled cuts are narrowed in
boiling range. COS concentrations in the LPG stream may range from 5 to 100
ppm; the amount usually rises with increased feed sulfur, but is very unpredictable.
COS, like some other sulfur compounds, should be considered toxic.

The principle concern with COS, aside from situations where product total sulfur
must be very low or zero, is its tendency to hydrolyze, forming corrosive H
2
S and
CO
2
. This hydrolysis proceeds slowly but is catalyzed by activated alumina or
molecular sieve desiccants. COS also partially reacts with MEA in acid gas
scrabbling systems to form high boiling by-products which are not steam
regenerable. COS is also a strong poison for polypropylene producers using FCC
propylene as a feed. Some polymerization catalysts are sensitive to as little as 5
ppb COS.

Carbonyl sulfide can be partially removed from the light product streams by
scrubbing with an aqueous DEA solution. Diethanolamine, unlike monoethanol-
amine, does not chemically react with COS and therefore is steam regenerable.
Aqueous DEA scrubbing can usually reduce COS levels to less than 10 ppm. A
reduction of COS to levels of one ppm or less can be effected with a batch scrubber
using MEA, sodium hydroxide, and water to remove COS by chemical reaction.
This system is not regenerable. For units producing polymer grade propylene
additional adsorbents or reactive treaters will commonly be used to remove COS
down to undetectable levels.

Copper

Copper is a powerful oxidation catalyst. It is usually picked up from contact with
copper or copper alloy surfaces, especially when ammonia or other basic nitrogen
and mercaptans are present. Copper catalyzes gum formation by promoting olefin
oxidation reactions faster than inhibitor additives can terminate these chain
157048
Treating
Page 10




reactions. Cracked distillates containing copper will form gum and gelatinous
precipitates in storage. Copper also contributes to distillate color stability problems
and catalyses oxidation of alkyl lead additives, leading to haze in some finished
gasolines.

Gross copper contamination can be removed by chemical treatment, such as dilute
acid scrubbing or clay percolation. If the copper does not exceed 1 mg/liter, it can
be rendered harmless with a copper deactivator. Dosage is roughly 10 wt. ppm
active agent for each mg/liter. The deactivator, a chelating agent, complexes with
the copper so that it cannot take part in any further reactions.

Nitrogen Compounds

There are usually two types of nitrogen found in gasoline and cycle oil. One type
would be neutral compounds such as pyrrole, and the other a basic compound such
as pyridine or quinoline. Ammonia is found in the reactor overhead vapors, but if
normal main column overhead water injection is maintained, the ammonia is
removed at this point.

Neutral nitrogen compounds are associated with sediment formation in fuel oils.
Basic compounds are typically more harmful. Pyridine has a characteristic odor
which is very unpleasant when combined with mercaptans. Both basic and neutral
nitrogen compounds are color precursors which affect distillate color stability. Their
effect on lead susceptibility and octane number varies between good and bad
depending on the particular compound in question. Both types of nitrogen
compounds may also promote oil soluble gum formation, but this has not been
firmly established at this time.

Neutral nitrogen compounds may be removed with either strong acid or strong
caustic-methanol solutions. Basic nitrogen compounds could be removed with dilute
acid in acid resistant equipment. If acid strength is too high, there may be problems
with olefin addition, sulfonation, and other acid catalyzed reactions. Hydrotreating
will decompose both types of nitrogen compounds to ammonia. This might be
157048
Treating
Page 11




suitable for cycle oils, but not for gasoline, because aromatics might be saturated,
with severe loss in octane number.

Oxygen

Oxygen compounds such as phenols and cresols are formed during the cracking
reaction from oxygenated compounds in the feed and from oxygen entrained with
the catalyst. They are generally not considered harmful and may be considered
beneficial as some act as oxidation inhibitors. Some of the phenols are suspected
of being color precursors. Caustic treating can be used to remove most of the
oxygen containing compounds, including most organic acids, when deemed
necessary.

Diolefins

Diolefins, especially conjugated diolefins, are reactive hydrocarbons which quickly
enter into gum and sediment forming reactions. These compounds are normally
found in significant concentrations only in thermally cracked products. However,
when FCC conditions allow cracking to occur in the absence of catalyst, diolefins
will be formed in amounts roughly proportional to the degree of thermal cracking
present.

A good example of this type of compound is butadiene. It stays in the C
4
fraction as
it is concentrated through fractionation. If this stream is then used as alkylation
feed, the butadiene will polymerize to form tar. Higher order diolefins lead easily to
gum formation in the gasoline and cycle oil streams.

Diolefins can be removed without significant olefins removal by carefully controlled
mild hydrotreating or vapor phase clay treatment. Proper dosage of oxidation will
nullify their effects. Another solution would be to minimize formation of diolefins by
decreasing thermal cracking. This could be done by reducing the reactor
temperature, reducing the regenerated catalyst temperature or by mechanical
changes minimizes post riser residence time.
157048
Treating
Page 12




SUMMARY FCC PRODUCT TREATMENT METHODS


Contaminant Concentration Treatment

Copper High Dilute mineral acid
Clay percolation

Low (<1 mg/l) Metal deactivator addition

Elemental sulfur Redistribution
Hydrotreating
Reverse Doctor
Prevent formation by
minimizing free oxygen

Hydrogen sulfide, H
2
S High (>1000 ppm) MEA or DEA scrubbing

Low Caustic soda, MEA or DEA
scrubbing

Mercaptans, R-SH Any Merox (Regenerative caustic)
Extractive for LPG or
Sweetening for Gasoline

Total Gasoline Sulfur Undercutting of FCC gasoline

Carbonyl sulfide, COS DEA-water scrubbing
Caustic-MEA-water scrubbing
(Batch operation only)
Silica-Alumina Adsorbents

PbO Treaters

Basic nitrogen compound Water Wash (NH
3
)

Weak mineral acid

Neutral nitrogen compound Strong acid
Strong caustic-methanol
solution
157048
Treating
Page 13




Contaminant Concentration Treatment

Oxygen compounds, phenols
or acids Water Wash
Caustic soda

Diolefins Mild hydrotreating
Vapor phase clay treating
Change FCC operations to
minimize formation

NOTE: Hydrotreating may be used to eliminate many of these contaminants. In
practice, however, it is used for cycle oil treating in some cases, rarely for LPG or
gasoline. Treating of the FCC feed is also effective in minimizing many of these.
Regenerative caustic treating, such as the Merox process, is a very common
treating method. Batch scrubbing using caustic, or regenerative MEA-DEA
scrubbing are also used. This may be in conjunction with a Merox unit or without it,
depending on the contaminant and on economic considerations.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 1





ANALYTICAL METHODS


Introduction

Good analyses of the feed and product streams are essential for control and
evaluation of a Fluid Catalytic Cracker. It is extremely difficult to optimize a unit if
potential problems are not defined through the laboratory and process variables.

The following sections give a typical FCC sampling schedule and a brief outline of
some of the more common analytical methods.

There are a large number of laboratory tests which may be used. FCC products
vary widely, from clarified oil to fuel gas. This in turn leads to markedly different
analytical methods, such as six different types of distillations. The product being
tested and the type of result desired will determine which test is used.

Distillation

There are six distillation methods listed in this book. Two of them, UOP 1 and
ASTM D 86, cover the lighter fractions, from gasoline to gas oils. The UOP 1
method goes further; it continues past the typical decomposition point of 700F
(371C) into a thermal cracking of the sample with a dry residue (coke) remaining.
Two other methods, UOP 77 and 79, are fractionations in addition to distillations.
Either one can be used to separate certain fractions of a product for further
analysis. UOP 77 is more commonly used. UOP 79 is a high precision distillation
method which is used to determine true boiling points of petroleum fractions. The
test requires special equipment and the information obtained from this test is not
frequently needed. The two vacuum distillation methods, UOP 76 and ASTM D
1160, are used for heavy material. Reduced pressures, down to 1 mm Hg absolute
for D 1160 and 0.3 mm Hg absolute for UOP 76, permit distillation when the
temperature used for atmospheric techniques would lead to thermal cracking.
Sulfur
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 2






The six analytical methods for sulfur analysis can be initially divided into two groups,
gases and liquids. The Tutwiler method, UOP 9, gives a quantitative determination
of H
2
S in a gas stream. A second method, UOP 212, measures H
2
S, mercaptans,
and COS in light gases and LPG. The Tutwiler method does not give as detailed a
test as does UOP 212, but takes less time. There are four methods given for hydro-
carbon liquid analysis. The Doctor Test, UOP 41, gives a qualitative determination
of mercaptans and H
2
S. UOP 163 will give a breakdown of mercaptan and H
2
S in
liquid streams. For total sulfur of lighter oils, the Lamp method, ASTM D 1266, is
used. For oils boiling above 350F (177C), ASTM D 1552 may be used to
determine total sulfur.

Octane

The Motor octane method, ASTM D 2700, is more severe, i.e., gives a lower rating
than does the Research method, ASTM D 2699. The correlation between the two is
not exact, so it is generally not easy to predict one octane from another. For similar
feedstocks and plant operation, the refiner may be able to make some general
predictions from past data.

Gas Chromatography

To determine the composition of light hydrocarbon gases and LPG streams
containing small amounts of C
3
and C
6
material, either UOP 539 or UOP 709 may
be used. Neither of these will separate argon from oxygen, or butene-1 from
isobutylene. UOP 709 is easier to run than UOP 539 and requires less elaborate
equipment, but UOP 709 does not differentiate between ethane, ethylene and
carbon dioxide. For exact determination of fuel gas from an FCC, UOP 539 would
be the better method. UOP 725 can be used to determine concentration of C5 and
lighter material in FCC gasoline.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 3





Samples for UOP Analysis

Most refineries have laboratories for common analyses. Samples may be sent to
UOP if the refiner does not have the equipment, manpower, or wishes to check the
accuracy at his own lab. Samples which are sent to UOP for analysis sometimes go
astray, either in shipping or within UOP. In order to minimize delays caused by lost,
misplaced or unidentified samples, please observe the following rules.

1. Identify each sample with refiner, location, unit, sample, date and technical
contact person at UOP responsible for the results. Make certain the sample
tag is well secured to the sample and remains legible, even if it is wet with
water or hydrocarbon.

2. It has been found that gasoline or naphtha sample collection in clear bottles,
which are left exposed to sunlight (or ultraviolet lighting) either direct or
indirect, and whether or not the sample has been treated with oxidation
inhibitors, will result in a severe loss of octane rating within a very short time.
Every effort must therefore be made to see that only the brown or amber
sample bottles are used for daily samples and more important that all samples
shipped to UOP for analysis are taken in amber bottles, are kept in a cool dark
place until packaged for shipment, and are shipped as soon as possible after
sampling.

3. When shipping samples, mail or phone shipping information (air waybill, flight
number, bill of lading, etc.) to UOP.

4. Send a copy of the request for analysis with the samples; send the original to:

UOP
Technical Service Department
FCC Group
25 E. Algonquin Road
Des Plaines, IL 60017 USA
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 4





5. Send samples to:
UOP LLC
Shipping and Receiving
50 E. Algonquin Road
Des Plaines, IL 60017 USA

6. For larger Rush samples being sent to UOP by air, indicate the shipping
instructions as:
SHIP TO: UOP LLC
Chicago, Illinois 60017 USA
HOLD AT: O Hare Airport
CALL: (847) 391-3043 ON ARRIVAL

7. All samples shipped from outside the United States require additional
paperwork to comply with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agencys Toxic
Substances Control Act (TSCA). The following are some of the guidelines for
importing samples into the United States. Always contact your customer
service or technical service representative for assistance before
shipping any samples to ensure that all regulations are followed.

The use of a freight forwarder (e.g. Burlington Air Express or Emery
Worldwide) is preferred for all imported samples.
Overnight couriers (e.g. DHL, Federal Express or UPS) may be used
only if the written TSCA certification authorized, signed and dated by
UOP is obtained prior to shipment and physically included with the
documentation in the shipped package.
All samples should be routed through Chicagos Ohare International
Airport
All imports must have the following documentation:
Bill of Lading (also known as a Master Airwaybill) which includes
vessel/flight information. The Bill of Lading must state: "Customs clearance
by Circle International". The Bill of Lading description field must begin with
the words TSCA Certified Chemical Sample.
Pro forma invoice (Attachment 1a and 1b: a blank form and example).
TSCA Certification (Attachment 2).
Analytical Requisition Form (Attachment 3)
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if the sample material is regulated as
hazardous by IATA, IMO or DOT.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 5





The documentation on the above listed items must contain the
following information:
On the Proforma Invoice:
Shippers name, address, contact name, phone number and fax number.
Importers name, address, contact name, phone number and fax number (this
must include the UOP contact person within the U.S.). UOP has provided this
information except for Contact Person
Consignee/Delivery name, address, contact name, phone number and fax
number (this must include the actual delivery location). UOP has provided this
information.
Approximate market value (for Customs purposes), for each item, in U.S.
Dollars.
Sample descriptions in English.
Packing details the number and types of containers.
Net weights and Gross weights for each item, in kilograms.
Country of origin. This is the country where the sample was taken.
On the TSCA Certification Form:
Sample description in English, UOP has provided this information.
Date the sample is to be shipped, in English.
On the International Analytical Requisition Form:
Shippers name, address, contact name, phone number and fax number.
Sample shipping information: Carrier and flight information, phone number of
the carrier, airway bill no.
Fill in all pertinent sample and analytical request information as required.

All samples must be prepared according to the hazardous materials shipping
regulations of the International Air Transportation Association (IATA), if
shipped by air, or International Maritime Organization (IMO) if shipped by
sea.
Prior to shipping, the UOP Tech Service Sample Coordinator must be
notified of all imports before their arrival in the United States. Please fax a
copy of the Pro Forma Invoice, the Bill of Lading, TSCA Certificate, and
the Analytical Requisition Form to the UOP Technical Service Sample
Coordinator at 847-391-2253. UOP will then ensure proper Customs and
TSCA clearance.

Failure to send samples with the proper documentation and information will result in
a delay of Customs clearance or refusal of the sample.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 6





Attachment 1a
Proforma Invoice
International Shipper/Exporter (Name & Address)
Invoice No:
Invoice Date:

Terms: Pro-Forma Invoice
Reference No:


DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
* * * NO CHARGE INVOICE * * *

QUANTITY:



DESCRIPTION OF SAMPLE(S):



PACKED IN BOX(ES)

GROSS WEIGHT: KGS.

COUNTRY OF ORIGIN (where sample was taken) __________________________

MARKS: AS ADDRESSED

IMPORTER OF RECORD CONSIGNEE / DELIVERY ADDRESS:
UOP LLC UOP LLC
25 EAST ALGONQUIN RD. SAMPLE RECEIVING
DES PLAINES, IL 60017 50 EAST ALGONQUIN RD.
DES PLAINES, ILLINOIS 60017-5016
ATTN: ATTN: UOP Tech Service Sample Coordinator
UOP Contact Name

Refinery Representative Signature Refinery Representative Name: please print

I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS INVOICE IS TRUE AND CORRECT.
US DOLLARS

$


MARKET
VALUE --
DECLARED
FOR CUSTOMS
CLEARANCE
PURPOSES
ONLY
ORIGINAL INVOICE





Contact Name:
Contact Phone No. Fax No.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 7





Attachment 1b
Example
Proforma Invoice
International Shipper/Exporter (Name & Address)
Invoice No:
Invoice Date:

Terms: Pro-Forma Invoice
Reference No:


DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
* * NO CHARGE INVOICE * * *
QUANTITY: Three 1 liter catalyst samples


DESCRIPTION OF SAMPLE(S): R-134 CCR Platforming Catalyst

Two regenerated samples and one spent sample

PACKED IN 1 BOX(ES)

GROSS WEIGHT: 3.5 KGS.

COUNTRY OF ORIGIN (where sample was taken) Refining Country
MARKS: AS ADDRESSED

IMPORTER OF RECORD CONSIGNEE / DELIVERY ADDRESS:
UOP LLC UOP LLC
25 EAST ALGONQUIN RD. SAMPLE RECEIVING
DES PLAINES, IL 60017 50 EAST ALGONQUIN RD.
DES PLAINES, ILLINOIS 60017-5016
ATTN: Robert S. UOP ATTN: UOP Tech Service Sample Coordinator
UOP Contact Name
J oe R. Engineer J oseph R. Engineer
Refinery Representative Signature Refinery Representative Name: please print

I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS INVOICE IS TRUE AND CORRECT.
US DOLLARS

$


MARKET
VALUE --
DECLARED
FOR CUSTOMS
CLEARANCE
PURPOSES
ONLY
ORIGINAL INVOICE

Mountain View Refining
1000 Mountain View Dr.
Boulder City
Refining Country
Contact Name: J oe R. Engineer
Contact Phone No. (12) 3 456 -7890 Fax No. (12) 3-098-7654
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 8





Attachment 2a

TSCA Certification Form


To: Area Director of Customs

Date:

Description of Sample:


Only one of the following should be selected:

( X ) TSCA Positive Certification

I certify that all chemical substances in this shipment comply with all
applicable rules or orders under TSCA and that I am not offering a
chemical substance for entry in violation of TSCA or any applicable
rule or order under TSCA.

OR

( ) TSCA Negative Certification

I certify that all chemicals in this shipment are not subject to TSCA



Signature (Authorized UOP LLC employee)


Printed Name (Authorized UOP LLC employee)
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 9





Attachment 2b

TSCA Certification Form

Example Form

To: Area Director of Customs

Date: August 23, 1999

Description of Sample: R-134 CCR Platforming Catalyst: Spent

Only one of the following should be selected:

( X ) TSCA Positive Certification

I certify that all chemical substances in this shipment comply with all
applicable rules or orders under TSCA and that I am not offering a
chemical substance for entry in violation of TSCA or any applicable
rule or order under TSCA.

OR

( ) TSCA Negative Certification

I certify that all chemicals in this shipment are not subject to TSCA



Signature (Authorized UOP LLC employee)


Angelo P. Furfaro
Printed Name (Authorized UOP LLC employee)
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 10





Attachment 3

International Analytical Requisition Form - UOP Technical Service

TO: UOP Technical Service Sample Coordinator Phone 847-391-2620 FAX: 847-
391-2253

UOP Technical Service Contact Phone 847-391- Fax 847-
391-2253

Customer: Refinery
Address
Contact Name Phone Fax

Liquid & Gas Sample(s)
Check if Rush
MSDS is or
Description Analysis Required: Included Standard






Catalyst & Adsorbent Sample(s):

Process or unit: Sample Location:
Check if Rush
MSDS is or
Catalyst Type Regenerated or Coked Analysis Required Included
Standard





Billing Information:
Address:



Attention:

Sample Shipping Information:
Shipped Via:
Phone Number of Carrier:
Airwaybill No.:
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 11





Minimum Sample Size


Analysis Minimum
(cm
3
)

Heavy Oil (Clarified Oil, Slurry, Raw Oil, Heavy and Light Cycle Oil)

API 100
Distillation 250
Viscosity 150
Vacuum Distillation 300
Conradson Carbon 150
Ash (sample to be taken and shipped in a wide mouth sample container) 300
Sediment and Water 150
Sulfur 20
Nitrogen 15
Metals 100
Pour Point 200
Color 50

Gasoline, LPG

API 100
Distillation 210
Hydrocarbon Types by GC 150
C
5
- by GLC 50
RVP 1000
Mercaptan Sulfur 100
Total Sulfur 100

Octane Research 1000
Motor for each
Leaded or Clear type

Catalyst 1000




NOTE: Individual samples can be taken from one large sample of each product,
usually about 1-2 gallons (3.5-7.0 liters).

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 12





TYPICAL TEST SCHEDULE


STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup
Raw Oil Charge
Gravity D-1298 or D-5002 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Viscosity D-445 1/W 3/W
Vacuum Distillation D-1160 1/D 1/D
Conradson
Carbon Residue D-189 or D4530 1/D 1/D
BS & W D-4007 1/W 1/W
Sulfur UOP 864 or D-1552 or D-2622 1/D 1/D
Total Nitrogen UOP 384 or D-4629 1/W 1/W
Metals Content by Wet Ash UOP 389 or D-5708 1/W 1/D
(May be sent to Outside Lab)
Pour Point D-97 1/W 1/W
Basic Nitrogen UOP 269 Occas Occas
Heptane Insolubles UOP 614 Occas Occas
UOP K UOP 375 1/D 1/D


Circulating Main Column Bottoms
Gravity D-1298 or D-5002 or D-4052 Occas 1/D
BS & W D-4007 Occas Control
Ash D-482 Occas 1/D


Main Column Bottoms Clarified Oil Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-5002 or D-4052 3/D 3/D
Viscosity D-445 1/W 1/W
Vacuum Distillation D-1160 1/D 1/D
BS & W D-4007 1/D Control
Sulfur UOP 864 or D-1552 1/W 1/D
Ash D-482 1/W 1/D

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 13





STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup
Heavy Cycle Oil Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-5002 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
Pour Point D-97 1/D 1/D
Flash Point D-93 1/D 1/D
Viscosity D-445 1/D 1/W
Sulfur UOP 864 1/D 1/D
Cetane Index D-976 1/D 1/D

Light Cycle Oil Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
Pour Point D-97 1/D 1/D
Flash Point D-93 1/D 1/D
Viscosity D-445 1/D 1/W
Sulfur UOP 864 1/D 1/D
Cetane Index D-976 1/D 1/D


Stripped Heavy Naphtha Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
H
2
S and RSH UOP 163 1/W 1/W
Sulfur UOP 864 1/D 1/D
Composition (PONA) UOP 777 3/W 1/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 1/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 1/D
RVP D-323 1/D 1/D


Blended Fuel Oil Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
Viscosity D-445 1/W 1/W
Sulfur UOP 864 or D-1552 1/D 1/D
Pour Point D-97 1/D 1/D
Flash Point D-93 1/D 1/D


Main Column Receiver Gas
H
2
S UOP 212 Occas 1/D
Composition UOP 539 Occas 1/D
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 14





STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup

Main Column Receiver Liquid
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 Occas Occas
Distillation D-86 Occas Occas
GC (C
4
and lighter) UOP 725 Occas Occas
H
2
S and RSH UOP 163 Occas Occas


Regenerator Flue Gas
Composition (Orsat or GC) UOP 172 or UOP 539 1/D 3/D
SO
x
EPA #6 Occas Occas
NO
x
EPA #7 Occas Occas
Particulate EPA #5 Occas Occas

Spent Catalyst
Percent Carbon UOP 703 1/W

Regenerated Catalyst
Particle Size Distribution* UOP 856 1/W 2/W
Surface Area* UOP 874 1/W 2/W
Pore Volume* UOP 874 1/W 2/W
Activity* D-3907 1/W 2/W
Metals by ICP* UOP 546 1/W 2/W
Percent Carbon* UOP 703 1/D Control

*Normally performed by catalyst vendors laboratory.


Flue Gas to Electrostatic Precipitator
Isokinetic Particle Determin. EPA #5 Occas Occas


Flue Gas from Electrostatic Precipitator
Isokinetic Particle Determin. EPA #5 Occas Occas


157048
Analytical Methods
Page 15





STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup
Main Column Receiver Water
Iron, Copper UOP 314 Occas Occas
Phenols UOP 262 Occas Occas
Cyanides UOP 682 1/M Occas
Sulfides UOP 683 1/M Occas
Ammonia UOP 740 Occas Occas
Total Oils D-3921 Occas Occas
pH D-1293 1/D 3/D
Total Dissolved Solids D-1126 1/W Occas
Silica D-859 1/M Occas


BFW and Continuous Blowdown
Sodium D-4192 1/W 1/W
Total Alkalinity D-1067 1/W 1/W
M Alkalinity D-1067 1/W 1/W
P Alkalinity D-1067 1/W 1/W
Chloride (as Cl-) D-512 1/W 1/W
Silica (as SiO
2
) D-859 1/W 1/W
Total Dissolved Solids STD Method 2540C 1/W 1/W
Total Suspended Solids STD Method 2540D 1/W 1/W
pH D-1293 1/W 1/W
Specific Conductance D-1125 1/W 1/W
Phosphates D-4327 1/W 1/W
Oil D-3921 1/W 1/W
Hydrazine D-1385 1/W 1/W


Saturated Steam from Catalyst Cooler, Flue Gas Cooler, and Main Column
Bottoms Steam Generator Steam Drums
Impurities D-2186-C Occas Occas
Silica D-859 Occas Occas
Sodium D-1428 Occas Occas

Lean Gas Product
H2S UOP 212 1/D 3/D
Composition UOP 539 1/D 3/D

Debutanizer Net Overhead Liquid
H2S & Mercaptan Sulfur UOP 163 1/D 3/D
Composition UOP 539 1/D 3/D
Total Sulfur UOP 923 1/D 3/D
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 16





STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup

Debutanizer Bottoms Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
H2S & Mercaptan Sulfur UOP 163 1/D 3/D
RVP D-323 1/D 3/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 3/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 3/D
C4 and lighter UOP 725 1/D 3/D
Sulfur UOP 864 or UOP 836 1/D 3/D

Naphtha Splitter Bottoms
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 3/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 3/D
Sulfur UOP 864 or UOP 836 1/D 3/D

Naphtha Splitter Side Cut Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 3/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 3/D
Sulfur UOP 864 or UOP 836 1/D 3/D

Naphtha Splitter Overhead Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
RVP D-323 1/D 3/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 3/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 3/D
C4 and lighter UOP 725 1/D 3/D
Sulfur UOP 864 or UOP 836 1/D 3/D

Depentanizer Overhead Product
H2S & Mercaptan Sulfur UOP 163 1/D 3/D
Composition UOP 539 1/D 3/D
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 17





STREAM AND TEST TEST NUMBER FREQUENCY
Normal Startup

Depentanizer Bottoms Product
Gravity D-1298 or D-4052 1/D 3/D
Distillation D-86 1/D 3/D
H2S & Mercaptan Sulfur UOP 163 1/D 3/D
RVP D-323 1/D 3/D
Research Octane D-2699 1/D 3/D
Motor Octane D-2700 1/D 3/D
C4 and lighter UOP 725 1/D 3/D
Sulfur UOP 864 or UOP 836 1/D 3/D

High Pressure Receiver Water
Iron, Copper UOP 314 Occas Occas
Phenols UOP 262 Occas Occas
Cyanides UOP 682 1/M Occas
Sulfides UOP 683 1/M Occas
Ammonia UOP 740 Occas Occas
Total Oils D-3921 Occas Occas
pH D-1293 1/D 3/D




LABORATORY TEST SCHEDULE FREQUENCY NOMENCLATURE

1/D One determination per day
3/D Three determinations per day
1/W One determination per week
3/W Three determinations per week
2/M Two determinations per month
N During normal operation
S During startup
Occas Determination is done only occasionally
Control Determination is done as frequently as necessary for plant control during
startup
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 18





OUTLINE OF SELECTED ANALYTICAL METHODS
SUBJECT INDEX

Test Description Number

Activity Test for Catalyst D-3907
API Gravity D 1298
Apparent Bulk Density of Catalyst UOP 254
Ammonia in Refinery Water UOP 740
Ash from Petroleum Products D 482
Boilaway (weathering Test) UOP 155
Carbon on Catalyst UOP 703
Carbonyl Sulfide (COS) in Gases UOP 212
Catalyst Loading in Heavy Oil UOP 233
Color ASTM D 1500
Saybolt D 156
Conradson Carbon Residue D 189
Copper in Water UOP 314
Cyanide in Refinery Water UOP 682
Distillation of Heavy Oil UOP 1
of Petroleum D 86
of Petroleum UOP 77
of Petroleum UOP 79
(Fractionation)
Vacuum UOP 76
Vacuum D 1160
Doctor Test UOP 41
Flash Point, Closed Cup D 93
Flash Point, Open Cup D 92
Fractionation of Petroleum UOP 79
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 19





Test Description Number

Flue Gas Analysis, (GC) UOP 539
(Orsat) UOP 172
Particulates, SOx, NOx EPA #5,6,7
Gas Analysis GC UOP 539
GC UOP 709
- Pentenes and lighter in olefinic gasoline UOP 725
Gravity API D 1298
Gum Copper Dish UOP 11
Existent (Steam J et) UOP 277
Hydrogen Sulfide (H
2
S)
in Gas Tutwiler UOP 9
with Mercaptans UOP 212
Induction Period of Gasoline UOP 6
Iron in Water UOP 314
Isokinetic Particle Determination in Flue Gas D 3685
Kinematic Viscosity D 445
Loss of Ignition of Catalyst UOP 275
Mercaptan Sulfur Gases UOP 212
Liquid Hydrocarbons UOP 163
Metals Trace, in Crackling Catalysts UOP 546
Trace, in Oils UOP 389
Trace, in Oils UOP 391
Nitrogen in Heavy Distillate UOP 384
Octane Motor D 2700
Research D 2699
Particle Size Distribution of Catalyst UOP 422
pH, Iron and Copper in Refinery Water UOP 314
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 20





Test Description Number

Phenols in Petroleum Products UOP 262
Pore Volume and Pore Diameter of Catalyst UOP 425
Pour Point of Petroleum Oils D 97
Reid Vapor Pressure D 323
Sampling of Petroleum UOP 516 or D 270
Sediment and Water in Oil D 4007
Sintering Index of Catalyst UOP 424
Sulfides in Refinery Waters UOP 683
Sulfur in Heavy Oils D 1552
Sulfur Doctor Test (H
2
S and Mercaptans) UOP 41
H
2
S in Gases (Tutwiler) UOP 9
Mercaptan and H
2
S in Light Distillates UOP 163
H
2
S, Mercaptans, and COS in Hydrocarbon Gases UOP 212
in Heavy Distillates D 1552
Total, in Light Distillates D 1266
Total Sulfur Lamp D 1266
Quartz Tube D 1552
Surface area, Pore Volume, and Pore Diameter of Catalyst UOP 425
UOP Characterization Factor K UOP 375
Vacuum Distillation D-1160
Viscosity Kinematic D 445
Water and Sediment in Oil D 4007
Weathering Test (Boilaway) UOP 155

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 21





OUTLINE OF SELECTED
ANALYTICAL TEST METHODS NUMERICAL INDEX

Test Number Description

UOP 1 Distillation Range of Heavy Oils
UOP 6 Induction Period of Gasoline
UOP 9 H
2
S in Gases (Tutwiler)
UOP 11 Gum, Copper Dish
UOP 41 Doctor Test (H
2
S and Mercaptans)
UOP 76 Vacuum Distillation
UOP 77 Distillation of Petroleum
UOP 79 Distillation of Petroleum
D 86 Distillation of Petroleum
D 92 Flash Point, Open Cup
D 93 Flash Point, Closed Cup
D 97 Pour Point of Petroleum Oil
UOP 155 Weathering Test (Boilaway)
D 156 Saybolt Color
UOP 163 Mercaptans and H
2
S in Liquid Hydrocarbons
UOP 172 Flue Gas Analysis (Orsat)
D 189 Conradson Carbon Residue
UOP 212 H
2
S, Mercaptans and COS in Hydrocarbon Gases
UOP 233 Catalyst Loading Test
UOP 251 Activity Test for Catalyst
UOP 254 Apparent Bulk Density of Catalyst
UOP 262 Phenols in Petroleum Products
D 270 Sampling Petroleum Products
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 22





Test Number Description

UOP 275 Loss of Ignition of Catalyst
UOP 277 Existent Gum (Steam J et)
D 287 API Gravity
UOP 314 pH, Iron, and Copper in Refinery Water
D 323 Reid Vapor Pressure
UOP 375 UOP Characterization Factor
UOP 384 Nitrogen in Heavy Distillate
UOP 389 Trace Metals in Oils
UOP 391 Trace Metals in Oils
UOP 422 Particle Size Distribution in Catalyst
UOP 424 Sintering Index of Equilibrium Catalyst
UOP 425 Surface Area, Pore Volume, and Pore Diameter of Catalyst
D 445 Kinematic Viscosity of Oils
D 482 Ash from Petroleum Products
UOP 516 Sampling of Gasoline, Distillates and C
3
-C
4
Fractions
UOP 539 Gas Analysis (GC)
UOP 546 Metals in Cracking Catalyst
UOP 682 Cyanide in Refinery Water
UOP 683 Sulfide in Refinery Water
UOP 703 Carbon on Catalyst
UOP 709 Gas Analysis (GC)
UOP 725 Pentenes and lighter in olefinic gasoline
UOP 740 Ammonia in Water
D 1160 Vacuum Distillation
D 1266 Total Sulfur in Petroleum Products (Lamp)
D 1500 ASTM Color (formerly ASTM Union)
D 1552 Sulfur in Heavy Oils
D 2699 Octane Rating, Research
D 2700 Octane Rating, Motor
D 3685 Isokinetic Particle Determination in Flue Gases
D 4007 Water and Sediment in Oil
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 23





DISTILLATION RANGE OF HEAVY PETROLEUM OILS
UOP METHOD 1


Scope

This method is for determining the distillation range of heavy petroleum oils. It is
applicable to petroleum products whose boiling range extends above that of
kerosene; e.g., crude oils, gas oils and fuel oils. The method differs from ASTM
Method D 86 in that a 200 ml flask is used and the distillation is continued past the
thermal decomposition point to a dry or coke residue. The test is particularly useful
in estimating gasoline, kerosene and/or distillate contents and the coking
characteristics of these oils.

Outline of Method

A 100-ml sample is distilled under prescribed conditions. Systematic observations
of thermometer readings and volumes of condensate are made, and the weight of
coke or residue is determined. The results of the test are calculated and reported
from these data. No corrections are applied to the data.

Precautions

Oils containing more than traces of water are very difficult to distill. However, if the
heat is applied to the flask correctly, water can be distilled from the oil without
bumping. When water is present, heat the flask evenly over its top and bottom
surfaces; do not concentrate heat on the bottom of the flask. Keep the top of the
flask hot enough to prevent water vapor from condensing there and allow time for
the temperature to drop to ambient before continuing the distillation. Do not include
water in the percentages reported for the temperatures named. The IBP obtained in
this manner on samples containing water may, or may not, be a true IBP owing to
the possibility of superheating the vapors when the flame is applied to the top
surface of the flask. Note this on the distillation sheet.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 24





Decomposition or cracking usually occurs when oils containing material boiling
above 625F (329C) are distilled at atmospheric pressure. When this decomposi-
tion takes place it will be impossible to maintain a uniform distillation rate without
causing a gradual drop in temperature. Therefore, disregard the 4-5 ml per minute
rate from the temperature at which cracking begins and continue the distillation at
such a rate that there is a steady rise in temperature.

Precision

See ASTM Method 86 for precision statement.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 25





INDUCTION PERIOD OF GASOLINES BY THE UOP OXYGEN BOMB
UOP METHOD 6


Scope

This method is for determining the induction period of gasolines. It is useful in
predicting the storage stability, in lieu of the more valuable storage tests and
accelerated gum determination. It is a valuable control test and an excellent
measure of inhibitor effectiveness.

This method does not give the same numerical induction periods as ASTM Method
D 525 because of differences in construction of the bombs and bath. However, the
results are parallel and this method is preferred for its speed and convenience.

Outline of Method

The sample is placed in a bomb at 60-70F (15-20C) and subjected to oxygen at
100 psig. The bomb is heated rapidly to 211.6F (99.7C). The pressure is recorded
continuously until the break point has been passed. The induction period is then
determined from the chart record.

Precautions

The bombs and bottles must be scrupulously clean to obtain reproducible results.

Precision

Repeatability should be considered suspect it results differ from the mean by more
than 5%.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 26





HYDROGEN SULFIDE IN GASES BY THE TUTWILER METHOD
UOP METHOD 9


Scope

This method is for the determination of hydrogen sulfide in gas mixtures. Mercaptan
sulfur, if present, is determined as hydrogen sulfide. The accuracy of this method is
not sufficient to obtain reliable results below 5 grains of H
2
S per 100 cu. ft.

Outline of Method

The sample is admitted to a Tutwiler buret, displacing a starch solution. A known
volume of starch solution is retained in the buret and a standard iodine solution is
admitted and measured from the buret until the starch solution assumes a taint
permanent blue color. The concentration of hydrogen sulfide is calculated from the
volume of iodine used and its known normality.

Precautions

It is recommended that gases to be analyzed for hydrogen sulfide content be
sampled directly from the plant stream into the buret. If the sample is to be
transported, it should be done in a dry glass or stainless steel container.

Do not confuse the blue color of the iodine-starch complex with the opalescent
milky appearance resulting from the separation of free sulfur.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 27





Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect it they differ
by more than the following amounts, depending on the iodine solution used:

Iodine Solution A: 10 grains*

Iodine Solution B: 20 grains*

Iodine Solution C: 5 grains*

*To convert to weight ppm:

grain/100 SCF 542.1
MW gas
= ppm (wt)
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 28





COPPER DISH GUM CONTENT OF GASOLINE
UOP METHOD 11


Scope

This is a method for determining the weight of the residue obtained when a gasoline
or naphtha is evaporated in a copper dish. Considered in connection with the
induction period, it is an indication of the stability of the gasoline in storage.

Outline of Method

The sample is evaporated in a clean, copper dish under controlled conditions and
the weight of the residue is determined.

Report

Report the average weight of the residue as milligrams of copper dish gum per 100
ml of gasoline.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 29





DOCTOR TEST FOR PETROLEUM DISTILLATES
UOP METHOD 41


Scope

This is a qualitative test for the presence of hydrogen sulfide and mercaptans in
gasoline, jet fuel, kerosene and similar petroleum products.

Outline of Method

The sample is shaken with a sodium plumbite solution in a test tube. If hydrogen
sulfide is present the following reaction occurs:

Na
2
PbO
2
+H
2
S PbS +2NaOH

The lead sulfide is black and readily visible. If this reaction does not appear, sulfur
is added to the test tube and the mixture shaken again. If mercaptans are present,
on shaking they undergo a series of reactions, coloring the hydrocarbon layer first
orange, then red and brown, and finally a black precipitate of lead sulfide appears.
The overall reactions may be written:

Na
2
PbO
2
+2RSH (RS)
2
Pb +2NaOH

(RS)
2
Pb +S RSSR +PbS
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 30





Report

(a) Hydrogen sulfide present.

If hydrogen sulfide is detected, report it.

(b) Sample sour.

If a brown or black precipitate forms, the sample contains a relatively high
concentration of mercaptans and is reported sour.

(c) Sample borderline or sweet.

If the mercaptan content of the sample is low, observe the sulfur layer and
judge as follows:

Discoloration of Floating Sulfur Report

Definitely discolored sour
Barely discolored borderline
Not discolored sweet

Precaution

Use only sufficient sulfur to form a thin film floating on the interface between the
sample and the doctor solution.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 31





HIGH VACUUM DISTILLATION OF
HIGH BOILING RANGE PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
UOP METHOD 76


Scope

The distillation apparatus described in this method was devised to provide a means
of determining the boiling range of heavy oils. It is intended for the determination, at
reduced pressures, of the boiling temperature ranges of petroleum products which
have an initial boiling point in excess of 460F (238C) and which decompose when
distilled at atmospheric pressure. The method is applicable to petroleum products
which can be partially or completely vaporized at a maximum liquid temperature of
750F (399C), at a pressure in the range of 0.2-0.3 mm of mercury absolute, and
which may be condensed as liquids at the pressure of the test.

Outline of Method

The sample is distilled at a pressure of 0.2-0.3 mm of mercury absolute under
conditions which provide approximately one theoretical plate fractionation. Data
obtained, converted to 760 mm mercury, allow the preparation of a distillation curve
relating volume distilled and boiling point.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 32





CRUDE OIL EVALUATION BY HEMPEL DISTILLATION
UOP METHOD 77


Scope

This method is for determining the gasoline, naphtha and kerosene content of a
crude oil as a guide in operating crude oil topping facilities.

Outline of Method

The method employs a Hempel column to secure the desired precision in a manner
which simulates the results obtained from a commercial distillation. Directions are
given to obtain end point gasoline, or naphtha, and kerosene of either specified end
point or API gravity.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 33





FRACTIONATION OF PETROLEUM DISTILLATES AND CRUDE OILS
UOP METHOD 79


Scope

This method describes laboratory fractionation equipment and procedures used in
obtaining true boiling point data for petroleum distillates and crude oils. Procedures
are also given for obtaining specific boiling range distillates for further analysis.

Outline of Method

A known volume of a petroleum distillate or a crude oil sample is fractionated in a
high efficiency laboratory column. The distillation may consist of: (1) the precision
fractionation of normally liquid hydrocarbons to collect fractions for further
identification: (2) the quantitative separation of normally gaseous hydrocarbons,
such as C
3
and/or C
4
hydrocarbons from C
5
and heavier gasoline or crude oil
fractions, and/or (3) the determination of true boiling point (TBP) distillation curves
at atmospheric and reduced pressures.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 34





DISTILLATION OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
ASTM D 86

Scope

This method covers the distillation of motor gasolines, aviation gasolines, aviation
turbine fuels, special boiling point spirits, naphthas, white spirit, kerosenes, gas oils,
distillate fuel oils, and similar petroleum products. A 100 ml sample is distilled under
prescribed conditions and systematic observations of thermometer readings and
volumes of condensate are made.

Definitions

1. Initial boiling point (lBP) thermometer reading at instant first drop of
condensate falls from the lower end of the condenser tube.

2. End point (EP) maximum thermometer reading obtained during the test.

3. Dry point thermometer reading observed at instant last drop of liquid
evaporates from lowest point in flask. Any drops or film of liquid on side of flask
or on thermometer are disregarded.

4 Decomposition point thermometer reading that coincides with first
indication of thermal decomposition of the liquid in the flask, as evidenced by
fumes and erratic thermometer readings which usually show a decided
decrease after any attempt to adjust the heat.

5. Percent recovery maximum percent recovered.

6. Percent total recovery combined percent recovery and residue in the flask.

7. Percent loss 100 minus percent total recovery.

8. Percent residue percent total recovery minus percent recovery.

9. Percent evaporated sum of percent recovered and percent loss.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 35





FLASH AND FIRE POINTS BY CLEVELAND OPEN CUP
ASTM D 92


Scope

This method covers determination of the flash and fire points of all petroleum
products except fuel oils and those having an open cup flash below 175F (79C).

Summary of Method

The test cup is filled to a specified level with the sample. The temperature of the
sample is increased rapidly at first and then at a slow constant rate as the flash
point is approached. At specified intervals a small test flame is passed across the
cup. The lowest temperature at which application of the test flame causes the
vapors above the surface of the liquid to ignite is taken as the flash point. To
determine the fire point, the test is continued until the application of the test flame
causes the oil to ignite and burn for at least 5 sec.

Precision

The following data should be used in judging the acceptability of results (95 percent
confidence).

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect if they differ
by more than the following amounts:
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 36





Repeatability

Flash point 15F (8C)
Fire point 15F (8C)

The results submitted by each of two laboratories should be considered suspect if
the results differ by more than the following amounts:

Reproducibility

Flash point 30F (17C)
Fire point 25F (14C)
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 37





FLASH POINT BY PENSKY-MARTENS CLOSED TESTER
ASTM D 93


Scope

These methods cover the determination of the flash point by Pensky-Martens
closed-cup tester of fuel oils, lube oils, suspensions of solids, liquids that tend to
form a surface film under test conditions, and other liquids.

Summary of Method

The sample is heated at a slow, constant rate with continual stirring. A small flame
is directed into the cup at regular intervals with simultaneous interruption of stirring.
The flash point is the lowest temperature at which application of the test flame
causes the vapor above the sample to ignite.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 38





WATER AND SEDIMENT IN CRUDE OILS
ASTM D 4007


Scope

This standard defines a primary centrifuge method and two alternatives for
determining the amount of water and sediment in crude oil. It further specifies a
base method to be used when centrifuging is not suitable or when the accuracy of a
centrifuge method is to be confirmed.

Summary of Method

The three centrifuge methods involve selection of number of factors such as type of
solvent, type and amount of demulsifier, temperature of the sample during testing,
and the duration of centrifuging. With many types of oil, the results are not
dependent on the selected factors. Those factors which are not the most convenient
can be used with good results.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 39





POUR POINT OF PETROLEUM OILS
ASTM D 97


Scope

The test for pour point is intended for use on any petroleum oil.

Summary of Method

After preliminary heating, the sample is cooled at a specified rate and examined at
intervals of 5F (or 3C) for flow characteristics. The lowest temperature at which
movement of the oil is observed is recorded as the pour point.

Definition

Pour point the lowest temperature, expressed as a multiple of 5F (or 3C) at
which the oil is observed to flow when cooled and examined under prescribed
conditions.

Calculation and Report

Add 5F (or 3C) to the temperature recorded and report the result as the Pour
Point, ASTM D 97.

Precision

Repeatability Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered
suspect if they differ by more than 5F (or 3C).

Reproducibility The results submitted by each of two laboratories should be
considered suspect only if the two results differ by more than 10F (or 6C).
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 40





WEATHERING TEST FOR GASES
UOP METHOD 155


Scope

This is a rapid procedure for the estimation of iso- and normal butane in liquefied
butane samples. Propane does not interfere with the analysis and is determined if
present in concentrations not exceeding 25%. Pentane and olefins will interfere in
the analysis, if present. The test is sufficiently accurate for routine control of plant
operations, the apparatus is inexpensive and the technique involved requires little
experience.

Outline of Method

A 94 ml sample of liquefied butanes is drawn into a precooled centrifuge tube. It is
then weathered in air to the 90 ml mark. The centrifuge tube and contents are then
transferred to a water bath maintained at 60-70F (15-20C). Temperature readings
are recorded when the liquid level has dropped to the 50- and 15-ml graduation
marks of the centrifuge tube. From these temperatures and weathering test curve,
the approximate concentrations of propane, isobutane and normal butane are
determined.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 41





Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect if they differ
by more than the following amounts:

Hydrocarbons Maximum Deviation, %
Propane +2.5
i-butane +1.5
n-butane +1.0
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 42





SAYBOLT COLOR OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(SAYBOLT CHROMOMETER METHOD)
ASTM D 156


Scope

This method covers the determination of the color of refined oils such as undyed
motor and aviation gasoline, jet fuels, naphthas and kerosene. A sample of the
liquid is added to a tubular column through which a light source is seen. The color is
compared with specified glass standards. The height of the liquid sample is
decreased by levels until the color of the sample is lighter than that of the standard.
The color number above this level is reported. The range of number is +30 (lightest)
to -16 (darkest color). Color standards correspond to sample depth and color
number.

Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect if they differ
by more than 1 color unit.

Results submitted by one laboratory should be considered suspect if they differ
from that of another laboratory by 2 color units.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 43





HYDROGEN SULFIDE AND MERCAPTAN SULFUR IN LIQUID
HYDROCARBONS BY POTENTIOMETRIC TITRATION
UOP METHOD 163
Scope

This method is for the determination of hydrogen sulfide and mercaptan sulfur in
liquid hydrocarbons, such as gasoline, naphtha, light cycle oils and similar
distillates. It is applicable to samples containing as little as 1.0 ppm mercaptan
sulfur and 1.0 ppm hydrogen sulfide.

Attention is called to the fact that an earlier version of this method (163-62) included
determination of free sulfur. This has been deleted from the present method.

Outline of Method

The liquid hydrocarbon sample is titrated potentiometrically in ammoniacal isopropyl
alcohol using alcoholic silver nitrate as titrant. A glass reference electrode and a
silver-silver sulfide indicating electrode system are used. Estimation of the hydrogen
sulfide and mercaptan sulfur content is made from the titration curves. Either an
automatic recording titrator or a manually-operated instrument may be used.

Free sulfur is a possible interference and instructions are given for analysis of
samples containing it.

Calculations

Hydrogen sulfide, as S, wt-ppm =
16 10
3
A N
SV


Mercaptan, as S, wt- ppm =
32 10
3
(B- A) N
SV

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 44





where:

A = volume of silver nitrate solution used to reach the sulfide ion end point,
ml

B = volume of silver nitrate solution used to reach the mercaptide ion end
point, ml

N = normality of alcoholic silver nitrate solution

S = specific gravity of sample at the temperature at which the sample is
pipetted

V = volume of sample, ml

Precautions

Allow enough time for the titration cell to reach equilibrium before recording the
volume of silver nitrate solution and the emf when the manual titration is made.
When using a recording titrator, add the titrant at a rate of 3.0 ml per minute in the
vicinity of the end point, otherwise the end point will be overshot.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 45





VOLATILE NITROGEN BASES AND AMMONIA IN
CATALYSTS, DEPOSITS, AND WATER SOLUTIONS
UOP METHOD 169


Scope

This is a method for the determination of ammonia and steam-volatile nitrogen
bases in catalysts, deposits, and water solutions. The procedure does not
distinguish between ammonia and volatile nitrogen bases. Ammonia in the parts per
million range can be determined with this method by using 0.005 N sulfuric acid and
large samples.

Outline of Method

A known quantity of sample is introduced into a Kjeldahl flask, diluted with distilled
water, and made alkaline with 50% sodium hydroxide. The volatile nitrogen bases
are distilled in a Kjeldahl apparatus and the condensate collected in a boric acid
adsorbing solution. This solution is then titrated with standardized sulfur acid using
methyl purple indicator.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 46





FLUE GAS ANALYSIS (ORSAT)
UOP METHOD 172


Scope

This method is for the quantitative determination of carbon dioxide, oxygen and
carbon monoxide in flue gases.

Outline of Method

Systematically, the gas sample is admitted into a series of pipets, each containing a
reagent for the removal of an individual component. After contact with each reagent,
the gas is returned to the buret. The difference in residual volume indicates the
amount of component absorbed. In this manner, percentages of carbon dioxide,
oxygen and carbon monoxide are determined.

Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect if they differ
by more than the following amounts:

Carbon dioxide +0.2%

Oxygen +0.3%

Carbon monoxide +0.3%
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 47





CONRADSON CARBON RESIDUE OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
ASTM D 189
Scope

This method covers the determination of the amount of carbon residue left after
evaporation and pyrolysis of an oil, and is intended to provide some indication of
relative coke-forming propensities. The method is generally applicable to relatively
nonvolatile petroleum products which partially decompose on distillation at
atmospheric pressure. Petroleum products containing ash-forming constituents as
determined by ASTM Method D 482, Test for Ash from Petroleum Products, will
have an erroneously high carbon residue, depending upon the amount of ash
formed.

Summary of Method

A weighed quantity of sample is placed in a crucible and subjected to destructive
distillation. The residue undergoes cracking and coking reactions during a fixed
period of severe heating. At the end of the specified heating period, the test crucible
containing the carbonaceous residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighed. The
residue remaining is calculated as a percentage of the original sample, and
reported as Conradson carbon residue.

Calculation

Calculate the carbon residue of the sample or of the 10 percent distillation residue
as follows:
Carbon residue =(A 100)/W
where:
A = weight of carbon residue, g
W = weight of sample, g



157048
Analytical Methods
Page 48





Report
Report the value obtained as "Conradson carbon residue, percent" or as
"Conradson carbon residue on 10 percent distillation residue, percent," ASTM
D 189.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 49





HYDROGEN SULFIDE, MERCAPTAN SULFUR
AND CARBONYL SULFIDE IN HYDROCARBON
GASES BY POTENTIOMETRIC TITRATION
UOP METHOD 212


Scope

This method is for determining hydrogen sulfide, mercaptan sulfur and carbonyl
sulfide in gaseous hydrocarbons and in liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) of ordinary
properties. Also covered is the determination of mercaptan in non-ordinary LPG
which may contain a wide range of hydrocarbon types from ethane to such gasoline
boiling range hydrocarbons as pentane and hexane. The hydrogen sulfide
concentration range which can be determined is from 0.3 to several thousand
wt-ppm. The method is also applicable to LPG samples containing as little as 1.0
ppm mercaptan sulfur.

Outline of Method

The sample, taken either from a sample bomb or directly from a refinery stream, is
scrubbed first through a potassium hydroxide solution and then through a
monoethanolamine solution. A potentiometric titration of the absorbed hydrogen
sulfide and mercaptan sulfur follows. The monoethanolamine solution, which
contains the absorbed carbonyl sulfide, is titrated potentiometrically with alcoholic
silver nitrate in an acidic titration solvent. The concentration of each item sought is
estimated from the titration curve.

Precision

Samples containing hydrogen sulfide mercaptan and carbonyl sulfide sulfur:

An estimated standard deviation (esd) is not reported since insufficient data are
available at present to permit this calculation with at least 4 degrees of freedom.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 50





Samples containing mercaptan sulfur only and appreciable concentrations or
pentane and higher boiling materials:

The estimated standard deviation based on indicated replicates is shown below.
Duplicate results by the same operator should not be considered suspect unless
they differ by more than the amounts shown in the "allowable difference" column
(95% probability).


Mercaptan esd, Allowable
No. of Level, wt-ppm, difference,
Type of Sample Pairs wt-ppm, S S wt-ppm, S

LPG containing
appreciable concentrations
of pentane and higher 5 6.0 0.28 1.1
boiling materials
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 51





FLUID CRACKING CATALYST LOADING TEST
UOP METHOD 233


Scope

This method is used to determine the proportion of silica-alumina type catalyst in
recycle stock from a fluid catalytic cracking plant.

Outline of Method

In this procedure the oil-catalyst mixture is washed free of oil with cold benzene,
dried and weighed.

Note: Toluene may be substituted for benzene.

Precautions

Do not conduct the analysis near an open flame. It is preferably carried out under a
hood.

Be sure the crucible is dry before placing it in the oven. It is advisable to leave the
oven door ajar for 5-10 minutes immediately after introducing the crucible.

If the catalyst persists in adhering to the Erlenmeyer flask, dry and weigh the flask
and add the increase in weight to the catalyst weight in the crucible.

Precision

Duplicate determinations by the same operator should agree within 5%.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 52





ACTIVITY TEST FOR FLUID CRACKING CATALYST
UOP METHOD 251


Scope

This method is for evaluating the activity of fluid catalytic cracking catalysts relative
to a reference catalyst by measuring the conversion of a Mid-continent gas oil to
gas and gasoline. The procedure is applicable to both fresh and used catalyst.

Outline of Method

A standard gas oil charge stock is cracked over the test catalyst in a fixed-bed
operation under carefully controlled standard operating conditions. The conversion
to gasoline and gas is measured. The activity, expressed as a percentage, is the
ratio of the liquid hourly space velocity used with the test catalyst to the liquid hourly
space velocity required with a primary reference catalyst to give the same
conversion as that obtained with the test catalyst. The latter value is read from an
experimentally-obtained reference catalyst calibration curve showing conversion as
a function of space velocity.

Notes

1. Fresh and equilibrium synthetic catalysts are calcined prior to activity testing
for 2 hours at 1112F +25F (600C) in a muffle furnace having a vent in the
door to permit slow circulation of air. The catalyst is loaded in 150-ml tall-form
porcelain crucibles (without covers) filled about one-half full. Fresh catalyst is
first dried at about 400F (204C) for 2 hours to remove moisture and avoid the
spattering of catalyst which otherwise may occur if placed directly in the muffle
furnace at 1112F. Regenerated equilibrium catalysts have substantially all of
the carbonaceous deposit (except embedded carbon) removed in calcining.
For normal carbon deposits of 0.3 to 0.5 wt-% or less, the activity rating is not
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 53





affected by the carbon removal. Abnormal carbon deposits, up to 1 and 1.5 wt-
%, usually will reduce the weight activity by 1 to 2 numbers.

In calcining fresh or used natural catalysts, the temperature employed is that
used when regenerating the catalyst in commercial practice.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 54





APPARENT BULK DENSITY OF FLUID CRACKING CATALYST
UOP METHOD 254


Scope

This is a procedure for determining the apparent bulk density (ABD) of loosely
packed fluid cracking catalyst.

Outline of Method

The sample is poured into a weighed, 25 ml cylinder under carefully prescribed
conditions. Excess catalyst is scraped off and the full cylinder is weighed. The
weight of catalyst, in grams, divided by the volume of the container, in milliliters, is
reported as the ABD of the sample.

Definition

Apparent bulk density is defined as weight per unit volume. It is an empirical value
for the particular type of solid particles to which the determination applies; in this
case, fluid (powered) cracking catalyst in a size range of less than 200 m effective
diameter.

Calculations

Calculate the ABD as weight per unit volume.


where:
W =weight of the catalyst, g
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 55





PHENOLS AND THIOPHENOLS IN PETROLEUM
PRODUCTS BY SPECTROPHOTOMETRY
UOP METHOD 262


Scope

This method is intended primarily for the quantitative determination of phenols and
thiophenols in gasoline and in refinery caustics, but it also is applicable to crude
cresylic acids derived from these refinery caustics. "Phenols" consist of a mixture of
phenol, cresols and xylenols. "Thiophenols" denotes the analogous sulfur
compounds.

Outline of Method

Phenols and thiophenols are extracted from the petroleum fraction with 10% sodium
hydroxide solution. The ultraviolet absorption spectrum of the caustic extract is then
recorded. A base-line technique is used to compensate for background absorption
of the sample. Calibration in a similar manner with known solutions and the
application of Beer's Law permits calculation of weight-percent phenols and weight-
percent thiophenols.

In the presence of excessive concentrations of mercaptans, only the sum of the
phenols and thiophenols can be determined directly. However, an accurate value
for thiophenols can be obtained from the modified procedure described, involving
adsorption of the sample on silica gel followed by selective elution of the
thiophenols.

The procedure for refinery caustics and crude cresylic acids is identical to that for
petroleum fractions except that the extraction step is omitted.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 56





Precautions

Use clean glassware and CP reagents.

Shake vigorously in order to obtain quantitative extraction.

Since this method of sample preparation is employed chiefly to avoid the oxidation
of thiophenols during storage, the extraction must immediately follow sampling. An
inert atmosphere and the proper sample container are mandatory.

Do not use carbon dioxide as the inert gas.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 57





SAMPLING PETROLEUM AND PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
ASTM D 270


Scope

This method covers procedures for obtaining representative samples of stocks or
shipments of crude petroleum and petroleum products, except electrical insulating
oils, and butane, propane, and other petroleum products that are gases at
atmospheric temperature and pressure.

Summary of Method

Samples of petroleum and petroleum products are examined by various methods of
test for the determination of physical and chemical characteristics. It is accordingly
necessary that the samples be truly representative of the petroleum or petroleum
products in question. The precautions required to ensure the representative
character of the samples are numerous and depend upon the type of material being
sampled, the tank, carrier, container or line from which the sample is being
obtained, the type and cleanliness of the sample container, and the sampling
procedure that is to be used. Each procedure is suitable for sampling a number of
specific materials under definite storage, transportation, or container conditions.
The basic principle of each procedure is to obtain a sample or a composite of
several samples in such manner and from such locations in the tank or other
container that the sample or composite will be truly representative of the petroleum
or petroleum product.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 58





LOSS ON IGNITION OF CATALYST AT 900C
UOP METHOD 275


Scope

This method is for determining the loss on ignition of fresh or used catalyst or
catalyst bases of the various commercial shapes and sizes, when an ignition
temperature of 900C is specified. It is also applicable to other sample types, such
as catalyst fines.

A representative weighted sample is heated at 900C to constant weight and the
loss in weight calculated as percent loss on ignition.

Precision

Duplicate determinations should not differ by more than 0.2% absolute for values
below 3.0%, or more than 0.3% to 10.0%.

Based on 10 pairs at the 2% loss on ignition level, the standard deviation calculated
from the mean range was 0.072%.

Time for Analysis

Elapsed time per test is about 2
1
/
4
hours (5.0 hours when fines are being
analyzed).

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 59





EXISTENT GUM IN DIOLEFIN-CONTAINING GASOLINES
AND NAPHTHAS BY THE STEAM JET METHOD
UOP METHOD 277


Scope

Some gasolines and naphthas contain appreciable concentrations of diolefins or
other materials which are sensitive to oxidation. Examples are: (1) pyrolysis
naphtha (ethylene coproduct gasoline), (2) certain catalytically cracked gasolines,
and (3) certain thermally cracked gasolines. This method is used to determine the
existent gum in these types of materials. An inert gas, steam in this case, is used in
the evaporation step in order to prevent gum from forming in the test beaker during
the evaporation. It has been observed that the ASTM air-jet Method D 381, when
used on oxidation-sensitive samples, tends to give falsely high gum values because
of gum formation during the evaporation.

Outline of Method

The steam jet method is similar to ASTM Method D 381 for Existent Gum in Fuels
by J et Evaporation. The sample in a tarred beaker is placed in a heated metal block
apparatus maintained at 325F (163C) and evaporated to dryness by a jet of steam
which has been superheated to 325F (163C). The residue is weighed and
reported as milligrams of gum per 100 ml of sample.

Precautions

The types of gasolines and naphthas for which this method is intended must be
sampled and handled carefully in order to prevent oxidation. For best results it is
recommended that: (1) the sample containers be purged with inert gas such as
nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or sweet refinery gas prior to taking the samples, (2) any
storage between time of sampling and analysis be in the dark (preferably
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 60





refrigerated storage), (3) the time lapse between sampling and analysis be as short
as possible.

Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should not be considered suspect unless
they differ by more than approximately 25% of the result.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 61





API GRAVITY OF CRUDE PETROLEUM AND PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(HYDROMETER METHOD)
ASTM D-287


Scope

Using a glass hydrometer the API gravity of crude petroleum and petroleum
products which have Reid Vapor Pressures under 26 lbs. can be determined.
Gravities are determined at 60F (15C), or converted to 60F, by means of
standard tables. Conversion tables are not applicable to nonhydrocarbons or
essentially pure hydrocarbons such as the aromatics. Of interest: the ID of the
sample cylinder must be at least 25 mm greater than the OD of the hydrometer. The
height of the cylinder shall be such that the sample height is 25 mm more than the
submerged portion of the hydrometer.

Precision

Repeatability Duplicates should not differ by more than 0.2 degrees API.

Reproducibility Results should not differ by more than 0.5 degrees API when done
by different labs.

The above judgments are valid providing API gravities were obtained at a
temperature not differing from 60F by more than 18F (10C).
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 62





ANALYSIS OF REFINERY WATERS FOR pH, IRON, AND COPPER
UOP METHOD 314


Scope

This method is designed for measuring the extent of corrosion caused by refinery
waters. Copper and iron are determined at a level of 0.1 ppm and higher. The
metals may be present as simple dissolved ions, as complex ions with cyanide or
other complexing agents, or as part of the suspended solids that often are present.
Ammonia, hydrogen sulfide, hydrogen cyanide and organic matter do not interfere.

The pH of the water is determined because it usually correlates with the extent of
corrosion.

Outline of Method

The water sample, including any suspended solids, is concentrated in the presence
of sulfuric acid until sulfur trioxide fumes appear and then treated successively with
nitric acid and aqua regia.

Iron is determined colorimetrically. The lower limit of detection is 0.1 ppm iron.

Copper is determined colorimetrically. The lower limit of detection is 0.1 ppm copper
in the water sample.

The pH of the original water sample is determined with a pH meter using a glass-
calomel electrode system. Samples drawn for determination of pH at the refinery
should be taken in glass bottles, leaving little or no air space above the liquid, and
should be stoppered immediately with rubber or neoprene. The pH should be
measured as soon thereafter as possible as it is often subject to fairly rapid change
with time. Draw samples to be sent out of the refinery in polyethylene bottles to
avoid breakage.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 63





Precision

Insufficient data available to calculate an esd with at least 3.7 degrees of freedom.

Time for Analysis

The elapsed time is about 8 hours per sample.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 64





VAPOR PRESSURE OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(REID METHOD)
ASTM D 323

Scope

This method determines the absolute vapor pressure of volatile crude oil and
volatile nonviscous petroleum products, except LPG. The gasoline chamber of the
testing apparatus is filled with a chilled sample and connected to the air chamber
section which should be at 100F (37.8C). The container is then immersed in a
constant-temperature bath and shaken periodically until equilibrium is reached. A
manometer attached at the end of the cylinder like apparatus is read and corrected
if the air chamber temperature is initially at something other than 100F.

Precision

Repeatability Duplicate results by the same operators should be considered
suspect it they differ by more than the following:

Range Repeatability

0-5 psi 0.1
5-16 psi 0.2
16-26 psi 0.3

Reproducibility Results by two laboratories should be considered suspect it they
differ by more than the following:

Range Repeatability

0-5 psi 0.35
5-16 psi 0.3
16-26 psi 0.4
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 65





CALCULATION OF UOP CHARACTERIZATION FACTOR AND
ESTIMATION OF MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF PETROLEUM OILS
UOP METHOD 375


Scope

This method is for determining the UOP Characterization Factor, which is indicative
of the general origin and nature of a petroleum stock. Values of 12.5 or higher
indicate a material predominantly paraffinic in nature. Highly aromatic materials
have characterization factors of 10.0 or less.

This method also may be used to estimate the molecular weight of typical
petroleum fractions. It is not intended for estimating the molecular weight of a pure
hydrocarbon compound.

Outline of Method

This method gives directions for estimating:

1. The UOP-Characterization Factor from API gravity and Engler distillation,

2. The UOP Characterization Factor from API gravity and kinematic viscosity at a
temperature of 100, 122 or 210F (37.8, 50 or 98.9C), and

3. The molecular weight from API gravity and Engler distillation.

Definitions

The UOP Characterization Factor, K, of a hydrocarbon is defined as the cube root
of its absolute boiling point, in degrees Rankine, divided by its specific gravity at
60F.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 66





Molecular weight, as employed herein, is the average molecular weight of a
petroleum fraction and not that of a single, pure compound.

Cubic average boiling point is the cube of the sum of the products of the volume
fraction multiplied by the cube root of the boiling point of each component
expressed in degrees Rankine.

Mean average boiling point is the arithmetic average of the true molal boiling point
and the cubic average boiling point, expressed in degrees Fahrenheit.

True molal average boiling point is the sum of the products of the mol fraction
multiplied by the boiling point of each component.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 67





NITROGEN IN PETROLEUM DISTILLATES AND HEAVY OILS
BY ACID EXTRACTION OR DIRECT KJELDAHL PROCEDURE
UOP METHOD 384


Scope

This acid extraction method is specifically intended for the determination of
combined nitrogen in petroleum distillates and heavy oils in concentrations ranging
from 0.2 to 20 ppm. Nonextractable samples, and samples containing nitrogen
concentrations ranging from 20 ppm to several percent, can be handled by a direct
Kjeldahl analysis.

The types of nitrogen compounds which can be determined are those which usually
are determined by a macro-Kjeldahl procedure and include amines, amides,
pyridines, pyroles and quinolines. The method does not apply to organic nitro-
compounds nor to those containing a -N =N- linkage.

Precision

Duplicate determinations run in the same laboratory by the same operator on the
same equipment should not differ from the mean by more than the percent relative
in the table below:

Total Percent,
Nitrogen, ppm Relative

0.5 20
5 11
45 5
500 2

The estimated standard deviation was calculated to be 0.35 at the 16-ppm level,
based on 5 replicate samples; 1.38 at the 54-ppm level, based on 6 replicates.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 68





TRACE METALS IN OILS BY WET ASH-SPECTROGRAPHIC METHOD
UOP METHOD 389


Scope

This method is applicable to the determination of iron, nickel, vanadium, lead,
copper, sodium and molybdenum, specifically, in crude petroleum and such
fractions as gas oils, fuel oils and let fuels. Additionally, manganese, chromium,
magnesium, tin, calcium, aluminum and zinc may be determined by this method.
Each of these elements can be determined over the concentration range of 0.02 to
1000 ppm if a 50-g sample of oil is ashed. Higher or lower concentrations can be
determined by ashing appropriately-sized samples.

Outline of Method

Cobalt and potassium are added to the oil sample as internal standards and
spectroscopic buffers. The oil sample is then coked with fuming sulfuric acid, ignited
and ashed at 1000F (538C), treated with aqua regia and the ash dissolved in
dilute hydrochloric acid. A spark spectrum of the solution is obtained by means of a
rotating-disk electrode technique. A microphotometer is used to measure the
densities of selected metal lines. Concentrations are determined from standard
calibration curves.

Precision

The estimated standard deviations (esd) for various concentration levels of the
metals determined by this method are shown below. Duplicate results by the same
operator should not be considered suspect unless they differ by more than the
amounts shown in the "allowable difference" column (95% probability).
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 69





Metal Level, No. of esd, Allowable
ppm Pairs ppm Difference, ppm

1 5 0.09 0.3
10 5 0.59 2.2
50 5 3.2 12
200 5 13 48

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 70





TRACE METALS IN PETROLEUM AND ORGANIC
PRODUCTS BY WET-ASHING; FLAME PHOTOMETER
AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC METHODS
UOP METHOD 391


Scope

This method is for determining trace concentrations (parts per million) of vanadium,
nickel, iron, copper and sodium in petroleum products such as crude oils and
residues, and varied organic compounds (including nitroanilines, amines,
chlorobenzenes, phenols and other related materials) produced or used in chemical
manufacturing. Other elements commonly found in these materials do not interfere.

Outline of Method

The sample is wet-ashed with fuming sulfuric acid and the coke is burned off in a
muffle furnace. The inorganic residue remaining is dissolved in acid and diluted to a
given volume. Vanadium, nickel, iron and copper are determined
spectrophotometrically, and sodium is determined by flame photometry, using
aliquots from the acid solution.

Precaution

The sulfuric acid concentration in the standard sodium solutions must be the same
as that in the sample solutions. If a different concentration of sulfuric acid is used for
the sample solution than that specified in this method, the calibration curve must be
prepared with sodium standard solutions containing this same sulfuric acid
concentration.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 71





Precision

Duplicate determinations by the same operator should not be considered suspect
unless they differ by more than the following amounts:


Allowable
Difference for
Range, ppm Duplicates, ppm

(Vanadium, Nickel, Iron, Copper)

0 to 2 0.1 ppm of metal
>2 5% of the mean

(Sodium)

0 to 2 0.2 ppm
>2 10% of the mean

Insufficient data are available to calculate a standard deviation for the metals listed.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 72





PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION BY MICROMESH SIEVES
UOP METHOD 422


Scope

This method is for the determination of particle sizes of fluid cracking catalysts by
means of calibrated sieves having uniform precise square openings. It may also be
used for determining particle sizes of other powdered materials. The method
provides for the classification of particles in a range of sizes from about 20 to 149
microns.

The method is a modification of Shell Development Company, Method EMS 5Z2/61.

Outline of Method

A representative sample is appropriately humidified and then placed on the top
sieve of a calibrated set of precision sieves. The set is mounted on a specified
shaking apparatus and shaken for 20 minutes. The weight of catalyst retained on
each sieve and in the pan is determined, and the percentage of the sample retained
on each sieve and in the pan is calculated on the basis of the sum of weights of the
recovered fractions.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 73





SINTERING INDEX OF USED FLUID CRACKING CATALYST
UOP METHOD 424


Scope

This method provides a means of separating and measuring a fraction of used fluid
cracking catalyst having a reduced apparent density resulting from the pores having
been sealed off by localized overheating.

Precision

Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered suspect if they differ
by more than 1% absolute. Duplicate results by different operators should be
considered suspect if they differ by more than 2% absolute.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 74





SURFACE AREA, PORE VOLUME AND PORE DIAMETER
OF POROUS SUBSTANCES BY NITROGEN ADSORPTION
UOP METHOD 425


Scope

This method is for the determination of surface areas of porous substances by a
two-point system, using the basic Brunauer-Emmett-Teller (B.E.T.) theory of
multilayer adsorption, and pore volumes of the substances, using the capillary
condensation theory. Surface areas greater than 10 m
2
/g may be determined, as
well as the volume of pores up to a diameter of 600 Angstroms. Pore diameter is
calculated from surface area and pore volume.

Outline of Method

The surface area of a substance is determined by measuring the volume of nitrogen
gas adsorbed at liquid nitrogen temperature and relative pressures of 60/760 and
160/760, and applying the B.E.T. theory.

The pore volume is determined by measuring the amount of gaseous nitrogen
condensed in the pores at liquid nitrogen temperature and a relative pressure of
735/760. It can be shown by use of the Kelvin equation for capillary condensation
and the proper correction for multilayer adsorption that this volume is that required
to fill all pores of diameter less than 600 Angstroms.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 75





Precision

Surface Area

Duplicate determinations should not differ by more than 8% from the mean.

Based on 2 sets of 5 replicate determinations, the standard deviation at the 500-600
m
2
/g level was 12.

Based on 2 sets of 5 replicate determinations, the standard deviation at the 100-200
m
2
/g level was 2.

Pore Volume

Duplicate determinations should not differ by more than 0.04 ml/g.

Based on 4 sets of 5 replicate determinations, the standard deviation in the range of
0.30 to 0.90 m
2
/g was 0.013.

Pore Diameter

Duplicate determinations should not differ by more than 5% from the mean.

Based on 2 sets of 5 replicate determinations, the standard deviation at the 50-60
Angstrom level was 1.

Based on 2 sets of 5 replicate determinations, the standard deviation at the 90-130
Angstrom level was 3.5.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 76





Time for Test

The elapsed time for 1 sample is 9 hours.

The elapsed time for 6 samples is 10.5 hours.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 77





KINEMATIC VISCOSITY OF TRANSPARENT AND OPAQUE LIQUIDS
(AND THE CALCULATION OF DYNAMIC VISCOSITY)
ASTM D 445



Scope

This method covers the determination of the kinematic viscosity of liquid petroleum
products, both transparent and opaque, by measuring the time for a volume of liquid
to flow under gravity through a calibrated glass capillary viscometer. The dynamic
viscosity can be obtained by multiplying the measured kinematic viscosity by the
density of the liquid.

Summary of Method

The time is measured in seconds for a fixed volume of liquid to flow under gravity
through the capillary of a calibrated viscometer under a reproducible driving head
and at a closely controlled temperature. The kinematic viscosity is the product of the
measured flow time and the calibration constant of the viscometer.

Precision

The following precision applies to clean, transparent oils tested between 60 and
212F (15 and 100C).

Repeatability Duplicate results by the same operator, using the same
viscometer, should be considered suspect if their difference is greater than 0.35
percent of their mean.

Reproducibility The results submitted by each of two laboratories should not be
considered suspect unless their difference is greater than 0.7 percent of their mean.
ASH FROM PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 78





ASTM D 482


Scope

This method covers the determination of ash from distillate and residual fuels, gas
turbine fuels, crude oils, lubricating oils, waxes, and other petroleum products, in
which any ash-forming materials present are normally considered to be undesirable
impurities or contaminants. The method is limited to petroleum products which are
free from added ash-forming additives, including certain phosphorus compounds.

Summary of Method

The sample contained in a suitable vessel is ignited and allowed to burn until only
ash and carbon remain. The carbonaceous residue is reduced to an ash by heating
in a muffle furnace at 1427F (775C), cooled and weighed.

Report

Report the result to two significant figures as the ash, ASTM D 482, stating the
weight of the sample taken.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 79





SAMPLING OF GASOLINES, DISTILLATE FUELS
AND C
3
-C
4
FRACTIONS
UOP METHOD 516


Scope

This is an outline of the sampling techniques necessary for obtaining, in a stainless
steel cylinder, an air-free sample of a liquid hydrocarbon. Samples may consist of
liquefied natural gases, high vapor pressure natural gasolines, various liquefied
petroleum gases, air unstable gasolines or other liquid hydrocarbon products which
require rigorous exclusion of air.

Outline of Method

Proper sampling techniques are specified to obtain an uncontaminated, air-free
sample in a suitable container; viz., a double-valved, stainless steel cylinder. The
cylinder is mounted vertically near the sampling point and connected to the plant
sample line by steel tubing or pipe. The connecting lines are flushed with the
sample, which is then allowed to flow upward through the cylinder. Several volumes
of sample are discarded before closing the sample cylinder valves of the cylinder.

Identification and Shipment

Properly identify each sample by attaching a tag to the cylinder giving company
name and location, time and date of sampling, identity of stream sampled, sample
pressure and tests required. Crate the cylinder to protect the valves from being
opened or damaged in shipment. Affix a "Red Label" or other proper shipping label
to the crate.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 80





Notes and Precautions

Samples taken in containers found leaking either during or after sampling should be
discarded and new samples taken in leak-free cylinders.

Consult the current Interstate Commerce Commission or other appropriate
authorities for regulations for applicable specification for shipment. Consult ASTM
Methods D 270, D 1145 and D 1265, if necessary, for procedures for measurement
and sampling of petroleum and petroleum products.

For liquid samples taken in the above manner it is mandatory to immediately
provide a safe outage in the cylinder to prevent thermal expansion and cylinder
rupture. Follow the recommendations in this method to safely provide that outage.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 81





GAS ANALYSIS BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
UOP METHOD 539


Scope

This method is for determining the composition of a wide variety of gaseous
hydrocarbon mixtures obtained from refining processes or from natural sources,
including minor concentrations of the composite of C
5
olefins and C
6
+
hydrocarbons. 1-Butene is not resolved from isobutylene and argon is determined
as a composite with oxygen. The lower limit of detection for a single component is
0.1 mol-%.

Outline of Method

All the constituents of a total gas sample cannot be resolved by a single
chromatographic column. Therefore in this procedure, 3 columns are connected in
series with appropriate coupling valves. Each column is used to separate a specific
portion of the total sample. The first column is able to resolve gases in the C
3
-C
5

boiling range. The second column separates the components in the intermediate
boiling range carbon dioxide, ethylene, and ethane while the third resolves the
light gases hydrogen, oxygen + argon (composite), nitrogen, methane, and
carbon monoxide.

Precision

Based on 7 replicate determinations, the estimated standard deviations (esd) in
Table 1 were calculated for the components listed.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 82





TABLE 1

GAS ANALYSIS BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY


ALLOWABLE
LEVEL, ESD, DIFFERENCE,
COMPONENT MOL-% MOL-% MOL-%

HYDROGEN 10 0.10 0.36
NITROGEN 20 0.02 0.07
METHANE 10 0.03 0.09
CARBON MONOXIDE 10 0.14 0.49


CARBON DIOXIDE 10 0.03 0.10
ETHANE 10 0.04 0.14
PROPYLENE 10 0.02 0.05
n-BUTANE 10 0.03 0.09


ISOPENTANE 3 0.03 0.11
C
5
OLEFINS/C
6
PLUS 4 0.04 0.14


157048
Analytical Methods
Page 83





METALS IN CRACKING CATALYST BY EMISSION SPECTROSCOPY
UOP METHOD 546

Scope

This method is designed for the determination of metal impurities in silica-alumina
cracking catalyst containing 0 to 30% alumina and less than 1% Na. Impurities are
determined in the following ranges: Cu and Mo, 0.001 to 1.0%; Ni, V, Mn, Cr, Pb,
Sn, and Ti, 0.005 to 1.0%; Fe and Mg, 0.01 to 2.0%; Zn and Ca, 0.05 to 2.0%; Na,
0.05 to 1.0%.

Outline of Method

Samples of the unknown diluted in graphite are burned to completion using a 6-amp
dc arc. The photographed spectra are then examined to determine the elements
sought.

Iron, nickel, and vanadium concentrations are quantitatively determined by
densitometry, using an internal standard, while the concentrations of the remaining
metals are semi-quantitatively determined by visual comparison with spectra from
known samples.

Precision

Duplicate determinations for Fe, Ni, and V should not differ from the mean by more
than 10% in the 0.01 to 1.0% range.

Based on 10 replicates, the estimated standard deviation (esd) was calculated to
be:

Elemental Level esd

Fe 0.6 0.047
Ni 0.02 0.0017
V 0.05 0.0075
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 84





CYANIDE AND THIOCYANATE IN REFINERY WATERS AS CYANIDE
UOP METHOD 682


Scope

This method is for determining cyanide and thiocyanate in refinery water, both of
which are then calculated as weight-ppm cyanide. The lower limit of detection is
about 0.02 wt-ppm in samples containing no sulfur and 0.8 wt-ppm in those
containing 1% sulfide.

Outline of Method

A sample of refinery water is placed in a flask and hydrogen sulfide added. The
sample is then acidified with hydrochloric acid, bromine water is added and the
mixture allowed to stand until clear.

(1) Reactions of bromine water with sample:

HCN +Br
2
CNBr +HBr

KCNS +4 Br
2
+4 H
2
O KBr +CNBr +H
2
SO
4
+6 HBr

H
2
S +4 Br
2
+4 H
2
O 8 HBr +H
2
SO
4


The excess bromine is destroyed with arsenious acid and a pyridine-benzidine
mixture is added. The sample is then allowed to stand for 10 minutes.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 85





(2) Reaction of the pyridine and benzidine with sample:

N
N
+CNBr
CN
Br
(a)



N N
+
H
+2H
2
NC
6
H
4
-C
6
H
4
-NH
2

Br
CN C
6
H
4
-C
6
H
4
NH
2
NHC
6
H
4
C
6
H
4
-NH
2
+(Br)
-
+H
2
N-CN
(b)


After standing the sample is diluted to volume. The absorbance is read on a
spectrophotometer at 525 m and calculated as weight-ppm cyanide.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 86





SULFIDE IN REFINERY WASTE WATER USING CADMIUM CHLORIDE
UOP METHOD 683


Scope

This method is for determining sulfide in refinery waste water. It cannot be used on
caustic solutions. Good precision can be obtained when a titrant volume of 10 ml or
more is used. The estimated standard deviation of 0.013 was obtained on a sample
containing 0.8 wt-% S. However, with titrant volumes of less than 10 ml, the results
may be high by as much as 5% of the value found.

Outline of Method

The sample is pipetted into 100 ml of water containing a small amount of
ammonium hydroxide. It is then titrated potentiometrically with standard cadmium
chloride and the result calculated as weight-percent sulfur. The titration curve may
have 2 "breaks". The possible reactions are as follows:

To the first "break":

Cd
++
+(NH
4
)
2
S CdS +2NH
4
+


Between the first and second "break":

either (a) Cd
++
+(NH
4
)
2
S S
4
CdS +4S +2NH
4
+


(b) Cd
++
+(NH
4
)
2
S S
4
CdS
3
+2NH
4
+


However, in this method the sulfide is calculated to the second "break" with the
equivalent weight of sulfur being 16.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 87






Precision

The estimated standard deviation (esd) at the 0.8% sulfur level is shown below.
Duplicate results by the same operator are not considered suspect unless they
differ by more than the amount shown in the "allowable difference" column (95%
probability).

Sulfur Allowable
Type of Level, No. of esd, Difference,
Sample wt-% Replicates wt-% S wt -%

Solution of
(NH
4
)
2
S 0.8 11 0.013 0.026

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 88





CARBON ON CATALYST BY " LECO" WR-12
WIDE RANGE CARBON DETERMINATOR
UOP METHOD 703


Scope

This method gives supplementary instructions for the determination of 0.01 to 80.0
wt-% carbon on catalysts.

It is necessary that the analyst be provided with the history of the sample so that the
proper sample preparation can be applied.

Outline of Method

The sample is weighed in a ceramic crucible, mixed with accelerators and burned in
an induction furnace using oxygen carrier gas. The products of combustion pass
through a purifying train consisting of a dust trap, antimony metal for chloride
removal, manganese dioxide for sulfur removal, and a heated catalyst lube for
conversion of carbon monoxide to carbon dioxide and hydrogen to water. The
carbon dioxide is adsorbed on molecular sieves at ambient temperature. After the
adsorption period is ended, the molecular sieve column is rapidly heated to 600F
(316C) and the carbon dioxide eluted and carried through the measuring thermistor
by an auxiliary flow of oxygen. The output of the thermistor bridge is integrated and
read on a digital voltmeter and converted to percent carbon by calculation.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 89





Precision

The estimated standard deviation (esd) for carbon at different concentrations is
shown below.

For the 95% probability level, duplicate results by the same operator should not be
considered suspect unless they differ by more than the amounts shown in the
"allowable difference" column.


Carbon Level, Number of Number of esd, Allowable
% C Pairs Used Replicates % C Difference, % C

0.01-0.6 5 8 0.005 0.02
0.6-2 7 0.015 0.05
2-5 7 0.022 0.07
20 5 0.334 1.25
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 90





GAS ANALYSIS BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
USING A TWO-INJECTION TECHNIQUE
UOP METHOD 709


Scope

This method is for determining most of the components, including low
concentrations of total C
6
+ hydrocarbons, normally found in a wide variety of
gaseous hydrocarbon mixtures obtained from refining processes or from natural
sources. Butene-1 is not resolved from isobutylene and argon is determined as a
composite with oxygen. The lower limit of detection for a single component is 0.1
mol-%.

Outline of Method

All the constituents of a total gas sample cannot be resolved by a single
chromatographic column. Therefore, in this procedure, 2 columns are connected in
series with appropriate coupling valves to a thermal conductivity detector. Each
column is used to separate a specific portion of the total sample. The first column is
able to resolve gases in the C
2
-C
5
range. The second column separates the light
gases: H
2
, O
2
+A (composite), N
2
, CH
4
and CO.

Precision

Based on 6 replicate determinations, the estimated standard deviation (esd) in
Table 2 was calculated for the gases listed.

Duplicate results should not differ by more than the allowable difference indicated
(95% probability).
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 91





TABLE 2

GAS ANALYSIS BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
USING A TWO-INJECTION TECHNIQUE


ALLOWABLE
LEVEL, ESD, DIFFERENCE,
COMPONENT MOL-% MOL-% MOL-%

HYDROGEN 21 0.186 0.68
NITROGEN 7 0.087 0.32
METHANE 12 0.180 0.66
CARBON MONOXIDE 8 0.266 0.97
PROPANE 8 0.077 0.28
PROPYLENE 6 0.203 0.74
ISOBUTANE 7 0.158 0.58
n-BUTANE 6 0.074 0.27
ISOBUTYLENE 6 0.264 0.96


157048
Analytical Methods
Page 92





OILY MATERIAL IN REFINERY WATERS
BY INFRARED SPECTROPHOTOMETRY
UOP METHOD 726

Scope

This method is for determining oily material in refinery waters. It is especially
suitable for routine monitoring of effluent streams known to be relatively constant as
to the nature of the oily material present. The method has an advantage over
physical test methods in that volatile hydrocarbons can be determined and are not
lost.

Outline of Method

Oily material is extracted from water with carbon tetrachloride. The infrared
absorbances of the extract are determined at 2860 cm
-1
(3.50 m) and 2930 cm
-1

(3.42 m), and these are used to calculate the concentration of oily matter.

Definition

Oily material means any substance containing -CH, -CH
2
-, or -CH
3
groups which
show infrared adsorption bands at 2860 cm
-1
(3.50 m) and 2930 cm
-1
(3.42 m)
and which is extractable from acidified water with carbon tetrachloride.

Sensitivity

The sensitivity of this method is about 1 ppm. The method can be extended to
include oil concentrations of less than 1 ppm by using cells of longer path length (5-
and 10-cm cells are common), larger samples of the water and smaller volumes of
carbon tetrachloride for the extraction.

Precision and Accuracy

Results are reported to the nearest part per million. Relative esd as reported in the
reference API method is 5%. Duplicate results should be considered suspect if they
differ by more than 20% of the average value.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 93





DISTILLATION OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AT REDUCED PRESSURES
ASTM D 1160


Scope

This method covers the determination, at reduced pressures, of the boiling
temperature ranges of petroleum products which can be partially or completely
vaporized at a maximum liquid temperature of 750F (400C) at pressures down to
1 mm Hg, absolute.

Summary of Method

The sample is distilled, at some predetermined and accurately controlled pressure,
between 1 mm Hg, absolute, and atmospheric, under conditions which provide
approximately one theoretical plate fractionation. Data are obtained from which a
distillation curve relating volume distilled and boiling point at the controlled pressure
can be prepared.

Significance

Some petroleum products decompose when distilled at atmospheric pressure. This
distillation method is for determination of distillation characteristics of such products.
The apparatus and conditions of test provide approximately one theoretical plate
fractionation.

Results by this method are not comparable with those of other ASTM procedures
for the determination of boiling point ranges of petroleum products, such as ASTM
Method D 86 for Distillation of Petroleum Products.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 94





SULFUR IN PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(LAMP METHOD)
ASTM D 1266


Scope

This method determines the total sulfur in liquid petroleum products in
concentrations above 0.002 weight percent. The procedure involves burning the
sample in a closed system using a suitable lamp apparatus. An artificial atmosphere
composed of 70% CO, and 30% O
2
is used to burn the sample to prevent formation
of nitrogen oxides. The oxides of sulfur are then oxidized to sulfuric acid. Sulfur as
sulfate is determined acidimetrically by titration or gravimetrically by precipitation as
barium sulfate.

Precision

Samples should contain in the range of 0.01% to 0.4% sulfur.

Repeatability Duplicate results by the same operator should not differ by more
than 0.005%.

Reproducibility Results by two laboratories should not differ by more than 0.010 +
0.025 S, where S =the total sulfur content, weight percent, of the sample.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 95





ASTM COLOR OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(ASTM COLOR SCALE)
ASTM D 1500


Introduction

This method has replaced the former ASTM Method D 155, Test for Color of
Lubricating Oil and Petrolatum by Means of ASTM Union Colorimeter. Method D
155 was withdrawn as an ASTM Tentative on J uly 1,1960. Method D 1500 is better
than the former Method D 155 in three respects: (1) the glass standards are
specified in fundamental terms; (2) the differences in chromaticity between
successive glass standards are uniform throughout the scale; and (3) the lighter
colored standards more nearly match the color of petroleum products.

Scope

This method covers the visual determination of the color of a wide variety of
petroleum products such as lubricating oils, heating oils, diesel fuel oils, and
petroleum waxes.

Report

Report as the color of the sample, the designation of the glass producing a
matching color, for example: 7.5 ASTM Color.

If the color of the sample is intermediate between those of two standard glasses
record the designation of the darker glass preceded by the letter "L", for example:
"L7.5 ASTM Color". Never report the color as being darker than a given standard
except those darker than 8, for example: ASTM Color.

If the sample has been diluted with kerosene, report the color of the mixture
followed by the abbreviation "Dil," for example: "L7.5 Dil ASTM Color".
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 96





Precision

The results obtained by different operators in the same laboratory should not vary
by more than 0.5 number, and the same variation should apply for determinations
between different laboratories at the 96 percent confidence level.

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 97





SULFUR IN PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
(HIGH-TEMPERATURE METHOD)
ASTM D 1552


Scope

This method covers two procedures for the determination of total sulfur in petroleum
products, including lubricating oils containing additives, and additive concentrates.
The method is applicable to samples boiling above 350F (177C) and containing
not less than 0.06 percent sulfur. Chlorine in concentrations less than 1 percent
does not interfere. Nitrogen when present in excess of 0.1 percent may interfere;
the extent of such interference may be dependent on the type of nitrogen
compound as well as the combustion conditions. The alkali and alkaline earth
metals, as well as zinc, phosphorus, and lead, do not interfere.

Summary of Method

The sample is burned in a stream of oxygen at a sufficiently high temperature to
convert about 97 percent of the sulfur to sulfur dioxide. A standardization factor is
employed to obtain accurate results. The combustion products are passed into an
absorber containing an acid solution of potassium iodide and starch indicator. A
slight blue color is developed in the absorber solution by the addition of standard
potassium iodate solution. As combustion proceeds, bleaching the blue color, more
iodate is added. The amount of standard iodate consumed during the combustion is
a measure of the sulfur content of the sample.

Report

Report the results of the test to the nearest 0.01 percent.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 98





Precision

The following criteria should be used for judging the acceptability of results (95
percent confidence):

Repeatability Duplicate results by the same operator should be considered
suspect if they differ by more than the following amounts:

Sulfur, weight percent
(Range) Repeatability

0 to 0.5 0.05
0.5 to 1.0 0.07
1.0 to 2.0 0.10
2.0 to 3.0 0.16
3.0 to 4.0 0.22
4.0 to 5.0 0.24

Reproducibility The result submitted by each of two laboratories should not be
considered suspect unless the two results differ by more than the following
amounts:

Sulfur, weight percent
(Range) Reproducibility

0 to 0.5 0.05
0.5 to 1.0 0.11
1.0 to 2.0 0.17
2.0 to 3.0 0.26
3.0 to 4.0 0.40
4.0 to 5.0 0.54
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 99





KNOCK CHARACTERISTICS OF MOTOR FUELS
BY THE RESEARCH METHOD
ASTM D 2699
Scope

This method determines the knock characteristics of motor gasolines, intended for
use in spark-ignition engines. A Research octane number (RON) of 100 or lower is
the volume percent of iso-octane in a blend with n-heptane that matches the knock
intensity of the unknown sample. For numbers above 100, a comparison is made to
iso-octane and milliliters of tetraethyllead required to match knock intensity.

Summary of Method

The RON of a gasoline is determined by comparing its knocking tendency with
those for blends of reference fuels of known octane. Knock intensity is measured by
an electronic detonation meter on a testing unit consisting of a single cylinder
engine.

Repeatability

Data for limits on duplicate results by the same operator have not been developed.

Reproducibility

Results by different laboratories should be considered suspect if their difference is
greater than the limits shown below:

Ave. Research
Octane No. Level Limits

80 1.2
85 0.9
90 0.7
95 0.6
100 0.7
105 1.1
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 100





KNOCK CHARACTERISTICS OF MOTOR FUELS
BY THE MOTOR METHOD
ASTM D 2700


Scope

This method covers the determination of the knock characteristics of motor and
aviation-type gasolines, intended for use in spark-ignition engines, in terms of
ASTM motor octane numbers.

Summary of Method

The ASTM Motor Octane Number of a fuel is determined by comparing its
knocking tendency with those for blends of ASTM reference fuels of known octane
number under standard operating conditions. This is done by varying the
compression ratio to obtain standard knock intensity, as measured by an electronic
detonation meter.

Definitions

ASTM Motor Octane Number of motor and aviation-type gasolines of 100 and
below The volume percent, to the nearest tenth, of iso-octane (equals 100.0) in a
blend with n-heptane (equals 0.0) that matches the knock intensity of the unknown
sample, when compared by this method.

ASTM Motor Octane Number of a motor gasoline above 100 The value, to the
nearest tenth, that corresponds to the equivalent engine rating in terms of milliliters
of tetraethyl lead in iso-octane.
157048
Analytical Methods
Page 101





Precision

Repeatability Data to determine acceptable limits for duplicate results obtained by
the same operator have not been developed.

Reproducibility The difference between two, single, and independent results,
obtained by different operators working in different laboratories on identical test
material would, in the long run, and in the normal and correct operation of the test
method, exceed the following values in only one case in 20 (see table).

Average Motor Octane
Number Level Limits Octane Number

80 1.2
85 1.1
90 1.0
95 1.1
99 1.5
100.1 1.1
105 1.8

157048
Analytical Methods
Page 102





SAMPLING STACKS FOR PARTICULATE MATTER
ASTM D 3685


Scope

This method covers the sampling and determination of particulate matter in stack
gases.

Significance

The following procedure describes a method of sampling in stacks and flues which
has been standardized within the limits of the many conditions which are
encountered in the normal course of sampling stacks. No one procedure or set of
apparatus will apply to all problems. The recognition of one set of apparatus which
will satisfy a number of commonly encountered conditions will often leave many
other problems unanswered. The objective has been to select apparatus that will
give a reliable answer when applied to a variety of problems.

For compliance with regulations in the United States EPA method #5 is usually
required. Check with local authorities before using any lab method required for
compliance with environmental regulations.



157048
Procedures
Page 1



PROCEDURES


INTRODUCTION

The procedures given in this section are general instructions which may serve as a
guide for each unit. They cannot be specific because of the variations in the design
and construction of each Fluid Catalytic Cracking Unit. These methods should be
used by each refiner to develop a detailed set of operating instructions for his
particular unit.

Although basic procedures will be fairly consistent from unit to unit, the FCC is such
a flexible process that several different strategies exist for operating an FCC unit.
Individual refinery requirements and product markets should be carefully considered
to determine the most economic strategy to employ for the FCC unit. These
procedures will cover the basic operating steps for startup, shutdown and
emergency situations. Specific operating strategies for maximum economic benefit
will be left to the individual refiner.

This section is divided according to topic. These subsections are:

A. Refractory Dryout -- Initial Startup
B. Normal Startup
C. Establish Normal Operating Conditions
D. Normal Shutdown
E. Emergency Procedures
F. Catalyst Handling
G. Special Operations

Throughout these procedures, references will be made to recirculation catalyst,
combustor and upper regenerator, which implies a high efficiency style combustor
regenerator, catalyst coolers, lift gas and alternate riser termination devices. Not all
units will have these features. Where not applicable to your specific unit, certain
steps in the procedures will not be followed. The basic principles for unit operation
are the same, however, regardless of the specific features of the unit. Refer to
Figures 1 through 3 for diagrams of the unit showing the key streams used in the
following procedures.
157048
Procedures
Page 2



A. REFRACTORY DRYOUT -- INITIAL STARTUP

The startup operations on the FCC Unit require careful coordination and planning.
The reactor-regenerator, main column, and Gas Concentration Unit must all be
inspected to verify proper construction and that the equipment is ready for use.
Utility systems should be commissioned and all catalyst and required chemicals on
site.

All instruments must be calibrated and control valves ready for service. Inspection
and precommissioning work is covered in depth in the UOP FCC Operations
Manual. The startup procedures that follow assume all equipment is ready for use.

The protective refractory lining in the regenerator, riser, and parts of the reactor
must be cured and dried before it is used. Failure to do this properly can result in
premature failure of this important protection. The dryout procedure is time
consuming, but once the refractory has been cured and dried, subsequent startups
will use a shorter procedure.

Minor repair work to the refractory will not necessarily require a full high
temperature dryout, but sufficient time must be allowed for curing and air drying. In
all cases the refractory manufacturer's guidelines should be consulted.

The initial dryout isolates the reactor and regenerator from the main column at the
vapor line blind. The vapor line vent opened upstream of the blind is opened to
allow air flow from the reactor to atmosphere. Any work remaining on the column,
gas compressor and Gas Concentration section can continue while the dryout is in
progress.

After application, the refractory lining contains three types of water: free, absorbed,
and chemically bonded. The curing step at ambient conditions allows time for the
chemical bonding to be completed. The free water must then be removed slowly to
prevent rapid expansion to steam that could damage the refractory. The absorbed
water is removed more slowly during a longer, high temperature step. AlI of the
157048
Procedures
Page 3



refractory must be cured and dried; be sure that air is directed to every part of the
reactor-regenerator system.

The dryout may be summarized as:

1. Controlled heating of regenerator and reactor with hold steps for water
removal.

2. Reactor-regenerator assembly field test for 24 hours.

3. Controlled cooling of regenerator and reactor.

The source of heat for the dryout may be the air blower and direct fired air heater,
as in the following procedure, or it may be supplied with internal local heaters. The
choice may be dictated by the particular vendor preference and/or availability of
suitable equipment.

Procedure

The following procedure is intended to supplement the refractory vendor procedure.
During the dryout, several hold periods are maintained at a constant temperature.
The time period for the hold may vary depending on the type and thickness of the
refractory lining. Where the vendor procedure calls for more conservative steps,
those steps should be followed. Should the following steps be more conservative
than the vendor, further discussion is warranted to confirm that the dryout will be
adequate. In all cases, the procedure of the vendor responsible for the
application/performance of the refractory shall govern.

1. Refractory Curing Step

a. The curing procedure shall begin immediately after installation and shall
last a minimum of 24 hours. For the 4" low density gunned lining in the
regenerator, water or membrane curing steps may also be included.

157048
Procedures
Page 4



b. During the curing procedure, the temperature of the shell and lining shall
be kept above 60F (16C).

2. Refractory Air Drying

a. After curing, the refractory lining shall be tested by tapping with a one
pound hammer at one foot intervals over the entire lining surface. Any
voids or dry filled spaces will emit a dull sound and these areas shall be
removed and replaced.

b. After the 24 hour curing period, the refractory lining shall be air dried for
at least another 24 hours by natural or forced ventilation.

3. Preparation Steps for Dryout

a. Isolate the structure with blinds in the feed, torch oil, fuel or gas to the CO
boiler and air heater, steam to the riser and stripper, and reactor vapor
line.

b. Double block and bleed the riser blast points, flue gas quench nozzles
and all steam purge points.

c. Remove the blankoffs on the catalyst loading lines and the drain points in
the flue gas system.

d. Remove the blankoff on the vent nozzle on top of the reactor shell and
install a gate valve. Attach a pipe stack approximately six feet (two
meters) long to the valve for personnel protection.
This valve will only be used if the reactor vapor line vent does not pass
enough hot air to adequately heat up the reactor or if the riser termination
device is highly contained so that there is little or no air flow through the
reactor shell. Open the vapor line vent valve upstream of the vapor line
blind.

157048
Procedures
Page 5



e. Connect the reactor skin thermocouples to a recorder for temperature
monitoring.

f. Open air purges to all instrument DA points and slide valve packing
glands.

g. Commission the steam systems of the flue gas cooler and catalyst cooler,
if present. Steam drum boilout procedures can be combined with the
dryout as long as the dryout procedure governs. The cooler tubes must
have circulating water flow for protection during the dryout.

h. Close the spent and regenerated catalyst slide valves. Check the blast
and sample connections on the catalyst standpipes and drain any free
water.

i. Open the snort valve on the main air blower discharge.

j. Prepare the direct fired air heater for firing. Prepare alternate internal
heaters if they are to be used.

4. Start the Main Air Blower

a. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the air blower startup.

b. Begin closing the discharge snort valve, forcing air into the regenerator.
As the pressure of the regenerator rises, the power required to drive the
blower increases. Check the air blower's performance curve and keep the
machine out of the surge condition.

5. Refractory Dryout

a. Open the blast and sample connections on the catalyst standpipes and
drain any free water.

157048
Procedures
Page 6



b. Follow the vendor's instructions for dryout or the following instructions, if a
suitable alternate is not available. Values given are approximate and to
be used as guidelines. Good judgment should be used for any situations
which deviate from the described steps.

c. Raise the temperature in the regenerator at a rate of 50F (30C) per
hour to 250F (120C). Adjust the regenerator pressure to control the air
blower discharge temperature. Hold at this temperature for a minimum of
12 hours. Open the recirculation catalyst slide valve and cooled catalyst
slide valve (if present), to ensure air circulates to all parts of the
regenerator.

d. As the regenerator is heating up, open the regenerated catalyst slide
valve to circulate air up the riser into the reactor. Vent at the reactor vapor
line vent and reactor shell if required. Raise the reactor temperature at
50F (30C) per hour to 250F (120C). Open the spent catalyst slide
valve to circulate air through the standpipe into the stripper. Air flow
should be primarily through the regenerated catalyst slide valve so that
the insulating refractory in the riser is heated thoroughly.

NOTE: It is important that the air blower is used only for initial dryout in
the reactor. For later startups, only steam should be used to
heat up the reactor. During operation, coke will form on the
reactor internals and walls. There is a real danger of damaging
oxidation or fire if this material is exposed to air at high
temperature.

e. For the cold wall regenerated catalyst standpipe, wye section and riser
with 5" high density vibracast refractory lining, the minimum hold period at
250F (120C) is 8 hours. It may be that some of this cold wall lining has
already been installed and dried out in the shop. In that case, the
remaining reactor lining will dictate the hold period required. For the 3/4"
abrasion lining in the upper riser and reactor vessel, the minimum hold
period at 250F (120C) is 4 hours.
157048
Procedures
Page 7



f. After the 250F (120C) hold period, light the direct fired air heater and
raise the temperature in the regenerator and reactor at 50F (30C) per
hour to 650F (350C) and hold for 12 hours for 4" gunned lining, 8 hours
for 5" vibracast lining, or 4 hours for 3/4" abrasion lining. An operator
should be stationed by the air heater any time it is in service.

g. When the regenerator temperature reaches 500F (260C), start the
purge steam flows to the torch oil guns and nozzles, and any quench
nozzles, to keep them cool. The spent catalyst standpipe expansion joint
steam purge can also be started at this time.

h. While the reactor and regenerator are heating up, the equipment should
be checked for expansion problems. Completely inspect the vessels,
standpipes and structure every hour until the regenerator plenum has
reached its maximum, generally ~1200F (650C), and every two hours
thereafter. Check:

(1) That the equipment is free to expand and is not contacting any
structural members.

(2) That expansion joint tie rods are loose and not binding.

(3) That catalyst lines and standpipes are free to move.

(4) That small piping, especially instrument lines and electrical cables, is
not under strain.

i. During the 650F (350C) hold period is a convenient time to perform the
first hot bolting step. Systematically hot bolt the entire reactor-regenerator
section.

j. All slide valves should be hot stroked at all hold temperatures. Position
indicators should be checked with board readings and the valves checked
157048
Procedures
Page 8



locally for free movement. Manual and handwheel operation should be
checked and any problems corrected.

k. Raise the regenerator temperature at 100F (55C) per hour to 1300F
(700C) or the highest temperature permitted by the air heater (may be
1200F (650C)). Raise the reactor temperature at 100F (55C) per hour
to 950F (510C).

l. Hold the regenerator temperature at 1250F (680C) or the highest
achievable for 12 hours for 4" gunned lining or 8 hours for 5" vibracast
lining.

m. When the regenerator temperature reaches 1000F (540C), begin hot
bolting the entire reactor-regenerator section again. Check for any
expansion related problems.

6. High Temperature Field Test of Reactor-Regenerator

At the end of the final refractory dryout hold period, a high temperature test is
conducted on the reactor, regenerator and interconnecting piping under
simulated low pressure operating conditions. The integrity of field welded and
bolted joints under the strains developed by the expansion of lines and vessels
is checked before putting catalyst and oil into the system. This test is only
conducted during the initial start of the unit.

a. Follow the procedure as described in the UOP Schedule A, Project
Specification 314, Reactor-Regenerator Assembly Field Testing
Procedure. The test can only be conducted after:

(1) The refractory linings in the regenerator, reactor and associated
piping have been fully cured and dried.

(2) The direct fired air heater lining has been cured and dried.

157048
Procedures
Page 9



(3) Any expansion related problems discovered in the dryout have been
resolved.

b. The reactor should be held at 950F (510C) and the regenerator at
1200-1250F (650-680C) for a 24 hour period before the system
pressure is raised.

c. Begin closing the reactor vapor line vent valve and flue gas slide valve
and raise the reactor and regenerator pressure to approximately 28 psig
(2 kg/cm
2
) or to the value specified in the 314 Specification.

d. Hold the reactor and regenerator at these conditions for a minimum of 30
minutes. Check all flanges and joints in the system for leaks. Check the
entire structure for any expansion related problems.

7. Cooldown and Inspection

a. After the high temperature field test is completed, reduce the reactor
regenerator pressure back to the previous level.

b. Begin reducing the air heater outlet temperature at 100F (55C) per
hour. When the regenerator temperature reaches 500F (260C), stop the
steam purges to the torch oil guns and nozzles.

c. Shutdown the DFAH when the temperature control becomes erratic due
to low fuel gas flow.

d. Continue air flow through the vessels until the temperature is within 50F
(30C) of the blower discharge temperature and then shut down the main
air blower.

e. Open all manways and vents. Use fans or other air moving equipment to
cool the vessel internals to ambient conditions.

157048
Procedures
Page 10



f. Remove the distributor flange at the bottom of the wye section to allow
inspection of the wye section.

g. Inspect all refractory linings in the catalyst system, including the reactor,
regenerator, riser, standpipes, cyclones, air heater, flue gas line and
orifice chamber. Lock each slide valve in position to prevent accidental
movement during inspection. Small hairline cracks will be present in the
refractory and do not present a problem. Large cracks greater than 3/8"
(10 mm) that extend all the way to the shell should be repaired.

h. For the final flange assembly before startup, glue of ceramic blanket to
the refractory retaining collars on all cold wall manways or blind flanges
before they are closed (see UOP standard specification 3-24-2 Figure 4).


B. NORMAL STARTUP

The normal startup of the unit can be divided into the following steps:

1. Steam out the reactor and main column, and heat up the catalyst section.

2. Heat up the fractionation section.

3. Load catalyst to the regenerator and heat catalyst.

4. Start the wet gas compressor.

5. Circulate catalyst between the reactor and regenerator.

6. Start oil to the riser.

7. Establish normal operating conditions.

157048
Procedures
Page 11



It is assumed that the unit is cold and empty, and that all precommissioning
activities and refractory dryout have been completed. General guidelines are
given in these procedures and each refiner should develop specific startup
procedures for their particular unit. Variations from the steps given here are
acceptable as long as the basic intent is followed and safety matters are not
compromised.

1. Steam Out Reactor and Main Column

a. The following procedure starts from the condition that all equipment and
vessels are full of air. Steaming of the reactor and fractionation section is
used to free the unit of oxygen. The following items should be completed
before the steam out is begun:

(1) The unit must be completely flushed, all vessels and piping closed
up, all orifice plates and instrumentation installed, and all equipment
ready for startup.

(2) The reactor vapor line blind should be removed at this time (refer to
Figure 4). Some refiners prefer to leave this blind in place until later
in the startup sequence. This is acceptable but it is generally more
convenient to remove the blind now. The procedure following is
designed to use the reactor containing steam as a protection buffer
between the regenerator with air and the main column with
hydrocarbon.

(3) If the vapor line blind is out, the vapor line vent should be blocked
and blinded.

(4) Remove the blankoff from the main column high point vent and open
the valve a couple turns.

(5) Isolate the wet gas compressor at the suction and discharge lines.
Steam should not be allowed to enter the compressor.
157048
Procedures
Page 12



(6) Line up backup nitrogen to the DG purge gas header and start purge
gas to the reactor instrumentation DG points.

(7) Make sure the regenerated and spent catalyst slide valves are fully
shut. All slide valves should be operational with hydraulic systems
commissioned.

(8) Low points from various equipment and piping should be prepared to
drain condensate as the steam out progresses.

b. Start steam to the base of the riser, to the feed distributors, to the reactor
stripper, and to the spent catalyst standpipe blast point. As the reactor is
purged and heated, steam will flow through the vapor line into the main
column. Continually drain condensate at the riser, reactor, stripper, and
main column low point drains. The spent catalyst standpipe blast point will
have to be used as a drain after the initial steaming is completed.

c. Start steam into the bottom of the main column and into the sidecut
strippers. Vent at the top of the main column and at the overhead
receiver. Do not run the condenser fans or water to the trim cooler during
this procedure.

d. Steam through the overhead receiver to the wet gas compressor suction
drum. Vent at the drum and drain condensate from low points. Steam
through the spillback lines and the interstage receiver but make sure the
compressor remains isolated. Connect steam hoses as needed if there is
trouble achieving a good steam plume from vents.

e. Continually drain condensate from all low points. As the vessels and
piping heat up, less steam will condense and the low points can be
throttled to match the condensate drain rate. Condensate collecting in the
overhead receiver water boot can be pumped out with the sour water
pumps.

157048
Procedures
Page 13



f. When there is a good steam plume out the top of the main column, main
column receiver, compressor suction drum and interstage receiver for at
least two hours, the system should be free of air and the steamout is
complete.

g. A quick leak check should be conducted on the system. Throttle all vent
and drain valves to raise the pressure in the system to 10-12 psig (0.7-0.8
kg/cm
2
). Check all flanges, valve packings, etc. for leaks. It may be that
too much steam is condensed in the main column condenser to permit
building pressure for this leak test.

h. Check all low points to ensure that all water is drained. Verify that the
spent catalyst standpipe is being drained from the blast and sample
connection.

i. Start injecting fuel gas at the LCO stripper vapor return line. Raise the
reactor and main column pressure to 10-12 psig (0.7-0.8kg/cm
2
) before
reducing the steam injection. This will ensure that air is not drawn into the
unit as the steam condenses.

j. Close all vents and continue draining water from all low points. Never
leave a drain point unattended with fuel gas in the system.

NOTE: Fuel gas injection to the LCO stripper should be enough that the
pressure transmitter on the main column receiver will keep the
overpressure control valve to the flare open a small amount at all
times. This will ensure that any air that might enter the system
will be purged out to the flare. On older units which used air as
the purge gas to the reactor instrument taps, air from the DA
points in the reactor is carried by the steam flows to the main
column and receiver. If this air is not purged out, the
concentration of oxygen can build up in the receiver to a high
level.

157048
Procedures
Page 14



k. The main column overhead condenser can be put in service to condense
the steam and build a concentration of fuel gas in the overhead receiver.
Fuel gas pressure must be adequate to ensure that a vacuum cannot
develop in any of the vessels. This is done in preparation for starting the
wet gas compressor.

l. The Gas Concentration Unit should be air-freed by steamout in parallel
with the reactor-regenerator-main column sections. The columns and
absorbers should be pressured with fuel gas at the conclusion of the
steamout. Drain any free water from all low points.

2. Start the Main Air Blower

a. Be sure all DA and DG purges and all instrumentation in the reactor-
regenerator section are in service.

b. Start the main air blower after the fractionation section is pressured up
with fuel gas. Refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual for the
blower startup procedure.

c. The differential pressure between the reactor and regenerator should be
maintained at a negative (reactor higher) 1.5 psig (0.1 kg/cm
2
). This will
ensure that any leakage through the slide valves will put steam into the
regenerator rather than air into the reactor.

NOTE: The steam in the reactor acts as a buffer between the
regenerator containing air and the main column which
contains some fuel gas. As long as the reactor pressure is
maintained as the highest level in the system, no
contamination of air and fuel gas can occur.
157048
Procedures
Page 15



d. Open the recirculating catalyst slide valve and catalyst cooler slide valve
(if present) to allow heated air to flow up the standpipes to the upper
regenerator.

e. If the unit is equipped with a power recovery unit, follow the
manufacturer's instructions for starting flue gas to the expander turbine

f. Begin water circulation through the catalyst cooler tubes (if present) and
flue gas cooler tubes.

3. Light the Direct Fired Air Heater

a. When the flow from the main air blower has stabilized, light the direct fired
air heater according to the manufacturer's instructions.

b. Heat up the regenerator at a maximum rate of 200F (110C) per hour to
a target temperature of 1000F (540C).

c. Start fluidizing air to the upper regenerator fluffing rings and to the
catalyst cooler fluidizing lances (if present) at minimum flow.

4. Inventory the Fractionation Section with Oil

a. As the regenerator is being heated, the fractionation section can be
inventoried with oil to begin circulation and pumparound flows. During this
process the main column overhead should be maintained above 230F
(110C) to minimize steam condensation in the column. Fuel gas flow
should be maintained to the LCO stripper vapor return line so that a small
purge flow is maintained through the overhead receiver overpressure line
to flare.

b. Since LCO and HCO will be unavailable for flushing oil to the instruments
and the main column bottoms pump flushes (gland seal, wear rings and
throat bushing), the flush header should be commissioned with raw oil or
157048
Procedures
Page 16



a light gas oil from outside the battery limits if the raw oil is very heavy.
When the LCO and HCO products become available, the flush systems
will be changed back to the proper stream.

c. Start raw oil feed through the startup filling line to the bottom of the main
column. The addition of cold feed into the column will condense some
steam since it passes countercurrent with steam over the disk and donut
trays. Therefore, add raw oil to the column slowly until the column is hot.
Pay special care to removing free water from the low points in all vessels,
exchangers and piping because sudden water vaporization can damage
equipment.

d. Slowly warm up the main column bottoms steam generators by backing in
steam through the bypass around the non-return valves. These steam
generators will be used to heat the raw oil in the main column.

e. Start the main column bottoms pump and send oil through one of the
steam generators. This circulation must be done slowly at first to avoid
cooling the bottom of the main column. Raise the raw oil outlet
temperature as high as possible, then start flow through the second
steam generator. Try to maintain the column overhead temperature high
enough to drive water overhead.

f. When the column bottom temperature has stabilized at its highest level
from the steam heating, slowly start bottoms circulation through the other
bottoms circulation loops. Circulate through the cold sections of the
system slowly until they are heated to avoid cooling the column bottom
excessively. Watch the bottoms level and bring in more raw oil as the
total bottoms circuit is inventoried. Start flow from the net bottoms pumps
through the startup line back to the raw oil charge pumps to complete the
loop. Check for water at the low points throughout the bottoms system.
This circulation and heatup will slowly dry out the bottoms system.

157048
Procedures
Page 17



g. After the bottoms circuit is hot and dry with good circulation flows, check
for free water in the LCO and HCO system low points. Check that the
sidecut strippers inlet level control valves are fully closed. Start a small
flow of hot raw oil from the main column bottoms up to the LCO circuit
return line via the startup filling line. This will put hot oil into the upper part
of the column. When the LCO draw tray is full, it will overflow to inventory
to HCO section and then overflow back to the bottom of the column. Add
raw oil as necessary to maintain the bottoms level as the LCO and HCO
sections are inventoried. Keep the bottoms temperature as hot as
possible with the steam generators.

h. Drain all free water in the LCO and HCO circuits and slowly start oil flow
through the heat exchange circuits in the Gas Concentration Unit,
bypassing the exchangers. Check that the main column overhead
temperature is high enough to avoid steam condensation in the column.
Do not place the sidecut strippers into operation at this time.

i. Circulate oil flow through the LCO and HCO circuits until the lines are hot
and all free water has been removed. Maintain a small flow from the hot
bottoms circuit up to the LCO section to keep these sections hot and
overflow the draw trays back to the bottoms.

j. Inventory the main column receiver with startup naphtha. Don't start reflux
at this time as it will cool off the top of the column and cause additional
steam condensation.

k. This method of starting oil circulation tries to minimize water accumulation
in the fractionation section. It is very important to avoid circulating free
water back to hot sections of the column as the rapid water vaporization
could cause damage to the trays. All changes in operation and flows
should be made slowly and only after first draining any free water from
low points. Spare pumps should be drained and switched occasionally to
prevent water accumulation.

157048
Procedures
Page 18



5. Prepare the Regenerator for Catalyst Inventory

a. The heating of the main column and the regenerator can be taking place
at the same time. The regenerator is being heated with the direct fired air
heater and steam is flowing through the reactor. Completely inspect the
reactor-regenerator structure every hour until the maximum air heater
outlet has been reached, around 1200F (650C), and once every two
hours thereafter. Check:

(1) That the equipment is free to expand and is not contacting any
structural members.

(2) That expansion joint tie rods are loose and not binding.

(3) That catalyst lines and standpipes are free to move.

(4) That small piping, especially instrument lines and electrical cables, is
not under strain.

b. When the regenerator temperatures reach 500F (260C), start purge
steam to the torch oil guns and nozzles, and any quench nozzles in the
upper regenerator. Commission the flue gas steam generator before the
temperature exceeds 500F (260C). Change air purges to packing
glands and expansion joints over to steam at 500F (260C).

c. As soon as the regenerator temperatures are above 450F (230C), the
differential pressure transmitter across the spent catalyst slide valve can
be placed in service. This transmitter should read the same as the
reactor-regenerator differential pressure transmitter as it is measuring the
same two pressures. If it does not, this is an indication that there may be
condensate in the spent catalyst standpipe. The water can either be
drained from the blast and sample point, or preferably, it can be slowly
drained into the regenerator where it will vaporize and exit with the flue
gas. Manually open the spent slide valve a small amount to continually
157048
Procedures
Page 19



drain the standpipe so that water does not accumulate. The desired
situation is that all of the condensate is kept drained, and if drained into
the regenerator, it is done slowly so that when the water vaporizes, it will
not cause a large pressure surge in the regenerator which could push air
into the reactor.

d. When the air heater temperature reaches 600F (315C), start hot bolting
flanges and manways and systematically hot bolt the entire regenerator
and flue gas system. Repeat this procedure when the air heater
temperature exceeds 1000F (540C).

e. When the temperature in regenerator has reached 1000F (540C),
catalyst can be loaded. A certain temperature is not required to load
catalyst, but since the catalyst is cold and must be heated, it is best to
have the regenerator already hot when loading is started. The main air
blower should be set at the design rate or at the maximum firing limit of
the air heater and the air heater should be adjusted to the maximum
outlet temperature, typcially around 1200 1350 F (650 - 730C). Since
heating the catalyst inventory is very time consuming, a high rate of hot
air flow is needed to help minimize this period. Close the recirculating
catalyst slide valve and the catalyst cooler slide valve (if present) before
loading catalyst.

f. Check that all instrument purges have been started and contain the
proper RO throughout the reactor-regenerator section. Check that all
regenerator level and density transmitters are functioning. Ensure that air
flow is going to the upper regenerator fluffing rings and catalyst cooler air
lances (if present).

g. Note that as catalyst is loaded into a high efficiency, combustor style
regenerator and the combustor density increases, the pressure in the
bottom of the combustor will increase. This will reduce the spent catalyst
slide valve P and it may be possible for air to flow back into the reactor.
If this P approaches zero reduce the regenerator pressure (with the
157048
Procedures
Page 20



reactor-regenerator PDIC) to ensure the spent catalyst slide valve P
remains positive.

6. Loading Catalyst to the Regenerator

The initial load of catalyst into the regenerator should ideally be enough to
provide the total unit inventory. However, due to the size of the reactor and
stripper, this is usually not the case. The regenerator should be loaded with as
much catalyst as possible to high levels, then after catalyst circulation is
started and the reactor inventoried, additional catalyst will need to be loaded
into the regenerator.

The cyclone inlet velocities in the regenerator should be maintained greater than 35
ft/sec (11 m/sec) as much as possible to ensure good catalyst separation efficiency.
Lower pressure during heatup and catalyst loading can help increase the velocity
when the regenerator is cool. For bubbling bed and RFCC regenerators the
superficial bed velocity should not exceed 3 ft/sec (0.9 m/sec) during startup to
minimize catalyst loading to the cyclones.

a. Ensure that the following items have been accomplished before loading
catalyst into the regenerator:

(1) All slide valve P transmitters should be in service and the low P
override controller operable.

(2) Check that all instrument purges, slide valve packing purges, and
expansion joint purges are commissioned.

(3) Check that steam is not being used in the regenerated catalyst
standpipe, as any condensate will make mud when the catalyst is
loaded. Check the blast and sample point to make sure no
condensate is present.

157048
Procedures
Page 21



(4) Make sure the catalyst cooler, regenerated catalyst and spent
catalyst slide valves are fully closed.

(5) Ensure that fluffing air is on to the upper regenerator rings and to the
catalyst cooler (if present). Water must be circulating through the
cooler tubes to keep them cool.

(6) Raise the feed atomizing steam to 150% of design rates to ensure
that any catalyst passing through to the riser can not plug the
distributors.

b. Prepare the catalyst hoppers for transferring catalyst. Refer to the specific
procedures outlined in the Catalyst Handling section. Gauge the hoppers
before starting to establish the initial catalyst inventory.

c. Start catalyst loading to the upper regenerator. Observe the level
instruments for signs that catalyst is accumulating. For a high efficiency
regenerator, open the recirculation slide valve a small amount to begin
circulation of catalyst to the combustor when a level is established and a
differential pressure appears across the recirculation slide valve. The
regenerator will begin to cool as cold catalyst is added. Keep the air
heater firing at its maximum temperature to help heat the catalyst.

d. For a high efficiency style regenerator, open the recirculation slide valve
further to increase the density in the combustor as the level increases in
the upper regenerator. The combustor density will remain low even with
the recirculation valve full open since there is no catalyst circulating
through the spent standpipe yet. If possible, try to establish a combustor
density of 4-7 lb/ft
3
(65-110 kg/m
3
).

e. Near the end of the catalyst loading step, when a high level exists in the
regenerator and the combustor density is as high as possible with the
recirculation slide valve open, it is advisable to reduce the main air blower
rate to around 50% of design. This will cause the combustor density to
157048
Procedures
Page 22



increase, thereby increasing the combustor catalyst inventory. The upper
regenerator level will drop, which allows additional catalyst to be loaded,
increasing the total catalyst inventory. Adjust the air heater firing when the
air rate is reduced so the maximum temperature is not exceeded.

f. At the completion of the catalyst loading step, gauge the hopper again to
determine the quantity of catalyst loaded.

7. Heat Up the Catalyst Inventory

a. As the cold catalyst is being loaded, it will cool the regenerator. Keep the
air heater firing at its maximum temperature to heat the catalyst. The rate
of heating the catalyst is not critical; the size of the catalyst inventory, the
speed of catalyst loading and the duty of the air heater will affect how fast
the temperature can be raised. A rate of 200-300F (110-170C) per hour
is a good target.

b. For a high efficiency regenerator, adjust the catalyst recirculation rate to
obtain a density of at least 4-7 lb/ft
3
(65-110 kg/m
3
) in the combustor
during the heatup. Torch oil should not be fired if the combustor density is
less than 4 lb/ft
3
(65 kg/m
3
). Excessive particle temperatures or
afterburning can result if sufficient catalyst is not available to absorb the
heat from torch oil firing.

For a bubbling bed regenerator or 2 stage, RFCC regenerator the catalyst
level should be a minimum of 1 ft (0.3 m) over the torch oil guns before
starting torch oil.

c. If torch oil is to be used to heat up the catalyst, the minimum temperature
at which it should be fired is 800-850F (425-450C). If an increase in the
combustor temperature is observed, the torch oil has ignited. If no
temperature change is observed, the torch oil has not ignited, and its use
should be discontinued until the catalyst temperature has been raised a
further 50F (30C). When using torch oil, adjust the torch oil atomizing
157048
Procedures
Page 23



steam pressure to a minimum of 50 psig (3.5 kg/cm
2
). Control the
amount of torch oil to give a smooth even rise in temperature.

d. If a catalyst cooler is present on the regenerator, heating the catalyst will
take additional time, as the cooler will be taking some heat out as the
entire system is being heated. This is because water is circulating through
the tubes and the fluffing air is on. Water circulation is required to protect
the tubes and some air flow is recommended to keep the air lances clear
of catalyst. The minimum amount of fluffing air should be used throughout
the startup to minimize this heat removal effect.

e. When the regenerator circulating catalyst inventory has been heated to
900F (480C), catalyst circulation to the reactor can be started. Continue
heating the regenerator catalyst to a target value around 1250F (675C)
in preparation for cutting in feed.

8. Start the Gas Concentration Unit Wet Gas Compressor

In order to control catalyst circulation between the reactor and regenerator, it is
necessary to have a constant pressure on the main column. Starting the wet
gas compressor at this time allows a better control over the pressure and
removes this task from the very busy time when feed is cut in. However, it may
not be possible to start the compressor now if fuel gas supply is insufficient or
molecular weight is too low. In that case, pressure control is maintained as
before, with a fuel gas purge to the LCO stripper and venting to flare at the
overpressure control valve. The wet gas compressor can be started after feed
is started to the riser.

a. It is advisable to start the wet gas compressor early and have it operating
smoothly before circulating catalyst. Set the process controls in
preparation for compressor startup as follows:

(1) Set the main column overpressure control to hold the system
pressure at 10 psig (0.7 kg/cm
2
).
157048
Procedures
Page 24



(2) Manually open both compressor spillback control valves and their
bypasses.

(3) Set the compressor speed control on manual at minimum speed or
open the suction valve fully.

b. Start the compressor interstage cooler fans and open the cooling water to
the trim cooler.

c. Increase the fuel gas makeup to the LCO stripper to provide an operating
cushion before starting the compressor.

d. Start the compressor auxiliaries and the compressor according to the
manufacturer's instructions.

e. Keep the compressor operating on total spillback until feed is charged to
the reactor. The discharge valve can be cracked open slowly to help
pressure up the gas concentration unit at this time but be careful to do
this very slowly so that the main column pressure is not sucked down
quickly.

9. Start Catalyst Circulation

The following procedure is general in nature and the specific arrangement of
the reactor and regenerator system needs to be carefully considered. The
velocity in the lift zone, upper riser and cyclones needs to be considered at all
times to ensure smooth catalyst circulation and to minimize catalyst losses.

For all types of riser terminations the velocity throughout the riser should
always be greater than 10 ft/sec (3 m/sec) when circulating catalyst. 15 ft/sec
(4.5 m/sec) is preferred. This will ensure smooth catalyst flow. When heating
up or circulating with steam only the heat demand and therefore the catalyst
circulation and cyclone loading is very low so that the cyclone efficiency is not
critical.
157048
Procedures
Page 25



Once startup naphtha (if used) or feed is introduced to the unit the additional
heat required to vaporize the hydrocarbon increases the catalyst circulation
and therefore the cyclone loading quickly. Before starting these streams the
catalyst separation efficiency of the riser termination device and cyclones must
be increased to minimize losses to the main column.

For a direct connect, SCSS, VSS or VDS riser termination systems the cyclone
inlet velocity should be increased to 35 ft/sec (11 m/sec) or greater with the
startup steam to the wye before starting raw oil or startup naphtha to the riser.
Note that this velocity includes the stripping steam vapor flow. This is very
important for direct connect or SCSS systems. The vortex chamber on VSS
and VDS riser termination systems is less sensitive to changes in velocity than
other types of termination devices so that this is not as critical but it is still
recommended.

For vented risers the velocity out of the riser is critical for catalyst separation.
Catalyst should not be circulated with startup naphtha or feed with less than 35
ft/sec (11 m/sec) riser exit velocity. This velocity does not include the stripping
steam vapor flow.

a. When the regenerator has reached 900F (480C), the unit is ready to
start catalyst circulation. Temporarily stop the flow of oil from the MCB
circulation up to the LCO and HCO sections of the main column.
Shutdown the HCO and LCO circulation pumps if the inventory in these
sections is lost. When catalyst circulation is first started, it is possible that
catalyst can be carried into the main column. It is best to contain these
fines in the bottoms rather than having them spread through the LCO and
HCO circuits.

b. Check the spent catalyst standpipe for any condensate. Crack open the
spent slide valve occasionally to drain condensate into the regenerator.
The P controller for the reactor and regenerator should be set at a
negative (reactor higher) 1.5 psig (0.1 kg/cm
2
) or more if required to keep
the spent catalyst slide valve P positive to provide a steam buffer
157048
Procedures
Page 26



(reactor) between the air in the regenerator and hydrocarbon in the main
column.

c. Set the lift and/or startup steam to the wye to maintain a velocity of 15
ft/sec (4.5 m/sec) throughout the riser. If sufficient fuel or natural gas is
available, lift gas flow can be started to help reduce the steam
requirement. This flow can come from the normal lift gas source (sponge
absorber) as recycle if the wet gas compressor is operating, or can be
piped in externally and vented at the main column overhead receiver if
the compressor is not operating.

d. Feed steam to the Optimix feed distributors should be set at 150% of
design to ensure that catalyst can not plug the nozzles.

e. Adjust the stripping steam and fluffing steam flows to design rates.

f. Check the P across the regenerated catalyst slide valve and blast the
standpipe with air if there is low or no P. Slide valve differential
pressures will be erratic at low catalyst circulation rates.

g. Start opening the regenerated catalyst slide valve with the reactor
temperature controller in manual. Closely watch the reactor temperature
which will rise as soon as catalyst begins to circulate. If no response is
observed after several minutes, blast the regenerated catalyst standpipe
again.

h. The catalyst circulation from the reactor back to the regenerator should
be started as soon as possible to minimize any potential mud formation
(catalyst +condensate) in the spent catalyst standpipe. Do not wait until
the reactor level is fully established to start catalyst flow to the
regenerator. As soon as catalyst creates an increasing P across the
spent slide valve, open the valve on manual to start returning catalyst to
the regenerator. If the P does not increase across the valve, blast the
standpipe with steam.
157048
Procedures
Page 27



i. The reactor level should be increased without delay, particularly if the
cyclone diplegs are to be submerged in the catalyst bed. It is possible that
some catalyst can be lost to the main column before the diplegs are
submerged, but if the stripper level is raised smoothly and quickly,
catalyst losses will be minimized. It is important that a good flow of
catalyst is leaving the stripper back to the regenerator during this period.

On units without submerged diplegs the level may be increased more
slowly.

j. As the reactor stripper level is increased, it may be necessary to bring in
more catalyst from storage to maintain levels in the regenerator. On units
with submerged diplegs this should be done before the stripper level
approaches the bottom of the diplegs. The catalyst level should never be
held just below the diplegs for any reason as it is possible to create a
vacuuming action through the cyclones if the seal is lost and draw
catalyst up the diplegs and out to the main column. Once the catalyst
level approaches the diplegs, they should be submerged as quickly as
possible.

k. Place the reactor level controller on automatic as soon as possible. The
reactor temperature controller should be maintained in manual.

10. Raise Reactor Temperature

a. As catalyst circulation is started, raise the reactor temperature smoothly
at a rate of 200-300F (110-170C) per hour. For certain reactor
configurations, it may be important how fast the skin temperatures are
increased. In some cases, special guidelines will be specified. It is useful
to record the reactor skin temperatures during the heatup for future
reference and analysis of developed stresses during the thermal
expansion.

157048
Procedures
Page 28



b. When the reactor temperature has reached 600F (315C), startup
naphtha flow can be started to the riser. Startup naphtha may be used to
increase the catalyst flow and open the slide valves further for better
control. It smoothes the transition when feed is cut into the riser. It also
aids in wetting the main column trays with hydrocarbon and helps
displace water in the main column. Startup naphtha is an optional step in
the procedure. Any type of light naphtha, straight run or cracked, can be
used.

Increase the startup steam to achieve a cyclone inlet velocity of 35 ft/sec
(riser outlet velocity for vented riser terminations) before starting naphtha
flow to ensure that the separation efficiency is good as the catalyst
circulation rate and cyclone loading will increase significantly with the
heat required to vaporize the naphtha. As the naphtha is vaporized and
the cyclone (or riser outlet) velocity increases the startup steam may be
reduced.

Add additional naphtha to the main column overhead receiver as needed.
This naphtha will be recycled through the main column, to the overhead
receiver, back to the riser. Keep raising the reactor temperature at the
specified rate when naphtha is added.

c. It is important that the bottom of the main column be maintained as hot as
possible during the reactor heatup to prepare for eventual cracked
product flows. The steam generators should be used to heat the bottoms
and maintain at least 350F (175C) in the bottom of the column. A high
temperature will ensure that all water and much of the naphtha is driven
overhead to minimize the accumulation in the column.

d. Continue to heat up the regenerator catalyst inventory to 1250F (675C)
as the reactor temperature is increased. Torch oil can be used to maintain
this temperature while the reactor is being prepared for starting feed.
Make sure the combustor density is maintained above 4 lb/ft
3
(65 kg/m
3
)
157048
Procedures
Page 29



when torch oil is fired (or the level is maintained above the torch oil guns
in a bubbling bed or RFCC regenerator).

e. At some point after stable catalyst circulation has been established, and
both spent and regenerated catalyst slide valves have good P across
them, the reactor-regenerator P controller can be adjusted to a positive
value (regenerator pressure higher) to help balance the two slide valve
P's. Make sure the slide valve low P override controllers are
commissioned.

f. Increase the reactor temperature to a target point around 980F (525C)
and the regenerator temperature to ~1250 1300 F (675 - 705C).
Maintain stable catalyst flow and levels before starting feed to the riser.

11. Charge Oil to the Reactor Riser

Feed can be started to the riser as soon as the preceding operations have
been stabilized.

a. Stop backing steam into the main column steam generators and fill them
with boiler feed water to prepare for eventual heat removal/steam
production. This should be done slowly to avoid excessive thermal shock
when the tubes are changed from hot steam to cooler BFW.

b. Set the feed flow through the bypass valve to the main column at
approximately 10% of design charge rate. The flow may be lined up
through the main column bottoms recycle flow meter. The bottoms
recycle meter is convenient to use for starting feed to the riser because
the normal feed control valve is too large to accurately control such small
flows.

c. Feed steam should be set at 150% of design. Stripping steam and fluffing
steam flows should be at design.

157048
Procedures
Page 30



If startup naphtha is in service the cyclone inlet velocity (riser outlet
velocity for vented risers) should already be greater than 35 ft/sec (11
m/sec).

If startup naphtha is not used then the startup steam rate should be
increased to achieve a cyclone inlet velocity (riser outlet velocity for
vented risers) of 35 ft/sec (11 m/sec) or greater.

d. Prior to starting feed to the riser, be sure to drain all free water from the
feed line between the diverter valve and the feed nozzle block valves.
Start feed to the riser by switching the feed bypass switch to the normal
position. This will close the valve on the line to the main column and open
the line to the riser. Begin opening the regenerated catalyst slide valve
further at the same time to provide the additional heat required to
maintain riser temperature and velocity.

NOTE: Start feed very slowly at first to avoid thermal shock to the feed
distributor tips. The feed distributor tips can be cracked if
subjected to excessive thermal shock.

When cutting in oil, catalyst circulation must be increased to
maintain the reactor temperature. Do not allow the temperature
to drop below 930F (500C). Should the reactor temperature
drop too low, feed can be reduced until the temperature is
increased again. Initially, the regenerator temperature may drop
until catalyst containing coke enters the regenerator. Try to
maintain the combustor temperature around 1250F (675C).

e. Begin increasing the feed rate smoothly in increments of 10-20% through
the normal feed control valve. As the feed rate is increased, startup
naphtha can be smoothly backed out. The lift steam rate can also be
reduced. It is best to wait until the feed rate is up to 40-50% before
beginning to reduce the startup naphtha and startup and feed steam
157048
Procedures
Page 31



rates. The reduction should be done gradually so that riser velocity does
not suddenly drop.

f. As the circulation of relatively cool catalyst from the reactor to the
regenerator increases the regenerator temperatures will decrease
temporarily until spent catalyst with coke has displaced the clean catalyst
in the stripper. Additional torch oil will be required to keep the regenerator
temperature at 1250 1300 F (675-705 C)

When spent catalyst starts entering the regenerator and the coke starts
burning the regenerator temperatures will increase. Torch oil flow can be
reduced and eventually stopped. The air heater firing can also be reduced
and eventually stopped. The combustor temperature should be
maintained around 1275-1300F (690-705C). The regenerator upper
dense bed temperature should be slightly higher than the combustor.

g. Continue increasing the feed rate smoothly in 5-10% increments to the
design value. During this time, gradually increase the air rate to the
regenerator as necessary. Adjust the reactor-regenerator P controller as
needed to balance the spent and regenerated catalyst slide valve P's.


157048
Procedures
Page 32



C. ESTABLISH NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS

At the completion of the unit startup, stabilize the unit operation using the following
process control guidelines:

Reactor Variables Control

Raw Oil Charge Rate As desired.

Raw Oil Preheat Temperature Set to balance coke yield, conversion, and
gasoline RON requirements.

Lift Steam

And

Lift Gas
Total flow set to achieve optimum lift zone
velocity, typically 10-20 ft/sec (3-6 m/sec).
Flows may be used in any ratio depending on
wet gas compressor, main column overhead
or sour water stripping constraints. Lift gas is
beneficial for metals passivation in units with
high nickel on Ecat (>3000 wppm)

Feed Steam Typically 1-2 wt% of design feed rate. Should
be adjusted to optimize yields. May be used
at high flow rates during startup and
emergencies.

Reactor Temperature Adjust to obtain desired conversion, yield
pattern, coke yield and gasoline RON.

Reactor Pressure Indirectly set by main column receiver
pressure.

Reactor Catalyst Level Set to cover the top stripping grid or to seal
the diplegs in units with submerged primary
cyclone diplegs.
157048
Procedures
Page 33



Reactor Variables Control

Stripping Steam Use just enough to strip the catalyst of
residual hydrocarbons. Typical rate is 1.7-2.5
lb (kg) per 1000 lb (kg) of catalyst circulation.
Adjust by observing effect of changes on
regenerator temperature.

Main Column Bottoms Recycle Normally zero. During turndown or when light
feeds are processed, some recycle may be
necessary to increase coke and help the unit
heat balance.

Naphtha to Riser Used to assist catalyst circulation during
startup and to help control the regenerator
temperature when the unit is behind in
burning (old style unit partial combustion
operation).

HCO Recycle For units operating in maximum distillate
production, used to increase coke yield or
improve LCO yield.
157048
Procedures
Page 34




Regenerator Variables Control

Combustion Air Rate Adjust for sufficient air to burn all coke off
spent catalyst. Maintain 1-2% excess oxygen
in the flue gas for full combustion units.
Typical value for full combustion is 14 lb (kg)
air per lb (kg) coke. The air/coke ratio on
partial combustion units is lower and is
adjusted to control the heat of combustion.

Combustor Temperature Adjust for proper coke and CO combustion
and minimize afterburning. Typical value
1275F (690C) minimum.

Combustor Density Adjust to optimize coke and CO combustion.
Normal value between 5-10 lb/ft
3
(80-160
kg/m
3
).

Regenerated Catalyst
Temperature
Function of coke operation. May be
influenced by catalyst cooler if present.
Dense bed normally 20-50F (10-30C)
above combustor temperature. Dilute phase
normally 10-20F (5-10C) above dense.

Reactor-Regenerator
Differential Pressure
Adjust to obtain stable and balanced spent
and regenerated catalyst slide valve P's.

Slide Valve P's Dependent on reactor-regenerator pressure
and catalyst levels. Normal values between 5-
12 psi (Low pressure over-ride typically set
about 2 psi (0.14 kg/cm
2
).
157048
Procedures
Page 35




Regenerator Variables Control

Upper Regenerator Catalyst
Level
Adjusted by additions and withdrawals to
maintain a suitable catalyst surge capacity for
the unit.

Torch Oil Rate Used during startup to aid in catalyst
inventory heatup. The use of torch oil should
be minimized for the protection of the
catalyst.

Air to Catalyst Cooler Used to control the catalyst cooler duty and
therefore the regenerated catalyst
temperature. A minimum air rate of 10-20% of
design should be maintained at all times. The
maximum air rate specified for the cooler
should never be exceeded. On flow through
catalyst coolers the air rate can be adjusted
to keep the cooled catalyst slide valve in a
good operating range.

Catalyst Cooler Slide Valve A secondary control for adjusting heat
removal. Can be used to limit T across
cooler to about 200F (100C).


157048
Procedures
Page 36




Fractionation Section Variables Control

Main Column Receiver Press Adjust as required by the reactor-regenerator
P, and the relative main air blower discharge
pressure and wet gas compressor suction
pressure.

Overhead Receiver Temp Generally maintained around 110-120F (40-
50C).

Main Column Top Temperature Set to control the endpoint of the unstabilized
gasoline.

Main Column Reflux Rate Controlled on cascade by the overhead
temperature controller. Reflux rate is set by
the overhead condenser duty required to heat
balance the column after the duty of the lower
pumparound streams are set. Primary
adjustment is with the MCB steam
generators.
Heavy Naphtha Product Draw
Rate
Set to control the draw temperature and
endpoint of the heavy gasoline product.

LCO Product Draw Rate Set to control the LCO draw and LCO product
endpoint or to control the MCB temperature.

Cycle Oil Circulation Rates Set by the process requirements of the
associated heat exchangers.
157048
Procedures
Page 37




Fractionation Section Variables

Control
Main Column Bottoms Circulation
Rate
Adjust flow to steam generators to balance
the main column heat removal and set
overhead reflux flow. Minimum total flow back
to column must satisfy disc and donut liquid
rate of 6 gpm per ft
2
(15m
3
per m
2
) of column
area..

Main Column Bottoms Temp Controlled primarily by the LCO product draw
rate. Quench from the steam generators may
be used to subcool the liquid in the bottom of
the column. Maximum bottoms temperature is
generally ~680F (360C) but is dependant on
feed type and reactor severity.

Unstabilized Gasoline Yield Depends on charge rate and conversion.
Controlled by the level in the overhead
receiver.

Main Column Bottoms Product
Rate
Adjust to control the main column bottoms
level.

Cycle Oil Stripping Steam Rate Adjust for product flash point specification.

Net Overhead Gas Flow Depends on charge rate, reactor severity and
catalyst condition. Controlled by the wet gas
compressor speed or spillbacks to control the
main column overhead receiver pressure.

Flush Oil Adjust as required to keep catalyst out of
instruments, and flush the main column
bottoms pump packing gland and wear rings.
157048
Procedures
Page 38



D. NORMAL SHUTDOWN

The shutdown of the FCC Unit is essentially the reverse of the startup steps. It
should be carried out in an orderly and planned sequence. Some main points to
remember are:

1. Maintain good catalyst fluidization and circulation through the reactor and
regenerator throughout the shutdown. Increase riser steam to ensure
smooth catalyst circulation.

2. Always decrease the charge rate before decreasing the air rate. Maintain
excess oxygen in the flue gas at all times and keep the regenerator hot to
ensure the catalyst is fully regenerated.

3. Make sure all pumparound circuits are flushed out to eliminate problems
with heavy oils or catalyst fines.

During scheduled shutdowns, the catalyst section and the main column exchanger
circuits will usually be inspected and cleaned. Depending on the work to be done,
the main column might have to be water washed for entry. The Gas Concentration
Unit will be pumped out and purged with steam. If columns are to be entered, they
will need to be water washed.

Precautions must be taken to cool the reactor sufficiently before allowing air to enter
the vessel. This is done to guard against the possibility of auto-ignition of hot coke
deposits in the reactor or vapor line. The reactor should be cooled below 350F
(175C) before any manways or nozzles are opened. Riser and stripping steam
should be used to assist cooling the vessel as required.

The following procedure describes a full shutdown for maintenance entry to vessels.
Depending on the reason for the shutdown, the full procedure may not be followed,
and catalyst may or may not be left in the regenerator. In most cases, catalyst will
be transferred from the reactor to the regenerator during a shutdown. These
157048
Procedures
Page 39



procedures should be considered only guidelines. Detailed shutdown instructions
should be prepared by the refiner for his specific unit.

If the shutdown is temporary, the unit may be maintained in an operating mode and
catalyst circulation continued. However, circulating hot catalyst on steam for long
periods of time will damage the catalyst. Therefore, if the shutdown will be for
several days, it is usually best to stop catalyst circulation.

Procedure

1. Notify offsites and utility systems well in advance that the FCC Unit will be
shutting down. Prepare the regenerator by withdrawing catalyst to drop
the upper regenerator level to a low value. This will make room for the
eventual transfer of the catalyst in the reactor and reduce the time
needed to unload the unit catalyst inventory.

2. Slowly begin reducing the reactor temperature to 900F (480C). At the
same time, begin reducing the naphtha and LCO product flows. This will
make the main column bottoms material lighter, aiding in flushing out the
bottoms circuits.

3. The regenerator temperatures will begin to drop when the reactor
changes are made. Adjust the recirculation catalyst and catalyst cooler to
keep the combustor hot, around 1250F (675C), to ensure all coke is
burned off the catalyst.

4. Maintain the main column bottoms level low around 30%. Control the
level by drawing more or less bottoms product to storage.

5. Begin decreasing the raw oil charge rate in increments of 5 to 10% to
50% of design. For full combustion units decrease the combustion air rate
as the charge is reduced, but always maintain excess oxygen in the flue
gas (2-5% provides a good safety margin) and good cyclone velocities.
On partial combustion units reduce the air rate to control the heat of
157048
Procedures
Page 40



combustion and move towards full combustion as the regenerator
temperature drops. Control the regenerator temperature at 1250-1300F
(675-705C). Maintain balanced main column heat removal and product
draw temperatures by decreasing pumparound circulations and product
flows as required.

6. As the raw oil charge rate is reduced, increase the lift steam and the feed
steam to assist catalyst circulation. Begin reducing the reactor pressure to
increase vapor velocity in the riser and the cyclones. Lift gas flow to the
riser may need to be reduced as the gas production is decreased. When
control of the lift gas becomes difficult or unstable, shutdown the flow and
block in the control valve.

7. As the coke make decreases, the regenerator will cool off. Reduce the
catalyst cooler air rate and begin closing the cooled catalyst slide valve.
The slide valve may be closed completely but do not stop the fluidizing air
until catalyst is removed from the regenerator. Fire the air heater when
needed to hold the combustor temperature at 1225-1250F (665-675C).
Torch oil may be used but should be avoided if possible due to its harmful
effect on the catalyst.

8. The main column overhead gas production will decrease as the reactor
temperature and charge rate are decreased. Check that the spillback
valves for the wet gas compressor remain in a controlling range. Start fuel
gas flow into the LCO stripper vapor return line if needed to maintain main
column pressure control as the unit is shut down.

9. Slowly decrease the reactor-regenerator P controller to a negative value
(reactor pressure higher than the regenerator) in preparation for cutting
feed. This is intended to create a higher pressure buffer of steam in the
reactor between the air in the regenerator and hydrocarbon in the main
column.

157048
Procedures
Page 41



10. Prepare to bypass feed from the riser. Make sure the main column has a
low level in the bottom. Keep the regenerator at a lower pressure than the
reactor and put the regenerated catalyst slide valve on manual control.
Increase riser steam to maintain catalyst circulation, bypass raw oil to the
main column, and reduce the flow of oil. Keep raw oil flowing in and out of
the main column until it is verified that any catalyst carried over to the
column during shutdown has been flushed out.

11. With the catalyst circulating on steam, begin dropping the reactor level to
transfer catalyst into the regenerator. Begin withdrawing catalyst from the
regenerator to the hopper to make room for the reactor inventory. Start
decreasing the air heater outlet temperature at 100-200F (50-100C) per
hour. When the regenerator temperatures have dropped below 1000F
(540C) close the regenerated catalyst slide valve and stop circulating
catalyst to the reactor. Maintain steam flow to the riser.

12. When oil is bypassed from the reactor, the gas make will decrease very
rapidly. Shutdown the wet gas compressor according to the
manufacturer's instructions and block it in. Nitrogen purge the compressor
casing.

13. After the wet gas compressor is shut down, block in the pressure
controller on the sponge absorber overhead line. Pressure as much liquid
as possible back to the main column or to the debutanizer from the other
gas concentration columns. After all the liquid is pumped out, depressure
the columns to the fuel gas system. When the fuel gas header pressure is
reached, depressure the remaining gas to flare.

14. As the main column starts to cool, stop the withdrawal of naphtha and
LCO to the sidecut strippers. The naphtha and cycle oils will then
overflow their accumulators, wash down the column, and dilute the
bottoms material. Open the bypass on the net bottoms product to the raw
oil line and start bottoms circulation as during startup. Switch the flushing
header source from LCO/HCO to the raw oil line. When the column and
157048
Procedures
Page 42



bottoms circuit is adequately flushed, pump out all circuits, the sidecut
strippers, and the column bottoms. Shut down the flushing headers.
When the column is empty, depressure it to flare. Pump out the overhead
receiver to the primary absorber column. Steam out the raw oil charge
line, the heat exchange train, and the reactor bypass line to the main
column from the raw oil pump discharge.

15. When all the catalyst has been transferred from the reactor into the
regenerator, close the spent catalyst slide valve. Lock both slide valves
closed. Unload catalyst from the upper regenerator to the hopper. Open
the recirculation and cooled catalyst slide valves to drop catalyst from the
standpipe and cooler into the combustor, where it will be carried back to
the upper regenerator. When all the catalyst is removed from the
regenerator, close the unloading valves, shut off the air heater and blind
the fuel gas line. Continue cooling the regenerator with the main air
blower. When the regenerator temperatures are slightly above the blower
discharge temperature, the air blower can be shutdown.

16. Connect vacuum hoses to the catalyst unloading connections throughout
the catalyst section and systematically clean out any remaining catalyst.
Vacuum catalyst from the unloading nozzles provided at the air heater,
the bottom of the riser, the bottom of the reactor stripper cone, and the
upper regenerator cone. When cleaning the reactor riser, the regenerated
catalyst slide valve should be temporarily opened to unload any
remaining catalyst from the regenerator standpipe.

17. When the main column is empty, start steam to the bottom and stripping
steam to the sidecut strippers. Be sure fuel gas to the LCO stripper is
shutoff and blinded. Maintain steam flow to the riser, feed distributors and
reactor stripper. Open the vents on top of the main column and overhead
receiver, and drain condensate from the low points.

18. When the reactor and main column are hydrocarbon free, decrease the
riser and column bottoms steam flows until only a trace is showing at the
157048
Procedures
Page 43



drains located at the vapor line blind. Remove the blind in the vapor line
vent, open the vent and install the vapor line blind. Increase the steam
flows and continue to steam out for several more hours. Drain
condensate from all low points.

19. Connect steam hoses and steam out all pumparound circuits. Drain
condensate from low points When the steamout is completed, be sure
vents and drains are fully open before stopping steam to avoid pulling a
vacuum.

20. When the main column has cooled to 100F (40C), start plant water to
the overhead receiver. Start the reflux pump and send water to the top of
the column. Drain at the bottoms and low points. When water flushing is
complete, blind where required for entry.

21. When the gas concentration columns are empty, steam out the unit as
required. Any column which will be opened for entry should be water
washed after steaming.

22. When the reactor and regenerator have cooled to 300F (150C), the
manways can be opened to ventilate and cool the vessels. Install air
movers as required. Note that when the reactor and regenerator are
entered, hot catalyst can still be present, particularly in any diplegs which
are closed by their flapper valves.

23. Install blinds to isolate all vessels to be entered. A specific blind list
should be prepared for each particular unit.

157048
Procedures
Page 44



E. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Emergencies on an FCC Unit may come in many forms. The operator must first
recognize the problem and then take quick action. Response will depend to a large
extent on plant design and individual features, the potential danger from the event,
and specific circumstances present at the time of the event. As it is impossible to
foresee every potential situation, operator judgment, anticipation and training are
key components for handling emergencies successfully. The best protection is a
thorough understanding of the process, the equipment and the potential dangers
involved.

The most important aspect of any emergency situation is how to make it safe;
personnel safety, environmental safety, and equipment safety are the major
objectives for any emergency handling program. Once the safety issues are under
control, then the less important concerns, such as maintaining or restoring unit
operation can be addressed.

Most FCC Unit emergencies will eventually involve a fundamental decision: should
raw oil charge to the riser be stopped for a period of time to correct the problem? If
this action is necessary, the basic steps to keep in mind are:

1. Increase lift steam, feed steam and stripping steam.

2. Bypass raw oil to the main column and stop lift gas.

3. Establish a negative reactor-regenerator pressure differential (reactor at
higher pressure).

4. Reduce the reactor pressure if possible.

These steps remove the hydrocarbon from the reactor, establish a steam
barrier between the regenerator and the main column, and maintain good
vapor velocity in the riser to assist catalyst circulation. Once these conditions
are established, the problem area can be investigated and corrected.
157048
Procedures
Page 45



It is emphasized that every emergency situation must be handled individually
depending upon the conditions existing at that particular time. The following
procedures must be considered as only guidelines which are not unit specific. Each
refiner is responsible for preparing a detailed set of procedures, specific to his unit,
for handling any type of emergency event.

1. Oil Reversal

This is one of the most severe emergency events which can develop on the
FCC unit, but thanks to built-in safety features in the design, is a very rare
event in today's modern unit.

A reversal can develop due to a sudden increase in reactor or main column
pressure, or a sudden decrease in regenerator pressure. The higher pressure
in the base of the riser can cause oil to backflow up the regenerated catalyst
standpipe into the regenerator. Once in the regenerator, the oil will burn
rapidly, resulting in extremely high temperatures. A severe reversal can cause
temperatures to exceed 2000F (1100C), well over the design temperature of
the regenerator internals. Fortunately, today's slide valves are designed to
close within 5 seconds and if the valve low P override is in service, the
amount of oil which could potentially reach the regenerator is considerably
reduced.

If a reversal occurs, the following actions should be taken:

a. Bypass the raw oil charge, increase steam to the riser, increase feed
steam and close the regenerated and spent catalyst slide valves. Adjust
the reactor-regenerator P to a negative value (reactor pressure higher)
and reduce the reactor pressure. Stop lift gas and block in the control
valves.

b. Check the regenerator temperatures. If they pass 1400F (760C),
decrease the combustor air rate. Increase fluidizing air to the catalyst
cooler and open the cooler slide valve to help remove heat.
157048
Procedures
Page 46



c. If the regenerator temperatures continue to rise, start a small circulation
of catalyst to the reactor. This will help remove some of the heat from the
regenerator. However, do not allow the reactor temperature to exceed
1000F (540C).

d. If it is not possible to circulate catalyst with riser steam, decrease the air
rate as much as possible and wait for the oil to burn off and temperatures
to drop. Do not shutdown the air blower if it can be avoided, as a lengthy
unit shutdown may develop to clean coke out of the regenerator. Monitor
and record regenerator temperatures every five minutes.

e. Add fuel gas to the LCO stripper to maintain main column and reactor
pressure. Shutdown the wet gas compressor if necessary and control the
pressure from the overhead receiver overpressure control valve.

f. If it is expected that raw oil feed will be stopped for a long period, begin
pre-startup main column bottoms circulations. When temperatures drop
below 1300F (700C) in the regenerator, start increasing the air rate and
internal catalyst circulation. Use the air heater or torch oil if necessary to
hold the catalyst at 1200F (650C), then continue with the unit restart per
the normal procedures.

2. Behind in Burning / Afterburning

While not necessarily an emergency, getting behind in burning or afterburning
can develop into one if not recognized and addressed.

The high efficiency regenerator is designed for complete CO combustion and a
small percentage of excess oxygen should always be maintained to avoid
getting behind in burning. However, although extremely difficult, it could be
possible that some sudden and unusual feedstock changes might cause this
problem to develop. A conventional unit operating in partial combustion is the
typical situation where behind in burning is a concern.
157048
Procedures
Page 47



It is essential that the coke be burned off the catalyst at the same rate it is
produced. This is easily achieved in full CO combustion by maintaining a small
amount of excess oxygen in the flue gas. In partial CO combustion, however,
excess oxygen is not present and the burn characteristic is represented by the
CO
2
/CO ratio. It is much easier to change the coke production fast enough to
exceed the oxygen availability in partial combustion. When all the coke is not
burned, the unit gets "behind in burning" with the result that coke begins to
accumulate on the catalyst. The catalyst may turn dark gray or black in color
and will start to lose activity, causing a drop in conversion. Coke formation in
the reactor will continue and the overall coke accumulation on the catalyst can
snowball, eventually forcing feed to be bypassed.

Afterburn can be defined as CO combustion in the regenerator dilute phase.
There will always be some minor degree of afterburn and it is not a problem
until it becomes excessive. It is undesirable because there is little catalyst
present in this area to absorb the heat and very high temperatures can
develop.

Signs that the unit is behind in burning are:

a. The temperature difference between the regenerator dilute phase and the
dense bed is less than usual, and

b. The catalyst is noticeably darker in color.

The following actions should be taken to catch up in burning:

(1) Increase the air rate to the regenerator. Take care, however,
because when the extra coke is burned off, there will be an
increasing amount of excess oxygen in the regenerator and
afterburning may occur. To avoid this, air rate increases should be
made gradually.

157048
Procedures
Page 48



(2) Increase internal catalyst circulation through the recirculation slide
valve.

(3) Monitor the regenerator temperatures to make sure the dilute phase
and flue gas temperatures are increasing.

(4) Draw frequent regenerated catalyst samples. Compare these to
check that the catalyst is becoming whiter, indicating that the
accumulated coke is gradually being burned off. This is the only way
to know for sure if the problem is being resolved.

(5) In the event that increasing the air rate does not correct the problem,
reduce the reactor temperature, drop the raw oil charge rate, and/or
start naphtha quench to the riser.

An afterburn problem is indicated by the following:

a. Increasing T between the regenerator dilute phase and the dense bed.

b. Increasing regenerator dilute phase temperature.

The following actions should be taken to reduce the afterburn:

(1) Increase the combustor temperature by increasing the catalyst
recirculation rate.

(2) Increase the combustor density by increasing the catalyst
recirculation rate.

(3) Increase the regenerator pressure if possible.

(4) Add CO combustion promoter or increase the rate of promoter
addition.

157048
Procedures
Page 49



(5) For a conventional bubbling bed regenerator, increase the
regenerator catalyst level.

3. Circulating Water Pump Failure

This procedure is in reference to the loss of the flue gas cooler circulating
water flow and the catalyst cooler circulating water flow. This could also be
caused by a loss of the boiler feedwater supply.

a. Switch to the spare pump if this has not automatically occurred from the
low flow switch auto-start control.

Flue Gas Cooler:

b. If the flue gas cooler circulating water cannot be restored, bypass oil from
the riser immediately. This is required to prevent high temperatures in the
flue gas cooler tubes and downstream piping. The maximum allowable
temperature for the cooler tubes is usually 700F (370C).

c. Increase lift steam and feed steam to the riser to maintain reactor
pressure so that air cannot enter from the regenerator. Stop the lift gas
and block in the control valve.

d. Close the regenerated and spent catalyst slide valves to stop catalyst
circulation.

e. Shutdown the main air blower as quickly and safely as possible to
eliminate hot flue gas flow through the flue gas cooler.

f. Start fuel gas to the LCO stripper. Continue running the wet gas
compressor on total spillback.

g. If feed to the riser is stopped for more than four hours and the reactor
instruments are purged with air (DA), block in the purges. This will
157048
Procedures
Page 50



minimize the possibility of auto-ignition of coke due to an accumulation of
oxygen.

h. When the water circulation is restored, start the main air blower and bring
the unit back on stream following the normal startup procedure. Restart
the DA purges just prior to beginning catalyst circulation if these had been
stopped.

Catalyst Cooler:

i. Stop the fluidizing air and close the cooler slide valve. The catalyst in the
cooler should be allowed to become stagnant and cool off to minimize the
overheating of the tubes.

j. It is not necessary to bypass feed from the riser. Unit operation will have
to be adjusted due to the loss of heat removal from the cooler. Reactor
severity will have to be reduced or the feedstock made lighter.

4. Main Air Blower Failure

Loss of the main air blower requires that the unit be shutdown. Usually this is
due to failure of the blower lube oil system, though faulty instrumentation may
also be responsible.

a. Immediately bypass oil from the riser to the main column. This must be
done quickly as the regenerator pressure will drop, causing a loss of
regenerated catalyst slide valve P which could set up the potential for an
oil reversal. Increase riser steam and feed steam.

b. Check that the air blower discharge check valve closes completely
following the blower shutdown to ensure that no catalyst backs into the
blower.

157048
Procedures
Page 51



c. Fully close the catalyst slide valves. The valves would eventually close
due to loss of differential pressure across them after the blower fails, but
they should be manually closed as fast as possible. Reduce fluidizing air
to the catalyst cooler to a minimum.

d. Start fuel gas to the LCO stripper as quickly as possible. This may allow
the wet gas compressor to continue operating with the spillbacks fully
open. Reduce the main column receiver pressure as low as possible.

e. Decrease the main column pumparound flows as possible to hold heat in
the column. Stop all net product flows except the bottoms to storage.
Establish the main column bottoms recirculation using the bottoms
product bypass to the raw oil charge line. If the main column top
temperature drops below 230F (110C) before oil can be restarted to the
riser, back steam into the bottoms steam generators and provide heat to
the circulating bottoms stream.

f. If feed to the riser is stopped for more than four hours and the reactor
instrumentation is purged with air (DA), block in the purges. This will
minimize the possibility of auto-ignition of coke due to an accumulation of
oxygen.

g. Restart the main air blower when it is ready for service. Begin internal
catalyst circulation in the regenerator through the recirculation catalyst
slide valve. If the regenerator temperature is above 800F (430C), torch
oil can be used to reheat the catalyst back to 1200F (650C). If it is
below 750F (400C), light the air heater first. Be sure to raise the reactor
pressure above the regenerator pressure after the blower is restarted.

h. When the catalyst temperature is at 1200F (650C), follow the normal
startup procedure. Restart the DA purges in the reactor just prior to
restarting catalyst circulation if these had been stopped.

157048
Procedures
Page 52



5. Wet Gas Compressor Failure

Usually the gas compressor would be lost due to failure of the lube oil system
or instrumentation. If this occurs, the main column pressure will be controlled
by the overhead receiver overpressure controller vent to flare. The unit can be
kept on stream for a short period at reduced throughput if the flaring can be
tolerated. If the compressor cannot be restarted soon, the unit will have to be
shutdown.

a. Bypass oil from the riser to the main column and increase steam to the
riser and feed distributors. Keep catalyst circulating to the reactor if the
shutdown will be for a short duration. Establish a reactor pressure higher
than the regenerator.

b. Continue internal catalyst circulation in the regenerator and use torch oil
to keep the catalyst at 1200F (650C).

c. Start just enough fuel gas to the LCO stripper to maintain pressure control
on the main column.

d. Reduce the main column pumparound flows to keep the main column hot.
Back steam into the bottoms steam generators as needed to heat the
circulating bottoms stream.

e. Restart the wet gas compressor as soon as possible. Bring the unit back
on stream following the normal startup procedure.

6. Raw Oil Charge Pump Failure

If the charge pump fails and cannot be restarted immediately, the unit will need
to be shutdown. This could also result from a loss of charge from storage.

157048
Procedures
Page 53



a. Increase riser steam and feed steam. Keep catalyst circulating to the
reactor if the shutdown will be for a short duration.

b. Start fuel gas to the LCO stripper to maintain pressure in the main
column. Establish a reactor pressure higher than the regenerator.

c. Keep the wet gas compressor running on total spillback in preparation for
restarting charge to the riser.

d. Continue internal catalyst circulation in the regenerator and use torch oil
as needed to maintain the catalyst at 1200F (650C).

e. When the charge pump is available, bring the unit back on stream
following the normal startup procedure.

7. Main Column Bottoms Circulating Pump Failure

The main column bottoms circulation circuits remove about 25% of the heat
from the reactor vapors. If the flow is lost for more than ten minutes, the unit
will need to be shutdown since the bottoms residence time and temperature
would increase to the point where coke formation would begin. The loss of
bottoms circulation could also result in heat damage to the disc and donut
trays and fines carried up the column.

a. The first priority is to get the material out of the column and try to keep
the bottoms temperature down. Try to start the spare pump immediately.
Reduce the charge rate to 75% of design and drop the reactor
temperature by 50F (30C). Decrease column product draws slightly to
aid in quenching the bottoms.

b. If it is not possible to start the spare pump immediately, continue
decreasing the charge rate. Increase steam to riser when the charge rate
is below 60% of design to assist catalyst circulation. If it is not possible to
start either pump within ten minutes, increase the riser steam and feed
157048
Procedures
Page 54



steam, bypass the raw oil charge to the main column, and stop the raw oil
feed. Establish a reactor pressure higher than the regenerator. Keep
catalyst circulating to the reactor if the shutdown will be for a short
duration.

c. Continue internal catalyst circulation in the regenerator and use torch oil
to maintain the catalyst at 1200F (650C).

d. Add fuel gas to the LCO stripper as needed to maintain main column and
reactor pressure. Keep the wet gas compressor running on total spillback.

e. When a bottoms pump can be restarted, pump the column bottoms down
to a normal level. Restart the normal bottoms circulation and follow the
normal startup procedure.

8. Slide Valve Failure

It may be necessary to manually operate a slide valve during an emergency
condition resulting from the following faults:

a. Hydraulic Oil Supply Failure

b. Controller Malfunctions

c. Physical Damage to the Valve

The slide valve has many redundant safety features to minimize the potential
for loss of control. Four methods are provided to move the slide valve:

1. Electronic actuator (hydraulic power)

2. Local manual positioner (hydraulic power)

157048
Procedures
Page 55



3. Local handpump (hydraulic power and manpower)

4. Local handwheel (manpower)

a. Hydraulic Oil Supply Failure

A loss of hydraulic oil pressure could occur due to a loss of the hydraulic
oil pump or a ruptured hydraulic oil line. The loss of pressure will result in
the loss of control of the slide valve and should leave the valve in the
position it occupied when the failure occurred (fail in place). The slide
valve must immediately be put on manual control. If the unit operation is
steady, a major upset need not result. However, the unit will drift off
control over time and immediate action should be taken.

(1) For those cases where the hydraulic lines remain intact, the slide
valve main hydraulic oil accumulator will provide enough fluid to the
actuator to move the valve two full strokes. However, if the valve has
not moved within approximately four minutes, the accumulator will
have depressured and be unable to move the valve.

(2) When the main accumulator pressure is depleted, switch to the
reserve accumulator which will again provide two full strokes of the
valve or about four minutes of operating time. When the reserve
accumulator is switched on, it will activate the control board alarm
"Reserve Accumulator in Service". To extend the use of the reserve
accumulator, the board operator can switch the reserve accumulator
in and out of service to make valve position changes.

(3) When the reserve accumulator pressure is low, the "Reserve
Accumulator Low Pressure" alarm will be activated in the control
room. At that time it will be necessary for a field operator to manually
move the valve with the local handpump or handwheel. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions for this operation.
157048
Procedures
Page 56



(4) When operating the regenerated catalyst slide valve by handwheel,
watch the valve P very closely. If P is lost, a flow reversal could
develop.

(5) If the hydraulic oil pressure can be reestablished quickly, put the
valve back into regular operation. For a prolonged failure, the unit
will need to be shutdown. Do not attempt to operate any slide valve
by the handwheel for normal operation. This manual action is much
too slow to react to sudden process changes.

b. Controller Malfunctions

A slide valve will close upon the loss of its actuator electronic power or
instrument signal. There is no alarm for these failures and they will only
be apparent to the board operator when he sees the slide valve drifting to
the closed position. In this case, the slide valve should be operated using
the hydraulic oil system local manual positioner, the local handpump or
the handwheel. When operating the slide valve locally, care must be
taken to maintain a positive slide valve P. If the electronic input signal
can be reestablished quickly, put the valve back into regular operation.
For a prolonged failure, the unit will need to be shutdown.

c. Physical Damage to the Valve

The loss of slide valve control could be the result of excessive disc
erosion or a broken stem.

Corrective actions to be taken depend on which valve is affected:

(1) Spent Catalyst Slide Valve Failure

(a) The worst situation occurs if control of the valve is lost in an
open position and the valve cannot be closed. For this case,
increase riser steam and feed steam. Bypass raw oil charge to
157048
Procedures
Page 57



the main column and shut down the charge pump. Establish a
reactor pressure higher than the regenerator and reduce the
main column pressure.

(b) Since the valve is stuck open, it is possible that the reactor
could empty of catalyst. This may allow air to enter from the
regenerator which could result in a fire or explosion. Continue
catalyst circulation using steam to the riser to hold a reactor
catalyst level. Allow the regenerator temperatures to fall to
1000F (540C) and maintain this level with torch oil or the air
heater. Having a lower catalyst temperature will allow more
catalyst to be circulated without generating a high reactor
temperature.

(c) Shutdown the wet gas compressor and allow the main column
to cool down. Pump out as much oil as possible. Start steam to
the bottom of the column and vent from the overhead receiver
to flare. Maintain enough pressure to keep the reactor pressure
above the regenerator.

(d) Start unloading as much catalyst as possible from the
regenerator without losing circulation to the reactor. Continue
with the shutdown procedure to eventually install the reactor
vapor blind, and prepare the regenerator for entry and repair of
the valve. If the level of catalyst is lost in the reactor and the
spent catalyst slide valve loses its P, the air blower should be
shutdown immediately and steam to the riser increased as
much as possible to keep air out of the reactor.

(2) Regenerated Catalyst Slide Valve Failure

(a) If control of the valve is lost with the valve in an open position,
increase the riser steam and feed steam while decreasing the
raw oil charge to 60% of design. Increase the riser steam as
157048
Procedures
Page 58



necessary to keep catalyst circulating through the riser. Reduce
the reactor pressure as possible to assist catalyst flow up the
riser.

(b) Allow the reactor temperature to drop to reduce coke make but
do not go below 900F (480C). As the regenerator
temperatures drop, transfer as much catalyst as possible to the
storage hopper without losing the recirculation and regenerated
catalyst flows.

(c) When the raw oil charge rate is decreased to 60% of design,
start a small flow of dry steam to the main column bottoms.

(d) When prepared, bypass the raw oil to the main column and
shut down the charge pump. Immediately shutdown the main
air blower, riser steam and feed steam. Maintain reactor
stripping steam. With no steam to transport the catalyst, it will
slump and plug the riser wye section. This is done to prevent
any air from entering the reactor. While this is less than
desirable for easily restarting operation, it is a necessary safety
protection for the unit.

(e) Fully close the spent catalyst slide valve to maintain a reactor
level. Increase steam into the main column bottoms. Increase
the reactor stripping steam to maximum to purge the reactor.

(f) After bypassing charge, shutdown and block in the wet gas
compressor.

(g) Continue steaming the main column and vent pressure to the
flare. Pump out the oil from all circuits in preparation for
installing the reactor vapor blind. Continue with the shutdown
procedures to isolate and prepare the reactor and regenerator
for entry to repair the valve.
157048
Procedures
Page 59



(3) Recirculation Slide Valve Failure

(a) Usually, failure of this valve does not require a unit shutdown
unless it fails near its fully closed position. Small adjustments to
other operating variables should make it possible to keep the
unit on stream.

(b) If the valve is stuck in one position, there will be no direct
control over the combustor temperature. Check the regenerator
temperatures, combustor catalyst density and main air blower
discharge pressure.

(c) If the valve is stuck too far open, the catalyst density in the
combustor will increase which will increase the blower
discharge pressure. If the air flow becomes limited as a result,
adjustments can be made to the regenerator pressure to
compensate.

(d) If the valve is stuck too far closed, the catalyst density and
temperature will decrease, and there may not be enough heat
to complete the coke combustion or enough catalyst to absorb
the heat from the combustion. This could lead to afterburning in
the upper regenerator. In this case, the air rate can be
decreased slightly to compensate. In severe cases, the charge
rate and reactor temperature should be reduced to decrease
the coke make.

(4) Flue Gas Slide Valve Failure

If the control of one of the discs is lost on the double disc valve, it
may be possible to control the reactor-regenerator differential
pressure using only the second operable disc. However, in the event
that adequate P control cannot be maintained, or that control of
both discs is lost, then the unit would need to be shut down.
157048
Procedures
Page 60



If the valves fail toward the closed position resulting in a rising
regenerator pressure, the main air blower would have to be
shutdown immediately. The rising regenerator pressure would stop
spent catalyst transfer and create a dangerous situation in which air
could be forced into the reactor.

On the other hand, if the valves were to fail toward the open
position, the regenerator would depressure as if the main air blower
had failed. Therefore, the unit should be handled as in a main air
blower failure.

(5) Catalyst Cooler Slide Valve Failure

The loss of control on this valve will not require a unit shutdown. The
cooler will either take more or less heat out of the regenerator than
desired, depending on whether the valve is too far open or closed.
This situation can usually be handled by adjusting the cooler
fluidizing air to compensate. In the extreme case, the reactor and
feedstock conditions may have to be adjusted to make more or less
coke.

9. Catalyst Cooler

a. Loss of Circulating Boiler Feed Water

The following steps must be taken if circulating water flow cannot be
restarted to the cooler. With the loss of circulating water, the catalyst
cooler tube temperature will quickly increase to the surrounding catalyst
temperature.

(1) To minimize heat transfer, immediately stop fluidizing air flow to the
catalyst cooler.

(2) Confirm that the cooled catalyst slide valve has closed.
157048
Procedures
Page 61



(3) Depressure the catalyst cooler steam drum to 50 psig (3.5 kg/cm
2
).
This will reduce the metallurgical stress on the cooler tubes.

(4) Determine the cause of the water circulation failure and make
necessary repairs.

(5) To avoid thermally shocking the tubes, let them cool to below 450F
(230C) before restarting the water circulation. Use the
thermocouples located in the cooler as an indication of the tube
temperature.

(6) Restart water circulation and watch for a high BFW makeup rate
indicating a tube is leaking.

(7) When water circulation is stable, begin fluidizing air to the cooler.
Adjust the air rate for the desired heat removal. If air will not flow
through the lances, it may be necessary to attach a higher pressure
gas source, air or nitrogen, to the header to help blow the lances
free.

b. Catalyst Cooler Tube Rupture

If a tube in the catalyst cooler ruptures, as indicated by a slight pressure
surge in the regenerator and a sudden increase in boiler feed water
demand, the following actions must be taken:

(1) The circulating water pumps must be shutdown and the makeup
water stopped.

(2) Stop fluidizing air to the cooler.

(3) Confirm that the cooled catalyst slide valve has closed.

(4) Depressure the steam drum and isolate the system.
157048
Procedures
Page 62



(5) It is possible to leave the cooler in this state and continue the FCC
operation indefinitely. The stagnant catalyst in the cooler will
eventually cool to protect the tubes against high temperature.
Shutdown of the FCC unit can be planned for a later date to repair
the ruptured tube.

In both of the above situations, loss of the catalyst cooler will require an
adjustment in FCC operating conditions to compensate for the lost heat
removal and limit regenerator temperature. This may require a reduction
in charge rate or a lighter feedstock. The FCC unit does not need to be
shutdown in either event.

10. Lift Gas Failure

Lift gas is not required to keep the FCC unit operating. Usually, lift steam can
be used to compensate for any loss of lift gas. The system is designed to shut
off lift gas to the riser when oil charge is bypassed.

a. Loss of Lift Gas

Increase lift steam to the riser. If lift gas cannot be restored, block in and
isolate the line.

b. Upset in Gas Concentration Unit

If an upset occurs which increases the heavy material in the lift gas
(greater than 10% C
3
+
), reduce or discontinue the lift gas, increasing the
lift steam to compensate. The C
3
+
material can crack to large quantities
of light gas which could upset the compressor and absorbers.

157048
Procedures
Page 63



11. Instrument Air Failure

Loss of instrument air will result in all control valves moving to their fail
position. If instrument air cannot be restored immediately, the unit must be
shutdown.

a. The raw oil charge is bypassed to the main column on air failure. The
charge pump should be shut down until air is restored.

b. Steam to the riser and feed distributors opens fully on air failure. Lift gas
to the riser will fail closed.

c. The main air blower governor will fail to the minimum speed and the anti-
surge snort valve will fail open. The catalyst slide valves will not fail as
they are electrohydraulic, so they must be closed by operator action. If
instrument air cannot be restored quickly, the blower may be left running
and the snort valve, recirculation catalyst slide valve and flue gas slide
valves and be adjusted to reestablish catalyst circulation in the
regenerator. The catalyst temperature can then be maintained at 1200F
(650C) using the air heater or torch oil in preparation for the unit restart.

d. The wet gas compressor spillback valves will fail open. Unless sufficient
fuel gas can be put into the LCO stripper to maintain column pressure,
the compressor should be shut down.

e. The circulating main column bottoms control valves to the steam
generators will fail open. If instrument air is not restored quickly, close the
block valves and use the bypass valves to reduce these flows and
minimize cooling in the main column.

f. Usually an instrument air failure will be of short duration. When air is
restored, control valve action will return and the unit can be restarted
according to the normal startup procedure.

157048
Procedures
Page 64



12. Electrical Power Failure

In a general power failure, all process equipment will shut down except those
pumps and compressors driven by steam turbines. The power pack for
instrumentation will fail momentarily until the emergency power system cuts in,
restoring instrument circuits.

In the event of a power failure, the following actions should be taken:

a. Increase lift steam and feed steam to the riser, bypass the raw oil charge
to the main column and close the raw oil charge control valve. If it is
expected that the power outage will be temporary, continue catalyst
circulation using steam. Stop lift gas flow. Establish a reactor pressure
higher than the regenerator and reduce the pressure in the main column.

b. Close the catalyst cooler slide valve and reduce fluidizing air to minimum
flow to minimize heat removal in the regenerator. If catalyst circulation is
continued, use the air heater to maintain the catalyst at 1200F (650C).
The turbine driven circulating water pumps for the catalyst cooler and flue
gas cooler should continue operating.

c. If the wet gas compressor is motor driven, it will shut down. If turbine
driven, keep the compressor running on total spillback. In either case,
start fuel gas to the LCO stripper to maintain column pressure.

d. The main column bottoms pumps are turbine driven and will continue
operating. Maintain circulation but flow through the steam generators may
have to be stopped if BFW makeup has stopped. With all column
pumparounds and overhead reflux stopped, the column will hold heat for
some time.

e. When power is restored, restart all pumps and follow the normal startup
procedure.

157048
Procedures
Page 65



13. Cooling Water Failure

If cooling water failure occurs for a period greater than about ten minutes, the
unit will probably need to be shut down. The largest potential danger is to the
wet gas compressor. Loss of cooling water to the interstage cooler will result in
a high suction temperature to the second stage which can cause significant
damage to the compressor. If cooling water cannot be restored, take the
following action:

a. Shutdown the wet gas compressor and bypass raw oil charge to the main
column. Increase lift steam and feed steam to the riser. Stop lift gas flow
and block in the control valve.

b. Maintain reactor pressure by starting fuel gas to the LCO stripper.
Establish a reactor pressure higher than the regenerator.

c. Continue catalyst circulation using riser steam if it is expected that cooling
water will be restored within a reasonable period. If not, catalyst
circulation to the riser can be stopped.

d. Continue internal catalyst circulation in the regenerator and use torch oil
to maintain the catalyst at 1200F (650C).

e. When cooling water is restored, bring the unit back on stream following
the normal startup procedure.

14. Steam Failure

Since the FCC unit is a major steam producer, it is less susceptible to steam
failures. When a boiler failure does occur, steam pressure will begin dropping.
Non-critical users will be shed first, so the FCC unit has time for an orderly
shutdown. A main objective is to purge hydrocarbon from the reactor before
steam is lost completely. The following actions should be taken:

157048
Procedures
Page 66



a. Bypass raw oil charge to the main column and shutdown the charge
pump. Increase lift steam, feed steam and stripping steam to maximum
flows to purge the reactor quickly.

b. Continue catalyst circulation on riser steam for a short period, then close
the regenerated and spent catalyst slide valves.

c. Since the main column bottoms pumps are turbine driven, they will not be
operating for long. Therefore, cool the main column quickly to lighten the
material in the bottom to avoid coking when flow has been lost. Pump out
bottoms to hold a low level. Shutdown the wet gas compressor and begin
to depressure the main column to flare. Start steam to the main column
bottom to help purge the column.

d. The main air blower is usually turbine driven and will eventually be
stopped. Internal catalyst circulation in the regenerator can be maintained
until that time. If it is expected that steam will be restored within a short
period, keep the catalyst hot with the air heater until the blower shuts
down.

e. When steam is restored, start turbines carefully due to the potential for
condensate in the lines. Restart the unit according to the normal startup
procedures.


F. CATALYST HANDLING

Handling FCC catalyst is a relatively simple job. FCC catalyst is a relatively
strong material and will function quite well if not seriously abused. Because of
its characteristic of being easily fluidized, it is easily moved to and from the unit
using the principles of a pneumatic conveyor.

157048
Procedures
Page 67



Storage is provided usually in two large hoppers, one for fresh catalyst and the
other for equilibrium catalyst (removed from the unit). Capacity of these
hoppers may vary from 100-500 tons, depending on the size of the unit. The
fresh catalyst hopper will have an automatic catalyst loader, and is usually
slightly smaller than the equilibrium hopper. The equilibrium hopper must be
sized to hold the entire catalyst inventory of the unit, plus some contingency.
Both hoppers have relief valves to prevent overpressuring, and a variety of
loading and unloading lines. Instrumentation is limited to several pressure
gauges and a level gauging device. Both hoppers are usually built to withstand
a full vacuum. A steam ejector is used to provide this vacuum to unload
catalyst into the hopper. Refer to Figure 5.

1. Loading Catalyst to the Hopper

Catalyst is delivered from the manufacturer in trucks, railcars, or large
plastic-lined boxes. Equilibrium catalyst usually leaves the refinery in the
same manner. Before the catalyst is loaded to the hopper, all lines and
vessels should be inspected. The important points to check are:

a. All lines and vessels are built according to specification.

b. Pressure taps are open and the level gauging devices are working.

c. The lines and vessels are free of foreign material, especially water
or oil. The air lines should be checked by blowing all lines until they
are clean and dry. The large diameter loading lines can be blown
using the hot air from the regenerator during dryout. Any water in the
lines or hoppers will form a sticky mud which makes normal handling
impossible as this wet catalyst is extremely difficult to remove.
Prolonged blowing with air or cleanout by hand will work, but the
best method is prevention by keeping the system dry.

157048
Procedures
Page 68



The next step is to load catalyst to the appropriate hopper. This is
important because of the tremendous activity difference between fresh
and equilibrium catalyst. Mistakes here can be highly embarrassing.

The catalyst may be loaded to the hopper by blowing it in from the truck
or railcar, evacuating the hopper and pulling it in, or a combination of the
two. A vacuum can be pulled on the hoppers by commissioning the
ejector after lining up the valves to the appropriate hopper (Figure 5).
Open the loading valves first at the top of the hopper, then at the catalyst
loading area. The catalyst should flow freely.

If the catalyst arrives on site in boxes, a cone shaped open hopper can be
used to transfer it to the catalyst hopper. The appropriate hopper would
be evacuated, and a small amount of carrying air supplied at the base of
the cone to help move the catalyst.

The amount of catalyst in the hopper should be measured regularly. A
chart showing tons of catalyst as a function of outage will give a quick
inventory reference. This can be calculated knowing the hopper volumes
as a function of height (be careful when calculating the cone section at
the base) and the catalyst densities of approximately 50 Ib/ft
3
(800
kg/m
3
) for fresh catalyst and 55 Ib/ft
3
(880 kg/m
3
) for equilibrium catalyst.
More exact values of these multipliers can be obtained from the catalyst
data sheets or calculated after a known weight of either catalyst has been
loaded into its appropriate hopper. Knowing the amount of catalyst
remaining in the hoppers is the only way to control inventory and to
determine how much catalyst is being used in the unit.

Using the hopper level gauging devices may not always provide accurate
catalyst level measurements. These have a tendency to sink in the
catalyst and give false readings. Also, the catalyst may form a cone inside
the hopper which can give a false reading. A proper measurement can be
obtained by depressuring the hopper and letting it settle for at least 1
157048
Procedures
Page 69



hour. Then the gauging hatch is opened and the outage measured with a
hand tape.

2. Loading Catalyst to the Regenerator

The procedure for loading the catalyst to the regenerator begins with
pressuring up the hopper. Blower air is good for this purpose because it is
hot and dry, although dry plant air can also be used. If possible, the air
should be injected at the base of the hopper so that it will fluff the catalyst
as it flows upward. The pressure in the hopper must be higher than the
pressure in the regenerator, or the catalyst will not move. Refer to Figure
5.

a. Make sure the regenerator is ready to receive catalyst. Refer to the
normal startup procedures.

b. Gauge the hopper and pressure it to 40 psig (2.8 kg/cm
2
) by adding
air through the bottom.

c. Line up the loading line from the hopper to the regenerator start the
carrying air to the line while leaving the block valve under the hopper
closed. Set the air rate to achieve a velocity of ~50 ft/sec (15 m/sec)
in the line or so that the pressure at the end of the line increases by
~1-2 psi (0.1-0.2 kg/cm
2
) if no FI is provided.

f. Open the catalyst loading valve at the bottom of the hopper slowly
until the loading line pressure rises 10-15 psi (0.7-1.0 kg/cm
2
),
signifying that catalyst is flowing through the line. The catalyst block
valve should be 1/4 to 3/4 open. The operator can avoid plugging
the line by carefully watching the pressure gauge and/or carrying air
FI on the loading line at the base of the hopper. With normal loading,
the gauge will oscillate slightly around a pressure about 5-10 psi
(0.35 0.7 kg/cm
2
) above the regenerator pressure. If this gauge on
the loading line shows an increase in pressure, the catalyst hopper
157048
Procedures
Page 70



block valve should be closed. The carrying air can then clear the line
before excess catalyst can plug it. The optimum catalyst transfer
technique is best determined through trial and error operation for
each specific installation.

g. Maintain the hopper pressure by adding air to the bottom of the
hopper as this generally gives smoother catalyst flow. However, if
this operation reduces the loading rate, the hopper can be pressure
from the top.

h. When the correct regenerator inventory is achieved, close the
loading valve at the bottom of the hopper. Blow out the loading line
and close the loading valves at the regenerator, leaving the loading
line under plant air pressure.

i. Gauge the hopper and determine the quantity of catalyst transferred
during the loading.

Plugging Problems

If there is a problem with the catalyst bridging above the block valve at
the bottom of the hopper, quickly opening and closing the valve 1-2 turns
will usually break the bridge. If this fails, blast the bottom of the hopper
with air.

The catalyst loading line may plug occasionally. When this happens,
close the catalyst block valve at the base of the hopper. Starting at the
regenerator and working back to the hopper, fully open the blast points
one by one. If this fails, pounding on the line with a non-sparking hammer
will work as a last resort. When the pressure gauge on the loading line at
the base of the hopper falls to just above the regenerator pressure, the
line is clear. High pressure air or nitrogen may be used to clear a plug,
but do not exceed safe working pressure of the line.

157048
Procedures
Page 71



3. Fresh Catalyst Makeup

For loading fresh catalyst, an automatic loader usually works quite well.
These feed catalyst to the regenerator in small amounts on a steady
basis. This is much better than dumping a day's supply into the unit in 20
minutes, leading to a marked activity change. The fresh catalyst loading
line is usually much smaller than the large line used for initial catalyst
loading. The smaller line has a larger volume of air per unit area passing
through it, which decreases the potential of plugging problems.

The rate of fresh catalyst makeup will vary depending on unit
performance objectives, feedstock quality and how well the unit "holds"
catalyst. Some refiners add only enough fresh catalyst to balance losses.
Others add makeup at a higher rate to maintain a certain activity level and
then periodically withdraw equilibrium catalyst to balance unit inventory.
The level of metals in the feedstock will have a strong impact on catalyst
makeup rates.

4. Unloading Catalyst from the Regenerator

The pressure in the regenerator is the driving force to unload catalyst to
the equilibrium hopper. Commission the steam ejector and line up the
valves to pull a vacuum on the equilibrium hopper. Then open the
unloading valves, first on the hopper, then on the regenerator. It is usually
not necessary to use the blast connections, although they are available if
needed. Withdraw the appropriate amount of catalyst by watching the
regenerator level. When the unloading is finished, close the regenerator
block valve. Clean out the unloading line by opening the nearest blast
point. Then shut off the ejector and bleed enough air into the hopper to
raise it to atmospheric pressure.

157048
Procedures
Page 72



5. Catalyst Valve Purges

An air purge is normally provided to the seat and bonnet of all valves in
the catalyst loading/unloading system. This is to prevent catalyst from
collecting in these areas and interfering with valve operation. Forcing a
valve shut when the seat is full of catalyst will only damage the valve.

For proper operation, open the purges and clear the seat and bonnet
before the valve is operated. Do not leave the purges on during the
loading operation as excessive valve erosion can result. Rather, purge
the valves each time they will be adjusted and particularly just before the
valves are closed.


G. SPECIAL OPERATIONS

1. Catalyst Sampling

When drawing hot catalyst samples, gloves, long sleeve clothing and face
shields should always be worn. Always use a metal container to collect
the sample. Refer to Figure 6 for the valve locations in the following
procedure for drawing catalyst samples.

a. Spent Catalyst Sample

NOTE: Air should never be used when purging into the reactor or
the spent standpipe as oxygen can initiate coke burning.

(1) The reactor level controller should be switched to manual as
purging the sample connection could upset the slide valve
differential pressure controller.

157048
Procedures
Page 73



(2) Check that all blast and sample connection valves are closed,
then open sample valve E and steam valve B. Vent steam to
the atmosphere until it is dry.

(3) Close sample valve E and open the nozzle valve F. Steam
purge the sample line into the standpipe.

(4) Open sample valve E and reduce the steam flow through valve
B until a small flow of catalyst is obtained. If catalyst does not
flow out of sample valve E, close valve E and blast the
standpipe through steam valve C. Repeat the step until catalyst
can be obtained.

(5) Take the sample and close valve E.

(6) Open steam valve B and purge into the standpipe.

(7) Close nozzle valve F and then steam valve B.

(8) Open sample valve E.

(9) Put the reactor level control back in automatic.

b. Regenerated Catalyst Sample

(1) The reactor temperature controller should be switched to
manual as purging the sample connection could upset the slide
valve differential pressure controller.

(2) Check that all blast and sample connection valves are closed,
then open sample valve E and air valve A. Vent air to the
atmosphere until it is dry.

157048
Procedures
Page 74



(3) Close sample valve E and open the nozzle valve F. Air purge
the sample line into the standpipe.

(4) Open sample valve E and reduce the air flow through valve A
until a small flow of catalyst is obtained. If catalyst does not flow
out of sample valve E, close valve E and A, and blast the
standpipe through steam valve C. Repeat the step until catalyst
can be obtained.

(5) Take the sample and close valve E.

(6) Open air valve A and purge into the standpipe.

(7) Close nozzle valve F and then air valve A.

(8) Open sample valve E.

(9) Put the reactor temperature control back in automatic.

2. Blasting Catalyst Standpipes

Sample and blast connections are located just above the spent,
regenerated, and recirculation catalyst slide valves. There may also be
blast connections located higher on the regenerated standpipe. These
connections are used not only to sample catalyst but also to clear the
standpipes of any plugs which might occur. The following is a procedure
for blasting these standpipes using steam (refer to Figure 6).

NOTE: Air should never be used to when purging into the reactor or
spent standpipe.

a. Place the appropriate slide valve controller in manual when blasting
a standpipe.

157048
Procedures
Page 75



b. Check that all blast and sample valves are closed, then open sample
valve E and steam valve C. Vent steam to the atmosphere until it is
dry.

c. Close sample valve E and open nozzle valve F. Purge steam into
the standpipe until the plug is cleared. Do not blast for extended
periods (more than several minutes) with the steam valve full open.
Potential erosion to the standpipe refractory is a concern. It is better
to use short intermittent blasts than one long continuous blast.

d. Close nozzle valve F and steam valve C.

e. Open sample valve E.

f. Place the slide valve controller back in automatic control.

3. Direct Fired Air Heater

The direct fired air heater is used to heat up the circulating catalyst
inventory during startup or maintain heat during temporary shutdowns.
The heater is only fired when the main air blower is operating. A
potentiometer should be connected to the temperature indicator located
at the outlet of the air heater so the field operator can monitor the
temperature locally when the heater is fired.

Refer to the manufacturer's operating manual for detailed operating
information. The general heater steps are as follows:

a. Pull the blind in the air heater fuel gas line after the main air blower
is put in operation.

b. Switch on the ignition power.

c. Adjust the inlet damper to direct less air behind the burner block.
157048
Procedures
Page 76



d. Open the fuel gas line supplying gas to the pilot burner. Press the
button on the local panel supplying power to the pilot ignitor. Use the
observation ports to confirm that the pilot has been lit.

e. When the pilot has been lit, slowly open the main burner gas valve
until a flame is obtained. Use the observation ports to confirm that
the main burner is firing.

f. Adjust the inlet damper to get a proper flame color.

g. While the air heater is relatively simple to operate, the following
precautions should be observed:

(1) An operator should be stationed at the air heater to monitor the
flame any time the heater is in operation.

(2) If the air flow to the regenerator stops for any reason, the fuel
gas supply valves must be shut off immediately.

(3) The fuel gas to the heater must be free of any liquid. Slugs of
liquid hydrocarbon can cause damage due to high
temperatures.

4. Flushing System

The flushing oil system is required for two reasons:

a. The main column bottoms contains catalyst fines which can settle
out and plug instruments and small piping, and which can erode
pumps and control valves.

b. Maintenance on the packing of the hot main column bottoms pumps
is reduced if the packing glands are cooled by a flushing stream.

157048
Procedures
Page 77



The throat bushings and wear rings of the main column bottoms pumps
are flushed with hot heavy cycle oil taken from the circulating HCO pump
discharge. Hot material is used to avoid the thermal stresses which could
result if a cooled oil was injected into the hot pump casing. HCO is used
since LCO would flash and cause pump cavitation. The flush rate is
adjusted by closing the inlet flush valve, observing the static pressure,
and opening the flush valve until the pressure increases about 10 psi (0.7
kg/cm
2
).

Light cycle oil is used for all other flushing services with the exception that
raw oil is used during startup and can be used during an emergency. On
units with resid feed stocks light gas oil from storage should be used as a
backup instead of raw oil. The flushing oil is taken from the LCO product
cooler outlet and passes through a 30 mesh strainer, which should be
cleaned whenever the P exceeds 15 psi (1 kg/cm
2
).

The main column bottom level instrument and sight glass similarly flushed
to prevent the accumulation of catalyst. A 1/8 inch (3 mm) restriction
orifice is used to regulate the flow to each location.

The main column bottoms pump packing glands are flushed with LCO
through a lantern ring to cool the shaft and packing. The flush is returned
to the main column with the circulating HCO return. This flush is adjusted
by closing both the supply and return valves, and observing the lantern
ring pressure. The flushing supply valve should then be adjusted so that
the flush oil pressure is 15 psi (1 kg/cm
2
) higher, while the return valve is
adjusted to maintain the return temperature above 150F (65C). It is
advisable to mark the desired flush oil pressures on the gauges so that
adjustments can be easily made.

157048
Procedures
Page 78



5. Main Air Blower Discharge Check Valve

a. Application

The main air blower discharge check valve is a swinging disc type
valve installed on the discharge of the air blower for safety reasons.
The weight of its disc is balanced to cause the valve to close when
air flow stops, preventing the reverse flow of air and catalyst through
the blower. The valve is equipped with a spring loaded air cylinder
and an oil dashpot. The air cylinder provides an automatic device
which assists the valve to close quickly, while the dashpot dampens
the excessive swinging of the disc under a low or pulsating flow
condition so that the disc does not slam on the seat.

b. Counterweights

The steel disc of the valve is of heavy construction to resist distortion
from pressure loads or high temperatures. Counterweights are
provided so that the full weight of this disc will not have to be carried
by the gas stream going through the valve. By counterweighting
approximately 75% of the disc weight, the valve opens wide under
the design flow condition and results in minimum pressure drop
through the valve. Counterweighting to hold the valve open when
there is no gas flow through the valve must not be done as this
negates the safety protection of the valve. If the disc is moved off the
seat by manually pulling on the counterweight lever when there is no
gas flow through the valve, the disc should return to the seat freely
and rapidly upon release of the counterweight lever.

c. Air Cylinder

The external spring loaded air cylinder is designed to assist in the
rapid closure of the valve under emergency conditions. It can not be
used to open the valve and under normal operating conditions with
157048
Procedures
Page 79



air pressure supplied to the cylinder, there is no physical connection
nor restriction to the movement of the valve.

Air pressure in the range of 60 to 125 psig (4 to 9 kg/cm
2
) is
required to offset the air cylinder spring force. The air pressure
supplied to the cylinder is through a 3-way solenoid valve which is
activated by the main air blower discharge flow transmitter low flow
switch. This valve operates such that when it is actuated, it vents the
air pressure in the cylinder to atmosphere. Once the cylinder is
depressured, its spring force acts to jolt the valve disc loose so that
it may close freely. The release of air from the cylinder, however,
does not assist in the closing action.

There are two advantages associated with using this type of
externally actuated check valve. If the valve tends to stick open after
several months of operation, the cylinder's spring provides a break-
away force to start the valve closing. Also, the air cylinder is tripped
before the blower stops rotating, so that the spring forces the disc
nearer to the seat before air flow stops. This ensures that the valve
will seat before reverse flow can develop.

While the spring in the air cylinder exerts a substantial force, the
closing force creates only a relatively small back pressure. This is
important from the standpoint of operation, because even in the
event of accidental tripping, flow through the valve will continue.
Thus, if the shutdown system should malfunction while the blower is
operating normally, the unit can continue in operation until the
instrumentation is repaired.

d. Oil Dashpot

The oil dashpot contains a loose fitting piston which moves through
an oil filled cylinder. As the check valve disc moves, it moves the
piston through the oil, forcing oil from one side to the other through a
157048
Procedures
Page 80



bypass line containing a regulating check valve. This valve restricts
the oil flow as the disc opens, preventing rapid opening, while
allowing unobstructed oil flow and rapid movement of the disc when
the check valve closes. This system will dampen the action of the
disc in a low flow or pulsating condition to protect the valve seat.

The regulating valve should be set initially in a 3/4 open position to
provide some restriction to the oil flow on opening of the disc. Before
the check valve is put into operation, the dashpot should be filled
through the plug on the bypass connection with a light lubricating oil
such as SAE 10W.

6. Slumped Riser During Shutdown

With raw oil charge bypassed, riser flow is maintained usually with only
steam. If this steam is stopped during catalyst circulation, or the
regenerated catalyst slide valve is maintained open manually with
insufficient steam to the riser, the catalyst can slump and fill the wye
section and bottom of the riser. If such a situation develops with hot
catalyst and oil present, the wye section stagnant catalyst can coke up
and require hammer and chisel to remove. If such a situation develops
with cooler catalyst and condensate, catalyst mud can form which is also
difficult to remove. Thus, it is imperative that steam always be maintained
to the riser during shutdown situations, at least until the regenerated
catalyst slide valve has been closed and the riser is free of catalyst.

Should a slump occur, blast points at the bottom of the wye section
should be used to clear the plug with steam if possible. Steam can also
be blasted through the normal lift steam line.

If mud has formed and cannot be blasted clear, the 4 inch (150 mm)
blankoff connection at the base of the wye can be opened to attempt to
drain the wet catalyst. A vacuum hose can be connected to assist pulling
the catalyst out.
157048
Procedures
Page 81




If all attempts fail, the lift or feed distributor in the wye should be pulled to
allow entry for manual removal of the catalyst.

NOTE: Always assume the catalyst will be hot and take all necessary
safety precautions.

157048
Procedures
Page 82



Figure 1:
Reactor/Regenerator Section

Products to
Main
Column
Flue
Gas
Startup Naphtha
from Main Column
Overhead
Lift Gas from Gas
Concentration Unit
Steam
Lift
Steam
Startup
Steam
HS
FO
FC
Main Column
Bottoms Recycle
Raw Oil
from Preheat
Reactor Bypass to
Main Column
Atomizing
Steam
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Fluffing
Steam
Stripping
Steam
FIC
Prestripping
Steam
Air
Fuel
Gas
Pilot
Gas
Direct Fired Air
Heater
Split Range
Steam
Torch Oil
from HCO
or Raw Oil
FIC
FCC-P001
157048
Procedures
Page 83



Figure 2:
Main Column Lower Section
Raw Oil
from
Surge
Drum
MCB
Product
Steam to
Superheater
Reactor
Product
Vapor
CW
MCB
Quench
Disc and Donut
Minimum Flow
LIC
Debutanizer
Reboiler
FIC
FIC
FIC
FIC
Torch Oil
Pump Flushing Oil
FCC-P002
FIC
T
Startup Heating
Steam Trap
Startup
Steam
HS
FO
FC
FIC
Raw Oil to
Reactor
FIC
Startup
Filling Line
To LCO
Pumparound
Return Line
Circulation
Bypass
Startup
Circulation/
Recycle
Torch
Oil
Flushing
Oil
157048
Procedures
Page 84



Figure 3:
Main Column Upper Section
PSV
CW
Wet Gas
Compressor First
Stage Spillback
To Wet Gas Compressor
Suction Drum
To Flare Header
FC
Signal to Wet Gas
Compressor Controls
PIC PRC
Net Overhead Liquid
to High Pressure
Receiver
Sour Water
LIC
TIC
FIC FIC
HCN
Product
HCO
CW
FIC
FI
LCO
Product
LCO to
Flushing Oil
FI
CW
BFW
Preheater
FIC
Gas
Concentration
Unit Heat
Exchangers
Gas
Concentration
Unit Heat
Exchangers
Startup Filling from
Raw Oil/MCB
Startup
Fuel Gas
Startup
Circulation
Bypass
Startup
Circulation
Bypass
Steam
FCC-P003
HCN
Stripper
LCO
Stripper
157048
Procedures
Page 85




Figure 4:
Reactor Vapor Line Blind


Vent to
Safe
Location
Steam
PI
DG
Blind or
Spacer
Blind or
Spacer
Drains
Reactor
Overhead
Vapor
FCC-P004
157048
Procedures
Page 86



Figure 5:
Catalyst Handling Facilities
GRATING
"DA"
Catalyst
Hopper
Everlasting
Valves
Plant Air
Plant Air
Catalyst
Volume Pot
Plant
Air
Catalyst
Makeup
Logic
Controller
Plant
Air
Plant Air
RO
Catalyst Makeup to
Regenerator
FCC-P005
Sight Flow
Glass
FI
PG
"DA"
FIC PI
To Atmosphere or
ESP Inlet
Steam
Ejector
Catalyst Filling
and Withdrawal
To/From
Regenerator
Catalyst Loading
and Unloading
from Shipping
Containers
Removable
Spoolpiece
(blankoff
when not
unloading
Ecat)
LI
Manual
Gauging
Hatch
Air Purge
157048
Procedures
Page 87



Figure 6:
Catalyst Standpipe Blast and Sample Point


Plant
Air
Sample
Point
F
E
D
C
B
A
Steam
Min
RO
Strainer
Catalyst
Standpipe
FCC-P006
157048
Safety
Page 1




SAFETY


A. GENERAL

Safety is a broad field that covers a variety of topics from fire fighting to toxic
chemicals. Awareness of safety in the refinery is extremely important. As a basis for
a safety program, regulations and guidelines from government and professional
groups should be studied for their effect on this unit and then implemented by the
refinery staff. The staff must develop its own coordinated plant-wide method of
implementing safe and proper procedures, and of handling emergencies, which
should include:

1. Training to develop the operator's knowledge of equipment operation, and the
nature of the FCC unit.

2. Good communication among all involved groups concerning activities in
progress, and of prime importance, as well, is the use of common sense.

3. Emergency planning and practice drills.

The following discussion is not intended to supersede or otherwise replace refinery
safety practices, but rather, should be used as a supplement or reminder of some of
the important safety features.


B. PRECAUTIONS FOR ENTERING VESSELS

The reactor must be adequately cooled before air is admitted into the vessel. If the
reactor is not sufficiently cooled, auto-ignition of hot coke deposits in the reactor or
its vapor line may result. The reactor must be cooled to below 300F (150C) before
any manways or nozzles are opened. Riser or stripping steam can be used to help
cool the vessel.
157048
Safety
Page 2




The following safety precautions should be followed to protect personnel entering a
vessel against toxic materials, such as H
2
S, which are present in the RCC Unit:

1. The vessels should be isolated by positive action, such as blinding, to exclude
all sources of hydrocarbon, steam, etc.

2. An air mover should be installed at the vessel's manway to sweep away any
vapors and provide a continuous supply of fresh air.

3. Responsible personnel must test the atmosphere in the vessel for explosivity,
toxic fumes, oxygen content, dust, etc. Permission for vessel entry should be
given only after this testing has been done.

4. Personnel entering the vessel must be equipped with a pressure demand
respirator that is in proper working condition, and is connected to a suitable
fresh air supply.

5. Separate air supplies which are independent of electrical power should be
available for immediate use and transfer to personnel in the vessel.

6. Personnel entering the vessel should wear a safety harness with a properly
attached safety line.

7. If the work is to be performed at a high level above the bottom of the vessel,
such as cyclone inspection, scaffolding and support flooring must be built to
prevent falls.

8. There should be a minimum of two backup men at the vessel manway in
continuous surveillance of the personnel in the vessel.

157048
Safety
Page 3




9. There should be spare pressure demand respirators, complete with their own
separate air supplies, to allow backup personnel to enter the vessel quickly in
case of an emergency. This spare equipment must be compact enough to
allow the users to enter through the manway while wearing the equipment.

10. It is recommended that any personnel working in a vessel which has an inert
or contaminated atmosphere not be permitted to move too far away from the
entryway, or into any tight areas, such as through a fractionator tray manway.
If the person should develop some difficulty in an inaccessible area to a point
where he could not function properly or lost consciousness, it would be
extremely difficult for the surveillance team to assist or move the person by
use of his safety line.


C. HIGH TEMPERATURE PRECAUTIONS

A hazard that is commonly encountered on an RCC Unit is the rapid heating of
unloading lines and the catalyst storage hopper when catalyst is unloaded from the
regenerator. The unloading lines and hopper will heat up very quickly from their
normal ambient temperature. Anyone working around the uninsulated lines or
vessels should be warned that these will get hot. Combustible materials and trash
should be kept away from the unloading lines and equilibrium catalyst hoppers.


D. WATER VAPORIZATION HAZARD

The danger of vaporizing water in a liquid-full vessel exists anywhere in the refinery
where a heating source exists and a water pocket can form. In the FCC unit, this is
most likely to occur in the main column bottoms circuit. Anytime a vessel such as a
slurry settler, or a bottoms coke strainer or filter is opened for maintenance,
particular care must be paid to removing all free water and slowly heating the vessel
back up to operating temperature. This is true for the bottoms heat exchangers as
well. If water is heated in a hydrostatically full vessel, it will follow its vapor liquid
equilibrium curve and begin increasing in pressure. If the vessel design pressure is
157048
Safety
Page 4




exceeded and the vessel cracks and relieves the internal pressure, the superheated
water will expand approximately 1600 times in volume, resulting in a catastrophic
failure of the vessel. This is similar to a classic boiler explosion mechanism.
Operating and maintenance procedures must be written and followed to prevent
equipment water pockets and rapid heating.


E. CHEMICAL HAZARDS

The hydrocarbons, catalyst, and chemicals encountered in an RCC Unit are not
hazardous as long as they are handled according to safe refinery practices. If they
are mishandled, or allowed to escape into the atmosphere, some of them may be a
hazard to the health of anyone in the area. It is recommended that the refiner
determine the allowable safe limits according to laws, rules, and regulations issued
by various agencies which apply to the material in question.

It is suggested that methods ASTM D-170, ASTM E-300, and UOP 516 be followed
regarding sampling techniques.

Hazardous materials present in the RCC Unit, and their emergency treatments,
include:

1. Catalyst

Fluid cracking catalyst is a fine dust capable of causing eye and lung irritation. When
unloading catalyst cars, drawing samples, etc., goggles or a face shield should be
worn. If the circumstances are such that the working atmosphere becomes dusty, a
dust mask should also be worn. The Material Safety Data Sheet provided by the
catalyst manufacturer needs to be consulted for additional detailed information.

When drawing hot regenerated catalyst samples, gloves and long sleeved clothing
should always be worn. In case of hot catalyst leaks, care must be exercised to
avoid the contact with hot catalyst on unprotected skin.

157048
Safety
Page 5




Loose catalyst is a relatively poor conductor of heat. While the surface of a pile of
catalyst may be cool, the interior may be very hot. Personnel should not walk over or
work around piles of spilled catalyst.

2. Iron Sulfide

Iron sulfide is a black or gray powder deposit found in vessels where sulfur corrosion
has occurred. It is easily mistaken for coke. The danger of iron sulfide lies in its
"pyrophoric" properties. It will ignite spontaneously when exposed to air, which is
most likely to occur in recently opened refinery vessels.

A vessel suspected of containing iron sulfide must be thoroughly steamed out and
washed with water before air is permitted to enter. Any suspected deposits must be
kept wet until they can be removed and disposed of properly.


3. Heavy Cracked Hydrocarbons

Heavy cracked oils are skin irritants. When drawing samples, draining equipment,
and cleaning vessels or exchangers, suitable care should be exercised to avoid skin
contact. In case of actual contact, the skin should be thoroughly washed with hot
soapy water, and any oil-saturated clothing should be removed.

Should any hydrocarbon enter the eye, the recommended First Aid is to wash with a
copious amount of clean water and obtain trained medical assistance as quickly as
possible.

4. Light Cracked Hydrocarbon Liquids

Hydrocarbons in the gasoline boiling range will remove the natural oil from the skin,
leaving it unprotected and subject to irritation or infection. Those gasoline streams
which contain aromatics will be particularly dangerous. Benzene is a poison, and
heavier aromatics have a narcotic effect.

157048
Safety
Page 6




In case of exposure, no time should be lost in removing any gasoline-soaked
clothing and washing the skin with hot soapy water. First Aid for eye injuries is
the same as that discussed above under "Heavy Cracked Hydrocarbons."

5. Aromatic Hydrocarbons

a. Benzene
2


The most toxic hydrocarbon present in the unit is benzene. The danger in
exposure to benzene lies in its carcinogenic effect on the body's blood-forming
organs, an effect which is cumulative with each exposure. This aromatic
component is contained in the gasoline and heavy naphtha streams in the unit.

If clothing, including gloves, becomes wet from benzene, immediately remove the
clothing. Wash the skin areas exposed to benzene with soap and water. Take a
complete bath if the body area is wetted with benzene. Do not wear clothing that
has been wet with benzene until the garment has been washed and dried.
Wearing clothing that has been wet with benzene almost assures that the person
will inhale benzene vapors over a long period of time with serious hazard to
health.

Avoid draining benzene on the ground or into the sewers where it can vaporize
and create a health hazard. If benzene is accidentally spilled, flush it from the
area and the sewer catch basin with large quantities of cold water. Do not use hot
water or steam which further vaporizes the benzene. If you must enter an area of
high benzene vapor concentration resulting from a spill, wear a pressure demand
respirator.



2
For detailed information to take on exposure and potential hazards, consult Chapter XVII of
OHSA Publication 1910.1028, Appendix A.
157048
Safety
Page 7




Though not specifically a health hazard, a problem resulting from benzene entering
the sewer is that benzene is much more soluble in water than any other
hydrocarbons. This places an extra load on the effluent treating system.

b. Toluene, Xylenes, and Heavier Aromatics
3


These aromatic compounds are present in the gasoline and heavy naphtha streams
in the unit. These compounds are only mildly toxic and do not have the destructive
effect on the blood-forming organs as does benzene. Their principal effect is skin,
eye, and respiratory irritation. If clothing becomes wet with such aromatics, remove
the clothing, bathe, and put on fresh clothing. Avoid breathing aromatic vapors.

All employees should be alerted as to the early signs and symptoms of excessive
absorption of aromatics, and all workers should report such symptoms to the
Medical Department. In addition, all employees should, of course, be advised of the
hazards involved and precautions to be taken when working with aromatics.


6. Light Hydrocarbon Vapors

The inhalation of any light hydrocarbon vapor should be avoided. Such vapors can
be toxic, since they may contain aromatics, H
2
S, or other lethal compounds.

A person who has breathed quantities of hydrocarbon vapors should be removed
from the area and kept warm and quiet. If necessary, artificial respiration with or
without the use of oxygen should be administered and medical aid summoned.
Professional medical attention should be obtained at once.




3
See attached sheets for further hazard information.

157048
Safety
Page 8




7. Hydrogen Sulfide (H
2
S)
3

Hydrogen sulfide is present in the gases produced by the cracking of hydrocarbons
containing sulfur. It will occur in the overhead receiver gas and will be dissolved in
the unstabilized gasoline.

Hydrogen sulfide is one of the most poisonous gases known. Exposure to an
atmosphere containing less than 0.1% H
2
S may be fatal in 30 minutes or less. At
very low concentrations, hydrogen sulfide has the characteristic odor of rotten eggs,
but at higher concentrations, or extended exposure at low concentrations, the sense
of smell is paralyzed so that personnel may be unaware of its presence.

Extreme care must be exercised when opening lines and equipment which have
contained even low concentrations of H
2
S, and an H
2
S detector should be used.
When drawing samples, venting instruments, bleeding pumps, etc., precautions
should be taken to avoid breathing the vapors.

A person exposed to H
2
S may become excited or dizzy, may stagger, and can
ultimately lose consciousness. First Aid consists of removal from the area and the
administration of artificial respiration with or without oxygen if breathing has stopped.
The patient should be kept warm and medical aid summoned.

157048
Safety
Page 9




8. Flue Gas

Flue gas from the regenerator contains little or no oxygen. Asphyxiation can result if
a person enters an improperly ventilated duct or a low area where the high density of
flue gas will cause it to accumulate.

Asphyxiation may be preceded by symptoms of dizziness, headache, or shortness of
breath.

RCC flue gas is very dangerous since it contains carbon monoxide, which is toxic. A
concentration of 0.4% can be fatal in about one hour. One visible symptom of carbon
monoxide poisoning is a bluish-red color of the skin.

First Aid in cases of flue gas asphyxiation or poisoning consists of keeping the victim
warm and administering artificial respiration and oxygen, if necessary, obtain
professional medical attention immediately.


157048
Safety
Page 10




HYDROGEN SULFIDE

EXPOSURE

CALL FOR MEDICAL AID.

VAPOR POISONOUS IF INHALED.

Irritating to eyes.
Move to fresh air.
If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration.
If breathing is difficult, give oxygen.
IF IN EYES, hold eyelids open and flush with plenty of water.

HEALTH HAZARDS

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Rubber-framed goggles; approved
respiratory protection.

SYMPTOMS FOLLOWING EXPOSURE: Irritation of eyes, nose and throat. If high
concentrations are inhaled, hyperpnea and respiratory paralysis may occur. Very
high concentrations may produce pulmonary edema.

TREATMENT FOR EXPOSURE (THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE): 10 ppm

SHORT-TERM INHALATION LIMITS: 200 ppm for 10 min., and 50 ppm for 60 min.

TOXICITY BY INGESTION: Hydrogen sulfide is present as a gas at room
temperature, so ingestion not likely.

LATE TOXICITY: Data not available.

VAPOR (GAS) IRRITANT CHARACTERISTICS: Vapor is moderately irritating such
that personnel will not usually tolerate moderate or high vapor concentration.
157048
Safety
Page 11





LIQUID OR SOLID CHARACTERISTICS: Minimum hazard. If spilled on clothing and
allowed to remain, may cause smarting and reddening of the skin.

ODOR THRESHOLD: 0.0047 ppm.


157048
Safety
Page 12




TOLUENE

EXPOSURE

CALL FOR MEDICAL AID.

VAPOR

Irritating to eyes, nose and throat.
If inhaled, will cause nausea, vomiting, headache, dizziness, difficult breathing, or
loss of consciousness.

Move to fresh air.
If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration. If breathing is difficult, give
oxygen.

LIQUID

Irritating to skin and eyes.
If swallowed, will cause nausea, vomiting or loss of consciousness. Remove
contaminated clothing and shoes.
Flush affected areas with plenty of water.
IF IN EYES, hold eyelids open and flush with plenty of water.
IF SWALLOWED and victim is CONSCIOUS, have victim drink water or milk. DO
NOT INDUCE VOMITING.

HEALTH HAZARDS

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Air-supplied mask; goggles or face shield;
plastic gloves.
157048
Safety
Page 13




SYMPTOMS FOLLOWING EXPOSURE: Vapors irritate eyes and upper respiratory
tract; cause dizziness, headache, anesthesia, respiratory arrest. Liquid irritates eyes
and causes drying of skin. If aspirated, causes coughing, gagging, distress, and
rapidly developing pulmonary edema. If ingested causes vomiting, griping, diarrhea,
depressed respiration.

TREATMENT FOR EXPOSURE: INHALATION: remove to fresh air, give artificial
respiration and oxygen if needed; call a doctor. INGESTION: do NOT induce
vomiting. Call a doctor. EYES: flush with water for at least 15 min. SKIN: wipe off,
wash with soap and water.

TOXICITY BY INHALATION (THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE): 100 ppm.

SHORT-TERM INHALATION LIMITS: 600 ppm for 30 min.

TOXICITY BY INGESTION: Grade 2; LD50 0.5 to 5 g/kg

LATE TOXICITY: Kidney and liver damage may follow ingestion.

VAPOR (GAS) IRRITANT CHARACTERISTICS: Vapors cause a slight smarting of
the eyes or respiratory system if present in high concentrations. The effect is
temporary.

LIQUID OR SOLID CHARACTERISTICS: Minimum hazard. If spilled on clothing and
allowed to remain, may cause smarting and reddening of the skin.

ODOR THRESHOLD: 0.17 ppm.
157048
Safety
Page 14




XYLENES

EXPOSURE

CALL FOR MEDICAL AID.

VAPOR

Irritating to eyes, nose and throat.
If inhaled, will cause headache, difficult breathing, or loss of consciousness.
Move to fresh air.
If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration. If breathing is difficult, give
oxygen.

LIQUID

Irritating to skin and eyes.
If swallowed, will cause nausea, vomiting or loss of consciousness. Remove
contaminated clothing and shoes.
Flush affected areas with plenty of water.
IF IN EYES, hold eyelids open and flush with plenty of water.
IF SWALLOWED and victim is CONSCIOUS, have victim drink water or milk.
DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING.

HEALTH HAZARDS

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Approved canister or air-supplied mask;
goggles or face shield; plastic gloves and boots.

SYMPTOMS FOLLOWING EXPOSURE: Vapors cause headache and dizziness.
Liquid irritates eyes and skin. If taken into lungs, causes severe coughing, distress,
and rapidly developing pulmonary edema. If ingested, causes nausea, vomiting,
cramps, headache, and coma; can be fatal. Kidney and liver damage can occur.
157048
Safety
Page 15




TREATMENT FOR EXPOSURE: INHALATION: remove to fresh air, administer
artificial respiration and oxygen if required; call a doctor. INGESTION: do NOT
induce vomiting; call a doctor. EYES: flush with water for at least 15 min. SKIN: wipe
off, wash with soap and water.

TOXICITY BY INHALATION (THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE): 100 ppm.

SHORT-TERM INHALATION LIMITS: 300 ppm for 30 min.

TOXICITY BY INGESTION: Grade 3; LD50 50 to 500 g/kg

LATE TOXICITY: Kidney and liver damage.

VAPOR (GAS) IRRITANT CHARACTERISTICS: Vapors cause a slight smarting of
the eyes or respiratory system if present in high concentrations. The effect is
temporary.

LIQUID OR SOLID CHARACTERISTICS: Minimum hazard. If spilled on clothing and
allowed to remain, may cause smarting and reddening of the skin.

ODOR THRESHOLD: 0.05 ppm.

157048
Environmental
Page 1




ENVIRONMENTAL


Introduction

The refiner today is facing ever tighter environmental regulations. This section will
discuss some of the normal FCCU pollutants and potential methods for their
reduction. It is assumed that each refiner will be familiar with the restrictions placed
on him by the appropriate authorities, as these widely varying and ever-changing
rules are beyond the scope of this book.

There are four primary sources of emissions from the FCCU. These are:

Regenerator Flue Gas

Sour Water

Main Column Bottoms Catalyst Fines

Fired Heater Stack Gas

The major source is the regenerator flue gas, it will be discussed first.

Regenerator Flue Gas

The flue gas flow rate is about 105 - 110% (wt) of the inlet air rate on a dry basis.
The composition of the gas will vary with the mode of regeneration, i.e., partial or
complete combustion, and with other factors such as feedstock composition.
Typical uncontrolled emission concentrations are shown in Table 1. Normally, the
breakdown of the flue gas will be 75-80 vol% N
2
+Argon, 15-22 vol% CO +CO
2
and 8 -12% water vapor.
157048
Environmental
Page 2




TABLE 1

FCCU REGENERATOR UNCONTROLLED
FLUE GAS EMISSIONS FLUE GAS CONCENTRATIONS




Species

Bubbling Bed
Partial
Combustion

Bubbling Bed
Complete
Combustion
High Efficiency
Regenerator
Complete
Combustion
CO 90,000 ppm <500 ppm <100 ppm
Particulates

(note 2)
20-30 lb/mm SCF
350-450 mg/Nm
3

15-30 lb/mm SCF
250-450 mg/Nm
3

Opacity
(note 2)
25-50% 20-50%
SO
x
(note 3)
200-2000 ppm
Hydrocarbons <200 ppm <10 ppm <10 ppm
NH
3
<200 ppm <10 ppm <10 ppm
NO
x
50-100 ppm 150-350 ppm <60 ppm

Notes: 1. All ppm concentrations are by volume
2. No external particle removal such as ESP or WGS
3. No SO
x
reduction such as catalyst additives or WGS

157048
Environmental
Page 3




CO, Hydrocarbons, and NH
3


The amount of hydrocarbons and NH
3
present will depend primarily on the
feedstock characteristics and operating severity. Hydrocarbon and NH
3
are
normally present in only trace quantities, while CO and CO
2
from coke combustion
are major constituents of the flue gas. The disposal of these pollutants can best be
handled by burning them, either in a complete combustion regenerator or with a CO
boiler. In most cases complete combustion is the favored method for a variety of
economic and process reasons. Complete combustion will convert most CO and
hydrocarbons to CO
2
and water vapor, while the higher oxygen atmosphere of the
complete combustion unit decreases the amount of ammonia formed. This
observation is based on commercial plant experience; the mechanism of ammonia
formation has not been definitely proven.

Particulates

The particulates from the FCCU regenerator cyclones are primarily catalyst fines of
less than 40 microns and the particulate loading is in the range of 15-30 lb/MMSCF
(250-450 mg/Nm
3
). In addition to the catalyst fines, some condensables such as
sulfates will be present if the sampling temperature is low enough. In the USA, the
temperature specified by EPA Method #5 is 248F +25F (120C). At this temper-
ature some sulfur compounds and hydrocarbons will condense, which may cause a
higher particulate measurement.

In the United States the particulate level in the flue gas is typically limited to 1 lb of
solids per 1000 lb of coke burned or approximately 4.7-6.5 lb/MMSCF of flue gas
(80-110 mg solids/Nm
3
); the European regulation varies from 80-500 mg/Nm
3
.
Future regulations may reduce this value to 50 mg/Nm
3
.

These environmental regulations typically require an electrostatic precipitator (ESP)
or wet gas scrubber (WGS) to bring particulate emissions down to an acceptable
level. The precipitator is the less expensive of the two options in many cases,
depending on flow rates, pressures, temperatures, and particulate loadings, but
157048
Environmental
Page 4




neither one is inexpensive to construct or operate. Disposal of the collected wastes
can be difficult. The precipitator yields dry catalyst fines which can be used for
landfill or as a raw material for cement. The scrubber generates a waste liquid or
slurry stream high in fines and solids, which must be further treated. The removal of
SO
x
is an added advantage for the scrubber system, with efficiencies of up to 95%
claimed by some manufacturers.

Improvements in third stage separator (TSS) technology which uses cyclonic
separators external to the regenerator have improved efficiency to the point where
tit may be considered a less expensive alternative capable of meeting
environmental regulations. Historically though, TSS use has been limited primarily
to protection of power recovery equipment and did not eliminate the need for the
ESP or WGS.

Opacity

Opacity is the quality or state of a substance which renders that substance
impervious to rays of light. Opaque stack emissions that block all light would have
an opacity of 100%, while clear emissions that do not attenuate light have an
opacity of zero. Another scale which is sometimes used for gray or black emissions
is the Ringelmann Number, going from 0 (clear) to 5 (opaque). A Ringelmann
Number of 1.5 would correspond to an opacity of 30%.

A high opacity for an FCCU regenerator stack would be caused by:

1. Catalyst fines (either greater content or shift to smaller PSD)

2. Unburned hydrocarbons

3. Condensibles such as SO
x
and NH
3


4. Water vapor

157048
Environmental
Page 5




Each of these would have a separate solution, and would normally be accompanied
by other problems. Large amounts of catalyst fines from the stack could indicate
excessive attrition or poor cyclone performance. If the plume were caused by
unburned hydrocarbons, this would indicate poor regenerator operation.

Control of condensables such as SO
x
are discussed elsewhere in this section.
Water vapor is sometimes mistaken for catalyst fines. This vapor usually does not
cause problems meeting environmental regulations and it should not be excessive;
large increases in water output should be investigated if the water vapor rate is
excessive.

Sulfur Oxides

The flue gas sulfur oxides are formed when sulfur in the coke is oxidized to SO
x
in
the regenerator. These oxides are primarily SO
2
(~90%), with lesser amounts of
SO
3
(~10%); the total SO
x
increases as feed sulfur increases and depends on the
type of compounds containing the sulfur.

There are basically two methods of reducing SO
x
besides feed pretreatment: using
a catalyst additive, i.e. a SO
x
control catalyst" and wet gas scrubbing (dry
scrubbing with limestone has also been used, but it is impractical for most refiners).
The SO
x
control catalyst additive is injected independent of the FCC catalyst (a
small injection device is required) and is typically 3-10% of the catalyst inventory.
The additive adsorbs SO
x
in an oxidizing environment (regenerator) and liberates
sulfur as H
2
S in a reducing environment (reactor). SO
x
control additives can
typically remove 10-20 lb SO
x
/lb additive down to a limit of ~300 vppm in the flue
gas. This process relies on oxidizing the SO
2
to SO
3
and is therefore typically more
effective in a complete combustion unit with excess oxygen present.

UOP has acquired the right to license the Exxon Wet Gas Scrubbing (WGS)
process (see Figure 1) to UOP-licensed FCC or RFCC units. The WGS process
removes both SO
x
and particulates from the FCC or RFCC flue gas. The WGS uses
a venturi device which provides intimate contacting of the flue gas with a mildly
alkaline solution. The system can also tolerate large solids carryover from the
regenerator if an upset should occur. The catalyst fines are removed as moist filter
157048
Environmental
Page 6




cakes and the water effluent contains dissolved salts (sodium sulfate). Wet gas
scrubbing can remove up to 90% of the SO
x
from the flue gas down to <50 vppm.

Precise economic comparisons between using a SO
x
control catalyst and the WGS
process are difficult because the value assigned to particulates removal has a major
effect on the selection. In general, the SO
x
control catalyst will be more attractive at
low-to-moderate amounts of SO
x
removal (below 1000 vol ppm) and the WGS is
more attractive for removing large quantities of SO
x
(above 1500 vol ppm) or for
meeting very low SO
x
emissions (<200 vppm). Between 1000 and 1500 ppm of SO
x

removed, the choice depends on a number of factors including variability of installed
cost, presence of existing particulate removal equipment, local environmental laws,
utility and chemical costs and relative amount of SO
x
removal.

Nitrogen Oxides

The amount of NO
x
emitted from the regenerator is highly dependent upon several
variables such as mode of operation, regenerator style, excess O
2
, promoter
concentration, coke distribution, feed nitrogen, and dense bed temperature. Studies
have shown that about half of the feed nitrogen goes to coke on catalyst, but only
about 10% of the nitrogen in coke goes to NO
x
. It is believed that the NO
x
emission
is limited by the reaction of CO +NO to form N
2
and CO
2
. Thus, when Pt CO
promoter is added to a unit, CO is converted to CO
2
so quickly that there is less CO
available to react with the NO
x
and NO
x
emissions increase. In a partial burn
operation, there is always CO available to react with the NO
x
formed so emissions
are lower. Good coke and air distribution is important so that concentrations of CO,
O
2
and NO
x
are evenly distributed throughout the regenerator. There are
fundamental differences in the operation of a bubbling bed operating in full
combustion with CO promoter and a high efficiency regenerator operating in full
combustion without the need for CO promoter.

Bubbling Bed Regenerator
The bubbling bed type regenerator burns coke from spent FCC catalyst in a back-
mixed dense phase fluidized bed. The regenerator consists of a closed cylindrical
pressure vessel sized to contain a dense phase fluidized bed of catalyst in the
bottom of the vessel and multiple sets of cyclone separators within the dilute phase
existing in the upper portion of the vessel.
157048
Environmental
Page 7





Spent catalyst enters the regenerator at the side of the vessel at the surface of the
fluidized dense phase of catalyst. Air for coke combustion is distributed uniformly
across the cross-section of the vessel near the bottom of the fluidized bed through
an air distributor. The carbon burning reactions proceed largely in series, with coke
burning to CO first and then CO burning to CO
2
. Since the fluidized bed is
substantially back-mixed, there is a rather wide distribution of residence times for
both the combustion reactants and products. Further, since fluidized dense beds
mix better vertically than laterally, it is difficult to mix reactants (air and coke)
uniformly across the cross-section of the vessel. This leads to non-uniform burning
profiles and requires longer average residence times, higher quantities of excess
oxygen and higher levels of Pt combustion promoter to assure that the catalyst is
burned clean (regenerated fully) and that CO is fully converted to CO
2
to avoid
exceeding CO emission limits. This combination of factors, i.e. long residence
times, non-uniform burning profiles, higher required levels of excess oxygen (~2
mol%), and higher required levels of Pt combustion promoter, result in this style of
regenerator typically producing on the order of 3 to 4 times the NO
x
emissions
relative to the equivalent High Efficiency Combustor style regenerator.

Combustor Style Regenerator
The High Efficiency Combustor style regenerator burns coke from the spent catalyst
in a quasi-plug flow fast fluidization burning zone. The High Efficiency style
regenerator is divided into two separate zones. The lower section is the combustor
zone where the coke burning occurs. The upper section of the regenerator (second
zone) serves to hold a reservoir of regenerated catalyst and also contains multiple
sets of cyclones in the dilute phase of the upper regenerator. Very little, if any, coke
burning occurs in this upper portion of the regenerator vessel.

Spent catalyst (carrying the coke), air and a substantial quantity of hot clean
regenerated catalyst are mixed together in the bottom of the combustor. The
combustor vessel is sized so that it operates in the velocity and density regime
characterized as fast fluidization. This permits quasi-plug flow transport of material
from the bottom of the combustor vessel upward and out to the upper regenerator
through a vapor/catalyst disengaging device. The moderate operating density of the
combustor (burn zone) permits rapid and uniform mixing of material entering the
bottom of the combustor. The recycle of hot regenerated catalyst permits a degree
157048
Environmental
Page 8




of control over residence time and initial rates of coke combustion. The quasi-plug
flow behavior of the fast fluidized bed assures relatively narrow and controlled
residence time distributions. Overall, the High Efficiency Combustor style of
regenerator provides better control of the burning zone.

The results of the better (or more efficient) control of the burn zone in the
Combustor style regenerator are that:

Oxygen is used more efficiently so that lower levels of excess oxygen are
required to completely burn the coke to CO
2
while minimizing CO emissions
Generally Pt combustion promoter is not needed (at design rates) to accelerate
the burn to completion because hot recycled catalyst is used to increase the
burning rate by preheating the combustion reactants (air and coke on spent
catalyst)
The preheating effect of recycling hot regenerated catalyst, combined with the
efficient mixing and uniform residence time distribution in the combustor permits
the time spent in the combustor to be minimized

The net result of these combustion characteristics of the Combustor style
regenerator is that substantially lower levels of NO
x
are produced.


Plant Upsets

The values given for pollutant concentration in Table 1 are for normal plant
operation. During upsets these numbers may be grossly exceeded. An example of
this would be an oil reversal into the regenerator. Massive amounts of hydrocarbons
may be emitted. While the FCCU has been designed for safe operation, something
as simple as a sticky slide valve may thwart initial corrective action. The best way to
minimize these upsets is careful attention to the unit, with well trained operators that
understand what action should be taken, and why it is done.
157048
Environmental
Page 9




Main Column Overhead Receiver Sour Water

Wash water is used in the FCCU to remove ammonia, cyanides, and some sulfur
compounds which can cause corrosion and fouling in the unit. The water is injected
into the interstage cooler of the wet gas compressor at a rate of ~2 GPM/1000 BPD
(5-7 vol% of fresh feed). The water goes through the coolers and is pumped from
the interstage receiver to the high pressure separator. From here it circulates back
to wash the main column overhead condensers, and leaves the plant from the
overhead receiver water boot.

In many units stripping, lift and feed atomizing steam in the reactor will double the
amount of water drained over the amount injected in the gas concentration unit.
The concentrations of the various contaminants in the water will depend on the feed
concentrations and the total sour water rates. For a 2 GPM/1000 BPD water
injection rate, the concentrations shown in Table 2 would be expected for a unit with
a feed sulfur of 1-2% and less than 1000 ppm of feed nitrogen.

TABLE 2
FCC SOUR WATER
CONCENTRATION IN MC OVHD WATER

Mode of Regenerator Operation
Partial Complete
Pollutant Combustion Combustion

Sulfide, ppm 3000 4000 3000 4000
Ammonia, ppm 1000 2000 1000 2000
Cyanide, ppm 40 150 30 50
Phenols, ppm 100 300 200 600
Hydrocarbons, ppm 100 2000 100 2000

All values are ppm by weight.

The pH of the water from the overhead receiver should be in the basic range,
pH =8-9.
157048
Environmental
Page 10




Some refiners do not show pollutant levels as high as the values given in Table 2,
especially if the feed sulfur or nitrogen is low. The difference between the partial
and complete combustion mode of regenerator operation would involve oxygen
carryover with the regenerated catalyst, different oxidation levels in the regenerator
and other factors. The normal disposal method for the sour water is a sour water
stripper. The overhead vapor stream from the stripper is normally sent to a Claus-
type unit, although in some cases it may be simply burned. The stripper bottoms is
sent to waste water treatment; it has also been used for the crude unit desalter.

MCB Catalyst Fines

Catalyst fines leaving the reactor with the hydrocarbon product are concentrated in
the bottom of the main column and leave the unit with the bottoms product. Some of
these fines settle out in the product tank so that the tank needs to be cleaned
occasionally. The oil soaked fines removed from the tanks are considered
hazardous waste and must be disposed of properly. Catalyst fines in the bottoms
product can also cause problems with heaters and boilers firing heavy fuel oil.

Because of the high cost of tank cleaning and problems with downstream heaters
catalyst fines removal technology is being added or considered by many refiners.
UOP, through an alliance with Pall Corporation, offers filtration technology capable
of reducing the fines in the bottoms product to less than 50 wppm. Cyclonic
separation devices and slurry settlers are also in use but are less effective.


Fired Heater Stack Gas

Any environmental problems with the FCC fired heaters would be the same as
those encountered with the other refinery heaters. Efficient firing normally reduces
CO content in the stack gas to a minimum. SO
x
and NO
x
can be minimized by
hydrotreating the fuel. Low No
x
burners are also an effective means of NO
x

reduction in fired heaters and boilers. Flue gas treating could also be used to
reduce emissions. Proper furnace operation will minimize emissions problems with
the stack gas.
157048
Environmental
Page 11





Fugitive Hydrocarbon Emissions

This category would cover hydrocarbon vapors from leaks, sampling or storage.
Refineries have always tried to minimize these losses, because uncontrolled
hydrocarbons are a fire and safety hazard, in addition to an economic loss. Closed
sampling systems and controlled venting on storage tanks will probably become
more common in the future.